Home

FSP 150SP-100 R6.1.1..

1. Error Code Response SPECIAL CONDITIONS 768 Card _cardeid_ not present 773 Invalid Loopback Configuration Type 775 Resource in Use by Loopback 780 Timed loopback with Vlan tag enabled 781 Non Vlan loopback with Vlan tag enabled 784 Loopback is not active 785 Loopback already exists 794 Invalid test config 795 Port Not in Auto Negotiation 796 Linktrace is currently active 797 Loopback is currently active 798 Maximum active linktrace sessions reached 799 Maximum active loopback sessions reached 800 Port media is invalid 801 Operation is not supported 802 No Linktrace Reply found 803 Interface not configured 804 Route to Host Subnetwork already exists 805 Invalid Gateway IP Address 806 Invalid Route Type 807 Invalid SWDL message 808 Backup file is locked 809 Invalid backup type 810 Database has not been backed up 811 Backup directory is empty 812 Failed to archive files 813 Failed to unarchive files 814 Failed to read directory 815 Transfer in progress 816 Transfer not in progress 817 File Transfer Server Type not supported 818 User id not set 819 Remote host not set 820 Remote file not set 821 Local file not set 822 File Name not set 823 Protocol not set 824 Unsupported protocol 825 Transfer protocol has been disabled 826 Invalid url 827 Transfer canceled 828 Unable to access local file 396 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Ev
2. Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Assumed QL Assumed QL Specifies the assumed Quality Level QL on QL NONE the interface Only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet QL PRC capable ports QL SSU A If the interface s QL Mode is disabled the specified Giese Assumed QL value is the Quality Level of the interface In this case Assumed QL can not be set to QL NONE If the interface s QL Mode is enabled the specified Assumed QL value overrides the received Quality Level of the interface unless Assumed QL is set to QL NONE If the Network Clock Type is SONET Option2 and QL Mode is disabled the Assumed QL is automatically set to QL STU and is not editable QL EEC1 If the Network Clock Type is changed from SONET to SDH and QL Mode is Disabled the Assumed QL defaults to QL EEC1 For both SDH and SONET options if QL Mode Enabled and the Network Clock Type is changed the Assumed QL defaults to QL NONE Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL NONE QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Default is QL EEC1 QL Mode Disabled Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL NONE QL EEC2 QL PRS QL STU QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL PROV QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Default QL STU QL QL PRS Mode Disabled QL SMC QL STU QL ST2 QL ST3E QL TNC 476 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 42 Configuration Settings for Ethernet Privat
3. i ts eee 5 15 1 Monitored Type Definition Direction Location Min Day AVGMEANPATHDELAY Average Mean Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 MINMEANPATHDELAY Minimum Mean Path Delay Receive NearEnd 0 0 MAXMEANPATHDELAY Maximum Mean Path Delay Receive NearEnd 0 0 AVGSYNCPDV Average Path Delay From Receive NearEnd 0 0 Master To Slave MINSYNCPDV Minimum Path Delay From Receive NearEnd 0 0 Master To Slave MAXSYNCPDV Maximum Path Delay From Receive NearEnd 0 0 Master To Slave MINRPDVFWD Minimum Residual Packet Receive NearEnd 0 0 Delay Variation Forward Direction AVGRESPDVFWD Average Residual Packet Receive NearEnd 0 0 Delay Variation Forward Direction RESPDVFWDLOW Total Number Of Forward Receive NearEnd 0 0 Residual Packet Delay Varia tion Results In Low Range RESPDVFWDMEDIUM Total Number Of Forward Receive NearEnd 0 0 Residual Packet Delay Varia tion Results In Medium Range RESPDVFWDHIGH Total Number Of Forward Receive NearEnd 0 0 Residual Packet Delay Varia tion Results In High Range RESPDVFWDTOTAL Total Number Of Valid RPDV Receive Near End 0 0 frw Results MINRPDVREV Minimum Residual Packet Receive NearEnd 0 0 Delay Variation Reverse Direction AVGRESPDVREV Average Residual Packet Transmit Near End 0 0 Delay Variation Reverse Direction RESPDVREVLOW Total Number Of Reverse Receive NearEnd 0 0 Residual Packet Delay Varia tion Results In
4. PDELAYRSPSRX PTP Delay Resp Messages Received Receive ar o o PDELAYRSPSTX PTP Delay Resp Messages Transmitted Transmit Near o o PDELAYRSPFOLUPSRX PTP Delay Resp Follow Up Messages Receive Near o 0 A Received End PDELAYRSPFOLUPSTX PTP Delay Resp Follow Up Messages Transmit Near o o Transmitted i End PTPUNKNOWNSRX Unknown PTP Messages Received Receive nar o o PTPUNKNOWNSTX Unknown PTP Messages Transmitted Transmit Hes o o SIGNALINGRX PTP Signaling Messages Received Receive Near SIGNALINGTX PTP Signaling Messages Transmitted Transmit Ner SYNCSRX PTP Sync Messages Received Receive Rest SYNCSTX PTP Sync Messages Transmitted Transmit Bee o o ojojo ojojo Installation and Operations Manual 339 a ADVA 7J E am Wa u PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring Optical Networking Figure 206 Exporting 15 Minute PM Counts to Excel File Application A ae 5 a E System NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 j MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves Configuration Statistics Entity ID ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 15 Minute Summary 1i Day Thresholds ANNOUNCESRX h A YRSPSTX FOL 3 Dynamic Slaves current Opening ACC_PTP_FLOW_PT 1 1 1 1 1 2014 02 04 csv DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 18 15 00 NTESP100 18 oo You have chosen to open E 1000 N 1 117145100 E ACC_PTP_FLOW_PT 1 1 1 1 1_2014 02 04 csw NET
5. Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Squelch Control A hierarchy to be established for Squelch control of Never the CLK and PPS timing interfaces when configured Holdover as Outputs The hierarchy is as follows Lock NEVER where the output is never squelched HOLDOVER where output is squelched only in freerun state LOCK where output is squelched in holdover and freerun states Squelch QL where output is squelched only Squelch QL based on Squelch QL This setting is not applicable for CLK 1 1 1 1 and PPS 1 1 1 1 which are input only or when CLK 1 1 1 2 and or PPS 1 1 1 2 is configured as input Squelch QL Set the Squelch Quality Level The Squelch QL attri QL NONE bute is used to define the minimum QL that the system QL PRC timing can accept If the system timing QL drops below QL SSU A this selected value the interface is turned off i e no QL SSU B output signal is provided Squelch QL does not apply for interfaces configured as input or when the Squelch QL EEC1 Control is set to Never QL DNU Assumed QL Set the Assumed Quality Level When the CLK or PPS QL PRC interface is configured as Input an assumed QL QL SSU A level is selected from the drop down list QL SSU B QL EEC1 TOD 1 1 1 1 Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASC
6. File Application x 5 D vu E System Edit User E NE 1 E Synchronization Identity Ej Communications ul MO UserName netadmin F Privilege Provisioning y nietos CLI Paging Enabled 7 Pii Users Login Timeout 15 Local neo Euse Comment Default User root user Edit Password Remote Remove Lock Cancel Apply os Remote Authe Delete User Step6 Edit the required data for this user Details on the function and rules for each data entry is located at Administration on p 464 After editing the user information click on OK The display will update to show the edited information End of Procedure amp Editing the user password can be done by the user or a user with superuser privilege Note Step 7 Right click on the user name to be edited in the selection tree pane and select Edit Password and the following screen displays Installation and Operations Manual 177 a ARAVA TM Pee 7J E amw wz 8 Provision Secure Access asi Networking Figure 79 Edit User Password File v E System E NE 1 E Synchronization E Communications SNMP Application v Edit Password See ee da C E Users a oe netadmi root Edit User user Remote Remove Lock Remote Authe Delete User Security Dalicw Step 8 Edit the password for this user Details on the function and rules for each data entry is located at Administration on p 464 After editing t
7. Power Input I va ao 24VDC _ Q Ss MGMT LAN PA i GND K i S amp AA Al ara e Aa Position connectors under set screws of power connector U U U ANAN Procedure Step 1 Verify that the source 24 VDC power supply is set up to deliver the correct operating voltage to the SP 100 24 VDC nominal Verify that the correct fuse or breaker 4 A rating is installed at the power supply source and that power is turned off Repeat for a second 24 VDC power supply source if applicable Step2 Using a volt meter measure the voltages at the source power supply terminals Verify that no voltage is present 110 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Step 3 A WARNING Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Run the DC power cables from the SP 100 to the designated battery terminals Dress cables as required When performing the following step ensure that the proper polarity of the DC power is observed as miswiring could result in damage to the SP 100 The SP 100 detects polarity reversal and does not power up when the polarity is reversed Remove the cover from the source power terminal strip Connect the following wires to the source DC power supply terminals Verify that all power terminal connections are tight and that no strands of wire are shorting terminals together North American applicatio
8. Syncjacl_ Edit Thresholds Installation and Operations Manual 371 SyncJack Testing ADVA VO E saa ws Y Optical Networking Performing PTP Network Analysis SyncJack PTP Network Analysis measures the level of network interference PDV The measurement is based on PDV either one directional or two direc tional The input is reference clock used as reference to the Master Clock The output is network statistics path delay and network usability score The procedure for performing PTP Network Analysis assumes that SP 100 is properly connected to the clock inputs to be measured and the appropriate SP 100 interfaces have been configured See Provisioning the SP 100 on p 153 Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the PTP Network Analysis entity Enter a right click on PTP Network Probes in the selection tree and select Create PTP Network Probe A Create PTP Network Probe pane appears Figure 239 Create PTP Network Probe View BO S Create PTP Network Probe File Application B x E System E NE 1 E Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 E Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Estimations PTP CLOCK P
9. glinvalid Sync QL Invalid qlinvalid no masking qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch and not glinvalid rfi Remote Fault Indication rfi and not Inkdownunisolated or Inkdownlpbkfault or Inkdowncableremoved or Inkdowncablefault or Inkdownautonegfailed or Inkdeactivated or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdownmasterslavecfg rxjabber Receiving Jabber rxjabber and not Inkdownunisolated or Inkdownlpbkfault or Inkdowncableremoved or Inkdowncablefault or Inkdownautonegfailed or Inkdeactivated or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdownmasterslavecfg sfpmismatch SFP Provisioning Mismatch sfpmismatch and not sfpremoved or SGEO sfpremoved SFP Removed sfpremoved and not SGEO sfptxfault SFP Transmit Fault sfptxfault and not sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or SGEO or dyinggasp syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref no masking S9PO 10113 sesneyd aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey a AMA O E VUE ws Alarm Masking Optical Networking 426 Installation and Operations Manual ADVA VO a MAD ws a Optical Networking Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Introduction The SP 100 is designed for Synchronous Ethernet and cellular backhaul appli cations to be installed in a remote terminal cabinet This chapter provides provisioning rule information for the SP 100 The follow ing is provided Entity State Descri
10. Reference Select Ref When BITS IN a Network Port or Access Port has fos drop down list of been added as a Sync Reference their interface e q provisioned Sync becomes available to choose from the menu list by Reference sources selecting its radio button to edit Priority and or Alias Priority If a displayed Sync Ref Eid has its Select Ref radio button selected the user can select a new Priority 1 10 from the dropdown list Alias If a displayed Sync Ref Eid has its Select Ref radio button selected the user can edit the text and or num ber string to uniquely identify this entity This string up to 64 characters can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long blank 452 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults SYNC 1 1 1 1 De Select Ref lete Sync Reference When a Network Port Access Port PWE3 Facility Telecom Slave or BITS IN has been added as a Sync Reference their interface becomes available to delete from the reference list by selecting its radio button drop down list of provisioned Sync Reference sources TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Edit Time Clock Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters
11. aF CLOCK _PROBE 1 1_2014 02 05 csv Microsoft Excel es l le lame msee Pagelayout Formulas Data Redew View Acrobat vs Ex hj UN ue My 1A R Ww 18 Y B D E E G H I J K L M OE IE R S E u Probe Configuration and Status 10 Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Tl Name CikProbe1 12 Running Failed Count 0 13 Actual Test Start Time 21412014 23 49 A 14 Actual Test Duration s 300 15_ Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 16_ Reference Enpected OL QL NONE T Source 15 11 18 Source Type Frequency 119 MTIEMask G823Pdh 20 MaskMargin 0 Z1_ Scheduler SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 22 Source Failure No 23 Reference Failure No 24 Mask Failure No 25 Mask Crossed Time 0 26 Mask Margin Failure No 27 Mask Margin Crossed Time 0 28 Measurement Rate measurement s 1 23 Last TIE Result ns 2 30 Time Of Last TIE Result 215 2014 0 08 31_ Raw Data Collection Disabled 32 Measurement Type Frequency 33 34 35 Tests Result 36 37 Interval sec Result ns Mask Sta Margin Stat 38 0 1 NIA NA NA 33 02 NA NA NIA 40 05 NA NA NA 4 1 OK OK 42 2 200K OK 43 5 200K OK 44 10 200K OK 45 20 200K OK 46 50 320K OK 47 100 44 DK OK 48 200 480K OK 43 500 NIA NA NIA 50 1000 NA NA NA 51 2000 NA NA NA 52 5000 NA NA NIA 53 10000 NA NA NA 54 20000 NIA NA NA 55 50000 NIA NA NIA 56 100000 NA NA NA 57 gt M 4 H CLOCK_PROBE 1 1_2014 LA Ha il Anl Ready Man 70 E y OR Step 16 After the test is completed select the Test
12. Synchronization Static Route Table 3 Communications DCN eth Add Static Route 3G DCN Add Static ARP Entry Delete Subnet Mask Destination 0 0 0 0 Gateway 10 10 32 1 Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 ethO 0 Back Delete Static Route Delete Static ARP Entry Edit Source Address Config Administrati Click the radio button in the Delete column for each route to be deleted Click on OK Step8 Goto Step 1 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 301 ADVA 7J E am WN u Provision Communications Optical Networking Add Delete Static ARP Entry Static ARP Entries may be displayed created or deleted To edit an existing static ARP entry delete it and add a new static ARP entry The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN See Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded Procedure Step 1 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Add a Static ARP Entry Continue with the next step Display Static ARP Entries Go to Step 5 Delete Static ARP Entry Go to Step 7 Provisioning complete End of Procedure Step2 Right click on Communications in the selection tree pane and select
13. Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes E Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Step 6 e Note File Application A B 3 amp El System Copy System Default Settings From Remote NE 1 Method File Transfer Method SCP x File Transfer Server IP User ID User Password Remote File Cancel OK Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP SFTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name of the database file to transfer The file transfer begins and show a screen similar to the following displays Figure 162 File Transfer Progress Screen Ls a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application y System e NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database le E me Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Step 7 a xjl Oo amp Transfer Upgrade Mode Software Download Status In progress 27 When the Status changes from Progress to Success End of Procedure 268 Installation a
14. 0 0c ee ee 237 Figure 132 Save Configuration to System Defaults View 238 Figure 133 Copy System Default Database To Remote Web View 239 Figure 134 Copy Database To Remote SCP View 240 Figure 135 Transfer Progress Screen o 0ooooooooooo monos 240 Figure 136 Copy Database From Remote Web VieW 241 Figure 137 Copy Database From Remote SCP View 242 Figure 138 File Transfer Progress Screen 0 o oooooooomomos 242 Figure 139 New System Defaults View 0 0 0 cee 243 Figure 140 Backup Database View o ooooo es 244 Figure 141 Database Back Up Status View ooo 245 Figure 142 Copy Database To Remote Web VieW 245 Figure 143 Copy Database to Remote SCP VieW o o 246 Figure 144 File Transfer Progress ScreeN o oooooooo momo 247 Figure 145 Copy Database From Remote Web VieW 248 Figure 146 Copy Database From Remote SCP View 249 16 Installation and Operations Manual List of Figures Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173
15. ASCII characters long blank Administrative Defines the Time Clock administrative state IS is In IS State Service and is the default value See Entity State Management Descriptions on p 430 WTR Time Time delay in minutes from the recovery of a clock 0 12 source to its restoral as usable in an active state 5 Selection Mode Defines what system is used to select the active clock Priority Mode source QL Mode Time Holdover Time Holdover Performance in nanoseconds 500 Performance ns 1000 1500 5000 10000 Sync Ref Candi Enable disable as a Sync Reference Candidate Enabled date Disabled Expected QL Set the Expected Quality Level If Line Type is set to QL NONE 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Add Time Clock Reference TimeREF Index Time reference index drop down list Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long up to 64 characters blank Priority Sets the priority for this Time Clock Reference 1 10 Time Clock Ref erence Sources Selects the Time Clock Reference Source drop down list of provisioned Time Clock Reference sources TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Edit Time Clock Reference Select Ref radio button Select the radio button for the corresponding Time Clock Reference to be edited
16. 69 Access Port Ethernet Facility LEDS lt lt 69 Access Optical Ethernet Link and Rate LEDs 70 Access Port Electrical RJ 45 Connector LED Definitions 70 Network Optical Ethernet Link and Rate LEDS 71 Network Port Electrical RJ 45 Connector LED Definitions 71 Network Optical Ethernet Facility and Active LEDS 71 SP 100 Mounting ProcedureS o oo ooooooo oo 82 SP 100 GPS GNSS Compatibility 104 4600 860 su 6 wwe wes 98 48 VDC PSU Cable Wire Assignments 118 24 VDC PSU Cable Wire Assignments 119 10 100 Base T LAN Port RJ 45 Connector 120 1000 Base T LAN Port RJ 45 Connector 120 RJ 45 RS 232 Serial Console Port and DB9 Adapter Pin Assign MENUS o oe 2c Sa eM wh ae eS hw ee ee hw dee ee ee 121 RJ 48c BITS IN T3 Input Connector oooooo o 122 RJ 48c BITS OUT T4 Output Connector 122 TOD RJ 45 Connector and Pin AssignhmentS 123 Software Download Condition Types 00 oo 155 SIM Card Status Description cee es 307 Performance Parameter Attributes o 323 Threshold Crossing Alert AttributesS 325 Performance Parameter Attributes 0 0 oo 335 Threshold Crossing Alert AttributesS 336 Error Codes and Definiti0NS oo oooo 384 Alarm Profile Notific
17. PTP Flowpoint Identifies the PTP Flowpoint used by the PTP Clock Probe A drop down list of the provisioned flowpoints drop down list of provisioned PTP available for use is provided Flow Points IP Version Defines whether the PTP Clock Probe uses IPv4 or IPv6 A IPv4 For the current release only IPv4 is supported Selection drop down list is from a drop down list Master IP Entry for the IP address of the Master Clock Entry is a Address valid IPv4 or IPv6 address according to the IP Version entry For the current release only IPv4 is supported If 0 0 0 0 the PTP Flow Point Type is set to OC Slave then the aes Master IP Address must be configured the same as the SOOC 516 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 59 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Slave IP Entry for the IP address of the Slave Clock Entry is a Address valid IPv4 or IPv6 address according to the IP Version entry For the current release only IPv4 is supported If 0 0 0 0 the PTP Flow Point Type is set to OC Slave then the Slave IP Address must be configured the same as the SOOC Direction Direction of PTP Clock Probe operation Slave to Master e If the Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point is set to OC Slave then Slave to Master
18. Edit an Ethernet Port s Delay Asymmetry Go to Step 20 setting Create a Telecom Slave Go to Step 2 Add a Telecom Slave to a Sync Reference See Add a Sync Reference on p 203 Associate the Telecom Slave to the ToD Output Associate the Telecom Slave to the PPS Output See Edit TOD Port on p 194 See Edit PPS Port s on p 192 Create a Boundary Clock Go to Step 23 Edit the Time Clock Go to Step 38 Add a Time Clock Reference Go to Step 43 Associate the PTP Clock to the System ToD See Edit System Time of Day on p 197 Create a Master Clock Go to Step 49 Create Static Slave Go to Step 64 Verify a Dynamic Slave connectivity Go to Step 71 All PTP provisioning is completed End of Procedure 210 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Create a Telecom Slave Prior to creating a Telecom Slave the appropriate Network Access amp port s for the PTP Flow Point s should already have been provisioned and In Service and the Master Clock device has been Note provisioned and tested Step 2 Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu Expand the System and NE 1 entities in the selec tion tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step 3 Enter a right click on the NE 1 entity and select Create Telecom Slave A
19. Entity ID PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name PTPCIkProbel State Completed Event Message Failure No Running Failed Count 0 Mask Failure No Actual Test Start Time 2014 01 27 18 58 56 Mask Crossed Time 20 Actual Test Duration s 599 Mask Margin Failure No Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Crossed Time 0 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Last TIE Result ns 0 PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Time Of Last TIE Result 2014 01 27 19 09 28 Measurement Direction Slave To Master Raw Data Collection Disabled IP Version IPy4 Measurement Type Frequency Master IP Address 10 206 206 1 Slave IP Address 10 206 206 6 MTIE Mask GB23 Pdh Mask Margin 20 Scheduler SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 Reference Failure No TimeStamp Failure No Step 14 Observe test result details by interval by viewing the Test Result table or hovering the mouse over the interval marker in the graph see Figure 216 on p 353 for an example Step 15 Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by selecting the Export button see the following figure Excel output is similar to what is shown in Figure 218 on p 355 364 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 230 Exporting PTP Clock Probe Test Results to Excel E ADYA FSP 150 EMS SP100 34 16 Synclack File Application v A X E 9 5 TOR Status Tests TIE TE Gra
20. File Transfer Upgrade Database Server IP Default Database User ID Default Settings User Password Configuration Files Remote File Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Cancel OK E Software Licensing Step 14 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP SFTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path Mi and file name of the database file to transfer ote The file transfer will begin and show a screen similar to the following Figure 138 File Transfer Progress Screen ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A B gt 6 E System Transfer Upgrade NE 1 Ej Synchronization Mode Software Download Communications Alarm Attributes E Administration Upgrade Status In progress E 27 Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane will indicate when the file transfer is 100 complete End of Procedure Step 15 Expand Administration right click on Default Database and select New The display is the Save Configuration to System Defaults view shown in the figure below 242 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations
21. Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP Administration Edit DCN etho Networking Name eth0 MTU 1500 bytes IP Address 10 Netmask 2 255 4 MAC Address RIPy2 Disabled e DHCP Enabled y DHCP Role DHCP Client DHCP Client ID Control Disabled y DHCP Client 1D FSP1505P 100 _ System Default Gateway Edit System Default Gateway Gateway IP Address 10 10 32 1 Cancel Apply OK Step 2 Determine the next step Desired Function Set up DCN as a DHCP Server Then Continue with the next step Configure DCN as a DHCP Client Go to Step 7 Disable DHCP functionality Go to Step 9 Configure RIPv2 Go to Step 11 Manually Configure IP Address and Netmask Go to Step 13 Provisioning complete End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 287 Provision Communications a ADVA 7J E amv ws n Optical Networking Step 3 amp Note E Note Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Select DHCP Enabled Select DHCP Role DHCP Server Enter the desired IP Address Enter the desired Netmask The range of the Netmask entered determines the number of IP Addresses available for this server to assign Select the desired RIPv2 setting Click on OK In order for the new IP Address and DHCP server function IP Address range to become active DHCP Control must be cycled Select DHCP Disabled Click on OK
22. System NE 1 Protection Groups LAG Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Transfer Alarm Log Progress E Step 7 When the Status changes from In Progress to Success the file has been transferred End of Procedure Test the FSP 150SP See Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Moni toring on p 319 Installation and Operations Manual 271 ADVA Va E am WN u Test the FSP 150SP Optical Networking 272 Installation and Operations Manual a ADVA Jo aw ws a Optical Networking Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Introduction This Chapter contains communications provisioning information and procedures for the SP 100 An example scenario of Gateway Network Element GNE to Subtending NE SNE communications is provided along with provisioning details This section contains the following communications procedures Serial Connection on p 276 Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 Set Up the 3G Modem Using the Serial Port on p 282 Browser based IP Connection on p 285 Edit DCN eth0 Configuration on p 286 Configure Management Tunnel on p 290 Configure Source Address on p 298 Add Delete Static Route on p 299 Add De
23. Interface Notification Code Description Date Time SYNC 1 1 1 1 NR Sys Clock Mode Freerunning 2014 02 03 17 28 31 Editing Alarm Attributes An Edit Alarm Attributes pane is accessed in Maintenance view by entering a right click on an entity under Alarms Attributes and selecting Edit Alarm Attri butes see Figure 53 on p 150 Notification Codes can be edited for a given Condition Type by selecting the desired Notification Code in the drop down menu selecting the desired Notification Code then selecting Apply or OK Notification Codes available for selection are Critical CR Installation and Operations Manual 149 a ADVA A Kd 7 WAY wW u Maintenance View Optical Networking e Major MJ Minor MN Not Alarmed NA Not Reported NR Figure 53 Edit Alarm Attributes Pane l ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 35 98 Maintenance File Application B B y 2 E System Edit Alarm Attributes E NE 1 E Synchronization Identification Communications Alarm Attributes Entity Type 3G USB MODEM 10MHz CLK Port F SG USB Erra NA Link Down Near RCVONLYINSS Access P NA gt MODEM Is Not Qualified Near RCVONLY NSA BITS In Port NA iw MODEM Removed Near RCVONLY NSA BITS Out Port NA iw No Sim Card Near RCVONLY NSA Clock Probe Cancel Apply OK DCN Port 150 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Manag
24. Organization ADVA Optical Networking Organization Unit Metro Ethernet Access Name Email ADVA Optical Networking support advaoptical com Valid Until varies yyyy mm dd Installation and Operations Manual 443 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E eam we Y Optical Networking 1 E1000 Access and Network Port Media Type is Copper Copper SFP or Fiber 2 MDIX for Media Type Copper or Copper SFP If Media Type is Fiber MDIX is Table 39 Maximum Network Port Access Port Bandwidth Not Applicable Port Type Associated EID Max CIR Max EIR E1000 Fiber Copper NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 1000000000 bps 8000000000 bps SFP or Copper E1000 Fiber Copper ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 1000000000 bps 8000000000 bps SFP or Copper All maximum values shown in the above table are indicative of a port j without a management tunnel which utilizes a configurable amount of bandwidth At default configuration no management tunnels are Note provisioned 444 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules System Configuration Options and Rules Refer to the following table for System configuration settings and associated rules when using the eVision web browser Default settings are identified in bold The following editable system settings are shown in order as seen when using the eVision web b
25. Timing Source PTP Domain Number 4 Cancel OK Enter the following Boundary Clock options a Enter the desired Alias and Boundary Clock Index b Enter the Clock Identity or use the Clock Identity proposed by the node c Select Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock Identity if using Clock Identity from the selected Timing Source d Set the Administrative state to IS e Select the desired Timing Source and enter the desired PTP Domain Number Installation and Operations Manual 219 a ADVA as TEA 7J WED wz 8 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP Optical Networking f Select OK The Boundary Clock entity displays below the network element entity in the Selection Tree Step 26 Select the Boundary Clock entity to verify entry details Step 27 Enter a right click on the Boundary Clock entity and select Create Master Clock Interface A Create Master Clock Interface window displays Figure 114 Create Master Clock Interface for Boundary Clock File Application v Ax BL System NE 1 Create Master Clock Interface ee ip Identification TS Delete Master Clock Interface Index 2 gt Alar Create Master Clock Interface Alias e sooc Telecom Slave state Administrative Management Secondary n a Operational n a IP Interface configuration IP Protocol IPV4 Priority Mode None IP Address 3 ol ol o 0 Priority
26. o 353 Figure 216 View Clock Probe Test Result Details 353 Figure 217 Exporting Clock Probe Test Results to Excel 354 Figure 218 Clock Probe Test Results in Excel 0 cee ee 355 Figure 219 Clock Probe Result Tests Tab 0 ce es 355 Figure 220 Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph 0 0 ee ee 356 Figure 221 Example Clock Probe TIE TE Graph with Failed Region 356 Figure 222 View Clock Probe History Result 0 0 eae 357 Figure 223 View Clock Accuracy Result Meter o oooooo 358 Figure 224 View Global and Clock Accuracy Dashboard 358 18 Installation and Operations Manual List of Figures Figure 225 Figure 226 Figure 227 Figure 228 Figure 229 Figure 230 Figure 231 Figure 232 Figure 233 Figure 234 Figure 235 Figure 236 Figure 237 Figure 238 Figure 239 Figure 240 Figure 241 Figure 242 Figure 243 Figure 244 Figure 245 Figure 246 Create PTP Clock Probe VieW 1 cee es 360 PTP Clock Probe Status Tab 1 aaa cee es 362 Create SyncJack Schedule ooooooo cono ooo 362 PTP Clock Probe State Running o o 363 PTP Clock Probe State Completed 364 Exporting PTP Clock Probe Test Results to Excel 365 SyncJack PTP Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph 366 Example PTP Clock Probe TIE TE Graph with Failed Region 366 View PTP Clock Pro
27. 290 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Figure 168 Create Management Tunnel w ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application E System NE 1 Synchronization E mE Communications DCN eth0 3G DCN Management Tunnels SNMP E Administration x BO amp Create Tunnel Identification Management Tunnel Index 1 Management Tunnel Name Associated Port ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 Interface Encapsulation Type Ethernet MTU 1500 bytes Networking DHCP Disabled y IP Address O ok ol 0 DHCP Client ID Control Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Client ID Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode VLAN Based y S Tag VLAN Disabled x VLAN Id 4095 1 4095 S Tag VLANId 4055 1 4095 Management Traffic Bridging Disabled System Default Gateway Edit System Default Gateway Gateway IP Address 10 10f 32 1 RIP RIPv2 Disabled Bandwidth CIR 256000 bps Buffer Size 32 KB EIR 768000 bps cos 7 Cancel Apply OK Step 4 Enter select the following data to configure the management tunnel see Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules on p 521 for details on each item Identification Management Tunnel Index integer from 1 to 255 Management Tunnel Name 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters Associated Port select fro
28. Are both HTTP and HTTPS enabled Go to Step 15 Is HTTP and or HTTPS disabled Proceed to the next step Step 13 Enter the following highlighted CLI commands to enable both HTTP and HTTPS ADVA comms gt home ADVA gt configure system ADVA system gt http enabled ADVA system gt https enabled Step 14 Goto Step 11 Step 15 Use an ethernet cable to connect the MGMT LAN RJ 45 connector to the network DCN Step 16 Open a browser window and use the configured IP address to access the NE Step 17 Determine the next step Current Status Then Did a login screen display Proceed to the next step Did the connection to the NE fail Check that you entered the IP address correctly that the PC is connected to the network DCN and has a valid IP address itself that the NE is connected to the network DCN and that the NE s IP address is set correctly If necessary return to Step 2 Installation and Operations Manual 279 a ADVA oats A J E WED wz 8 Provision Communications Optical Networking Step 18 Enter a valid login User ID and Password The default login and pass word are root and ChgMeNOW respectively The security banner will then be displayed Step 19 Click on the Continue button and a display similar to the following will appear Figure 166 eVision System View File Application Be x 5 D D O aiai Configuration R
29. Local X SNMP Engine ID 800009f0030080ea39d200 Source TOD Clock i None Configured Cancel Apply OK Step 30 For System Time Of Day select Local Step 31 Select the drop down calendar for the Date and select the appropriate year month and day Three years are displayed at a time To progress through the years A beyond the displayed years continue to click on the right most years 5 until the desired year is displayed Then select the desired year Then select the desired month from the drop down list Then select the Note desired date Installation and Operations Manual 197 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Provision Synchronization Optical Networking Figure 94 Edit System Time Of Day Local Method DYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x A D tu System Edit System f NE 1 la NTESP100 E Synchronization 5 NE 1 Name a FSP 150SP 100 NTESP100 ASI FSP 150SP 100 ome uie ee TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Cli profir GA BITS 1 ld enous Configuration BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Provisioning Mode 3 Autoprov y FTP Enabled v CLK 1 1 1 2 Release Version 26 1 1049 HTTP 3 Enabled PPS 1 1 1 1 IN DCN IP Address 10 10 35 98 HTTPS t Enabled e PPS 1 1 1 2 DCN Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 SSL Cipher Strength Low TOD 1 1 1 1 DCN DHCP Enabled p gt SCP 2 Enabled dias DCN DHCP R
30. Mounting Dual SP 100 via a 23 Standard or Extended ETSI Extended Configuration Prior to mounting the SP 100 please check the mounting package contents carefully Two mounting kits are required e SP 100 Dual Rack Mounting Brackets Kit part number 1013904011 SP 100 Extended Rack Mounting Brackets kit part number 1013904012 The following components will be used in this procedure two 19 short rack mounting brackets two dual mounting brackets six M2x6 Phillips A2 screws eight M3x5 CSK POZI A2 screws Two adapter brackets extender tabs 1U 19 to 23 or 1U 19 to ETSI Four 10 32 x 0 375 screws Four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or Four M6x20 POZI screws and four M6 nuts o o o o o o o 1 MECHANICAL LOADING When mounting the equipment in a rack ensure that a hazardous condition is not created by uneven mechanical loading 2 Ensure that reliable grounding of the rack mounted equipment is WARNING maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit Use the following procedure to install dual SP 100s via a Standard or Extended 23 ETSI Extended configuration Procedure The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows Step 1 Perform all the steps in the following procedure Mounting Dual SP 100s via a 19 Standard or Extended Configuration on p 88 Step 2 Attach the extension brackets to e
31. Provision Network Port The following procedures assume that the user has completed the physical installation procedures in Physical Installation on p 73 including installation of SFPs and connecting fiber cables to the Network Port It is also assumed that the user has configured the NID with an IP address and connected the NID to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 It is also assumed that the user is logged on to eVision with the proper privilege level for provisioning see User Authorization Privilege Levels on p 436 and is in the configuration view Configuring Network Port Procedure Step 1 Expand the System Name NE 1 and NTESP100 entities in the Selec tion Tree by clicking on the signs next to each entity Step2 Right click on the E1000 N 1 interface in the selection tree pane and select Edit Configuration and the following screen displays Figure 84 Edit Network Interface ADVA FSP 150 P100 8 O O File y Application y A x 5 D e El System Edit Configuration E NE 1 NTESP100 Identification 100 earn E100 AREA Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 DCN esate Alias 3G Modem Synchronization State Communications Administrative S Secondary ACT o Operational Normal Administration MAC Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c1 Negotiated Speed Auto 1000 Full Media Type i Copper ix Loopback Co
32. TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 x TOD 1 1 Edit Configuration GPS 1 1 MF Cancel Apply OK 4 Communications SNMP Administration Step 21 Enter the following TOD options a Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative state b Select the desired Squelch Control c Select the desired Source EID d Select OK Step 22 Select the TOD 1 1 1 1 entity to view configuration details Step 23 Goto Step 2 194 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit GPS Refer to the following procedure for provisioning the Global Positioning System GPS port Step 24 Enter a right click on the GPS 1 1 1 1 entity and select Edit Configu ration An Edit GPS 1 1 1 1 window displays Figure 91 Edit GPS Interface Configuration File Application v System NE 1 NTESP100 Synchronization f NE 1 NTESP100 SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 BITS 1 BITS IN BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN PPS 1 1 1 2 TOD 1 1 1 1 oro Eoi Connouraton Communications Edit Configuration SNMP x 5 D Y Edit Configuration Identification Entity ID GPS 1 1 1 1 Alias gt State Administrative S Operational Normal Secondary ACT Configuration PPS generation condition 35AT8S Antenna Cable Length m 5 Cancel Apply OK Step 25 Enter the following GPS options a Enter the desired Alias and select the desi
33. 146 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool 3G USB MODEM Access Port BITS In Port BITS Out Port Clock Probe DCN Port GPS Port Network Port PTP Clock Probe PTP Network Probe Pulse Per Second PPS Port SOOC NTESP100 Card NTESP100 Shelf Synchronization System Telecom Slave Time Clock Time of Day TOD Port Administration Expanding the Administration entity reveals the Software Database Configura tion Files and Software Licensing entities The following maintenance functions are available Administration Right clicking on the Administration entity allows selection of Restore System Defaults or Restore Factory Defaults See Restore Sys tem Defaults on p 252 and Restore Factory Defaults on p 253 for expla nations of these operations and the difference between them Upgrade Selecting the Upgrade entity displays the current Active and Standby software versions along with the File Services mode and status and the Validation Timer status Entering a right click on the Upgrade entity allows selection of Transfer Install Activate and Validate options Database Selecting the Database entity displays the current Active and Standby database versions along with the File Services mode and status Entering a right click on the Database entity allows selection of database backup and restore functions Backup Database Copy to Remote Copy from Remote R
34. 292 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Figure 169 Display Management Tunnel Configuration Sl ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application wv E System E NE 1 Synchronization E q Communications DCN etho 3G DCN E Management Tunnels SNMP EJ Administration Step 6 B x B 3 6 Configuration Identification Entity ID MANAGEMENT TUNNEL 1 Tunnel Name Dallas2 Associated Port ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 Interface Encapsulation Type Ethernet MTU 1500 bytes Networking DHCP Disabled IP Address 110 12 23 4 DHCP Client ID Control Disabled Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Client ID FSP 150SP 100 Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode VLAN S Tag VLAN Disabled VLAN Id 4095 S Tag VLAN Id 4095 Management Traffic Bridging Disabled System Default Gateway Gateway IP Address 10 10 32 1 RIP RIPv2 Disabled Bandwidth CIR 256000 bps Buffer Size 32 EIR 768000 bps cos 87 If anything in the Configuration RIP or Bandwidth data requires modi fication right click on the management tunnel ID and select Edit Con figuration see the following figure Installation and Operations Manual 293 a ADVA 7J E a Wwe u Provision Communications Optical Networking Figure 170 Edit Management Tunnel File Application v x 5 D MW A System Edit Configuration E NE 1 EJ Syn
35. A VO a naw WAI n SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Step 12 Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe continued prog ress while the test is running Observe the Actual Test Duration s status to determine how long the test has been running how much time is left before completion if a Fixed Duration was scheduled Step 13 Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe when the test is completed see the following figure Figure 229 PTP Clock Probe State Completed File Application 4 Xx o 5 System Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph NE 1 Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results 10000000 4 4 4 J Tests Result CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat_ Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 git wa CO E T a 100000 0 2 na Na NA Clock Analysis J 0 5 NA NA N A PTP Clock Probes 1 N A N A N A pedra e 100000 a N A N A N A 3 8 OK oK T a 10 10 OK OK 20 10 OK oK PTP Network Analysis e En E En o PTP Network Probes Z xo 200 21 OK OK Syncjack Schedules 500 EA ETE oK SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 100 1000 NA Nia wa 2000 N A N A A SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 5000 N A N A N A Result Analysis 0 10000 N A N A N A MTIE comparison 20000 N A N A N A 50000 N A N A N A Raw Data Collection Y 18 po wp ypo 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec Identification
36. FSP 150SP 100 a Description FSP 150SP 100 Location SP100 35 98 Contact SP100 35 98 1 CLI Prefix ADVA Configuration Provisioning Mode Release Version DCN IP Address DCN Subnet Mask DCN DHCP DCN DHCP Role Gateway IP Address Management Traffic Bridging Mgmt Traffic Bridging Security Proxy ARP System Up Time Date Time System Time Of Day Source TOD Clock Autoprov ES 6 1 1 049 10 10 35 98 255 255 240 0 Enabled DHCP Client 10 10 32 1 Disabled y 1 hr 53 mins 14 secs 3 2014 02 yyyy mm dd 19 20 26 hh mm ss t Local y None Configured z HTTP HTTPS SSL Cipher Strength SCP Serial Port Serial Port Auto Log Off SFTP SSH Telnet Authentication Traps CLI Security Prompt SNMP Engine ID Enabled z Enabled z 3 Enabled z 3 Low Zi 3 Enabled i Enabled x Enabled z i Enabled z 3 Enabled lx Iz 3 Disabled 800009f0030080ea3992c0 Cancel gt Apply gt OK Step 41 Enter the following System TOD options a Select PTP Clock for System Time of Day b Select TS 1 1 for the Source TOD Clock c Select OK Step 42 Select the Identification tab to view Date and Time Step 43 Goto Step 2 Installation and Operations Manual 201 a ARAVA an 5 A v 7 VA WS u Provision Synchronization ell Networking Edit Sync E on a Network Port or Acce
37. Grand Master Multiple Transparent Clocks may reside ay Ordinary ToD between a GrandMaster Clock Source Clock and an Ordin Clock Slave i ay wo Slave 10MHZ f 1 4 bes O na Clock Partition gt Synchronous networks rely on accurate distribution of frequency in order to opti mize transmission and TDM cross connection In contrast packet based net works and services are highly buffered and do not require accurate timing for their operation But if packet based networks are used to support circuit emula tion services stable frequency is needed at both ends of the service Stable fre quency from one end has to be transported on the packet network and be recovered on the other side Other applications include wireless access technol ogies like LTE WIMAX etc where the air interfaces have stringent synchroni zation requirements Synchronous Ethernet was developed by ITU T for physical layer frequency distribution But Synchronous Ethernet may not be a viable option in all cases as it requires transceivers that are capable of extract ing accurate frequency from the received signal and hence requires different hardware This also adds cost to the network devices IEEE 1588v2 defines mechanisms to accurately transfer time between two clocks An IEEE 1588v2 slave is able to compute the time based on a precise timestamp from the master and the delay between master and slave The accu racy o
38. Right clicking on an entity in the Selection Tree Pane opens a window of avail able edits for that entity selecting one of these yields an edit view in the Details Pane See Figure 48 on p 140 for an example of an Edit Access Port pane Note that all valid provisioning options are displayed in white and options that are not provisionable are grayed out Media Type Installation and Operations Manual 139 a ADVA 7J E a m Wa u Getting Familiar with eVision Optical Networking Figure 48 Edit Access Port Pane EL ADYA FSP 150 EMS SP100 35 98 Configuration File Application 64 x A D AS m System Edit Configuration NE 1 NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1900 0 Entity ID ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 Br contratos allas 36 EditSync E Synchronization State NE 1 Administrative S Secondary ACT FAF NTESP100 Operational Outage SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Port BITS 1 Ger CLK 1 1 1 1 IN MAC Address E 00 80 8a 39 d2 c2 Negotiated Speed Negotiating iio Media Type 3 Fiber_ x Loopback Configuration None MTU 9600 bytes Loopback Status None ener IN Max Speed 0 Swap SA DA B None Configured Speed Auto 1000 Full w Auto Diagnostic Disabled y TORT tae MDIX 2 Not Applicable GPS 1 1 1 1 Communications DCN ethO Service 3G DCN Management Tunnels Port Mode CO Port Shaping Disabled x
39. Step 7 amp Note Copy System Default Database From Remote Method File Transfer Method SCP File Transfer Server IP User ID User Password Remote File Cancel OK Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP SFTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name of the database file to transfer The file transfer will begin and show a screen similar to the following Figure 147 File Transfer Progress Screen Low ia ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v E System NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Canfinuiratinn Files 4 x 6 A 5 Nas a Transfer Upgrade Mode Software Download Status In progress 27 Installation and Operations Manual 249 a ADVA 7J E a m WM u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking When the Status changes from Progress to Success right click on Database in the selection tree pane and select Restore Data base The following screen displays Step 8 Figure 148 Restore Database Query a a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance EE Synchronization Communications A
40. c For PPS 1 1 1 2 provisioned as an Output PPS Select the desired Squelch Control d Foran Input PPS select the desired Input Rate e Enter the desired Cable Delay Compensation approx 5ns per meter 192 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning f For PPS 1 1 1 2 provisioned as an Output PPS Select the desired Source EID g Select OK Step 18 Select the PPS 1 1 1 1 or PPS 1 1 1 2 entity to view configuration details Step 19 Goto Step 2 Installation and Operations Manual 193 ADVA an 5 A v VA Ws u Provision Synchronization ell Networking Edit TOD Port Refer to the following procedure for provisioning the Time Of Day TOD port 5 The desired Source ElD must be provisioned prior to selecting its entity as an output source Note Step 20 Enter a right click on the TOD 1 1 1 1 entity and select Edit Configu ration An Edit TOD 1 1 1 1 window displays Figure 90 Edit Time of Day Interface Configuration 5 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v x EA D D E System edit Configuration E NE 1 NTESP100 Identification Synchronization NE 1 Entity ID TOD 1 1 1 1 NTESP100 Alias SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 SETE BITS 1 Administrative Unassigned x Secondary UAS BITS IN Operational Outage BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Configuration CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Squelch Control Never is Source Eid
41. 1 Packet Per 1 Second Installation and Operations Manual 511 a ADVA 7 A 7 7 We a VA Ws YA Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies cole Networking Table 56 Create Edit Static Slave Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Sync Message Sync Message Rate Applicable only if Unicast Mes 1 Packet Per Rate Create sage Negotiation is Disabled Second only Sync Message Rate cannot be greater than the associ 2 Packets Per ated MCI Max Sync Message Rate Second 4 Packets Per Second 8 Packets Per Second 16 Packets Per Second 32 Packets Per Second 64 Packets Per Second 128 Packets Per Second Delay Response Delay Response Message Rate Applicable only if 1 Packet Per Message Rate Unicast Message Negotiation is Disabled Second Create only 2 Packets Per Delay Response Message Rate cannot be greater than Second the associated MCI Max Response Message Rate 4 Packets Per Second 8 Packets Per Second 16 Packets Per Second 32 Packets Per Second 64 Packets Per Second 128 Packets Per Second 512 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Edit Delete a Dynamic Slave To edit a Dynamic Slave enter a right click on the Dynamic Slave entity e g DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 and select Edit The number of Dynamic Slaves that may be
42. 100 Full MDIX Auto2 Auto Diagnostic Enabled Ethernet Access Port Port Mode CO Connection Oriented Facility Service Type EPL E1000 A 1 AFP AFP ALL Q in Q Ethertype 8100 hex Q in Q Ethertype Enabled Override NTE Port Shaped Speed 0 bps NE 1 Sync E Mode Disabled NTESP100 QL Mode Disabled Continued Assumed QL QL EECi Expected QL QL NONE Alias blank Administrative State IS ASA Configured Speed Auto MDIX Auto Alias blank Administrative State IS 3G Dial Up APN blank 3G Dial Up User Name blank 3G Modem 3G Dial Up Password blank 3G Dial Up Dial Not Available 3G Dial Up Redial Timer 10 Sec PIN blank Installation and Operations Manual 439 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Functional Area Entity Parameter Default Setting Alias blank Administrative State IS Network Clock Type Option 1 SDH Regional Clock dada WTR Time 5 minutes Selection Mode Priority Mode Add Edit Delete No Sync References Exist Sync Reference at System Default Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned Line Type El Line Code E1 HDB3 SN Frame Format E1 CRC4 SA Bit Bit 4 QL Mode Disabled Assumed QL QL EEC1 Expected QL QL NONE Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned Syn
43. ADVA 7J E a m WM u User Authorization Privilege Levels Optical Networking User Authorization Privilege Levels Refer to the following table for user authorization privilege levels Table 37 User Authorization Privilege Levels User Level Description Superuser Has access to all commands including administration commands Provisioning Has access to all commands with the exception of other user administration options Maintenance Has access to a limited set of commands which support maintenance actions such as testing loopbacks diagnostics Retrieve Has access to commands for displaying configuration settings and performance data Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies The following provides a summary of configuration default settings configura tion options provisioning rules and dependencies The following configuration options and rules tables provide high level option descriptions and valid entries using the eVision web browser management tool The high level option descriptions provided here assume a good working knowl edge of the use of each option and are intended to be used as a guide to oper ate configure and maintain the system Additional information for each option description can be found in the ESP 150SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide for specific features For more information regarding navigating and using the eVision see Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management
44. Each entity type has default thresholds for its PPs which are used when an entity is provisioned The default thresholds are configurable Procedure Step 1 Select the PTP icon or select PTP from the Applications menu then expand the System and Network Element entities in the selection tree Step 2 For Network Access PTP Flowpoint Expand the NTESP100 entity then expand the E1000 A 1 E1000 N 1 entity For SOOC Expand the TS 1 1 entity Step 3 Enter a right click on the desired entity in the selection tree and select Edit Thresholds An Edit Thresholds pane appears see Figure 208 on p 343 Step 4 Edit the desired thresholds for the desired Monitored Type Use slid ing bars to view data as required Select OK End of Procedure 342 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 208 Edit PM Threshold View of a SOOC l ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP A 5 File Application System NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 NTESP100 E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 El1000 A 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 SOOC 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes Entity ID SOOC Edit Thresholds DIR oc 15MIN aiye Near PTI ATI eive End PTP Invalid Message Nea
45. Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 File Transfer Progress Screen 0 0 0 0 cee ee es 249 Restore Database Query 1 a 250 Activate Standby Database View 000 eee 250 Restore System Defaults us es dy eR wl ew ee we oe 252 Restore Factory DefaultS 0 00 00 ee es 253 Configuration Files Create o o oooo o 261 Configuration Files Update lt 262 Configuration Files Display Status oooo 262 Configuration Files Restart lt lt 263 Configuration Files IMPOR A 263 Configuration Files EXpOlt o ooooooooooos 264 Configuration Files Edit Description 265 Configuration Files REMOVE anaana aaa aaa ds 265 Copy System Default Settings From Remote Web View 267 Copy System Default Settings From Remote SCP View 268 File Transfer Progress Screen 0 20 eee ees 268 Transfer Log WiCW 2 its tad Bie wie Gs we Bw eee ee 269 Bulk Log Transfer SCP View 1 0 0 0002 eee eee 270 File Transfer Progress Screen o o oo oo oo ooo oo 271 eVision System View a a E a nee 280 Edit iDEN Std sera e aa Bs 287 Create Management Tunnel o oooooo ooo ooo 291 Display Management Tunnel Configuration 293 Edit Management Tunnel saaana coso 294 Delete Manageme
46. Link Down is generated when a Wait a few moments for the Cause Not physical connection is lost on a good system to isolate the trouble Facilit Determined link on the Ethernet interface port and observe another Link y ox f Red Access or Network Upon the loss of Down condition on this x f f aes E Minor Critical connection on a given port this is the interface Troubleshoot OE A Link Rate first notification being sent before any according to the new oN de Off specific cause is determined such as condition cable fault or cable removed Link Down Cable Link Down is generated when a Perform an Etherjack Fault physical connection is lost on a good Diagnostic test Repair the Facility link on the Ethernet interface port cable using test results Red Access or Network A Cable Fault Minor Critical notification is sent when it is Link Rate determined that the link is down due to Off S9PO 10113 SESNEI aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey 8Lv enue y suoneledo pue uonejesu Table 31 Network Port and Access Port Alarms Continued number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Network problem or possibly a bad cable Repair faulty equipment or cable ss Description NSA Default SA Default LED condition Type Probable Cause TUNE Learna Procedure Notification Notification Indication Link Down Cable
47. PTP Clock Probe can estimate the accuracy of the phase and frequency recov ered by the Slave under test with respect to a time reference signal based on mirrored tz timestamps in PTP Delay_Req messages PTP Clock Probe can estimate the phase and frequency generated by the Mas ter with respect to a reference time signal based on mirrored ty timestamps in PTP Sync messages Refer to the following figure for example PTP Clock Probe test results 40 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Figure 13 SyncJack PTP Clock Probe State Completed File Application DAX G amp G gt 5 ae Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results 30000000 4 J Tests Result CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat_ Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 N al 1 Ma MA we Clock Analysis 0 5 N A N A N A E 1 N A NA nA a 2 N A N A N A History Estimations TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes MTIE ns E 588 nfe fe Salo ojojo RIRIR ojojo AAA 200 21 ok OK Synejack Schedules 500 25 OK OK SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 00 4008 tia wa wa SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 5000 N A N A N A Result Analysis yo 10000 N A N A N A MTIE comparison l 20000 N A N A N A s 50000 N A N A N A Raw Data Collection vr P o po Topo mpoo 100000 N A N A N A Tau s
48. Sync Reference Wait To Restore A Sync Reference has been restored and is in WTR timing No Action Required Minor N A N A S9PO 10113 sesneyd aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey 90v enue y suoneledo pue uoe eysu Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued assigned and the BITS IN port must be a member of the system clock selector list for this condition to exist eds Description NSA Default SA Default LED Gondiapn Type Probable Cause Trouble Sip anne Procguure Notification Notification Indication BITS In Port Alarm Indication BITS Alarm Indication Signal Verify and troubleshoot clock Signal reference Verify and troubleshoot possible signal mismatch In order for proper BITS IN and BITS OUT inter operate with source equipment test sets the user must manually match the FSP 150SP s Network Clock Type with the BITS Not line type Reported N A N A If a T1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 2 If a 2048kHz or E1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 1 Frequency Offset Frequency Offset The Verify and troubleshoot clock synchronization circuit detected reference a frequency offset problem with the BITS IN port s recovered clock The BITS IN port must be Minor N A N A Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BuIy10MI9N e
49. This option is used to enable or disable the Network Time Protocol Client Enabling NTP causes a Unicast point to point request to a server IP address and expects a reply indicating the time Up to two IP addresses can be provisioned Enabled Disabled Primary Server This option is used to configure the IP address of the primary NTP Server Setting this address to 0 0 0 0 disables this server from being used Only applicable if NTP State is Enabled 0 0 0 0 Backup Server Polling Interval This option is used to configure the IP address of the backup NTP Server Setting this address to 0 0 0 0 disables this server from being used Only applicable if NTP State is Enabled Set the NTP polling interval in seconds Allowed settings are from 16 to 1024 seconds as powers of 2 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 Default is 16 0 0 0 0 16 Active Server If both Primary and Backup Server IP Addresses are configured the user can switch between them using this setting Only applicable if NTP State is Enabled Primary Backup Restore System Defaults Restore System Defaults Allows the user to reset the NE back to system defaults NOTE This may cause the loss of all traffic user data and DCN communications settings This should only be done when re configuring or relocating the NE or as a last resort when troubleshooting traffic or communications problems Network Element NE 1 Configura
50. preserved so the configured USM auth and priv keys remain valid If the snmpEngineld is edited the USM auth and priv keys automatically reset to ChgMeNOW and need to be edited End of Procedure Note Installation and Operations Manual 251 ADVA YWQJ eamD WN u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking Restore System Defaults There are two types of database resets available on the FSP 150SP Restore System Defaults and Restore Factory Defaults The difference between System Defaults and Factory Defaults is explained in Determining Database Configura tion Status on p 236 Restore System Defaults may result in the loss of all Provisioning Data Base settings including DCN SNMP Remote Access and User data This is normally only done only when a system is decommis sioned and moved to a new location or when the software or data base is corrupted ltis advisable to backup the database before CAUTION performing this procedure This procedure is NOT part of original Provisioning procedures The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision in Configuration view Procedure Step 1 Click on the Maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Right click on Administrati
51. suuely Jeldey 807 enue y suonyeledo pue uonejesu Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued dis Description NSA Default SA Default LED Conatan Type Probable Cause Toupie tang Prenda Notification Notification Indication Sync Reference Synchronization Referencing Verify and troubleshoot clock Failed Failed The BITS IN port has reference failed in such a way that its clock cannot be recovered thus preventing it from being used Minor N A N A as a synchronization reference e g LOS The BITS IN port must be assigned for this condition primitive to exist Sync Reference Wait A Sync Reference has been No Action Required To Restore restored and is in WTR timing Minor NA NA Sync Reference A Sync Reference has been Test the Locked Out Sync Reference Locked Out locked out Usually due to and remove lock out when reference failure configuration changes is fully functional again Minor N A N A planned or maintenance operations Sync Reference A forced switch operation has Evaluate reason for forced switch Forced Switch been performed on a Sync operation and when appropriate Minor N A N A Reference remove the forced switch Sync Reference A manual switch operation has Evaluate reason for the manual Manual Switch been performed on a Sync switch operation Reference Minor N A N A Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BupyomieN e911dO am awe E A W
52. 0 0 0 0 Accounting Access Order Enable or Disable the use of an accounting port Set the RADIUS access order If the Access Order is set to Local First the default user login is first authenticated using local user database If the local authentication fails then the system will use RADIUS if so configured to authenticate with the remote server If the Access Order is set to Remote First and if the remote authenticate is enabled the first try is to authenticate using the remote server If the remote server is reachable but the authentication failed the system does not authenticated with the local database and declares authentication failure If the remote authentication is successful the system declares the authentication successful If the remote authentication is not enabled or if the remote server is unreachable then the system uses the local database to authenticate Disabled Enabled Local Remote Remote Authentication Server 1 to 3 Status Enables Server for operation Disabled Enabled Installation and Operations Manual 465 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Remote Defines the priority of the server in servicing requests First Authentication Multiple servers m
53. 100 Half 10 Full 10 Half MDIX Defines the Media Dependent Interface Crossover Auto function for copper interfaces MDIX allows the Crossed interface to change cable signal assignments to Uncrossed compensate for using the incorrect cable type 450 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults 3G Modem Edit C Alias onfiguration A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long plank Administrative Defines the SYNC administrative state IS is In IS State Service and is the default value See Entity State Management Descriptions on p 430 Unassigned APN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank User Name 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank Password 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank Dial 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank Redial Timer 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting in seconds 10 3G Modem Enable PIN Input PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank 3G Modem Disable PIN Input PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank 3G Modem Change PIN Current PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank New PIN 3G Modem
54. 28 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview cal 100BaseFX 1000BaseX Copper SFPs are also supported on Access and Network interfaces See the following figure The SP 100 chassis is 44 mm high 220 mm wide and 212 mm deep The SP 100 is convection cooled no fans or filters and is designed for use in a desktop or communications closet environment Multiple units may be stacked up to 4 rows high depending on the operating environment Refer to the FSP 750SP 700 Technical Descriptions document for air flow requirement details A wall mount rack mount kit may be ordered separately One mounting kit is applicable to a variety of mounting environments see the FSP 150SP 100 Technical Descriptions document for mounting kit details A detailed list of system features is provided in the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document eVision Web Browser Management Tool The SP 100 supports an eVision web browser management tool to provide a web based Graphical User Interface GUI for Operation Administration and Maintenance OA amp M functions For more information on eVision web browser management tool operation see Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Figure 4 eVision Web Browser Management Tool File Application a xX B amp B oo 5 E System y Configuration Resources E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 1000 A 1 Entity ID NTESP100 1 1
55. A Communications Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 mv DCN ethd 3G DCN Settings E Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled SNMP E Administration H Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Interface pea Description Date Time Logged in as root Management Features User Management and Security Security features include user access security levels Secure Sockets Layer SSL support for security of Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS Secure Shell SSH management protocols RADIUS support SNMP support post login security banner and Access Control List ACL management Web access to the onboard Element Manager is via HTTP or HTTPS Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPS FTP SFTP and SCP protocols may be enabled or dis abled individually Serial port access may also be disabled The serial port auto matically logs the user off on disconnect provisionable Local User Profile Management Up to 10 local user accounts are supported A login inactivity time out security feature provides a provisionable login time out for each user ID regardless of access type Four privilege levels are supported Superuser Provisioning Main tenance and Retrieve See User Authorization Privilege Levels on p 436 Three preconfigured user accounts are provided as default root Superuser level netadmin Provisioning level and user Maintenance level Default 60 Installation and Operatio
56. Buues D agnor pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BupyomieN e911dO 7m awe A WAU enue y suonyeledo pue uoneljeysu 6LY Table 31 Network Port and Access Port Alarms Continued Messaging Channel ESMC and provisioning eu Description NSA Default SA Default LED C onaon Type Probable Cause Trouble Cleaning Piceedure Notification Notification Indication SFP is not SFP is not qualified but inventory Remove SFP module and qualified Fiber information indicates that it may still replace with an ADVA Optical Minor N A N A only work Networking approved module for that interface type SFP Provisioning Small Form factor Plug able SFP Remove SFP module and Mismatch Fiber optics module mismatch The installed replace with an ADVA Optical only SFP module does not match the Networking approved module m ZR f Facility provisioned module type for the for that interface type Red interface The system expects the SFP ds A Minor Critical to conform to the MSA specification for 3 Link Rate inventory contents and and alarm will Off be raised if the SFP s inventory data does not reflect that the device supports the configured speed SFP Removed Small Form factor Plug able optics Install SFP module Facility Fiber only module is removed Red Minor Critical Link Rate Off SFP Transmit Small Form factor Plug able optics Replace SFP module Facility Fault module fail
57. E System BE m e NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing a x B o amp Configuration Files Status Status Completed Action Save Information Files File Name Description El Test The details pane shows a table of the existing configuration files including the file name and description if any 262 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 10 Goto Step 2 Step 11 Select Configuration Files then right click on the menu icon beside the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane The following screen displays Figure 155 Configuration Files Restart ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application A B 3 4 m System Configuration Files fe NE 1 E Synchronization Status Communications Alarm Attributes Status Completed Action Save E Administration Information Upgrade Files Database File Name Description Default Database E H Save Default Settings Configuration Files Seis Oren item Last Reset Cause Copy to Remote Transfer Log Restart with File Software Licensing Remove Step 12 Select Restart with File The NID is rebooted then the selected configfile is run End of Procedure Step 13 Right click on
58. Enabled scp Enabled E DCN DHCP Role DHCP Client E A Gateway IP Address 10 10 32 1 IO Enabled Management Traffic Bridging Disabled Serial Port Auto Log Off Enabled 7 Mgmt Traffic Bridging Security Disabled SFTP r Enabled Proxy ARP Disabled SSH Enabled System Up Time 1 hr 53 mins 14 secs Telnet afz Date i 2014 024 yyyy mm dd Authentication Traps Jal Time 19 20 26 hh mm ss CLI Security Prompt Disabled System Time Of Day Local Y SNMP Engine ID S00009f0030080ea39d2c0 Source TOD Clock i None Configured Cancel Apply OK m Step 38 For System Time Of Day select NTP and select OK Step 39 Go to Step 2 200 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit System Time Of Day via PTP Clock e Note p 208 Step 40 An Edit System window displays Figure 97 Edit System Time of Day File v Application Syste ranan Edit Security Log Edit Alarm Log Edit Audit Log Edit Syslog Edit ACL Edit Banner Edit NTP Restore System Defaults Bl x E gt Edit System Enter a right click on the System entity and select Edit System If the source TOD clock is to be set to PTP Clock then the Telecom Slave must be provisioned and In Service prior to selecting its entity as a source See Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP on Identity Name
59. Ensure that the dual mounting brackets are flipped from one another oriented so they will mate correctly when they are attached in the next step See Figure 33 on p 89 Step 3 Secure the dual mounting brackets to each other using six M2x6 Phil lips A2 screws three on the top and three on the bottom See Figure 33 on p 89 Step 4 Secure a 19 short mounting bracket to the left unit using two M3X5 CSK POZI screws and secure the remaining 19 short mounting bracket to the right unit using two M3x5 CSK POZI screws See Figure 33 on p 89 If installing in a Standard configuration set the brackets flush with the SP 100 If installing in an Extended configuration line up the rear set 88 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation of bracket holes to the SP 100 so that the SP 100 is recessed from the front of the bracket Step5 Mount the SP 100 to the 23 rack or ETSI rack with four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and four M6 nuts End of Procedure Figure 33 Mounting Dual SP 100s via EXT 19 Configuration 19 Mounting Bracket Short M2x6 Phillips Screws 12 24x0 5 or M6x20 POZI Screws And M6 Nuts Dual Mounting Brackets See Detail A 12 24x0 5 or M6x20 POZI Screws And M6 Nuts 19 Mounting Bracket Short Installation and Operations Manual 89 Physical Installation ADVA VO E aap ws Y Optical Networking
60. For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors may be used The cable should be no longer than 100m and should be compliant with the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 3 1998 Ethernet standard e Note amp Note See LAN Connector Pin Assignments on p 120 For effective environmental protection from external objects of any kind the SP 100 is intended to be protected from dust and particles with all covers complete To ensure that all components are adequately protected do not operate the SP 100 for extended periods without supplying plugs for vacant electrical and optical ports The copper connection has Auto MDIX enabled which allows straight through or cross over cables to be used Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Route the Access Network interface cable s from the SP 100 to the appropriate location Repeat for each additional port as needed Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the Access Network Inter face port on the front panel of the SP 100 Repeat for each additional port as needed Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the Customer Equip ment Repeat for each additional Access Network Port copper cable Dress cables as required End of Procedure 96 Instal
61. Installing a Standalone Chassis Use the following procedure to install a chassis in a cabinet or on a desk The SP 100 is cooled by radiating heat from the chassis If the SP 100 is to be placed on a desktop or in a communications closet environment it is recom mended that nothing be placed on top of the unit or within 3 inches 7 cm of either side Procedure Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an antistatic sur face If necessary use canned compressed air to blow off any dust particles Step2 Mount four rubber feet to the bottom of the unit near each corner Four white rubber feet are included in the Accessory Kit which is shipped with each unit Step 3 Place the chassis on a secure flat surface making sure that it is within reach of the necessary connections End of Procedure 94 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Route and Connect Copper Cables Use the following for connecting copper cables Two Ethernet combination ports that may be configured for copper 10 100 1000 BaseT or optical 100BaseFX 1000BaseX Port 1 is always designated as a Network port Port 2 is always designated as an Access port Ethernet DCN connection labeled MGMT LAN Local Serial port labeled RS 232 USB port BITS IN and BITS OUT Ports RJ 48c connectors Time of Day Input Connector RJ 45 RS 422 RS 232 port labeled TOD Pulse Per Second Input and Input Output Connect
62. NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Method File Transfer Method Web y Administration Upgrade Database HTTP Transfer Remote File No file selected Cancel OK Default Database Default Setting Save Configuration F Copy to Remote Last Reset Cau Transfer Log New E Software Licensing Step 3 Determine the next step Desired File Transfer Method Then Web HTTP Continue with the next step FTP SFTP or SCP Go to Step 6 248 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Enter the path to the file to restore or browse to the file location then click on OK The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane will indicate when the file transfer is 100 complete Go to Step 8 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the following figure The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP views are identical Figure 146 Copy Database From Remote SCP View ma a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance E EA D a File Application E System NE 1 Le Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing
63. Near 0 0 Packets Received The total number of End packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received ESP64 EtherStats Packets 0 to 64 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 480 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Monitored oe ae Loca 5 15 Type Description Direction tion Min 1 Day ESP65 EtherStats Packets 65 to 127 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP128 EtherStats Packets 128 to 255 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP256 EtherStats Packets 256 to 511 Octet Receive Near 0 0 Packets The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP512 EtherStats Packets 512 to 1023 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in leng
64. P Va aaz WA YA SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Performing MTIE Result Comparison SyncJack MTIE Result Comparison provides a comparison chart of up to 4 Results Procedure Step 1 Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Step 2 Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the Result Analysis entity Step3 Enter a right click on MTIE Comparison in the selection tree and select Configure A Configure MTIE Comparison pane appears Figure 245 Configure MTIE Comparison S ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application BDXB9o amp System Results E NE 1 Clock Accuracy MTIE Mask 6823 Pdh Y Clock Analysis Tests Result PTP Network Analysis Entity ID Alias Reference Source Start time Duration Mask Cross Margin Cross ES Synejack Schedules 7 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 CLKPRB1 GPS 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 2013 09 19 19 45 27 2 Not Available Not Available Result Analysis T PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 PTPProbe1 1 1 ner PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 2013 09 19 299 Not Available Not Available MTIE comparis PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 1 PTPCLKProbe2 GPS 1 1 1 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 2013 09 19 20 12 59 599 Not Available Not Available Raw Data Collection Step4 Enter the following to configure the MTIE Comparison a Select the desired MTIE Mask b
65. PTP Clock Source TOD Selects the source TOD Clock TS 1 1 if provisioned None Configured Clock A drop down list is provided that contains all configured TOD clock sources Mena FTP Enables or disables File Transfer Protocol access to Enabled the system If enabled the FTP client on the system Disabled can be used for file transfer HTTP Enables or disables Hypertext Transfer Protocol Enabled access to the system If enabled the user can access Disabled the GUI interface using HTTP Note HTTP is an unsecured protocol Using this protocol to access the system could compromise the security of the system HTTPS Enables or disables Hypertext Transfer Protocol Enabled Secure access to the system If enabled the user can Disabled access the GUI interface using HTTPS 446 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults SSL Cipher Sets the strength of the SSL cipher Encryption Low Strength strength is measured in key length number of bits in Medium the key To decipher an SSL communication one High needs to generate the correct decoding key Mathe matically speaking 2 possible values exist for an n bit key Thus 40 bit encryption low involves 240 possible values 56 bit encryption
66. Receiving Jabber Near RCVONLY SA BITS Out Port CR SFP Provisioning Mismatch Near RCVONLY SA Clock Probe CR SFP Removed Near RCVONLY SA DCN Port CR__ SFP Transmit Fault __ Near _ RCVONLY SA MN Sync Reference Failed Near RCVONLY NSA GPS Port MN Loss of ESMC Near RCVONLY NSA NTESP100 Card MN Sync QL Mismatch Near RCVONLY NSA NTESP100 Sh MN _ Frequency Offset Near RCVONLY NSA E e MN Sync QL Invalid Near RCVONLY NSA N rt MN Bandwidth Exceeds Negotiated Speed Near _ RCVONLY NSA PTP Clock Probe M Bandwidth Exceeds Negotiated Speed Near RCVONLY SA PTP Network Probe MN SFP is not qualified Near RCVONLY NSA CR Link Down Master Slave Config Near RCVONLY SA Pulse Per Second PPS Port MN sync Reference Locked Out Near RCVONLY NSA sooc MN Sync Reference Forced Switch Near RCVONLY NSA a MN Sync Reference Manual Switch Near RCVONLY NSA Synchronization MN Sync Reference Wait To Restore Near RCVONLY NSA System Telecom Slave Time Clock Time Of Day TOD Port E Administration A Conditions List is also present for the NE 1 entity see Figure 52 on p 149 Figure 52 Conditions List View of the NE 1 Entity S ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP 100 35 98 Maintenance File Application System NE 1 Synchronization Communications E Alarm Attributes Administration xl amp Identification Conditions List Identification Entity ID SYSTEM
67. Select the check box for each desired Probe Results a maximum of four to include in the comparison Step5 Select the MTIE Comparison entity in the Selection Tree MTIE Comparison results are displayed 378 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 246 MTIE Comparison Results E ADVA FSP 150 EMS File Application E System El NE 1 El Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 f History Results E Clock Analysis Ej PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 2 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 3 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 4 E PTP Network Analysis El PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 El Synejack Schedules SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 El Result Analysis MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection 10000000 1000000 100000 10000 MITE ns PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 3 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 4 1 9823 PDH Results Ot N A N A N A N A 0 2 N A N A N A N A 0 5 N A N A N A N A EN N A N A N A N A 2 N A N A N A N A 5 24 14 8 8 10 32 23 3 10 20 42 35 17 14 50 81 43 24 19 100 89 44 34 20 200 89 60 37 23 500 N A E 60 WA N A 1000 N A N A N A N A 2000 N A N A N A N A ig xr 5000 N A N A N A N A 10000 N A N A N A N
68. Server 1 Status Disabled Y Port a 1812 Priority 2 First w Accounting Port 1813 IP Address of oM oM ol Timeout Ll Edit Server Secret Retries 3 Server Secret 00000 Remote Authentication Server 2 Server 2 Status Disabled Y Port Priority Second X Accounting Port L IP Address o ol o 0 Timeout Edit Server Secret Retries Server Secret sesse Remote Authentication Server 3 Server 3 Status Port z 1812 Priority i Accounting Port 1813 IP Address Op ol ol o mimenut Le Edit Server Secret Retries _ 3 Server Secret oovoo Cancel Apply OK Step 3 Enter the required data for the Remote Authentication Protocol Sys tem Level Configuration including Authentication Protocol Authenti cation Type TACACS Privilege Control TACACS Default Privilege NAS IP Address RADIUS only Accounting and Access Order Details on the function and rules for each entry is located at Adminis tration on p 464 and the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document Step 4 Enter the required data for each Remote Authentication Server 1 2 and 3 including Server Status Priority IP Address Server Secret Port Accounting Port Timeout and Retries Details on the function and rules for each entry is located at Administration on p 464 and the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document If Remote Authentication is activated local access may be restricted
69. Step 68 If statistics are not indicating message receive and transmit statistics as expected troubleshoot accordingly Step 69 At the FSP150 remote node select the OCS PORT entity to view con figuration details and Port State Wait until the Port Status changes to Slave Locked Installation and Operations Manual 231 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP a ADVA 7J a amw waz n Optical Networking Figure 127 Slave OCS Port State mal Ka ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application E System El NE 1 E NTESP100 E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 TS 1 1 SOOC 1 1 1 q E Alarm Attributes Step 70 a x BL Configuration Identification Entity ID OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 Alias TS1 Identity 0080ea33b0a000000000 State Administrative IS Secondary ACT Operational Normal Configuration PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Port State Slave Go to Step 1 232 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Verify a Dynamic Remote Slave Connectivity The following procedure is performed at the node that is provisioned for Bound ary Clock Master Clock SS Note Step 71 Step 72 Ensure connectivity to the Remote Slave and it is provisioned with Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled If the Remote Slave is an FSP150 unit it must already have a Telecom Slav
70. SyncJack Testing SyncJack provisioning and reporting is invoked by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu and expand ing the system folder in the Selection Tree Selecting the NE 1 entity in the Selection Tree provides the SyncJack Global Dashboard View see Figure 209 on p 344 The Global status reflects a com posite of 3 status meters Clock Accuracy Clock Analysis and PTP Network Analysis For the indicator bar a horizontal line indicates N A green indicates normal operation yellow indicates some issue exists red indicates a significant problem Figure 209 SyncJack Network Element View 5 ia ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application v System e NET Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 CLOCK PROBE 1 2 E History Results AX BO Network Element SYNCIACK GLOBAL CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 E Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT TS 1 1 E PTP Network Analysis E PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 E Synejack Schedules SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 lt m CLOCK ACCURACY CLOCK ANALYSIS PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS 344 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and
71. This is positioned at each PSU chassis and provides a means to fasten the cables Installation and Operations Manual 429 Entity State Descriptions ADVA VO E ea wz Y Optical Networking Entity State Descriptions A state model is maintained for each entity in the system The state of an entity is derived from its Administrative State its Operational State and its Secondary States Administration State There are a number of rules related to the behavior of the Administrative state as it relates to the parent child relationship of objects For example there are certain states for a child that are invalid if the parent state is not already in that state The administrative state model consists of the following states IS in service this is the normal state for an entity that is configured to be fully operational Management this is also referred to as the Out of Service state In this state all alarms for the entity is squelched Any Standing Alarm is cleared and re raised as a not alarmed NA Condition The intended use of this state is to squelch alarms that the user is not interested in In addition for any traffic affecting provisioning change the entity is put into this state although there is no enforcement of this requirement The additional char acteristics associated with this state is that user data and management traf fic continue to flow Maintenance this is ALSO an Out of Se
72. Up to three Syslog Servers can be configured 0 0 0 0 All syslog messages generated by the unit are sent to a all configured Syslog Servers Setting the IP Address to 0 0 0 0 will result in the server not being used Port The IP port of each registered Syslog Server The 514 default port number is 514 Access Control List Edit ACL for ACL ID 1 through 10 Network Address IP Address of the user subnet allowed to access the SP 100 Up to 10 user subnetwork IP addresses can 0 0 0 0 be entered ACL ID 1 10 Network Mask Network Mask for the user subnet IP address allowed to access the SP 100 Up to 10 user subnetwork IP address and Network Mask combinations can be 299 209 299 209 entered ACL ID 1 10 Control Each Network Address Network Mask combination Enabled can be Enabled or Disabled The default is Disabled Enabling an entry applies it to every management Disabled interface with ACL enabled Security Banner Edit Banner Banner Defines a custom security banner a text string of up to This is a private 2000 characters in length which is displayed when a system Unauthorized user logs onto the system This banner is displayed on access or use may CLI and web browser logins lead to prosecution 448 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults NTP Edit NTP State
73. amp Synchronization Activate Now Communications Schedule Activation Date 2013 00 25 yyyy mm dd Time 19 36 hh mm E Alarm Attributes Cancel Previous Scheduled Activation Administration Enable Validation Timer Time Out 01 00 hh mm Upgrade Data Transfer Cancel OK Defa Install Conf Validate s Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Software Licensing Step 11 Select the activation mode Activate Now or Schedule Activation If Schedule Activation is selected enter the date and time activation should occur Enable and set the validation timer time out option if desired see the following note and warning Activation can be done immediately Activate Now or scheduled for some date time in the future Schedule Activation Either way setting the validation timer causes an automatic switch back to the previous load if the timer should expire The validation timer should be set for a long enough period to allow reconnection to the NE and verification Note thatitis functioning properly Once this sanity test is done the user accepts or cancels the upgrade see Step 15 Do not power down the unit while upgrade is in progress Software and or database corruption may result CAUTION Failure to use the validation timer option can result in loss of contact with the NE and interruption of customer traffic should the software or A database become corrupted during the upgrade process The validation timer option
74. and if it is not damaged reinsert Step 4 Holding the SFP Interface by its sides gently slide it into the port slot until it clicks into place or until it cannot be inserted any further End of Procedure 102 Installation and Operations Manual FSP 150SP 100 R6 1 1 80000026364 Issue A 2014 ADVA Optical Networking SE Confidential Chapter 2 Physical Installation Route Fiber Optic Cables Refer to the following procedure when running fiber optic cables CAUTION A CAUTION Follow local safety procedures regarding fiber optic cables Never look at the end of a fiber optic cable Permanent eye damage or blindness can occur All optical connectors are shipped with protective caps Ensure that protective caps are firmly in place before running any fiber optic cables Never handle exposed fiber optic cables with bare hands or touch it to your body A fiber fragment could enter the skin and be very difficult to detect and remove Prevent damage to fiber optic cables Do not bend fiber NOTICE optic cables to a radius less than 50 mm To avoid damage to optical receivers do not connect any NOTICE fibers until instructed to do so Always check optical levels before connecting fiber optic cables Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Route all fiber optic cables from the SP 100 to the appropriate loca tion Do not connect the cables to the SP 100 connectors at this time They will be connected later Dress all fi
75. at www advaoptical com or the specifications of customer equipment Variable or fixed attenuators in the range of 3dB to 11dB can be placed as appropriate at the Rx and Tx Access Interface connectors Rx and Tx Network Interface connectors Installation and Operations Manual 115 a ADVA A J E sap ws Y Measure Optical Power Optical Networking Install an optical attenuator by plugging the appropriate fiber optic cable into the attenuator and installing the cable attenuator combination at the appropriate connector socket Clean Fiber Connections Clean all fiber connections prior to connecting fiber optic cables Isopropyl alcohol can cause eye irritation Follow the pre cautions given by the optical fiber cable manufacturer A WARNING Working with compressed air can cause debris to fly into your eyes To avoid injury wear safety glasses when you work with isopropyl alcohol and compressed air EK Fiber optic end surfaces must be smooth and clean before connection Note To ensure that all fiber connectors are clean thoroughly clean the connectors using a lint free non abrasive wipe or pad Precautions When Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Refer to the following precautions when connecting fiber optic cables NEVER insert metal objects such as a screwdriver or a finger with jewelry into open SFP Interface slots when the SP 100 is powered on WARNING Fiber optic cables can be damaged if the
76. edited or displayed and registers can be initialized depending on the user access permission level Precision Time Protocol PTP feature provides the ability to create and monitor End to End E2E functionality or Telecom Slave TS functionality for use in high accuracy time and frequency synchronization applications SyncJack feature for monitoring and analyzing clock and synchronization The applications available on the Tool Bar may also be selected from the Application pull down menu on the Menu Bar See Menu Bar on p 135 136 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Selection Tree The Selection Tree located at the left of the screen enables the user to select an entity in order to display a status pane related to that entity shown in the Details Pane to the right select menu options related to that entity The Selection Tree provides a hierarchical tree of the entities that make up an FSP 150SP system and the entities related to that system Each Selection Tree entity is representative of a specific entity type NE PSU Network Port Access Port communications SNMP administration etc Entities are arranged in hierarchical order e g to gain access to an Access Port the System NE 1 and FSP 150SP menus must first be opened Selection Tree nested items are opened or closed by clicking on the or symbol next to the entity respectively Once an
77. is not valid value xxx is the last Superuser xxx not available xxx not available for yyy speed xxx not supported by yyy xxx not supported for Service Mode yyy IPort Mode xxx not supported for UNTAGGED frames xxx not supported on CP unit xxx Out Of Range xxx MIN yyy MAX xxx requires valid address mask xxx speed not supported on yyy xxx state is not supported A port in the reference selector list cannot be unassigned A Reference entity must Access Network or BitsIn port Address cannot be broadcast multicast or begin with 0 Address cannot be xxx Address cannot be broadcast Address cannot be broadcast mutlicast or all O s Address cannot be experimental address Address cannot be Loopback Address cannot be loopback broadcast multicast or begin with 0 Address cannot be multicast Address cannot begin with 0 An Ethernet port in the reference selector list cannot be configured as xxx Attribute missing authentication key Attribute missing authentication protocol Because Service type is in xxx mode Bin index xxx not in range Cannot be empty Cannot configure xxx loopback type Cannot create xxx flow Cannot create xxx flow with VLAN members Installation and Operations Manual 391 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Error Codes and System Responses Optical Networking Error Code Response 512 Where Why is continued Cannot enable QL Mo
78. medium involves 25 combinations and 128 bit encryption high 2128 possible combinations Changing the SSL strength setting results in disconnecting all active web access users requiring them to re login SCP Enables or disables Secure Copy Protocol access to Enabled the system If enabled SCP can be used for file Disabled transfer Serial Port Enables or disables RS 232 serial port access to the Enabled system Disabled Serial Port Auto If Enabled causes Auto Logoff of the user session on Enabled Log Off the serial port when the serial port is disconnected Disabled SFTP Enables or disables Secure File Transfer Protocol Enabled access to the system If enabled SFTP can be used Disabled for file transfer SSH Enables or disables Secure Shell TCP UDP port 22 Enabled access to the system If enabled the user can access Disabled the system through an SSH connection Telnet Enables or disables Telnet TCP port 23 access to Enabled the system If enabled the user can access the Disabled system through a telnet connection Note Telnet is an unsecure protocol Use of this protocol can have an impact on the security of the system Authentication Enables or disables SNMP Authentication Traps If Enabled Traps enabled SNMP Authentication traps will be sent to the Disabled configured trap host CLI Security Enables or disables the following CLI security prompt Enabled Prompt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
79. see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision in Maintenance view Procedure Step 1 Click on the maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Expand the Administration entity Step2 Determine the next step Desired Operation Then Create a new configuration file Continue with the next step Update an existing configuration file Go to Step 6 List check status of the configuration files Go to Step 9 Reboot the system and execute a configuration file Go to Step 11 Import a configuration file Go to Step 13 Export a configuration file Go to Step 16 Edit the description of a configuration file Go to Step 19 Delete a configuration file Go to Step 22 Done working with configuration files Go to Step 25 Step3 Right click on Configuration Files and select Create The following screen displays Figure 152 Configuration Files Create sa a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v E System E NE 1 E Synchronization Communications E Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files a x v amp Create Configuration File Configuration File Identification File Name Cancel OK Transfer Log E Software Licensing Copy from Remote Installation and Operatio
80. see the following figure Figure 175 Edit Source Address Config ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration Blx BY 6 Edit Source Address Config File Application E System NE 1 THE Synchronization Communicatis Source Address Configuration DCN ett Add Static Route Address Type Outgoing Interface IP 3G pcn Add Static ARP Entry Source Address Interface Name eth0 E Manager Delete Static Route Snmp v1 Interface Name zl ethd y SNMP Delete Static ARP Entry E Administra CEA Tt Cancel Apply OK 298 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 2 Enter select the following data to configure Source Address Address Type Select System IP Address or Outgoing Interface IP Source Address Interface Name If Address Type is System IP Address select the desired Source Address Interface Name from the drop down list If Address Type is Outgoing Interface IP Source Address Inter face Name is fixed as eth0 Management LAN SNMP v1 Interface Name Select the desired interface name from the drop down list Click on OK End of Procedure Add Delete Static Route Static Routes may be displayed created or deleted To edit an existing static route delete it and add a new static route The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN
81. 0 0c cee es 436 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies o oooooo 436 Factory Default Parameters and Maximum Bandwidth 437 System Configuration Options and RuleS ee es 445 Network Port Configuration Options and RuleS 469 Access Port Configuration Options and RulesS 473 Edit Access Port Configuration 0 0 ee es 473 Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Service Provisioning 473 Performance Monitoring SettingS 0 0 cc ee ees 478 Ethernet Network Port Monitored TypeS 0 000 enue unease 478 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types 0 000 eee ee eee 483 Precision Time Protocol Flow Monitored TYpeS 488 Slave Only Ordinary Clock Monitored Types 0000 ee uae 490 Telecom Slave Clock Analysis Monitored Types o 492 PTP Network Probe Monitored Types 000 eee eee eee 493 PTP Configuration Options and Rules ooo eee ee es 495 Telecom Slave Provisioning Order o oooooooo o 495 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order o oo ooooo o 495 Master Clock Provisioning Order ooo o coco oo 496 Create Edit a Telecom Slaves roms a RR 497 Create Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock S00C 501 Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP lt 504 Create Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave OCS Port 505 Create Edit a
82. 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 24 7 00 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 25 6 45 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 26 6 30 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 27 6 15 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 L 28 6 00 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 y 29 5 45 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 30 5 30 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 L 31 5 15 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 32 5 00 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 33 4 45 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 34 430 00 507 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 892 57088 0 0 35 4 15 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 36 4 00 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 37 3 45 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 M4 H NETWORK_PORT 1 1 1 1 2012 02 08 3 al AL Ready 330 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Initializing PM Registers For Network Port and Access Port entities PM data is maintained in individual monitored parameter bins for each interval The system maintains bins for the following time periods e Current 15 minute or 5 Minute bin Current 24 hour 1 day bin Current intervals are indicated as current and older periods are assigned incremental numbers The index allows a user to identify the current previous Bin Index 1 or one of the historical bins Bin Index 2 to 32 with 32 being the oldest bin
83. 1 DCN etho Alias SP100 35 98 3G Modem State Ej Synchronization E NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT NTESP100 Operational Normal SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Physical Inventory ul BITS 1 Name FSP150SP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Physical Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c0 Software Revision 6 1 1 049 CLK 1 1 1 2 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN USI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen PPS 1 1 1 2 CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Environmental E Communications Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 mv DCN etho 3G DCN Settings E Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled SNMP E Administration Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Notification Interface cane Description Date Time Logged in as root Installation and Operations Manual 29 ADVA g Va E a m Wa u Syncjack Suite Optical Networking Command Line Interface ing and monitoring the SP 100 equivalent CLI commands may be used The CLI command structure provides a text based system for local configuration and management of SP 100 functions CLI access may be attained via RS 232 Serial Console Port direct connection or telnet ssh session For more informa tion regarding the CLI command structure refer to the FSP 150SP 100 Com Although this document focuses on using the eVision web browse
84. 1 1 1 f Select OK A TS entity appears under the Ethernet Ports in the selection tree pane Step5 Select the TS entity to view configuration details Create a Slave Only Ordinary Clock Step6 Enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity TS 1 1 and select Create SOOC A Create Slave Only Ordinary Clock window displays Figure 104 Create Slave Only Ordinary Clock La ia ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application A x 5 System Create Slave Only Ordinary Clock E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E 1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT SEOID 22 E1000 A 1 Al ii Associated Telecom Slave TS 1 1 a TSsy Al Edit e Alarm i Delete State w r Create 500C Administrative Management Secondary n a Operational n a Configuration Slave IP Address ol ol ol 0 Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled Slave Subnet Mask of oM of o Unicast Timeout 1 1 600 sec Interface Name Unicast Restart Timer D 60 30 1800 sec Priority Mode None Priority a o D Master Clock Configuration Master Delay Mechanism End To End y Master Protocol 3 IPv4 Master Priority 0 0 255 Master Clock IP Address o o ol 0 Master Clock Message Rates Duration Master Announce Message Rate 1 Packet per 16 Seconds Master Announce Receipt Timeout 2 2 255 intervals Master Delay Response Message Rate 32 Packets per Second x Master
85. 1 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes Synejack Schedules SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 Result Analysis MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection 4 m race D o Result 20000000 1000000 MTIE ns 1 Tests Result 0 1 N A N A N A 0 2 N A N A N A 0 5 N A N A N A 1 N A N A NA 2 N A N A N A 5 8 ok oK 10 10 ok oK Z 20 jo ok ok 50 19 ok OK 100 an ok OK 200 21 oK oK 500 25 ok OK 4 1000 N A N A N A 2000 N A NA N A 5000 N A N A N A E ait So 10000 N A N A N A 20000 N A N A N A 50000 N A N A N A ofr e spe Tororo 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec Add To Result Analysis Identification Entity ID PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 3 Alias PTPCIkProbel IP ersi Running Failed Count 0 Event Message Failure No Actual Test Start Time 2014 01 27 18 58 56 Mask Failure No Actual Test Duration s 599 Mask Crossed Time si Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Failure No Reference Expected QL QL NONE Mask Margin Crossed Time 0 PTP Flow Point Measurement Direction Master IP Address 10 206 206 1 Slave IP Address 10 206 206 6 MTIE Mask GB23 Pdh Mask Margin 20 Reference Failure No Tim
86. 1 1 1 Opening CLOCK_PROBE 1 1_2014 02 05 csv pg N A NA NA CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 1009000 4 N A N A NA Clock Analysis You have chosen to open a ie hits PTP Clock Probes 100000 a a a El CLOCK_PROBE 1 1_2014 02 05 csv 20 oK oK PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 hichi 20 OK OK History Estimations z en which is Microsoft Excel 97 2003 Worksheet 20 OK OK TS 1 1 from http 10 10 34 16 20 oK OK y 32 oK OK PTP Network Analysis 1000 What should Firefox do with this file 44 oK OK m PTP Network Probes NE A a 9 Open with Microsoft Excel default ERRATA IN Synejack Schedules de WA NK WA SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Save File N A N A N A Result Analysis me N A N A N A aca 3 a AS WA N A N A MTIE comparison E Do this automatically for files like this from now on N A N A N A Raw Data Collection NA N A NA oor F N A N A NA OK Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name ClkProbe1 State Completed Running Failed Count 0O Actual Test Start Time 2014 02 04 23 49 31 Actual Test Duration s 300 Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Source is dl Source Type Frequency MTIE Mask 6823 Pdh Mask Margin Hio Scheduler SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Source Failure No 354 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 218 Clock Probe Test Results in Excel
87. 5 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the figure below The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP views are identical Figure 164 Bulk Log Transfer SCP View Loma 4 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance A z E BN 4 File Application v E System NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Software Licensing El Transfer Alarm Log Method File Transfer Method SCP File Transfer Server IP E olf olf olf ol User ID User Password Remote File Cancel OK 270 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 6 Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP SFTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path aes and file name of the software file to transfer ote The file transfer will begin and show a screen similar to the following displays Figure 165 File Transfer Progress Screen ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP150CC GE201SE Maintenance File y Application E SB lt G
88. 5 D a System Edit Time Clock NE 1 NTESP100 Identification Synchronization gt NE 1 Entity ID TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 NTESP100 dls SYNC 1 1 1 1 State TIME CLOCK 1 1 ga BITS 1 istrative S Secondary ACT Add Time Clock Reference z BITS IN tional Normal BITS OUT Edit Time Clock Reference CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Delete Time Clock Reference jration CLK 1 1 1 2 RTH F Teed PPS 1 1 1 1 IN biti MES pe Selection Mode Priority Mode TOD 1 1 1 1 Time holdover performance ns oe GPS 1 1 1 1 Sync Ref Candidate 3 Disabled gt 4 Communications Expected QL A OL NONE SNMP Administration lt Cancel gt Apply gt OK Installation and Operations Manual 223 a ADVA Va E am Wea u Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP Optical Networking Step 40 Enter the following Time Clock options a Enter the desired Alias ey Set the Administrative state to IS Enter the desired Wait to Restore Time a o Select the desired Selection Mode Time Holdover Performance Sync Reference Candidate and Expected QL options e Select OK Step 41 Select the Time Clock entity and select the Configuration tab to verify configuration entry Time Clock Step 42 Continue with next step to add a Time Clock reference Otherwise go to Step 1 Add Time Clock Reference Perform the following steps for adding time clock reference s to the Time Clock gt A second priority re
89. 7 Deleting a user Go to Step 9 Remove a login lock out Go to Step 11 amp Entering a new user can only be done by a user with superuser privilege Note Step 3 Right click on Local in the selection tree pane and select Add User and the following screen displays Figure 77 Add User S ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File y Application B XD gt 5 E System Add User E NE 1 E Synchronization Identity Communications gt SNMP User Name E Privilege Retrieve Y de Admini 3 Password J Login Timeout 15 mins E Administration Retype Password CLI Paging Enabled x Users Comment E Loc Cancel OK root 176 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 4 Enter the required data to establish a new user Details on the func tion and rules for each data entry is located at Administration on p 464 After editing the user information click on OK The display will update to show the edited information End of Procedure 5 Editing user data other than the user s own password can only be done by a user with superuser privilege Note Step5 Right click on the user name to be edited in the selection tree pane and select Edit User and the following screen displays Figure 78 Edit User ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration
90. A degradation detected Validate PTP Clock Probe con figuration check connectivity Minor N A N A to the Clock under test SJTEST No Messages PTP Clock probe does not receive PTP event messages from the Clock under test BupyomieN e911dO 7m awe Pa WAU enue y suoneledo pue uonejesu Ezr Alarm Masking Refer to the following tables for alarm masking where certain alarms or conditions may mask the raising of an underlying condition and until the masking alarms are cleared the underlying alarms may not be seen Table 35 Alarm Masking Rules Condition Type Alarm Rule SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name NTESP100 Card ctneqpt Communication Failure ctneqpt and not eqptremoved or mismatch eqptflt Equipment Fault eqptflt and not eqptremoved or mismatch mismatch Equipment Does Not Match mismatch and not eqptremoved Provisioning eqptremoved Equipment Provisioned But eqptremoved no masking Removed NTESP100 Shelf overtemp Over Temperature overtemp and not eqptremoved or mismatch overvoltage Over Voltage overvoltage and not eqptremoved or mismatch undertemp Under Temperature undertemp and not eqptremoved or mismatch undervoltage Under Voltage undervoltage and not eqptremoved or mismatch Synchronization Restore allsyncref All Input Sync Referenced allsyncref no masking Failed fstsync Sys Clock Mo
91. A Progress is in progress SWDL Validation In Software Download validation No action required Not Alarmed N A N A Progress is in progress SNMP Dying Gasp Database or Network issue Check database settings for SNMP Host Unreachable Dying Gasp If correct test network Minor N A N A access Ping the Host address SNMP Dying Gasp SNMP Dying Gasp is enabled Check database settings for SNMP Resource Busy on multiple trap hosts and there Dying Gasp Delete extra port is reachability to these trap assignments hosts via the same interface On a 1 1 Network Interface there can only be a single SNMP trap host with SNMP Dying Gasp Enabled Enabling a second trap host for SNMP dying gasp raises the alarm or Minor N A N A Bunea ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold s Nnquyy wey BuIy10MI98N e911dO 7m ae E A WAU enue y suoneledo pue uonejesu cov Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued Failure or replace unit dd Description NSA Default SA Default LED Gondi on Typs Probable Cause rouble Glesting Procedure Notification Notification Indication DB Downgrade Database Downgrade No Action Required implementation of a database Not file below the current release Reported NA WA level File Transfer In File transfer is in progress No action required Not N A N A Progress Reported Operation In Operation is in prog
92. A text editing window opens Enter the desired description up to 127 ASCII characters and click on OK Step 21 Goto Step 2 Step 22 Select Configuration Files then right click on the menu icon beside the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane The following screen displays Figure 159 Configuration Files Remove Lal a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A 5 D U System Configuration Files E NE 1 Synchronization Status Communications Alarm Attributes Status Completed Action Save E Administration Information Upgrade Files Database File Name Description Default Database Test Default Settings Save Configuration Files Edit Description Last Reset Cause Copy to Remote Transfer Log Restart with File El Software Licensing Step 23 Select Remove The selected configuration file is deleted Step 24 Goto Step 2 Step 25 If configuration changes were implemented using this procedure ver ify the changes then save the configuration using the procedure Cre ate a Database Backup on p 244 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 265 a ADVA 7J E team WN u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking Default Settings Value File Installing a Default Settings Value File changes the settings applied when a new entity or object is created The Factory Def
93. ANSI compatible terminal emulation program e g Tera Term Pro Web 3 1 3 loaded Unpack and Inspect the FSP 150SP Equipment Depending on the order a FSP 150SP shipment may consist of a number of equipment packs hs amp Note This product contains electro static sensitive devices Appropriate anti static handling precautions should be followed i e IEC 61340 5 1 1998 Further details on equipment packs and part numbers are provided in the FSP 1508P 100 Technical Descriptions document Verify the contents of the shipment and the condition of the equipment as soon as it arrives Use the following procedure for unpacking and inspecting the equipment Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Remove the FSP 150SP equipment from its shipping cartons Compare the equipment in each carton with the equipment lists in this section If there are discrepancies notify ADVA Optical Networking immediately with details of the discrepancies see Obtaining Techni cal Assistance on p 26 Check all components If shipping damage is discovered notify ADVA Optical Networking immediately see Obtaining Technical Assis tance on p 26 Please have the following information available Part number of the equipment pack e Serial and version number of the damaged unit e Description of the damage How the damage may prevent successful installation If any FSP 150SP equipment is to be returned to ADVA O
94. Add Static Route and the following screen displays see the following figure Figure 179 Add Static ARP Entry a a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x DA System a Add Static ARP Entry NE 1 Synchronization Add Static ARP Entry E Communic E E gt T p DCN e ala 1P Address 0 0 ok Oj ee Add Static ARP Entry MAC Address O o i ok OF o ol Interface Name 181 y SNMP Delete Static ARP Entry E al Delete Static Route E Administra Edit Source Address Config Cancel Apply OK Step 3 Enter select the following data to create a Static ARP Entry IP Address valid IPV4 address MAC Address Interface Name Select desired Interface Name from the drop down list Click on OK 302 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled only ethO is allowed for Interface Name To enable Management Traffic Bridging refer to ae Table 30 System Configuration Settings on p 464 ole Step 4 Goto Step 1 Step5 Left click on Communications and select the Static ARP Entry tab see the following figure Figure 180 Display Static ARP Entries ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B cor System E NE 1 Synchronization Static Routes Source Address Config Arp Entry Table 3 Com
95. Analysis 0 5 NA N A N A 4 16 oK oK PTP Clock Probes 00000 2 20 oK OK PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 s 20 OK OK History Estimations 2 10 20 ok oK Eiei a 20 20 ok oK ek wy 50 32 OK OK PTP Network Analysis E mm 100 44 ok oK PTP Network Probes 200 ES ok j E 500 N A N A A Syncjack Schedules ea 2000 gt NA ue WA SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 2000 N A N A N A Result Analysis 0 pp 5000 N A na wa 10000 N A NA N A MUTE comparso 20000 NWA WA MA Raw Data Collection 5000 na NA MA or bd bl mp po 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec y Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name ClkProbe1 State Completed Running Failed Count 0 Actual Test Start Time 2014 02 04 23 49 31 Actual Test Duration s 300 Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference Expected QL OL NONE Source 3 TS 1 1 Source Type Frequency MTIE Mask 6823 Pdh Mask Margin eso Scheduler SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Source Failure No Reference Failure No 36 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Figure 10 Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph 4 BO File Application E Al Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Estimations TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes Synejack Schedules SYNCIACK SC
96. Box Only selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected Create only Unselected Inner VLAN1 Defines the Ethertype for the Inner VLAN1 tag Ethertype 0 Create only Inner VLAN1 Defines the VLAN tag and priority that is associated with 1 to 4095 Tag this PTP Flow Point Inner VLAN1 Tag Create only 0to7 Inner VLAN2 Defines whether the Inner VLAN2 tag entry is allowed Selected Check Box Only selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected Create only Unselected Outer VLAN Defines the Ethertype for the Inner VLAN2 tag Ethertype 0 Create only Outer VLAN Tag Defines the VLAN tag and priority that is associated with 1 to 4095 Create only this PTP Flow Point Inner VLAN2 Tag Oto7 Create Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave OCS Port Once a PTPFP has been created an Ordinary Clock Slave OCS Port may be created by expanding the Telecom Slave entity in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the SOOC entity and selecting Create OCS Port To edit a OCS Port enter a right click on the OCS Port entity OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 and select Edit To delete an OCS Port enter a right click on the OCS Port entity and select Delete Table 51 Create Edit OCS Port Parameter Settings Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long up
97. Create only ASCII characters long blank Use Selected Select the Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock Identity Selected Telecom Slave Check Box if its clock identity is to be used Clock Identity Chack Box Unselected Create only Clock Identity Entry of a Clock Identity of the Telecom Slave is Create only permitted if the Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock varies Identity Check Box is not selected Entry is 16 HEX characters Administrative Enables or disables the Boundary Clock See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management Timing Source Selects the provisioned Telecom Slave timing source None drop down list PTP Domain This PTP domain number is used in the domain Number Number Create field of the PTP header in the PTP packet This PTP 0 127 only domain number is used when PTP packet is generated by the SOOC 506 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Create Edit a Master Clock A Master Clock may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP from the Applications menu expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the NE 1 entity and selecting Create Master Clock To edit a Master Clock enter a right click on the Master Clock entity e g MASTER CLOCK 1 1 and select Edit A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a
98. DCN eth0 Entity ID MANAGEMENT TUNNEL 1 3G DCN El Management Tunnels Delete MANAGEMENT TUNNEL 1 NE 1 Mgmt Tyrrol 4 f2c1000 A 11 i A Cancel OK SNMP Edit Configuration E Administration End of Procedure Step9 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Create a management tunnel Continue with the next step Display a management tunnel Go to Step 12 Edit a management tunnel Go to Step 13 Delete a management tunnel Go to Step 8 Provisioning complete End of Procedure Step 10 Right click on NE 1 in the selection tree pane under Management Tunnels select Create Tunnel and the following screen displays Installation and Operations Manual 295 ADVA 7J E am Wea u Provision Communications Optical Networking Figure 172 Create Management Tunnel Bridging Enabled File Application v alx gt V E System Create Tunnel E NE 1 E Synchronization Identification E Communications DCN eth0 Management Tunnel Index 1 Management Tunnel Name eee Associated Port ACC 1 El Management Tunnels SSOCALOUPD ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 y MEE a Create Tunnel SNMP Interface E Administration Encapsulation Type Ethernet x MTU 1500 bytes Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode VLAN Based y S Tag VLAN Disabled VLAN Id 4095 1 4095 S Tag VLAN Id 4095 1 4095 Management Traffic Bridging Enabled Bandwi
99. Dial Up Configuration setting blank Confirm New PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank 3G Modem PIN Authentication Input PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank 3G Modem Unlock with PUK Input PUK 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank New PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank Confirm New PIN 3G Modem Dial Up Configuration setting blank Synchronization NE 1 NTESP100 SYNC 1 1 1 1 Edit Sync Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters Descriptions on p 430 ASCII characters long blank Administrative Defines the SYNC administrative state IS is In IS State Service and is the default value See Entity State Management Installation and Operations Manual 451 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E aap we Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Network Clock Type Defines the network clock type If a 2048kHz or El is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 1 If a T1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 2 AIS or LOF will be detected at the BITS interface endpoints if mismatches of the SP 100 s Netwo
100. E System E NE 1 E Cl E Create Clock Probe Identification Clock Probe Index 2 CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 E Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes History Estimations TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes Syncjack Schedules cy m Configurations Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference Expected QL QL NONE ppsiit2_ Frequency m G823 Pdh y alo il Source A Source Type MTIE Mask Mask Margin Cancel OK Step 4 Enter the following to configure the Clock Probe Clock Probe Index EID for the probe Enter a number from 1 to 9 Name a text identifier up to 15 characters no spaces or special 348 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 5 Step 6 characters for the probe Required entry Reference the signal reference for this Clock Probe The available references are populated in a drop down list Reference Expected QL clock quality level of the selected reference The available QLs are provided in a drop down list Source select the desired source clock under test from the drop down list Source Type select either Frequency or Phase from the drop down list MTIE Mask select the desired MTIE Mask from the drop down list Mask Margin enter the desired Mask Margin as a percentage from 0 to 99
101. Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Le a Transfer Alarm Log E Software Li Transfer Audit Log Transfer Security Log 4 x 9 amp Transfer Alarm Log Method Cancel OK Step 3 Determine the next step Desired File Transfer Method Then Web HTTP Continue with the next step FTP SFTP or SCP Go to Step 7 Installation and Operations Manual 269 Database and Configuration Files a ADVA VO E nav WN Y Optical Networking Step 4 Note Select Web then click on OK You are prompted to open or save the file Select the save option to save the file The options presented for file saving are dependant on the browser being used and the options the user has selected for browser operation For example MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name and where the file should be saved Firefox will save the file with the default file name to the computer desktop A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop up blocking enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully downloaded to the system With this configuration the system logs may indicate successful file download when the browser has not properly saved the file The file may be successfully downloaded and saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or disabling pop up blocking or using the browser s pop up override capability to allow the file save to complete End of Procedure Step
102. ID Selected MEP destination type does not allow to specify MAC address Should be between xxx MIN and yyy MAX inclusive Should be between xxx MIN and yyy MAX bytes inclusive Should not be higher than xxx MAX Source IP already in use by a Reflector Source IP already used by a Probe Source MEP does not exist Source MEP should be an Up MEP Specified IP address is already used by a Probe Specified IP address is already used by another Reflector Specified MAC address is invalid Specified name is already in use xxx and yyy Specified Source MEP is already used by xxx Specified tag is invalid Start Time in the past is not allowed SyncE Mode cannot be disabled because this port is used in the reference selector list SysLog is disabled Target Parameter xxx used by Target Address yyy Too few digits To few special characters Too many consecutively repeated chars Total provisioned CIR xxx bps exceeds port speed yyy bps Total provisioned EIR xxx bps exceeds yyy bps Traffic Management cannot be disabled Tunnel already exists on xxx Tunnel index must be from 1 to 255 Unknown interval Unknown MEP destination type Unknown Network Clock Type Unknown priority map mode xxx Unknown protocol type Unknown unsupported Unsupported for given Line Type Untagged support with xxx Untagged support with xxx is disallowed Username too long Username too short USM Security Name xxx used by Target Pa
103. N A amp 20 N A NA NA Synejack Schedules w 50 N A N A N A Result Analysis 5 pen 100 ji N A N A N A Raw Data Collection 200 J NA N A N A 500 N A N A N A 100 1000 N A N A N A 2000 NA na N A 5000 N A N A N A 10 10000 NA nA N A 20000 N A N A N A 50000 NA N A N A 1af Y Yo rpr Toor mp 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec o E Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name ClkProbel State Not Scheduled Mask Failure No Running Failed Count 0 Mask Crossed Time hia Actual Test Start Time N A Mask Margin Failure No Actual Test Duration s O Mask Margin Crossed Time Mal Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Measurement Rate measurements s 1 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Last TIE Result ns N A Source TS 1 1 Time Of Last TIE Result un Source Type Frequency Raw Data Collection Disabled MTIE Mask G823 Pdh Measurement Type Frequency Mask Margin F a Scheduler None Source Failure Yes Reference Failure No Step 7 Enter a right click on SyncJack Schedules in the selection tree and select Create Schedule A Create Schedule pane appears Figure 213 Create SyncJack Schedule File y Application a xos 86 El System oy Create Schedule E NE 1 E Clock Accuracy Identification E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Schedule Index 1 1 255 Activity ID History Results Schedule Parameters Clock Analysis El PTP Clock Probes Schedule Type One Shot x Duration 2 Forev
104. N A El 16 oK oK PTP Clock Probes 100000 2 20 OK OK PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 5 20 OK OK History Estimations es Hy ok at eE E 20 A Ke Oc TS 1 u 50 32 OK OK PTP Network Analysis E 1000 100 44 OK OK PTP Network Probes aa ane i A T 500 N A N A N A Synejack Schedules ia 1000 N A N A N A SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 2000 N A NA N A Result Analysis m 500 NA NA NA 10000 WA NA NA MME comparison 20000 N A N A N A Raw Data Collection 50000 _ MA NA MA iy baal Ba m 100000 N A NA N A Tau sec Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name ClkProbe1 State Completed Running Failed Count 0 Actual Test Start Time 2014 02 04 23 49 31 Actual Test Duration s 300 Reference z GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Installation and Operations Manual 353 a ADVA 7J E a m WM u SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Step 15 Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by selecting the Export button see the next two figures Figure 217 Exporting Clock Probe Test Results to Excel VA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application ax o amp e dad Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Accuracy Export to excel Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results 0000000 t J peste Result E t 5 Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT
105. NE 1 Common Units on p 169 Installation and Operations Manual 153 a ADVA 7J E am WM u Upgrade Software Version Optical Networking e Provision Secure Access on p 171 Provision SNMP Access on p 181 Provision Access Port on p 181 Provision Network Port on p 184 e Provision Synchronization on p 186 Enable Software Licensing for SyncJack PTP Feature s on p 206 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP on p 208 e Provision SyncJack see SyncJack Testing on p 344 Clear all alarms see Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing on p 381 Create a Database Backup on p 244 Test the FSP 150SP on p 271 o Network Access Port Loopbacks Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Upgrade Software Version Upgrading or changing the system software is a multi step process First the new software is transferred from an external repository to a tempo rary location on the NE The NE supports transfer via HTTP Web HTTPS Web FTP SFTP and SCP protocols Second the new system software is installed that is transferred to the standby side of the NE Third the new software is activated that is switched from standby to active The SP 100 supports immediate or scheduled activation and can use a vali dation timer which allows the NE to revert to the previous software version if problems are encountered during the
106. Operations Manual 361 a ADVA VO E amw wa SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 226 PTP Clock Probe Status Tab File Application A XA Bo k a Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results 10000000 4 Tests Result CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 g P 1 1 0 1 N A N A N A CLOCK ROBE RESULT 1 1 2 a I a2 NA N A EEA Clock Analysis 0 5 N A N A N A PTP Clock Probes 1 N A N A N A J NAR 2 N A N A N A A caer 5 N A N A N A History Estimations my N 10 N A N A N A TS 1 1 20 N A N A N A PTP Network Analysis _ O e E so Wa Wa Wn A N A A PTP Network Probes Z w En NA NA N A Synejack Schedules 500 N A N A N A SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 20 5008 na na na Result Analysis 5000 TH ne TA MTIE comparison 10 10000 N A N A N A Raw Data Collection 20000 N A N A N A 50000 N A N A N A dof w x TOET mEpo 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec Identification Entity ID PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name PTPCIkProbel State Not Scheduled Event Message Failure Running Failed Count 0 Mask Failure Actual Test Start Time N A Mask Crossed Time Actual Test Duration s 0 Mask Margin Failure i Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Crossed Time Reference Expected QL QL NONE Last TIE Result ns 2 8 PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Time Of Last TIE Result 2014 01 27 18 54 00 Mea
107. Optical Networking Enable Raw Data Collection for Clock Probe Clock Accuracy PTP Clock Probe Clock Analysis results 346 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Provision Raw Data Collection Server Perform the following procedure if using a raw data collection server is to be used for receiving Clock Accuracy and or Clock Analysis results for further cal culations The procedure for provisioning the raw data collection server assumes that the System configuration is properly configured to enable the desired file transfer protocol to be used See Configure System Identity and Configuration on p 162 Procedure Step 1 Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu then expand the System folder in the selection tree Step 2 Enter a right click on Raw Data Collection in the selection tree and select Edit Raw Data Server A Raw Data Collection pane appears Figure 210 Edit Raw Data Server J vy File Application v a x B amp B 9 E System NE 1 Raw Dt O Method File Transfer Method FTP Raw Data Server Raw Data Collection Server IP ol ol ol ol User ID User Password Cancel OK Step 3 Enter the following to configure the Clock Probe File Transfer Method select the desired File Transfer Method Server IP enter the server IP address User ID enter the server User ID Us
108. PIN Can be Go to Step 10 applied if PIN PUK status OK Change PIN Change existing PIN Can be applied if Go to Step 13 PIN PUK status OK 304 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Desired Function Description Then PIN authentication Enter the PIN Can be applied if PIN PUK Go to Step 16 status Input PIN Unlock with PUK If the PIN input fails for three times during PIN Go to Step 19 Authentication the 3G Modem SIM will be locked therefore the SIM needs to be unlocked by entering the PUK and new PIN Can be applied if PIN PUK status Input PUK Observe 3G Network Observe the 3G modem network information Go to Step 21 information and IP address Verify 3G Network Verify the 3G network connection by logging Go to Step 23 Connection onto the SP 100 via the IP address acquired from the 3G service provider Provisioning Complete All desired provisioning options are completed End of Procedure and current 3G status has been verified Step 3 Right click on the 3G Modem entity and select Edit Configuration The following screen displays Figure 182 Edit 3G Modem Configuration File Application v A x B 2 5 E System m Edit 3G Modem NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 Aoier Entity ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 DCN eth0 Als i 3G Mode Edit Configuration State Ej Synchronizatio EN Enable PIN
109. PTP Delay_Req Messages Transmit NearEnd 0 0 Transmitted DELAYRSPSRX PTP Delay_Resp Messages Receive Near End 0 0 Received DELAYRSPSTX PTP Delay_Resp Messages Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted FOLLOWUPSRX PTP Follow_Up Messages Receive Near End 0 0 Received FOLLOWUPSTX PTP Follow_Up Messages Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted MGMTFRAMESRX PTP Management Frames Receive NearEnd 0 0 Received MGMTFRAMESTX PTP Management Frames Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted PDELAYREQSRX PTP Pdelay_Req Messages Receive Near End 0 0 Received PDELAYREQSTX PTP Pdelay_Req Messages Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted PDELAYRSPSRX PTP Pdelay_Resp Receive Near End 0 0 Messages Received PDELAYRSPSTX PTP Pdelay_Resp Transmit Near End 0 0 Messages Transmitted PDELAYRSPFOLUPSRX PTP Receive NearEnd 0 0 Pdelay_Resp_Follow_Up Messages Received PDELAYRSPFOLUPSTX PTP Transmit Near End 0 0 Pdelay_Resp_Follow_Up Messages Transmitted PTPUNKNOWNSRX Unknown PTP Messages Receive NearEnd 0 0 Received PTPUNKNOWNSTX Unknown PTP Messages Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted 488 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 44 PTP Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued ive mats 5 15 1 Monitored Type Definition Direction Location Min Day SIGNALINGRX PTP Signaling Messages Receive
110. Performance Monitoring SP 100 Probing Features General Guideline for Reference Accuracy Used by the Probes In order to measure meaningful results the accuracy of the reference used by the probes should be accurate by at least one order of magnitude compared to the signal under test e when using GPS as a reference the time error gener ated by the GPS GNSS receiver PRTC can be up to 100 nsec according to G 8272 therefore the TE TIE MTIE can be effected by the GPS reference time error and wander Clock Accuracy Up to 2 Clock Probes Calculate MTIE between physical source and reference signals o Programmable Source and reference signals Only one Clock Probe can be created if TimeClock is configured with 5 TimeReference as GPS Note Clock Analysis Up to 4 PTP Clock Probes all PTP Clock Probes must use the same refer ence Calculate packet MTIE between Physical reference signal and packet flow o Probe Master to Slave or Slave to master traffic o Support parallel and tapping modes T SC score simple score of internal slave clock PTP Network Analysis 1 PTP Network Probe o Delay and delay variation performance statistics o Network usability statistics o Packet loss statistics MTIE Comparison Compare up to four MTIE results Raw Data Collection Set up a Raw Data Collection Server Installation and Operations Manual 345 a ADVA A VO a MED WAI n SyncJack Testing
111. Procedure Step 1 Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Moni toring from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Step 2 Expand the Network Element entity form the selection tree then expand the NTESP100 entity Step 3 Enter a right click on the desired Network Port and Access Port in the selection tree To initialize Network Port or Access Port counters select Init Registers An Initialize Registers pane appears see Figure 200 on p 331 Step 4 Select the desired Interval and Bin Index Select OK The designated PM count registers are cleared End of Procedure Figure 200 Initialize PM Registers Pane L ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring File Application Y A x D D System Init Registers f NE 1 NTESP100 Identification ae Init Registers E1000 A D NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Edit Thresholds Register and Interval Selection Entity NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 w Bin Index current x Interval 11 5 Minutes Cancel y Apply OK Installation and Operations Manual 331 ADVA P v VA Wel u Network Access Port Performance Monitoring il Networking Editing PM Thresholds Each Performance Parameter PP has a threshold for each bin period which is configurable for each entity instance The PP count is compared to the config ured threshold and if met or exceeded a Threshold Crossing Alert TCA is gen era
112. Provisioning Figure 139 New System Defaults View File Application v EA B 3 6 E System New System Defaults File NE 1 Replace any existing system default database with a new system default database based on factory default settings and reboot Synchronization Cancel OK BE Communications Alarm Attributes Administration me Upgrade Database Default Dat Default Set BEE Configurati opyta Remote Last Reset Copy from Remote Transfer LM E Software Licensing Resetting the database to factory defaults will drop all traffic and erase all communications and user settings including the loss of the A eVision connection to the NE When using the New option selection any user uploaded Default Settings will be erased This operation CAUTION should not be performed lightly It may be advisable to backup the current database so that it can be restored later Step 16 Click OK The System resets the Default Database and Active Database to Fac tory Defaults End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 243 ADVA 7J E am Wa u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking Create a Database Backup Backing up the system database is a two step process First the database has to be transferred to a temporary location on the NE e Second the database file is transferred to a remote repository The NE sup ports transfer via HTTPS Web FTP SFTP and SCP protoco
113. RPDY rev Medium ns RPDY rev High ns FPP Cluster Range Assured ns FPP Cluster Range Satisfied ns Scheduler Status lt NET RRP LO PT 1 1 17171 IPv4 192 168 106 1 192 168 106 5 E a Er S a l QL NONE 200 500 2000 200 200 2000 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 25000 150000 Current Forward Score 0 Current Reverse Score 0 Results State Running Reference Failure No No Event Messages Failure No No Time Stamp Failure No Actual Test Start Time Actual Test Duration s 126 2013 08 28 16 52 41 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack Step 10 Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe when the test is Step 11 completed During or after the test is completed the results are available by selecting the desired PTP Network Probe and selecting the Statistics tab A Summary pane appears Installation and Operations Manual 375 ADVA P Va m az WA YA SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 242 View SyncJack PTP Network Probe Statistics File y Application y a x i E System E NE 1 E Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 Configuration Statistics Entity ID PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Summary 15 Minute 1 Day _ Thresholds Clear Refresh Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds Path Delay Statistics Average Forward RP
114. Raw Data Collection If Raw Data Collection Server has been provi sioned enable or disable raw data to be sent to a remote raw data collection server Measurement Type select the measurement type Frequency or Phase Select OK Expand Clock Probes in the Selection Tree The newly created Clock Probe entity is displayed Select the Clock Probe entity and Status tab to verify entry and con nection status see Figure 212 on p 350 If any Failures are indi cated troubleshoot and clear the failure as necessary A Clock Probe can be edited after creation by right clicking on the entity name and selecting Edit Clock Probe All fields except the Clock Probe Index can be edited Once a probe is scheduled it cannot be modified or deleted Installation and Operations Manual 349 a ADVA A vJ a naw ws 8 SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 212 Clock Probe Status Tab File Application 4 x A C E Pe Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Tests Result History Results 10000000 Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat Clock Analysis A 0 1 NA MA wA O PTP Clock Probes 1000000 0 2 N A N A NA History Estimations as as WA A de N A N A N A TS 1 1 som 2 NA N A N A PTP Network Analysis s N A N A N A PTP Network Probes T m 10 N A N A
115. Score 4 Yellow PTP event messages may not meet the requirements for successful clock recovery Score 3 Red PTP event messages cannot be used for successful clock recovery Score 0 Gray Noscore has been calculated yet PTP Network Analysis Status GUI The GUI provides an overall status of the PTP Network Analysis function shown as Green Yellow or Red in the GUI The status of PTP Network Probe and Net work Usability Score for each direction is also provided see the following fig ure Figure 16 PTP Network Status PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS Opte NETWORK PROBE 1 1 O Forward Network Usability Score O Reverse Network Usability Score Product Applications Timing and Synchronization The SP 100 is equipped with an internal clocks with an accuracy of 4ppm and the performance in hold over mode meets the requirements identified in ITU T G 8262 Option 1 Synchronous Ethernet The SP 100 supports Synchronous Ethernet according to ITU T G 8261 for fre quency distribution over Ethernet networks and can use any Network or Access Port or an E1 or T1 BITS clock Ethernet interfaces can be configured in synchronous operation mode or non synchronous operation mode Synchronous operation mode can be Installation and Operations Manual 43 Product Applications a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking enabled or disabled on a per port basis Default is non synchronous operation mode In synchronous oper
116. Se GS eh ce ee See ee de 319 Network Access Port LoopbackS 00 0 cee ees 319 Performing Loopbacks Using eViSi0N o ooooooooo oo 320 Network Access Port Performance Monitoring lt lt o 321 OVETVIEW secar a A eee ee eS 321 PM FOQatures sea ca aa A a a a Sa ee a 322 Performance ParameterS ooooooooro noe 322 Performance Parameter Attributes o ooooooco o 323 Performance Parameter CounterS 0 0 aaa 323 Performance Parameter ThresholdinG o ooo ooo 324 Optical Performance Parameter Thresholdin9 324 Threshold Crossing Alert MessageS ooooooooo ee e 325 Configuring System Level PM o o ooooocmocononooo oo 325 Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values o ooooooo 326 Initializing PM Registers 00 5 100 aad etd a AR ARA 331 Editing PM Thresholds 20 60 ieee cake we ead ee Peewee ee eee ee 332 PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring oo ees 334 OVERVIEWS are amara ra ae A ee Pe ee E 334 Installation and Operations Manual 9 a ADVA VO E emp ws Y Optical Networking PM Features aca aa A a A a A 334 Performance ParameterS ocur rosita rara a a 335 Performance Parameter Attributes oooooooo mos 335 Performance Parameter Counters 0 cee ee es 336 Performance Parameter Thresholding 000 eee eee e nas 336 Threshold Crossing Alert MessageS
117. Select DHCP Enabled Click on OK Go to Step 2 End of Procedure Step 7 Step 8 Select DHCP Enabled Select DHCP Role DHCP Client Enable Disable DHCP Client ID Control Edit if desired DHCP Client ID only available if DHCP Client ID Control is Enabled Enable Disable RIPv2 setting Click on OK Go to Step 2 End of Procedure Step 9 Select DHCP Disabled Enter the desired IP Address if needed Enter the desired Netmask if needed Select the desired RIPv2 setting Click on OK 288 Installation and Operations Manual FSP 150SP 100 R6 1 1 80000026364 Issue A 2014 ADVA Optical Networking SE Confidential Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 10 Goto Step 2 End of Procedure Step 11 Select the desired RIPv2 setting Click on OK Step 12 Goto Step 2 End of Procedure Step 13 Select DHCP Disabled Enter the desired IP Address Enter the desired Netmask Select the desired RIPv2 setting Click on OK Step 14 Goto Step 2 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 289 Provision Communications ADVA VO E VUE wl Y Optical Networking Configure Management Tunnel The FSP 150SP supports the configuration of one VLAN based management tunnel on each Network or Access interface port The FSP 150SP supports management tunnels that use Ethernet or PPP encapsulation PPP can only be used with ADVA Optical Networking NIDs that are directly connected and not using Managemen
118. Settings File This is an XML based file that changes the default settings applied when a new entity such as an EVPL Flow is created This file is down loaded and applied to the unit if the factory default values are determined to be not applicable or unacceptable to the user s application See Default Settings Value File on Page 4 266 If using Internet Explorer 8 in order to view certain eVision elements i correctly namely data provided in Maintenance View e g Restore amp factory defaults Restore system defaults Restore database New System Defaults File enable Compatibility View in IE by selecting Note Tools Compatibility View Settings and adding the FSP 150SP IP address to the list of websites data field ICF Configuration Files The ICF Implementation Configuration File database files are binary copies of the complete database and are not user editable While the binary database files can be managed using CLI or SNMP commands the FSP 150SP provides an easy means to manage the binary database files using the following configu ration database management functions via the eVision Web Browser Create a Database Backup Restore Database Setting a Default Database Restore System Defaults e Restore Factory Defaults Determining Database Configuration Status When the database of the FSP 150SP is modified it stores the changes in non volatile memory If a power loss system reboot occurs all configuration d
119. Slave oocmoxiorsorcirra ra a ee 211 Edit an Ethernet Port s Delay Asymmetry SettinG 218 Create a Boundary Clock ss Pewee ra RARA 219 Edit the Time Clock e cirscuia rra at tame Santee oa Gee 223 Add Time Clock Reference 0 0 00 es 224 Create a Master CIOCK ss i222 440 88 86458 ME 4G PDE RR ODEO ERR 226 Create a Static Remote Slave oooooooooooo oo 230 Verify a Dynamic Remote Slave Connectivity o 233 Provision SyncJack sara AAA AAA AN 235 Provision Performance Monitoring saasaa aaa a a ee 235 Database and Configuration Files o o oooooo ee es 236 ICF Configuration Files asa dsd iaa dara 236 Determining Database Configuration Status 236 Setting a Default Database o oooooo oo e 237 Create a Database Backup 0 oooooococo no 244 Restore Database iva rra ad Skea 248 Restore System Defaults 0 o o ooo oo oo oo oo es 252 Restore Factory Defaults ius i460 e4540 6564844 086 a 253 CLI Configuration Files 0 aaa es 254 CLI Configuration File Management o ooo ooooo eee 255 Transfer Ple ed tar E Ral a 256 A A et ree ne oer 256 Restart with configfile oooooooooomomonooso 256 LO e ee ee ad al a de a do ee ee ee 256 SNOW o gt oe 2 Se Se A AS ee aia 257 DESChIDUCHs bis ee das es o a a RA 257 REMOV eos caaan cesar ies ge eaten eid erase ot se ado ete Seer ree E a gt tee a 258 Configur
120. Slave Locked Figure 130 Slave OCS Port State ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application v A x 5 System A Configuration E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Entity ID OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 E1000 A 1 Alias TS1 Identity 0080ea33b0a000000000 E TS 1 1 E State E Alarm Attributes Administrative IS Secondary ACT Operational Normal Configuration PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Port State Slave Step 76 Goto Step 1 End of Procedure 234 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Provision SyncJack See SyncJack Testing on p 344 Provision Performance Monitoring See Network Access Port Performance Monitoring on p 321 Installation and Operations Manual 235 Database and Configuration Files ADVA vJ E VUE ws Y Optical Networking Database and Configuration Files There are two different ways to manage database files on the FSP 150SP ICF Configuration Files binary via eVision SNMP and CLI CLI Configuration Files text based via CLI and eVision These two types of files can be used in a complimentary fashion or they can be used independently Each type of file and its use is described under the head ings ICF Configuration Files and CLI Configuration Files There is a third type of Database File supported by the FSP 150SP called the Default
121. Sync E on associated Ethernet Ports e Provision CLK PPS and GPS interfaces e Provision and associate Timing Domain on associated Facilities Add Sync Reference Sources Sync E enabled Network Port Access Port BITS IN and or Telecom Slave to System Sync Domain SYNC 1 1 1 1 Ethernet services support one System Sync Domain with up to four reference sources which may be associated with an Ethernet Access Port Network Port BITS IN CLK In PPS In GPS or a Telecom Slave For Synchronization provisioning rules see Synchronization on p 451 186 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permissions using eVision All steps in the fol lowing procedure are performed in the Configuration Application Procedure Step 1 Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configu ration from the Application Menu Expand the System Synchroniza tion NE 1 NTESP100 and BITS 1 entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step 2 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Configure System Sync Continue with the
122. System Time Of Day via local entry Edit System Time Of Day via NTP Continue with the next step Go to Step 35 Edit System Time Of Day via PTP Clock Go to Step 40 Edit System Time Of Day via Local Entry Step 29 Enter a right click on the System entity and select Edit System An Edit System window displays Figure 93 Edit System Time of Day DVA FSP 150 P 150SP 100 o o File Application 4 x E gt k 1s Edit Security Log Identity q Edit Alarm Log S Edit Audit Log Heia g FSP 150SP 100 A Edit Syslog Leslie FSP 150SP 100 Location SP100 35 98 Edit ACL Contact SP100 35 98 Edit Banner CLI Prefix ADVA Edit NTP Restore System Defaults Configuration Provisioning Mode i Autoprov M FTP Enabled x Release Version 6 1 1 049 HTTP i Enabled z DCN IP Address 10 10 35 98 HTTPS Enabled x DCN Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 SSL Cipher Strength i Low I DCN DHCP Enabled scp Enabled el DCN DHCP Role DHCP Client Gateway IP Address 10 10 32 1 Sarel POE pe Enabled lil Management Traffic Bridging Disabled Serial Port Auto Log Off Enabled Jl Mgmt Traffic Bridging Security Disabled SFTP Enabled Proxy ARP Disabled y ssH Enabled tA System Up Time 1 hr 53 mins 14 secs Telnet Disabled x Date i 2014 024 yyyy mm dd Authentication Traps Time 19 20 26 hh mm ss CLI Security Prompt B System Time Of Day
123. Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Not Reported N A N A Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BuIN10MI9N e911dO am ae E A WAU enue y suonyeledo pue uonejesu LLY Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued sus Description NSA Default SA Default LED Condition Type Probable Cause Trouble CIAO Fiocedire Notification Notification Indication Sys Clock Mode System Clock Mode Loss of Verify and troubleshoot clock Loss of Lock Lock This indicates the reference selected reference had locked and is not invalid and the lock Not has been lost While in this Reported me NA state the clock selector will be attempting to acquire the phase of the selected reference Average Holdover Clock was not synced long No action necessary Not Frequency Not enough to enter holdover and is N A N A Read now freerunning Reponed y u g Time Reference Sync 1 1 1 provisioned as Time Test the Locked Out Time Reference Locked Out Reference of Time Clock and and remove lock out when reference Minor N A N A has been Locked out is fully functional again Time Reference Sync 1 1 1 provisioned as Time Evaluate reason for forced switch Forced Switch Reference of Time Clock and operation and when appropriate Minor N A N A Force Switch has been applied remove the forced switch Time Reference Sync 1 1 1 provisioned as Time Check Sync 1 1 1 Sync Referen
124. a PTSF Loss of Sync a Verify and troubleshoot clock reference b Release loopback Minor N A N A PTSF Loss Announce Packet Timing Signal Fail Loss Announce Announce is not received before announceReceiptTimeout A loopback on the port on which the PTP Flowpoint of the SOOC exists will result in a PTSF Loss Announce a Verify and troubleshoot clock reference b Release loopback Minor N A N A PTSF Unusable Packet Timing Signal Fail Unusable The PTP packet stream is not usable for clock recovery For example unable to recover clock due to unacceptable PTP packet PDV Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A S9PO 10113 sesneyd aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey AS enue y suonyeledo pue uonejesu Telecom Slave Alarms Refer to the following table for PTP Telecom Slave alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default notifica tion code and suggested trouble clearing procedure Table 30 Telecom Slave Alarms Condition Type Description Probable Cause Trouble Clearing Procedure NSA Default Notification SA Default Notification LED Indication Sync Reference Failed Synchronization Referencing Failed The TS has failed in such a way that its clock cannot be recovered thus preventing it from being used as a synchronization reference The TS must be assigned for thi
125. a 64 bit number crossed Threshold Value The configured threshold at the time the threshold Up to a 64 bit number was crossed Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Refer to Performance Monitoring Settings on p 478 for monitored types and default Threshold Crossing Alert TCA settings Viewing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Counts and Threshold Values By selecting a PTP Flowpoint or SOOC in the Selection Tree Pane in the PTP application the following tabs are provided in the Details Pane for each entity Summary which displays a summary of both transmit and receive statistics See Figure 203 on p 338 for an example view of a Network Port summary 15 Minute which displays the PM counts in the current 15 Minute perfor mance bin See Figure 204 on p 339 for an example view of a PTP Flow point 15 Minute PM counters If the History checkbox is selected the previous periods are also displayed 1 Day which displays the PM counts in the current 1 Day performance bin If the History checkbox is selected the previous period is also displayed e Thresholds which displays the details and the thresholds that have been set for each PP See Figure 205 on p 339 for an example view of a Network Port Threshold values Procedure Step 1 Select the PTP icon or select PTP from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Step 2 Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the NTES
126. and the location of the Alarm Window Installation and Operations Manual 381 a ANNA 7J E a m WN u Obtaining Technical Assistance Optical Networking Step4 Determine which current alarm has the greatest service effect and record the alarm Service affecting SA critical alarms should be cleared first followed by Major SA alarms and then Minor SA alarms Then any remaining non service affecting NSA major alarms should be cleared followed by any minor alarms Step5 Locate the appropriate alarm indication description and suggested troubleshooting techniques for the specific problem Step6 Refer to Alarm Attributes Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing on p 399 for identifying interpreting and troubleshooting alarms Step 7 Refer to Connector and LED Descriptions on p 65 for descriptions of connectors and front panel LED indications Step 8 After performing suggested trouble clearing actions did the alarm or status condition clear a If YES Record the time the alarm was cleared and continue with the next step b If NO Obtain ADVA Optical Networking technical assistance see below Step 9 Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 for all alarms Step 10 Observe the Alarms Pane to view all current alarms Have all alarm conditions been cleared a If YES Go to the next step b If NO Obtain ADVA Optical Networking technical assistance see below Step 11 Log off all FSP 150SPs when finished End of Procedure O
127. az WA YA SyncJac Optical Networking 152 Installation and Operations Manual a ADVA VO E eam ws Y Optical Networking Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Introduction This chapter contains system provisioning details for the SP 100 and provides a recommended work flow for new installations The procedures can also be used for incorporating provisioning changes to existing systems Additionally this chapter includes links to technical information and procedures elsewhere in the document that are needed or helpful in successfully completing the installation and original provisioning process Provisioning the SP 100 Once the chassis has been installed cabled and powered see Physical Instal lation on p 73 it requires provisioning and testing prior to carrying customer traffic The procedures to accomplish this are listed below in the suggested order that they be performed The following sections can also be used for incor porating provisioning changes to existing systems Recommended Sequence of Steps for Initial Turn Up of an SP 100 The following sections in this chapter provide supporting information and proce dures for provisioning the SP 100 Serial Connection on p 276 Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 Browser based IP Connection on p 285 e Upgrade Software Version on p 154 e Provision System Options on p 162 Provision
128. contents carefully Two mounting kits are required e SP 100 19 Single Rack Mounting Brackets kit part number 1013904010 SP 100 Extended Rack Mounting Brackets kit part number 1013904012 The following components will be used in this procedure One 19 mounting bracket short One 19 mounting bracket long Four M3x5 CSK POZI screws Two adapter brackets extender tabs 1U 19 to 23 or 1U 19 to ETSI Four 10 32 x 0 375 screws Four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or Four M6x20 screws and four M6 nuts o o o o o o Installation and Operations Manual 85 Physical Installation a ADVA 7J a amv ws n Optical Networking A 1 MECHANICAL LOADING When mounting the equipment in a rack ensure that a hazardous condition is not created by uneven mechanical loading 2 Ensure that reliable grounding of the rack mounted equipment is WARNING maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit Use the following procedure to install a single SP 100 via a Standard or Extended 23 ETSI Extended configuration Procedure The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an antistatic sur face If necessary use canned compressed air to blow off any dust particles Secure the 19 mounting bracket short and 19 mounting
129. desired probe and select Delete PTP Clock Probe A Delete Clock Probe pane appears Select OK End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 369 SyncJack Testing ADVA VO E ea ws Y Optical Networking Clock Analysis Telecom Slave Score Ifa Telecom Slave is configured in the SP 100 under PTP SyncJack can be used to test and score internal slave performance Three scores are provided for frequency and time recovery 5 High Score High Performance 4 Medium Score Marginal Performance 3 Low Score Low Performance This scoring is used to estimate the frequency and phase accuracy of the inter nal SP 100 T SC Unlike Network Usability this is the quality of the slave clock not the network The input is PTP packets the output is a frequency accuracy and a phase accuracy score of 3 4 or 5 for each as PM The Telecom Slave current configuration and statistics can be viewed by select ing the Telecom Slave TS 1 1 under Clock Analysis See Figure 236 on p 370 for configuration view and Figure 237 on p 371 for statistics summary view The T SC target values for frequency and phase can be configured by right clicking on the Telecom Slave TS 1 1 under Clock Analysis and selecting Edit Telecom Slave Analysis then selecting the desired values for Frequency Recovery Target and Phase Recovery Target in the details pane and clicking on OK See Figure 238 on p 371 To initialize the
130. e configuration of FPGA CPLD and CPU Once the hardware devices have been configured the Status LED will be begin to flash Yellow with a frequency of 1Hz 0 5Hz After the U Boot software has loaded a power on lamp test is exe cuted where all LEDs are lit for two seconds See LED Start Up on p 114 Next hardware tests are performed If there are no failures the sequence continues If there is a hardware failure the Status LED is red and the sequence stops WARM Start If the card has been WARM started the sequence begins here If this is a cold start sequence then the previous steps are executed and a forced warm restart is performed Once the CPU has been initialized the Status LED will begin to flash Yellow with a frequency of 1Hz 0 5Hz Now the image is validated If the image is bad the sequence stops and the Status LED will continue to flash Yellow If the image is good the Status LED will begin to flash Green with a frequency of 1Hz 0 5Hz The status LED then reverts to normal behavior either Green provi sioned or Flashing Red equipment mismatch If during the boot sequence or during normal operation a fault is detected on the card in Hardware Firmware or Software the Status LED will be lit red indefinitely This indicates that the card cannot recover End of Procedure 114 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Power On Lamp Test The SP 10
131. e NTESP100 Identification Synchronization NE 1 Entity ID BITS OUT 1 1 1 1 i NTESP100 Allas 8 SYNC 1 1 1 1 Stat TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 ae BITS 1 Administrative Unassigned Secondary UAS BITS IN Operational Outage BITS C igi CLK 1 1 EN Configuration CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Line bd 2 61 7 QL e Disabled PPS 1 1 1 2 Line Code 1 HDB3 x Squelch QL TOD 1 1 1 1 Frame Format 1cRC4 x Line Build Out None GPS 1 1 1 1 SA Bit Bit4 Communications SNMP Status 4 Administration Transmit QL QL DNU Cancel Apply OK Step 10 Enter an Alias if desired Select the desired Administrative State Select the desired Configuration settings starting with Line Type as the Line Type selection changes the options available for Line Code Frame Format SA Bit and QL Mode If using SDH Option 1 E1 and 2048 kHz are supported If using SONET T1 is supported Line type line code frame format and SA bit for E1 settings for 5 BITS IN and BITS OUT are shared Changing one changes the other Squelch QL setting means if the reference clock drops below this Note setting the BITS OUT output will be suppressed As part of the Ethernet port Sync E reference set up the Administration State should not be set to Unassigned Click on OK Step 11 Goto Step 2 190 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit 10 MHz Clock Port Refer to the f
132. e g Tera Term Web to establish a connection Step 3 Select the outgoing communication port Step4 Setthe communication settings of the terminal emulation program to the following e 9600 baud e 8 data bits e no parity bit e 1 stop bit No flow control Step 5 Save these settings for future use The following Login prompt should be displayed Login Step 6 Login with the following details e Account name root or as appropriate see Provision Secure Access on p 171 e Password ChgMeNOW or as appropriate A Security Banner displays on the screen Step 7 Enter Y to continue The following prompt is displayed ADVA gt End of Procedure Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN ethO Port Using the Serial Port The following procedure assumes that the ethernet cable connecting MGMT LAN to the DCN network has not been installed yet If there is no DCN con nected and only a 3G DCN will be provided for this SP 100 refer to Set Up the 3G Modem Using the Serial Port on p 282 to provision the 3G DCN USB port using CLI commands Perform the following procedure to set up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 port MGMT LAN using the RS 232 Serial Port on the FSP 150SP RS 232 and the 276 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning CLI command structure For more information on the CLI command structure see the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Interface Reference Guide You will need
133. eee Oe 73 Preparing for Installation i 6 ia cca cee ee eee eee ae we ees 74 Verifying Site REACINGSS es lt 24 d 424 44 p24 oe DEAE REDD a ERS 74 Reg irementS e a aio Sh Ge AA Y AR eS RA 76 Cables iaa Saad Oke oe las a S Pane eee 76 TOOIS ca a a a a a a e aa ee ee 79 Unpack and Inspect the FSP 150SP Equipment 0 oo 80 Returning Equipment saasaa aaa aaa ee A 81 Install the FSP 150SP 2 apna a Oe ee eh eee SORE ee ee eS 81 Mounting KIES oa ue wo SS ase aa Ow OSE Re RE SA 82 MOUNUING OPUIONS to as cae ek RA See eee a 82 Mounting a Single FSP SP 100 via a Standard or Extended 19 COMMOUPAUOMS ws ta wa eae ee A ROE ee ee OF 84 Mounting a Single SP 100 via a 23 Standard or Extended ETSI Extended Configuration sece0 e550 e280 a ee wee 85 Mounting Dual SP 100s via a 19 Standard or Extended COMMOUPAUON s 4 44 amp wade a wie aaa aa ee Ae oe eb See EY 88 Mounting Dual SP 100 via a 23 Standard or Extended ETSI Extended Configuration 0 0 0 0 0 eee ee es 90 Mounting the SP 100 to a Wall iis csw sie teleRe wd caw tee ae 92 Installing a Standalone Chassis 0 0000 eee eee ees 94 Route and Connect Copper Cables anasa aaa aaa es 95 Access Network Interface Copper Cables oooooo ooo 96 Ethernet DCN Connections 0 00 cee es 97 Serial Console Port Connection 0 00 cece ees 97 USB Port Connections a a Yee 98 GPS Port ConnectionS 1 0 es 98 BITS IN and BITS OUT Cables
134. eee ee es 336 Viewing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Counts and Threshold Values 337 Initializing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Registers 341 Editing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM ThresholdS 342 SyncJack TESTO se mata ated sw O ee dew de ae Se we A 344 SP 100 Probing Features 6 c460002 ee va bee Pane e eae ew Pee Be 345 General Guideline for Reference Accuracy Used by the Probes 345 Es ACCURACY c aace dusman da 8d 842 455 E 08 ot ee a 345 Clock ANGIVSIS lt a 588 4449 aaa 345 PTP Network AnalySiS oooooooo ee es 345 MTIE COMParSON 4 4 aeia e aa eae AE She Aa 345 Raw Data Collection ex 2 dae awa os a ew Ale ee ke Ye a 345 Provision Raw Data Collection Server 0 0 0 cee es 347 Performing Clock Accuracy Testing oooooooo coo 348 Performing Clock Ana lysiS zoo 0 0 8 20 we tak ak Be o a e a 360 Clock Analysis Telecom Slave Score nannaa aaa aaa oo 370 Performing PTP Network AnalySiS 0 ooo es 372 Performing MTIE Result Comparison saasaa aaa ee ee ee eee eee 378 Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error COGGS idear eri L Introduction iia oe a or a as ia e nd 381 Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing lt lt lt 381 Obtaining Technical Assistance nasasa aaa aa ro 382 Error Codes and System Responses 00 cc eee ee ees 384 Alarm Attributes Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing 399 Alarm Prof
135. enabled xxx must have at least one Vlan enabled Loopback config not supported for OAM passive mode OAM mode is xxx Swap SA DA must be xxx for EFM OAM Loopbacks 280 281 Data not available for _entityeid_ _why_ Where Why is Admin State is UNASSIGNED PM Thresholds not supported PM not monitored on CP Flow 282 Port _entityeid_ is not eligible to be put in selector reference list _why_ Where Why is A port can only be added to the reference selector list if it is assigned An Ethernet port with speed configured as xxx cannot be added to the refer ence selector list An Ethernet port with SyncE mode disabled cannot be added to the reference selector list It is already present in the list 390 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response ATTRIBUTE SPECIFIC 512 Invalid value _why_ Where Why is xxx already used by user yyy xxx ARP route can be created xxx can be set only for protocol belonging to protocol group xxx cannot be set xxx C Tag Control option is not applicable when service type is yyy xxx flow need to be MultiCOS enabled xxx flow with UNTAGGED support need to have different COS level support xxx has more than 1 Remote MEP xxx has no Remote MEPs xxx has non zero EIR xxx is already scheduled in yyy xxx is currently active on this port xxx is different than USM user yyy xxx
136. entering a right click on the PTP Network Probes entity and selecting Create PTP Network Probe To edit an existing PTP Network Probe enter a right click on the PTP Network Probe entity PTP Network Probe 1 1 and select Edit To delete a PTP Network Probe enter a right click on the PTP Network Probe entity PTP Network Probe 1 1 and select Delete then select OK Table 61 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults PTP Probe Index Create only PTP Probe Index Number is automatically indexed but is user editable 1 32 Name A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 15 printable ASCII characters long 1 to 15 characters blank PTP Flowpoint Identifies the PTP Flowpoint used by the PTP Clock Probe A drop down list of the provisioned flowpoints available for use is provided drop down list of provisioned PTP Flowpoints IP Version Defines whether the PTP Clock Probe uses IPv4 or IPv6 For the current release only IPv4 is supported Selection is from a drop down list IPv4 drop down list Master IP Address Entry for the IP address of the Master Clock Entry is a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address according to Version entry For the current release only IPv4 is supported the IP Version entry For the current release only oe IPv4 is
137. entering the following CLI command ADVA comms gt home ADVA gt configure system ADVA system gt proxy arp enabled Ensure that the Proxy ARP option is set correctly for the FSP 150SP If two or more ADVA Optical Networking NEs or FSP 150SPs are connected via SDCC or Management Tunnel as well as connected to the same LAN segment then only one of the them should have the Proxy ARP option enabled Otherwise there will be multiple ARP CAUTION responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP address from each NE FSP 150SP in the same LAN that has Proxy ARP enabled 316 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Logoff the CLI session and remove any commissioning cables Ether net cable and or console cable from the FSP 150SP front panel con nectors as required Ensure the DCN connection for LAN Segment A is connected to the MGMT LAN eth0 port Connect the optical cables to the FSP 150SP Network Port front panel connectors if they are not already connected Observe the Network Port Net and Act LEDs on the front panel They should be lit green If the LEDs are not lit green then troubleshoot the connections between FSP 150SP 1 and FSP 150CC 2 Depending on your configuration either set the eVision workstation default gateway to point to the GNE FSP 150SP s Management LAN port IP address or create
138. entity form the selection tree then expand the NTESP100 entity Expand the E1000 A 1 E1000 N 1 entity Enter a right click on the desired PTP Flowpoint entity in the selection tree To initialize counters select Init Registers An Initialize Registers pane appears see Figure 207 on p 341 Select the desired Interval and Bin Index Select OK The designated PM count registers are cleared End of Procedure Figure 207 Initialize PTP Flowpoint PM Registers Pane 5 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application v A x z7 a System NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 NTESP100 f E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 Alarm Attributes Init Registers Identification Entity ID ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Register and Interval Selection Entity ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 x Bin Index current w Interval 15 Minutes Cancel Apply OK Installation and Operations Manual 341 a ADVA 7J E eam Waza u PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring Optical Networking Editing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Thresholds Each Performance Parameter PP has a threshold for each bin period which is configurable for each entity instance The PP count is compared to the config ured threshold and if met or exceeded a Threshold Crossing Alert TCA is gen erated pS Provisioning a threshold to zero disables threshold monitoring for that entity Note
139. errors and is subject to change at any time without notice Reliance on this content is at the relying party s sole risk and will not create any liability or obligation for ADVA Opti cal Networking Any references in this document to publications and or Internet sites that are not from ADVA Optical Networking are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those publications and or Internet sites The materials within those publications and or Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA Optical Networking information product or service and use of those publications and or Internet sites is at your own risk THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING ITS AFFILIATES EMPLOYEES OFFICERS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY H
140. files are kept in persistent memory and survive software upgrades and ICF database file resets and restorals This is important because when either of these events happens the system requires a reset and if a CLI configuration file is marked for automatic execution it runs after the reset com pletes The following give some examples of and uses for the CLI configuration files The full syntax for each related CLI command can be found in the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide Included here is a procedure for dealing with CLI configuration files CLI Configuration File Procedure on p 258 Below is a sample configuration file The configuration file parser looks for the first remarks line lines starting with to identify that this is a configuration file and this line should never be edited or the file will not be run ADVA config file gt show configfile configfile4 File Name configfile4 Description Context below DO NOT EDIT THIS LINE FILE TYPE CONFIGURATION FILE CLI ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 Edit home network element ne configure nte ntesp100 1 1 1 configure access port access 1 1 1 1 CLI FLOW 1 1 1 1 1 Create home network element ne 1 configure nte ntesp100 1 1 1 configure access port access 1 1 1 1 Installation and Operations Manual 255 a ADVA a z 7J a auw wz va Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking end home admin config file ADVA config f
141. from external objects of any kind the SP 100 is intended to be protected from dust and particles with all covers complete To ensure that all components are adequately protected do not operate the SP 100 for extended Note periods without supplying plugs for vacant electrical and optical ports 100 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Invisible Laser Radiation 1 Laser equipment should only be installed by personnel competent in laser technology 2 SFP Interfaces approved by ADVA Optical Networking are Class 1 laser devices when inserted into the FSP 150SP 3 Do not stare into the beam of any SFP Interface or view directly with optical instruments 4 Output ports of the SFP Interfaces emit laser radiation which is invisible to the naked eye The equipment uses laser diodes as fiber optic transmitter sources which are inherently safe unless mis handled Mishandling and misuse can result in severe eye injury CAUTION 5 Do NOT look directly into an optical fiber connector or an un termi nated receptacle with a magnifier unless it is absolutely certain that no laser radiation is being emitted from the receptacle or the fiber This product contains electro static sensitive devices A Appropriate anti static handling precautions should be followed i e IEC 61340 5 1 1998 1 When handling SFP Interfaces DO NOT touch any connections inside the device 2 Keep all
142. help customers to streamline business processes and improve productivity Through your cus tomer login you will find information tailored especially for you including net working solutions services and programs In addition you can resolve technical issues with online support services download and test software pack ages and order ADVA Optical Networking training materials Access your customer login via the ADVA Optical Networking home page at http www advaoptical com Installation and Operations Manual 383 ADVA 7J E a m WN u Error Codes and System Responses Optical Networking Error Codes and System Responses This table lists the error codes and the associated definitions or responses The _why_ attribute is a response string that is defined by the system software All possible _why_ responses are listed under the Where Why is when an error code can have multiple responses Before the response is sent to the user the error codes are mapped based on the message type Each group of error codes is sorted by a system condition or type Table 26 Error Codes and Definitions Error Code Response GENERAL SYSTEM CONDITIONS Operation completed successfully Unknown error Mei application shutdown failed File _filename_ does not exist No Response _from_ User _username_ is locked out User _username_ is not logged in User _username_ locked out _loginnum_ unsuccessful
143. identifier up to 15 characters Schedule Type of Periodic is selected This option is only valid if Fixed duration is selected associated with a Probe and is nota blank mandatory entry Schedule Parameters Schedule Type Define schedule type as a one time or periodic One Shot execution The current release only supports One Shot scheduling Start Time Buttons Activate either an immediate SyncJack or Now future scheduled SyncJack Future Periodic Interval secs Specifies the interval between subsequent future runs in seconds This option is only available Range 1 to if Schedule Type of Periodic is selected This 2147483647 option is not available in the current release Duration Buttons Define the duration as continuous or a fixed Forever time in seconds Only applicable if Schedule Fixed Type of One Shot is selected Define the duration in seconds Valid entries Duration secs are 0 continuous through 9999 seconds if Entry Window Schedule Type of One Shot is selected and 0 to 9999 One Shot valid entries are 60 through 9999 seconds if 60 to 9999 Periodic Installation and Operations Manual 521 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 62 SyncJack Schedule Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Start Time Entry Windows The date
144. in format yyyy mm dd and the time When cursor is placed in data entry window and mouse click is entered a calendar selection appears allowing date selection Entry selection must be the current date or greater This option is only applicable if Future start time is selected yyyy mm dd Define the duration in hours minutes and seconds in format hh mm ss 24 hour clock time entry When cursor is placed in data entry window and mouse click is entered a start time drop down selectable menu appears in 15 minute segments Entry selection must be greater than the current time This option is only applicable if Future start time is selected hh mm ss Schedule SJ Test Items Selects the Probes that belong to this SyncJack schedule To add a Probe select a Probe from the Schedule Probes list Multiple Probes may be selected Probes may be deselected by clicking on the Probe once again before hitting the OK button Only previously created Probes that are not used for another Scheduled Activity are available for selection Once a schedule has been created it cannot be edited It must be deleted and re created with the desired new parameters Any available probes will be displayed in the Schedule SJ test Items list as a checkbox selection 522 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Result Analysis Configure MTIE Comparison Parameters Result Analysis may be configu
145. in the master slave hierarchy but instead measures the residence time for each PTP event message i e it mea sures the time a PTP eventmessage spends in transit through the Transparent Clock or more specifically the time between the ingress point and the egress point in the node A S ave Clock uses the residence times to account for the variable delay i e queuing delay incurred by a PTP event message while in transit through the network IEEE 1588 2008 defines the Precision Time Protocol PTP for use in applica tions requiring highly accurate time phase synchronization The PTP protocol involves the transmission of messages containing accurate timestamps with each timestamp representing the time at which the message was sent The repeated transmission of messages provides the means for frequency recovery and when combined with the timestamps embedded within the messages accu rate time phase is also recovered The performance achievable by the PTP protocol is dependent on the network environment in which it is operating and the use and performance of the various clock types e g OC BC TC within the network IEEE 1588 2008 doesn t define the performance criteria for recovering the clock time and frequency from a received PTP message flow however ITU T is working on such require ments for telecommunications applications To support the accurate transport and recovery of time across a network IEEE 1588 2008 defines the followi
146. in the selection tree and select Create Schedule A Create Schedule pane appears Installation and Operations Manual 373 SyncJack Testing ADVA J E emp wz Y Optical Networking Figure 240 Create SyncJack Schedule File Application y B x E System NE 1 E Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results E Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Estimations TS 1 1 E PTP Network Analysis E PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Synejack Schedules El Result Analysi Create Schedule MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection Step 8 Step 9 3 gt A 4 Create Schedule Identification Schedule Index eee Schedule Parameters 1 1 255 Activity ID Schedule Type One Shot y Duration 2 Forever Fixed Start Time secs Now Future y yyyy mm dd v hh imm ss Schedule SJ Test Items pe CLOCK PROBE 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 _ PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Cancel Apply OK Enter the following to configure the SyncJack Schedule Schedule Index EID for the schedule Enter a number from 1 to 255 Activity ID a text identifier up to 15 characters no spaces or special characters for the probe Schedule Type Select the desired type from the drop down list Only One Shot is currently supported Duration Select either the Forever or Fixed radio button If Fixed is selected ent
147. is disconnected or inoperable When the primary management connection is in service and working and SNMP is provisioned SP 100 reports its public IP address acquired from the 3G service provider to a Network manager via the primary management connection DCN If the primary management connection fails management communica tions may be made to the SP 100 via a public 3G network The following is a procedure for provisioning a 3G modem to enable the wire less connection to an SP 100 using eVision If there is no DCN connected and only a 3G DCN will be provided for this SP 100 refer to Set Up the 3G Modem Using the Serial Port on p 282 to provision the 3G DCN USB port using CLI commands Procedure Desired Function Edit 3G modem configuration Step 1 Select Configuration view Expand the System Name NE 1 and NTE11x entities in the Selection Tree Step2 Determine the next step Description Then Provision or edit 3G Modem Configuration Continue with the next step Observe current 3G modem configuration and SIM status Observe current 3G modem configuration and Go to Step 5 SIM status to determine appropriate action Enable PIN Requires entry using a PIN Can be applied if Go to Step 7 PIN PUK status Disabled When the PIN is Enabled if the 3G Modem is unplugged or the system reboots the 3G Modem SIM must be unlocked by entering the PIN Disable PIN Allows access without entering a
148. is set to DHCP Client Enabled 460 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults DHCP Client ID Client ID maximum length is 254 characters and the default value is the System Name truncated to 254 system name characters Only used if DHCP Role is set to DHCP Client and DHCP Client ID Control is Enabled Edit System Selecting the check box allows editing the Gateway IP check box Default Gateway Address Only applicable if DHCP is Disabled deselected Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if the Edit System Address Default Gateway check box is selected grayed Out 3G DCN Select to Display Configuration The 3G DCN information is viewable but not editable document Create Edit Delete Management Tunnels see the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions SNMP Add Delete Community see Note Community Entry for the valid Community Name public Name private Access Type Defines the access type Read Only public Read Write private and select OK Note To delete an existing Community Name enter a right click on the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete Community Then select the desired Community Name from the selection list Add Delete Target Address see Note Target Ad
149. it then select OK The file transfer will begin and a screen similar to Figure 57 on p 158 displays Go to Step 9 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the following figure The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP file transfer view is identical Figure 56 Transfer Upgrade SCP View File Application El System E NE 1 Ej Synchronization Communications E Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log EJ Software Licensing A x 5 D Transfer Upgrade Step 8 Method File Transfer Method SCP File Transfer Server IP al ol ol ol 0 User ID al User Password Software Image Cancel OK Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK amp It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or Note SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name of the software file to transfer The file transfer will begin and a screen similar to the following dis plays Installation and Operations Manual 157 ADVA p v 7 VA Wel u Upgrade Software Version Sores Networking Figure 57 File Transfer Progress Screen ADV
150. login attempts User _username_ locked out CO NI o OI BY oI IN o Remote User Login failed _why_ Where Why is Athentication failed Radius setup failed Invalid password 384 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response ENTITY CONDITIONS 256 Entity does not exist 257 Entity already exists 258 Next child entity does not exist 259 Set operation is not supported 260 Create operation is not supported 261 Delete operation is not supported 262 _actiontype_ operation is not supported 263 Get variable objects operation is not supported 264 Maximum _maxnum_ number of _entityname_ entities has been reached 265 Total _rsrc_ resource amount of _totalval_ exceeds max limit of _maxval_ 266 Allocating_val_ _unit_of_rsrc_resource from _container_failed total amount of _totalval_ _unit1_ exceeds max limit of _maxval_ _ unit2_ 267 IP address _ipaddr_ _mask_ of interface _if_ overlaps with address of interface _overlapif_ 268 Operation denied _why_ Create denied _why_ Delete denied _why_ Edit denied _why_ Retrieve denied _why_ Action denied _why_ Where Why is System in Db Maintenance Mode 269 Operation denied _why_ Create denied _why_ Delete denied _why_ Edit denied _why_ Retrieve denied _why_ Action denied _why_ Where Why is Object is transient Instal
151. menu expanding the system folder and Boundary Clock entities in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the Boundary Clock entity and selecting Create Master Clock Interface To edit a Master Clock Interface enter a right click on the Master Clock Interface entity e g MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 and select Edit To delete a Master Clock Interface enter a right click on the Master Clock Inter face entity and select Delete Table 54 Create Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Master Clock The index number of the Master Clock Interface Up to Interface Index Four Master Clock Interfaces may be created per 1 4 Create only system Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64 characters identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable blank ASCII characters long Administrative Enables or disables the Master Clock Interface See IS State Entity State Descriptions on p 430 Management IP Protocol IP Protocol IPv4 Create only Master Clock Valid IPv4 address The IP address must be unique Interface IP across all IP interfaces in the system 0 0 0 0 Address Create only Master Clock Valid IPv4 subnet mask Interface Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Create only Interface Name When an Master Clock Interface is created an IP Create only interface is created with
152. next step Configure PTP Go to Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP Configure BITS IN Go to Step 6 Configure BITS OUT Go to Step 9 Configure a 10MHz Clock Port Go to Step 12 Configure a PPS Port Go to Step 16 Configure ToD Port Go to Step 20 Configure the GPS Port Go to Step 24 Edit System Time of Day Go to Step 37 Configure Sync E for Network Access Ports Go to Step 44 Add a Sync Reference Go to Step 47 Edit a Sync Reference Go to Step 52 Delete a Sync Reference Go to Step 55 All Synchronization provisioning is completed End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 187 ADVA 7J E amy WN u Provision Synchronization Optical Networking Edit System Sync Step 3 Right click on SYNC 1 1 1 1 and select Edit Sync The following screen displays Figure 85 Edit System Sync ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x 5 D D m System Edit Sync E NE 1 NTESP100 Identification f Synchronization gt NE 1 Entity ID SYNC 1 1 1 1 gt NTESP100 Alias 3 chassis SYNC plat laa State TIME a BITs Add Sync Reference Administrative S Secondary ACT cLk 1 Edit Sync Reference Operational Normal CLK 1 Delete Sync Reference PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Configuration PPS 1 1 1 2 are ee TOD 1 1 1 1 Synchronization Domain C Network Clock Type GPS 1 1 1 1 eee WTR Time E 4 Communications ceed Mode nics e SNMP 2 Pri
153. octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP1024 EtherStats Packets 1024 to 1518 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP1519 EtherStats Packets 1519 to 1536 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 1519 and 1536 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESUF EtherStats Unicast Frames sent If there is Transmit Near 0 0 link down during the interval the bin is not End accessible ESUP EtherStats Undersize Packets received Receive Near 37055 3557280 The total number of packets received that End were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0 Discarded Number of Layer 2 Control End Protocol Frames discarded on the interface L2CPFP Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0 Processed Number of Layer 2 Control End Protocol Frames processed on the interface LBC Laser Bias Current retrieved from the SFP Receive Near 0 0 Applicable only if the media type is Fiber End LES Line Errored Seconds detected Increments Receive Near 0 0 if a False Carrier or Errored Symbol e
154. of a PTP Flowpoint ax amp PIS Configuration Statistics Thresholds _Clear Refresh Receive Statistics Entity ID ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 J 15 Minute 1 Day Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds Average Residence Time for PTP Delay_Req Messages o Average Residence Time for PTP Sync Messages o Average Residence Time for Peer Delay_Req Messages o Average Residence Time for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages o Maximum Residence Time for PTP Delay_Req Messages o Maximum Residence Time for PTP Sync Messages o Maximum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Req Messages 0 Maximum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages o Minimum Residence Time for PTP Delay_Req Messages o Minimum Residence Time for PTP Sync Messages o Minimum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Req Messages o Minimum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages o PTP Announce Messages Received o PTP Delay Req Messages Received o PTP Delay Resp Follow Up Messages Received o PTP Delay Resp Messages Received o PTP Delay_Req Messages Received 2735174 PTP Delay_Resp Messages Received o PTP Follow_Up Messages Received o PTP Management Frames Received o PTP Signaling Messages Received 305 PTP Sync Messages Received o PTP messages discarded No MCI Destination IP match o Unknown PTP Messages Received a Transmit Statistics PTP Announce Messages Transmitted 5222 PTP Follow Up Messages Transmitted o PTP Delay Req Messages Transmitted o PTP Management Frames Tr
155. or Master to Slave may be selected Master to Slave e Ifthe Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point is set to OC Master then only Slave to Master selection is allowed Reference Defines the reference source for the PTP Clock Probe Network References available are presented in a drop down list Port 1 1 1 1 Access Port 1 1 1 1 BITS IN 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 PPS 1 1 1 2 GPS 1 1 1 1 SYNC 1 1 1 1 Reference Defines the expected Quality Level of the selected QL NONE Expected QL reference for the PTP Clock Probe Available QL levels QL PRC are presented in a drop down list QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Installation and Operations Manual 517 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 59 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults MTIE Mask Define the predefined MTIE Mask to use for G823 E1 Ssu measurements Choices are presented in a drop down G823 E1 Sec list G823 E1 Traffic G823 Pdh G824 T1 Sync G824 T1 Traffic G8261 E1 Case 1 G8261 T1 Case 1 G8261 E1 Case 2 G8261 EEC Opt1 G8263 G8263 temp G8272 PRTC G8261 1 G8262 EEC Opti G8262 EEC Opt1 temp G8262 EEC Opt2 G8262 EEC Opti Tolerance Mask Margin The margin percentage to be applied to th
156. output capable One SMB Pulse Per Second PPS input front mounted SMB 500hm TTL One SMB Pulse Per Second PPS input output front mounted SMB 500hm TTL External Frequency Reference Input CLK front mounted SMB External Frequency Reference Input Output CLK front mounted SMB SP 100 Equipment Configuration Options Only one internal open frame PSU is supported The PSU types supported include o AC 110 220V PSU o DC 48 60V PSU o DC 24V PSU Only one PSU is installed per box so SP 100 does not support a protected PSU configuration of the above PSU types 428 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Component Descriptions Common to the SP 100 Refer to the following component descriptions to the SP 100 Mounting Brackets The chassis may be positioned as a standalone unit or it may be rack mounted Adaptation to rack mounting is possible by using mounting brackets and sepa rate removable mounting brackets are available for e 19 rack mounting 23 ETSI rack mounting e Recessed rack mounting brackets are also available for 19 and 23 ETSI racks in order to ensure that optical fiber bend radius is maintained when installed in some cabinets with doors All brackets are designed to be screwed to the sides of the chassis and the screws supplied have ISO threads Cable Handling Rack Integral Cable handling is provided by means of an integral Cable Handling Rack
157. page at http www advaoptical com Installation and Operations Manual 27 a ADVA 7J E am Wa u SP 100 Product Overview Optical Networking SP 100 Product Overview The SP 100 is a small efficient device that brings the power of Syncjack Syn cprobe to any network Figure 3 SP 100 Chassis MGMT LAN BITS Out TOD CLKIN PPSIN CLK PPS GPS e 4 BITS In No longer must archaic legacy synchronous links be maintained for timing Instead timing can be easily distributed and assured throughout a network over existing packet infrastructure Timing performance is continuously monitored in service and alarmed if needed A valuable new service is made available to Ethernet wholesalers and mobile operators the ability to write and bill to Service Level Agreements on timing or to assure timing with Mobile Network Operator Offering unique flexibility the SP 100 simultaneously supports both Synchro nous Ethernet and IEEE 1588v2 PTP It has a built in Global Positioning System GPS receiver that can be used as the Syncjack tools measurements reference as well as an alternative timing source for frequency and time of day delivery With its thorough IEEE 1588v2 PTP implementation the SP 100 can be config ured to operate in Slave Boundary Clock BC or Master Clock MC mode to enable highly accurate clock recovery An internal Stra
158. permits the NE to roll back to the previous CAUTION software and database without user intervention Normally a software upgrade activation is implemented with a warm restart which is non service affecting However if the upgrade A includes FPGA changes the upgrade is implemented with a cold restart which does cause a traffic hit The upgrade release notes CAUTION include information regarding whether the upgrade is implemented with a warm or cold restart Installation and Operations Manual 159 Upgrade Software Version ADVA J E VUE wa Y Optical Networking Step 12 SS After selecting and setting the activation and validation settings select OK When activation occurs now or when scheduled the NE resets and the eVision session is interrupted Wait for 2 or 3 minutes then reconnect to the NE Once logged back in verify that the NE is behaving normally If unable to login the validation timer will eventually time out and the NE will revert to the previous load and after that NE reset reconnection should be possible If the validation timer was not used Note contact technical support Step 13 Determine the next step Desired Activity Then Accept or reject upgrade during validation period Go to Step 14 Cancel scheduled activation Go to Step 16 Validation timer not set End of Procedure Step 14 Expand Administration right click on Upgrade an
159. point using the provided ground cable Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Using the M4x6 RAIS Pozi screw and one lock washer provided with the Earth Terminal Kit attach the 10 foot 16 gauge grounding cable to the Earth terminal point located at the rear of the SP 100 unit See Figure 36 on p 105 and Figure 37 on p 106 Connect the other end of the cable to the site designated grounding location frame connecting point or ground bar location See Figure 37 on p 106 Dress the cable as required End of Procedure Figure 36 Rear Panel Frame Ground Point Earth terminal point optional connection Installation and Operations Manual 105 a ADVA v 7 VA w YA Connect Power Cables and Apply Power il Networking Figure 37 Grounding Detail gP OG E eg oiana Terminal tab RO Earth Terminal Kit and Ground Cable for optional grounding 106 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Connect AC Power The SP 100 AC variant operates with an AC source externally fused at 10 Amps with a voltage range of 120 240 VAC nominal 50 60Hz nominal The system operates with an AC source with the voltage range specified in ANSI specification C84 1 1989 Voltage Ratings 60 Hz for Electric Power Systems Equipment Range B The equipment shall tolerate any frequency within the range of 60 3 Hz UK EU Power requirements EN50160 defines voltage characteristics i
160. radio button Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long up to 64 characters blank Installation and Operations Manual 453 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E QUE wz Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Priority TIME CLOCK 1 1 Sets the priority for this Time Clock Reference 1 1 Delete Time Clock Reference 1 10 Select Ref radio button Select the radio button for the corresponding Time Clock Reference to be deleted radio button BITS 1 BITS IN Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long blank Administrative Defines the SYNC administrative state See Entity Unassigned State State Descriptions on p 430 BITS will not show up IS as a potential synchronization reference if the administration state is set to Unassigned Management Line Type Sets the BITS line type If a 2048kHz or E1 is the El desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type T1 should be set to Option 1 Ifa T1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Ty
161. radio button associated with the desired feature f enabling a license a License Warning window appears Step 4 Select OK Step5 Setthe feature Status to Enabled and select OK The Feature Management Status is displayed and indicates it is in the enabled state 206 Installation and Operations Manual 6364 Issue A 2014 ADVA Optical Networking SE Confidential 0026 OC P 100 R6 1 1 800 FSP 150S Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step6 Select OK Step 7 Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for each additional desired feature End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 207 ADVA 7J E eam WM u Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP Optical Networking Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP This section provides Precision Time Protocol PTP related configuration including Telecom Slave TS Boundary Clock BC Remote Slave Static Slave or Dynamic Slave Master Clock MC Time Clock and add a Time Clock Reference Telecom Slave Provisioning Order A single Telecom Slave may be created for the system The Telecom Slave and associated timing functions are created in the following order Enable Software Licensing for Syncjack PTP features Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is In Service Edit an Ethernet Port s Delay Asymmetry setting Create a Telecom Slave Create Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP Create Edi
162. right click on Feature Management and selecting Edit Feature In addition to configuring SyncJack options TIE History stats are available in the SyncJack application Clock Accuracy Parameters Create Edit a Clock Probe A Clock Probe may be created by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu expanding System NE 1 and Clock Accuracy in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the Clock Probes entity and selecting Create Clock Probe To edit an existing Clock Probe enter a right click on the Clock Probe entity Clock Probe 1 1 and select Edit To delete a Transparent Clock enter a right click on the Clock Probe entity Clock Probe 1 1 and select Delete then select OK Table 58 Create Edit Clock Probe Parameter Settings Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Clock Probe Clock Probe Index Number is automatically indexed but Index Create is user editable 1 32 only Name A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 15 characters identify this entity This string can be up to 15 printable blank ASCII characters long Reference Defines the reference source for the Clock Probe Network References available are presented in a drop down list Port 1 1 1 1 Access Port 1 1 1 1 BITS IN 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 PPS 1 1 1 2 GPS 1 1 1 1 SYNC 1 1 1 1 514 I
163. server The IP address of the server a valid username password and configfile name are required for either get or put operations Go to Step 1 Enter the following command load lt configfile name gt Where configfile name is the an existing configfile Go to Step 1 Enter the following command show lt configfile name gt Where configfile name is an existing configfile Go to Step 1 Enter the following command description lt configfile name gt lt description gt Where configfile name is an existing configfile The description can be up to 127 characters long ASCII with no spaces or question marks unless the text string is in quotes Installation and Operations Manual 259 Database and Configuration Files ADVA Jon aw ws a Optical Networking Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Go to Step 1 Enter the following command remove lt configfile name gt Where configfile name is an existing configfile Go to Step 1 If configuration changes were implemented using this procedure ver ify the changes then save the configuration using the Create a Data base Backup on p 244 procedure End of Procedure 260 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Configuration File Procedure Using eVision The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN
164. shown in the following figure 266 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 160 Copy System Default Settings From Remote Web View om ia ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v E 5 D MW E System Copy System Default Settings From Remote E NE 1 E Synchronization Method Communications File Transfer Method Web f Alarm Attributes E Administration HTTP Transfer Upgrade Database Remote File No file selected Default Database a Cancel OK Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Step3 Determine the next step Desired File Transfer Method Then Web HTTP Continue with the next step FTP SFTP or SCP Go to Step 5 Step 4 Enter the path to the file to copy or browse to the file location then click on OK The file is copied from the source location and the Detail Pane indi cates when the file transfer is 100 complete End of Procedure Step5 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the following figure The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP views are identical Installation and Operations Manual 267 a ADVA 7J E a m Wa u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking Figure 161 Copy System Default Settings From Remote SCP View
165. software upgrade process If scheduled activation is chosen it is possible to cancel the activation any time before the activation occurs If validation timing is set the user must accept the new load by the time set or the NE automatically reverts to the previous load upgrade Any resource that is cached by the browser may have to be refreshed if that resource is different from one release to another amp It is recommended to perform a refresh of the browser after every SW 154 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Activation causes the NE to reset which temporarily interrupts traffic and can cels all active user sessions During the software upgrade process it is desirable to know the status of the upgrade The SP 100 provides standing conditions to supply this need By default these conditions are set with a Notification Code of Not Reported and thus are only visible by selecting the Maintenance Application System view and selecting the Conditions List tab in the Details Pane If the user wants to see the status conditions dynamically while using the Upgrade or Database detail views edit the Notification Codes for SWDL and Data Base Condition Types to Not Alarmed This causes the conditions to display in the Alarm Pane at the bottom of the GUI window See Table 20 on p 155 Also eVision does not show the settings for Scheduled Activation or Validation Timer once these se
166. the Sync ID option Disabled Enabled QL Mode Sync ID Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or disabled for Quality Level QL Mode This option is only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports when this option is set to Enabled When enabled on receive side port shall PEER the Synchronization Status Messages SSM slow protocol PDUs and take appropriate action When enabled on transmit side port shall periodically once a second transmit QL TLV information PDUs When disabled on receive side port shall terminate and discard any SSM slow protocol PDUs When disabled on transmit side port shall not transmit any SSM slow protocol PDUs Selects an external driver for PTP If Sync Reference is set to Disabled AND SYNC 1 1 1 1 is selected then SYNC 1 1 1 1 is used to drive PTP If Sync Reference is set to Enabled then only None is applicable Sync ID is not editable when an SOOC is associated with the TS Disabled Enabled None SYNC 1 1 1 1 498 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 48 Create Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Assumed QL Assumed QL Specifies the assumed Quality Level QL QL NONE on the interface Only applicable for Synchronous QL PRC Ethernet capable ports Q
167. the probes should be accurate by at least one order of magni tude compared to the signal under test e when using GPS as a ref erence the time error generated by the GPS GNSS receiver PRTC can be up to 100 nsec according to G 8272 therefore the TE TIE MTIE can be effected by the GPS reference time error and wan der Note The Syncjack suite is comprised on Syncjack Network Management System NMS and Syncjack embedded applications see Figure 5 on p 31 30 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Figure 5 SyncJack Suite SyncJack Suite SyncJack embeded SyncJack NMS SyncProbe Syncjack module Syncjack NMS is used for collecting and presentation of the Syncjack informa tion Syncjack embedded is an application that runs on a device This applica tion may be ported to an Fiber Service Platform FSP 150CC NID device such as the GE206V Syncjack module or may be implemented as a Standalone device SP 100 Syncjack is a collection of monitoring and measurement tools that allows main tenance and performance monitoring of synchronization services SP 100 is a low cost Synchronization Network testing and monitoring device that runs Syncjack applications SP 100 has the following properties One Network Port and one Access Port interface PTP functionality Telecom Slave Boundary Clock Master Clock e Support for Syncjack applicatio
168. the selected synchronization input s fails the SP 100 product automatically switches either to holdover or free running Holdover is used if the internal clock was locked to the reference The accuracy of the internal clock is 4ppm and the performance in hold over mode meets the requirements identified in ITU T G 8262 Option 1 Free running is used if the internal clock was not locked to the selected reference The switchover can occur as soon as the fault condition is detected or after a configurable hold over timer has elapsed Synchronization source switchover can be triggered by physical link defects LoS or changes in the received quality level SSM QL The BITS output CLK and PPS ports can feed legacy devices or synchroniza tion equipment such as SSUs or SASEs The BITS OUT and CLK ports can be assigned a SSM QL In the diagrams below the SP 100 distributes the frequency reference to a leg acy base station via BITS output port and to a new generation base station via a Synchronous Ethernet Sync E interface 44 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Figure 17 Frequency Distribution via BITS Output Port and Sync E Interface Office A Expected SSU L Received SSU T MGMT LAN CLKIN PPSIN CLK PPS GPS ME o o 000 If the synchronization quality of the BITS CLK or PPS output port falls below the configured SSM QL value the port can be switched off squelche
169. the system clock selector list for this condition to exist Verify synchronization network and provisioning Minor N A N A Sync QL Invalid Synchronization Quality Level Invalid The Ethernet port receives Synchronization Status Messaging SSM slow protocol messages whose specified Quality Level is invalid The Ethernet port s QL Mode attribute must be configured as enabled for this condition primitive to exist Verify synchronization network and provisioning Minor N A N A Bandwidth Exceeds Negotiated Speed Access Port only Bandwidth Exceeds Negotiated Speed Verify provisioning and adjust accordingly Minor Major Facility Red Sync Reference Wait To Restore A Sync Reference has been restored and is in WTR timing No Action Required Minor N A N A Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seiInquiy wey BuIy10MI198N e911dO 7m ae E Pa WAU enue y suonyeledo pue uoneljeysu Lev Table 31 Network Port and Access Port Alarms Continued E Description NSA Default SA Default LED Condivan ype Probable Cause TI Frocsdurg Notification Notification Indication Sync Reference A Sync Reference has been locked out Test the Locked Out Sync Locked Out Usually due to failure configuration Reference and remove lock s Minor N A N A changes planned or maintenance out when reference is fully operati
170. time To delete a Master Clock enter a right click on the Master Clock entity and select Delete Table 53 Create Edit Master Clock Parameter Settings Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Master Clock Index Create only The index number of the Boundary Clock One Master Clock may be created per system Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long pign Clock Identity The Master Clock s Clock Identity Entry is 16 HEX varies Create only characters Administrative Enables or disables the Boundary Clock See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management PTP Domain This PTP domain number is used in the domain Number Number Create field of the PTP header in the PTP packet 0 127 only Priority 1 Priority 1 based on IEEE 1588v2 0 255 128 Priority 2 Priority 2 based on IEEE 1588v2 0 255 128 Timing Clock Eid The timing reference of the Master Clock Create only drop down list Installation and Operations Manual 507 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA J E a wl Y Optical Networking Create Edit a Master Clock Interface A Master Clock Interface may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP from the Applications
171. to 64 characters blank PTP Flow Point Create only PTP Flow Point Identifier to associate with this Ordinary Clock Slave Port The Service Flow associated with Flow Point and SOOC must be the same drop down list of provisioned PTP Flow Point IDs Installation and Operations Manual 505 a ADVA 7J E a m Wa u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking Create Edit a Boundary Clock A Boundary Clock may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP from the Applications menu expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the NE 1 entity and selecting Create Boundary Clock To edit a Boundary Clock enter a right click on the Boundary Clock entity e g BOUNDARY CLOCK 1 1 and select Edit A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time To delete a Boundary Clock enter a right click on the Boundary Clock entity and select Delete Table 52 Create Edit Boundary Clock Parameter Settings Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Boundary Clock The index number of the Boundary Clock One Boundary Index Create Clock may be created per system 1 only Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters
172. various ranges in between Class 1 AEL CAUTION Do not touch the backplane under any circumstances when power is applied WARNING This product contains Electro Static Sensitive Devices A Appropriate anti static handling precautions should be followed i e IEC 61340 5 1 1998 Preparing for Installation Before physically installing the FSP 150SP the following tasks must be com pleted Verify site readiness See Verifying Site Readiness Ensure that all cables tools and equipment required for installation are readily available See Requirements on p 76 Unpack and inspect the FSP 150SP equipment See Unpack and Inspect the FSP 150SP Equipment on p 80 Verifying Site Readiness Before installation ensure that the site is suitable Check the items listed below If any check fails rectify the problem before con tinuing If the FSP 150SP is to be mounted in a rack Is a rack available and is there sufficient space in it Height 44mm Width 220 mm without brackets Depth 212 mm 74 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation The chassis is designed for passive fanless air cooling The number of units that can be stacked are determined by the environment the unit will be installed in not the unit type that will be installed The following are requirements for maintaining internal temperatures within design limits When units are in
173. verify entry Select the desired Clock Probe entity entities in the Selection Tree and the Status tab to observe the Syncjack Schedule State and test progress State indicates whether the test is Not Scheduled Failed Waiting Scheduled Future Running or Completed A Clock Probe Status pane displays Installation and Operations Manual 351 SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 214 View Clock Probe State Running File Application axu 8 E ala Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph l NE Clock Accuracy Clock Probes Cl eu Histor i Tests Result y Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 w WA NA NA f Clock Analysis 1000000 0 2 N A N A N A PTP Clock Probes 0 5 N A N A N A a 8 oK oK PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 om A ae OF OK History Estimations 5 8 OK OK TS 1 1 T 10 12 OK oK Ss 20 NA N A N A E PTP Network Analysis w 50 N A N A N A PTP Network Probes E mw 100 mwa N A N A E Syncjack Schedules 200 wa wa wa 500 N A N A A SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 in 1000 N A 1 N A N A FE Result Analysis 2000 N A N A N A MTIE comparison as 5000 N A N A N A a rt Raw Data Collection zoo NA NA WA 50000 MA N A N A iy bal zpr mjor mpa 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec y 7 Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name ClkProbe1 State Running Running Failed Coun
174. viciosa as ha 4 99 Time of Day Cabl s ce e Pee dee Aaa Maa 99 Install SFPs and Route Optical Cables ooooo ooo 100 Install SFP Interfaces 2684080225825 orent ti eR ee whee eee we 100 Route Fiber Optic Cables 1 2 aa es 103 Connect Power Cables and Apply Power 0 000 oo ooo ee es 104 Connect Optional Earth Frame Ground Cable 105 Connect AC Power 1 o 107 Connect 48 VDC Power saaana naaa aa es 108 Connect 24 VDC Power iva ea ee iv eee Saw eS eee Bare es 110 Start Up LED Sequence aannaaien a 112 ED SCAR i Shim GG oe deidades 114 Installation and Operations Manual 5 ADVA VO E VUE wl Y Optical Networking Power On L mp TeSt iii a A ee ee 115 Measure Optical Power 0 aa a es 115 Optical Attenuation aca cb bad we heey ae eee ewe eb iiaeiai 115 Clean Fiber CONNGCHONS xs 22486 ee ee ek eK ME aa eS 116 Precautions When Connecting Fiber Optic CableS 116 Connect Fiber Cables to Access Port or Network Port 117 To Power Off na aa pacca ers Son es ieee ee ape Se ree Seeded eck gee oe 117 Connector Pin Assignments evitas e be WEAR AAA AR 118 Power Supply Unit Connector Pin Assignments 118 LAN Connector Pin Assignments 0050509 ld A E A 120 Serial Console Port Connector Pin Assignments 0 ooo o 121 RJ 48c BITS Connector Pin Description and Assignments 122 Time of Day TOD C
175. y FTP Enabled y Release Version 6 1 1 049 HTTP i Enabled w DCN IP Address 10 10 35 98 HTTPS i Enabled A DCN Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 SSL Cipher Strength Low DCN DHCP Enabled scp Enabled y DCN DHCP Role DHCP Client E Gateway IP Address 1 10 1032 sele Enabled z Management Traffic Bridging D ola Serial Port Auto Log Off Enabled Mgmt Traffic Bridging Security D SFTP 3 Enabled x Proxy ARP Disabled y Si Enabled z System Up Time 1 hr 53 mins 14 secs Telnet Date 1 2014 02 Cyyyy mm dd Authentication Traps lr Time 19 20 26 hh mm ss CLI Security Prompt Disabled y System Time Of Day Local m SNMP Engine ID 800009f0030080ea39d2c0 Source TOD Clock None Configured v Cancel Apply OK Step2 The user can change the system level CLI prompt prefix set Manage ment Traffic Bridging Management Traffic Bridging Security Proxy ARP Date Time System Time of Day Source TOD Clock FTP HTTP HTTPS SSL Cipher Strength SCP Serial Port Serial Port Auto Log Off SFTP SSH Telnet Authentication Traps CLI Security Prompt and SNMP Engine ID For information on these system options see System Configuration on p 445 162 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning The System identity information that is not available for editing on this amp screen Name Description Location Contact is the same identity information that displays i
176. 0 performs a Power On Lamp Test This lamp test occurs during the module start up sequence see LED Start Up on p 114 During the test all module indicators illuminate for two seconds and then the indicators return to normal operation dual color LEDs will light a mix of colors i e Red Green will be Orange Measure Optical Power Using an optical power meter calibrated for the appropriate wavelength check the power budgets and the transmit levels of optical Access and Network Inter face connections by performing the following procedure for each Procedure Step 1 Take optical power measurements for the Tx port the Rx fiber before insertion Step 2 Compare the optical power measurements made and add attenua tion if necessary see Optical Attenuation on p 115 End of Procedure Optical Attenuation When making optical power measurements the following guidelines generally apply For Access Interface connections the power measured at the Rx input should be within the range of the Access ports Rx level the power measured at the input to the customer equipment should be within the range of the customer equipment s Rx level For Network Interface connections the Rx input should be within the range of the Network ports Rx level In some cases it is necessary to attenuate the optical signal power to meet the specification of the SP 100 see the FSP 150 Ethernet Access Compatibility Matrix
177. 00 detects polarity reversal and does not power up when the WARNING ache polarity is reversed 108 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Remove the cover from the source power terminal strip Connect the following wires to the source DC power supply terminals Verify that all power terminal connections are tight and that no strands of wire are shorting terminals together Wire size is 16 AWG for SP 100 North American application e Black Battery Return wire to the terminal e Green yellow Ground wire to the GND terminal e Red 48V Office Battery wire to the terminal European application Blue Battery Return wire to the terminal e Green yellow Ground wire to the GND terminal Grey 48V Office Battery wire to the terminal DTAG application e Black Battery Return wire to the terminal Green yellow Ground wire to the GND terminal e Blue Office Battery wire to the terminal Repeat Step 4 for a second source DC power supply if applicable Route the wire harness to the SP 100 Do Not insert the power con nectors at the SP 100 see Figure 38 on p 108 They will be inserted later during the power up procedure Reconnect the office power source reinstall fuses reset breakers or turn on power supply Use a volt meter to verify the power and ground at the source DC power supply terminals Connect the p
178. 1 E Alarm Attributes Step 18 Configuration Identification Entity ID OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 Alias TS1 Identity 0080ea33b0a000000000 State Administrative IS Operational Normal Secondary ACT Configuration PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Port State Slave Go to Step 1 Installation and Operations Manual 217 a ADVA Sa ale v 7 VA w YA Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP cores Networking Edit an Ethernet Port s Delay Asymmetry Setting Step 19 Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu Expand the System NE 1 and NTESP100 entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step 20 Enter a right click on the Ethernet Port entity and select Edit An Edit PTP Network or Access Port screen displays Figure 112 Edit PTP Network Port Delay Asymmetry File Application v EA x 5 D U Syst a ed Edit PTP Network Port E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E E1000 e EEE Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 reate 3 E1000 Alias TS 1 1 a State E Alarm Attributes Administrative IS Secondary ACT Operational Normal Configuration Delay Asymmetry 0 ms Cancel Apply OK Step 21 Enter the following desired delay value in nanoseconds and select OK Step 22 Goto Step 1 218 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 O
179. 1 E NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 DCN eth0 3G Modem E Synchronization E NE 1 E NTESP100 SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 BITS 1 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN PPS 1 1 1 2 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1i21 1 E Communications DCN eth0 3G DCN E Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP E Administration H Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Interface Logged in as root alx B gt 5 Configuration Resources Identification Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 Alias SP100 35 98 State Administrative IS Secondary ACT Operational Normal Physical Inventory Name FSP150SP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 Physical Address 00 80 e3 39 d2 c0 Software Revision 6 1 1 049 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 USI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 Environmental Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 mv Settings SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled Notification Code Description Date Time To access eVision the FSP 150SP must first be configured with an Internet Pro tocol IP address and subnet mask Details on how to do this are provided in Provision Communications on p 274 eVision provides the user with the following major applications Alarms Pane The Alarms Pane provides quick visibility and access to current alarms Alarms are color coded based on severity The Alarms P
180. 120 Time Created 2014 02 03 22 09 37 Select the Dynamic Slave Statistics tab to view Receive and Transmit statistics Installation and Operations Manual 233 a ADVA Sa ale v 7 VA w u Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP ma Networking Figure 129 Dynamic Slave Statistics File Application Ba xB LP amp System 3 B syste Configuration Statistics NE 1 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 Summary 15 Minute 1Day Thresholds MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves Clear Refresh Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds E Dyn si Receive Statistics Delay Req Messages Dropped o Signaling Messages Received 18 Delay Req Messages Received 146186 Times Announce lease duration expired 15 TS 1 1 PTP messages with invalid PTP TLV length 0 Times Delay_Resp lease duration expired 0 SOOC 1 1 1 PTP messages with unknown PTP TLV type 0 Times Sync lease duration expired o Alarm Attributes sooc Transmit Statistics Telecom Slave Announce Messages Generated 279 Signaling Messages Generated 49 Delay Resp Messages Generated 146186 Sync Messages Generated 146186 Step 74 If the Dynamic Slave entity is not present or statistics are not indicat ing message receive and transmit statistics as expected troubleshoot accordingly Step 75 At the FSP 150 remote node select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port State Wait until the Port Status changes to
181. 6 Seconds Sync Message Rate 8 Packets per Second Delay Response Message Rate 8 Packets per Second Status Announce Negotiated Lease Duration s 300 Announce Remaining Lease Duration s 265 Sync Negotiated Lease Duration s 300 Sync Remaining Lease Duration s 266 Delay Response Negotiated Lease Duration s 300 Delay Response Remaining Lease Duration s 265 Time Created 2013 09 13 22 04 32 Step 67 Select the Static Slave Statistics tab to view Received and Transmit statistics Figure 126 Static Slave Statistics EN File Application A x ES E System Configuration Statistics El NE 1 E MASTER CLOCK INTERFA Summary 15 Minute 1Day Thresholds MASTER VIRTUAL POR Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds E Static Slaves clear Bi Refresh STATIC SLAVE 1 1 Receive Statistics Dynamic Slaves a Delay Req Messages Dropped Signaling Messages Received A NTESPI0O Delay Req Messages Received Times Announce lease duration expired E 1000 N 1 PTP messages with invalid PTP TLV length Times Delay_Resp lease duration expired NET PTP FLOW PT 1 PTP messages with unknown PTP TLV type Times Sync lease duration expired E 1000 4 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 Transmit Statistics A TS i 1 Announce Messages Generated 29 Signaling Messages generated 6 E SOOC 1 1 1 DelayResp messages generated 3576 Sync Messages Generated 3577 OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Alarm Attributes am J Is
182. 7 To enable 3G Modem PIN right click on the 3G Modem entity and select Enable PIN The following screen displays Figure 185 Enable 3G Modem PIN File Application v xX B gt 6V E System a Enable PIN El NE 1 El NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 OA di Eney ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 DCN eth0 allas E 3G Mor i i Operation iil Synchroniza Edit Configuration p Communicat AA Input PIN DCN ethi Disable PIN 3G DCN Change PIN You have 0 attempts left E Managem PIN Authentication SNMP Unlock with PUK E Administration Cancel Apply OK Step8 Enter the PIN provided by wireless ISP Click OK When the PIN is Enabled if the 3G Modem is unplugged or the system reboots the 3G Modem SIM must be unlocked by entering the PIN upon each occurrence Note Step9 Goto Step 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step Step 10 To disable 3G Modem PIN right click on the 3G Modem entity and select Disable PIN The following screen displays Figure 186 Disable 3G Modem PIN ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application B X BE DS El System a Disable PIN E NE 1 El NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 i000 4 1 m ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 DCN eth0 co 3G Modo 5 Edit Configuration Operation E Synchroniza Enable PIN E Communicat Input PIN cen er a 3G DCN Change PIN You have 0 attempts left E Managem PIN Authenticat
183. 8009 MEIATTR_SYNC_OPER_TYPE 8010 MEIATTR_SYNC_REF_REQ 8011 MEIATTR_SYNC_DOMAIN 8012 MEIATTR_SELECTION_MODE 8192 Invalid message received 8193 Invalid user 8194 Unable to update profile 8195 Internal error 8196 Internal error 8197 Internal error IPC 8198 Internal error 8199 Internal error EP 8200 Invalid user name received 8201 insufficient privilege level SNMP SPECIFIC 20480 Attribute is deprecated 398 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response 20481 VLAN ID is not specified 20482 Invalid Data for Cable Length Benchmark Required format xx yy Alarm Attributes Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing All problems causing an alarm event are soaked for 2 5 seconds before the alarm indication is raised The problem causing the alarm event must clear for 10 seconds before the alarm indication is cleared All FSP 150SP System alarms and default notification codes are shown in Table 28 on p 401 For all FSP 150SP Access and Network alarms see Table 31 on p 417 For Mainte nance End Point MEP alarms see Table 5 21 Each of the following tables contain a description of the alarm condition probable cause and suggested trouble clearing procedure To clear alarm conditions it is suggested that you start by using the trouble clearing procedure in Recommended Steps for Trou ble Clearing on p 381 Alarm Profile Notification Codes The user
184. 9 Standard or Extended Configuration on p 88 23 Standard or 1013904011 and Mounting Dual SP 100 via a Extended 1013904012 23 Standard or Extended ETSI Extended 1013904011 and ETSI Extended Configuration 1013904012 on p 90 82 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Table 10 SP 100 Mounting Procedures Single Dual Mounting Kit s SP 100 SP 100 Mounting Type Required Procedure X Wall Mounted 1013904013 Mounting the SP 100 to a Wall on p 92 X Cabinet or Desk N A Installing a Standalone Chassis on p 94 Installation and Operations Manual 83 Physical Installation a ADVA J E VUE WN Y Optical Networking Mounting a Single FSP SP 100 via a Standard or Extended 19 Configuration Prior to mounting the SP 100 please check the mounting package contents carefully One mounting kit is required The SP 100 Single Rack Mounting Brackets kit part number 1013904010 The following components will be used in this procedure One 19 mounting bracket short One 19 mounting bracket long Four M3x5 CSK POZI screws Four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or Four M6x20 screws and four M6 nuts o 0 9 0 1 MECHANICAL LOADING When mounting the equipment in a rack ensure that a hazardous condition is not created by uneven mechanical loading 2 Ensure that reliable grounding of the rack mounted equipment is WARNING maintained Particular at
185. 911dO am A E A WAU enue y suonyeledo pue uoneljeysu LOr Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued attribute must be configured as enabled and the Expected QL attribute must be configured as anything besides None for this condition to exist vs Description E NSA Default SA Default LED eondinon Type Probable Cause ls od Notification Notification Indication Loss of Frame BITS Loss of Frame Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Verify and troubleshoot possible signal mismatch In order for proper BITS IN and BITS OUT inter operate with source equipment test sets the user must manually match the FSP 150SP s Network Clock Type with the BITS line type Minor N A N A If a T1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 2 If a 2048kHz or E1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 1 Loss of Signal BITS Loss of Signal BITs signal Verify and troubleshoot clock Minor N A N A is lost reference connection Sync QL Invalid Synchronization Quality Level Verify and troubleshoot clock Minor N A N A Invalid reference Sync QL Mismatch Synchronization Quality Level Verify and troubleshoot clock Mismatch The BITS IN port reference receives SSM messages whose specified Quality Level is lower than the Expected QL The BITS IN port s QL Mode Minor N A N A s po 10113 sesneyd 9 qEqOId pue sjuang
186. A 7J E am WM u PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring Optical Networking PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring Overview The SP 100 PTP feature provides Performance Monitoring PM for PTP Flow points and the Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC Additionally the SyncJack feature provides stats for the Telecom Slave TS Clock Probes Clock Accu racy PTP Clock Probes Clock Analysis and the PTP Network Probe PTP Network Analysis as well has history results for Clock Probes Clock Accuracy and PTP Clock Probes Clock Analysis These PMs follow the same patterns and rules as the Ethernet interface PMs see Network Access Port Perfor mance Monitoring on p 321 The Performance Monitoring PM feature enables in service non intrusive sys tem monitoring to aid in diagnosing and isolating issues that may occur during operation PM enables users to detect and react to potential failures prior to a customer outage In addition to providing traditional SNMP MIB Etherstats Syn cjack provides Performance Parameters PPs and features similar to those found in traditional services This allows Ethernet service assurance to be inte grated into a carrier s existing service assurance infrastructure Performance Monitoring view allows you to view performance monitoring counts and view PM thresholds Performance monitoring thresholds can be edited and registers can be initialized for users with proper user access permission l
187. A Tau sec 20000 N A N A N A N A 50000 N A N A N A N A 100000 N A N A N A N A End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 379 ADVA 7J E DMI wa SyncJack Testing Optical Networking 380 Installation and Operations Manual ADVA VO a MAD ws a Optical Networking Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Introduction This chapter contains information supporting alarms and events generated by the system their meaning and suggested trouble clearing methods This chap ter contains the following information Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing Obtaining Technical Assistance Alarm Attributes Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing Alarm Masking Recommended Steps for Trouble Clearing In the event that alarms are raised after commissioning the SP 100 this proce dure is provided to assist maintenance personnel in identifying the probable cause and clearing the alarm Procedure Step 1 Ensure that an interface device such as a craft interface is con nected to the network and is operating correctly before continuing Step2 Establish a communication connection to the FSP 150SP and log on See Logging On and Off on p 130 Step3 Observe the Alarms Pane to view all current alarms and record the alarm severity See Getting Familiar with eVision on p 133 for an overview of the eVision web browser management tool components
188. A D D E Syste i i yst Egit SE Edit Audit Log E NE Edit Security Log Edit Alarm Log EA Sa Syslog Disabled x Local Logging Enabled Edit Syslog Edit ACL Cancel Apply OK Sy Edit Banner Configuration Step 4 For Syslog Enable select Enabled to include Alarm Log messages in the Syslog or Disabled to not include Alarm Log messages in the Syslog for Local Logging select Enabled or Disabled to Enable or Disable sending Alarm messages to the local log Alarm Log tab and click on OK Step5 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit Audit Log and the following screen displays Figure 65 Edit Audit Log View 2 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application XB o amp E Syste Edit Audit Log 6 NE Edit System a Edit Security Log Configuration Edit Alarm Log Edit Audit Log Syslog Disabled y Local Logging Enabled y Edit Syslog Edit ACL Cancel Apply OK Sy Edit Banner Step6 For Syslog select Enabled to include Audit Log messages in the Syslog or Disabled to not include Audit Log messages in the Syslog for Local Logging select Enabled or Disabled to Enable or Disable sending Alarm messages to the local log Alarm Log tab and click on OK Step 7 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit Sys log and the following scr
189. A FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A 5 D y System Transfer Upgrade NE 1 El Synchronization Mode Software Download Communications Status In progress Alarm Attributes E Administration Upgrade Database E Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Ej Software Licensing Step 9 When the Status changes from In progress to Success right click on Upgrade in the selection tree pane and select Install The follow ing screen displays Figure 58 Software Install Query File Application A ES ER x ny E System Install Upgrade E NE 1 Ej Synchronization Install new software now Communications El Alarm Attributes Gane ci E Administration Upgre gt 5 Transfer Data Defa Install Defa Activate conf Validate ig Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Step 10 Click OK and the screen shows a progress bar When the install completes when the Status changes from In progress to Suc cess right click on Upgrade in the selection tree pane then select Activate An Activate Upgrade screen displays as shown in the fol lowing figure 158 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 59 Software Activate File Application v A x FA D e E System Activate Upgrade E NE 1
190. ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring File Application A x E D Co NE 1 Summary 15 Minute i Day Thresholds NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds Clear Refresh Receive Statistics 1024 to 1518 Octets Frames Received Drop Events 128 to 255 Octets Frames Received Fragments 1519 to MTU Octets Frames Received Jabbers 256 to 511 Octets Frames Received Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Discarded 512 to 1023 Octets Frames Received Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Processed 64 Octets Frames Received Multicast Packets Received 65 to 127 Octets Frames Received Octets Received Average Bit Rate Received Oversize Packets Received Broadcast Packets Received Packets Received CRC Aligned Errors Unavailable Seconds Collisions Undersize Packets Received Transmit Statistics Average Bit Rate Transmitted Frames Sent Broadcast Frames Sent Multicast Frames Sent Bytes Sent Unicast Frames Sent Ether Stats Oversize Frames Discarded Installation and Operations Manual 327 ADVA 7J NE an WS Y Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Optical Networking Figure 196 15 Minute PM Counts View of a Network Port File v Application v A X D G E System Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 NE 1 a Summary 15 Minute 1Day Thresholds El NTES El Network Port E 4 La r TS ABR RX ABR TX ESBF ESBP ESBS ESC ESCAE ES
191. ARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOC UMENT UNLESS A SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING OR THE APPLI CABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHERWISE ADVA Optical Networking SE 5755 Peachtree Industrial Blvd Norcross Georgia 30092 USA Phone 1678 728 8600 Fax 1 678 728 8788 http www advaoptical com ADVA VO E ea wa Y Optical Networking Table of Contents Table of Contents 000 00 een a D List of FIQUFOS o cria bw eee eee ee ES List OF Tables ica Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview 000coo 23 Document OvervieW es 25 AUN eek wee ee Pee ta as a A 26 Related Documentati0N o o ooooooconear nea 26 Documentation Feedback sasaaa nana 26 Obtaining Technical Assistance oooooo nooo ooo 26 SP 100 Product Overview aana aaa a a a 28 eVision Web Browser Management Tool saasaa auaa aaa 29 Command Line Interface rara ee eee eee een A ews 30 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 30 Syncjack SUIS aa tata ae a A ea ee OE a as a 30 Tapping Modes cs aude a ede MN Se ee EN Ra eek Ye a 33 Parallel MOE 0 sua tee e 28 So ee a OS eaten orn Fee ae S 34 Tester Mod siestas crisi BASS oe ow Se ws 35 Clock ACCURACY yx acd acu go wai d a ena ae eM ee eta ae ee ke a Aca ae Mele i 36 Reference and Source Signal ais eG yee Boles ce ke oe ae eee a 37 TIE Post Processing scale ws He ed as ende ed 37 Clock Accuracy Status GUI
192. AU enue y suoneledo pue uoneyjeysu 607 Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued SP 100 supplied power 3 3V Ensure sufficient sky view is available above the antenna Replace antenna eds Description NSA Default SA Default LED Condition Type Probable Cause Trouble cleaning Procsgure Notification Notification Indication BITS Out Port Output Squelch Quality Level Squelch The Verify and troubleshoot clock BITS OUT port is squelched reference due to the system s QL being lower than the BITS OUT port s configured Squelch QL attribute The BITS OUT port s Minor N A N A QL Mode attribute must be configured as enabled and the Squelch QL attribute must be configured as anything besides None for this condition to exist GPS Port GPS Antenna Fail GPS Antenna Fail This Ignore if Operational state is Normal condition may be reported dukio normal GPS Receiver If operational state is not Normal operation when active antenna Check number of tracked Satel draws less current in such lites If 0 check antenna cable is cases like connection with securely connected to the splitter or long antenna cable antenna input Ensure the antenna required power is compatible with the Minor N A N A S9PO 10113 SESNEI aiqeqoig pue sjuang suuely Jaeldey Olp enue y suoneledo pue uogejjesu Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued Condition Typ
193. Applications Measurement of the accuracy of the phase and frequency recovered by the clock under test with respect to a reference timing signal Enable mode BC GM Mode MC Figure 8 Tester Mode Operation Installation and Operations Manual 35 Clock Accuracy Optical Networking Clock Accuracy The Clock Accuracy function measures the accuracy of the phase or frequency recovered by the clock under test with respect to a measurement reference tim ing signal Two Clock Probes are supported Clock Probes are functional entities that perform Time Interval Error TIE measurements Both can be active at any time Clock probes measure TIE between a source timing signal and a measurement reference timing signal and can maintain up to sixteen 16 historical TIE mea surements TIE results are processed and can be presented as Maximum Time Interval Error MTIE Plots MTIE results Vs standardized masks Phase Offset Calculates and presents phase offset results Figure 9 Clock Probe MTIE Results File Application xX Bo amp Sh Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Tests Result History Results 10000000 n Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 aa NIA WN WA CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 1mm o2 NA NA MA Clock
194. Apply OK Installation and Operations Manual 297 a ADVA Va E am WN u Provision Communications Optical Networking Edit the appropriate data Click on OK Step 14 Goto Step 1 End of Procedure Configure Source Address The FSP 150SP can have multiple IP addresses assigned when using manage ment tunnels in addition to or in place of the Management LAN interface Sys tem IP Address When management conditions or messages are sent over another interface it is often desirable or even necessary that the message be traceable to the Management LAN IP address rather than the address of the interface carrying the message Setting the Source Address ensures that this address will be used for all management functions for the unit For details on the settings and options for Source Address see Source Address Config Edit Source Address Config on p 472 The FSP 150SP supports the configuration of one VLAN based management tunnel on each Network or Access interface port The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN See Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded Procedure Step 1 Right click on Communications in the selection tree pane select Edit Source Address Config and the following screen displays
195. BE 1 1 Oo PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 O PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 2 Step 22 Select the Network Element entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Analysis and Global results via Dashboard meter E ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File y Application BxB oO amp E System sc Network Element NES E Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 SYNCIACK GLOBAL CLOCK PROBE 1 2 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 E Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 CLOCK ACCURACY CLOCK ANALYSIS PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis E Synejack Schedules SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 4 m r Step 23 To delete a SyncJack Schedule right click on the desired schedule under SyncJack Schedules and select Delete Schedule A Delete SyncJack Schedule pane appears Select OK Step 24 To delete a PTP Clock Probe History Result right click on the desired result under History Estimations and select Delete History Estima tion Figure 235 View Global and Clock Analysis Dashboard A confirmation screen appears Select OK 368 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 25 To delete a SyncJack PTP Clock Probe right click on the
196. Boundary Clock lt lt is 506 Create Edit a Master Clock durar ara eee eee e 507 Create Edit a Master Clock Interface 0 0 0 ooo 508 Installation and Operations Manual 11 a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Create Edit a Master Virtual POrt o oo 510 Create Edit a Static Slave 2460248846 e be whee Bawa ea ee 511 Edit Delete a Dynamic Slave oooooooo ooo o 513 SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules 0 000 eee aee 514 Clock Accuracy Parameter s sosa ered ee eaten ade eee oe 514 Create Edit a Clock Probe viu isa ee he ee Baers 514 Clock Analysis Parameters 0 00 ee ee es 516 Create Edit a PTP Clock Probe o oooooooo 516 Telecom Slave Le a a ee A RED a we 518 Edit Telecom Slave Analysis Parameters o oooooo ee 518 PTP Network Analysis Parameters o o o ooo ooo o 519 Create Edit a PTP Network Probe PTP Probe 519 Scheduled Synclack Activity SettingGS lt lt o o 521 RESUIEANAIYSIS sss a woi si ae da Be Mk a wl hae AE a oe A A 523 Configure MTIE Comparison Parameters o o 523 Edit Raw Data Collection Parameters oooooooo o 524 12 Installation and Operations Manual a ADVA vJ a WED a Optical Networking List of Figures Figure 1 SyncJack Dashboard Indicators o oo ooooo oo 23 Fig
197. CN H Management Tunnels SNMP Ej Administration Modem Configuration SIM Identification Entity ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 Alias 4 State Administrative Unassigned Secondary VAS Operational Outage Modem Vendor Name Model Serial Number IMEI Hardware Ver Firmware Ver Physical Configuration Connection Status Not Available Service Provider MTU 0 Max Speed z0 Current RSSI Not Available 3G Dail Up Configuration APN 8 Dial Not Available User Name Redial Timer 10 Sec Password Figure 184 3G Modem SIM Card Status ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration Elx B gt amp File Application v E System El NE 1 E NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 DCN etho 3G Modem E Synchronization Ej Communications DCN ethO 3G DCN E Management Tunnels SNMP E Administration Modem Configuration Identification Entity ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 Alias y SIM Status Not Inserted PIN PUK Status Not Available IMSI Current RSSI Not Available 306 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Table 21 SIM Card Status Description SIM Status Type Result Description SIM Status OK Unlocked status Network reject Invalid SIM Not inserted SIM not inserted PIN PUK Status Disabled PIN protection is disabled OK PIN protection is enabled and PIN code is correct Input PIN PIN authe
198. Clock Analysis Optical Networking e Standardized MTIE masks TCA generation for MTIE mask crossing and margin crossing events Clock Accuracy Status GUT The GUI provides an overall status of the Clock Accuracy function shown as Green Yellow or Red in the GUI The status of each configured Clock Probe is also provided see the following figure Figure 11 Clock Accuracy Status CLOCK ACCURACY Clock Probe Status CLOCK PROBE 1 1 O CLOCK PROBE 1 2 Clock Analysis The Clock Analysis function Assesses the performance of the internal clock recovery algorithm when a reference timing signal is not available e Provides status and statistics of the internal Slave clock Estimates the accuracy of the phase and frequency recovered by the clock under test with respect to a reference timing signal by analyzing timestamps in mirrored PTP event messages Frequency Performance Estimation Frequency Performance Estimation Uses a score for the assessment of the frequency recovery performance o Assigned based on the performance of the PTP network clock trace ability status OCXO stability device temperature change etc o Score can be in the range of 3 to 5 Score 5 Green o High confidence that the recovered frequency is within the performance target range 38 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Score 4 Yellow o Low confidence that the recovered frequency is wit
199. Configuration Files and select Copy From Remote The following screen displays Figure 156 Configuration Files Import ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v EA B gt 5 E System Copy Configuration File From Remote NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Method File Transfer Method Web HTTP Transfer Remote File Browse No file selected Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration F Cancel OK Create Transfer Log Copy from Remote E Software Licensing Installation and Operations Manual 263 Database and Configuration Files ADVA VO E emp wl Y Optical Networking Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Select the desired protocol and enter the configuration file name The selected file transfer protocol is used to move a configuration file from get a remote server The IP address of the server a valid user name password and configfile name are required if using FTP SFTP or SCP protocols Select OK Go to Step 2 Select Configuration Files then right click on the menu icon beside the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane The following screen displays Figure 157 Configuration Files Export ia ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A 5 D my E System NE 1 Synchronizatio
200. Control Protocol LCP Fail EFM RLS Remote Link Status Yellow EFM RCE Remote Critical Event Ethernet Electrical EFM Fail EFM Discovery Fail Access Port e Remote Failure Indication RFI Facilities Flashing Facility in loopback Yellow Dying Gasp e Link Deactivated Red Link Down Unisolated Cable Removed Cable Fault Auto Negotiation Fault Receive Jabber Installation and Operations Manual 69 SP 100 Hardware Description ADVA vJ E aap wa Optical Networking Table 4 Access Port Ethernet Facility LEDs Continued LED Name Color Definition Off Unassigned Green Assigned and no defects Link Control Protocol LCP Fail EFM RLS Remote Link Status Yellow EFM RCE Remote Critical Event Ethernet e Remote Failure Indication RFI Optical Access e SFP Mismatch Port Facilities Flashing Facility in loopback Yellow Dying Gasp Receive Jabber Red e SFP Removed e SFP Tx Fault Associated with the Optical Access Ethernet port are two LEDs Link and Rate as defined in the following table Table 5 Access Optical Ethernet Link and Rate LEDs Connector LED Color Definition SFP Off Unassigned Rate RT Yellow 100M Operation ed Green 1000M Operation KN Unassigned SFP not present Link off Activity e Link Down LK Green Working Link detected Flashing Traffic TX or R
201. Create PTP Flow Point File Application A x 5 a E System y Create PTP Flow Point E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E ELO Edit PTPFP ID 2 A alias 1S 1 1 Associated Port NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Le E Alarm Attributes AdminState Administrative S y Secondary None Operational Not Available Configuration PTP FlowPoint Type cos 0 Flow ID CIR 0 bps EIR 0 bps Buffer Size 0 KB VLAN Configuration Untagged Y Outer YLAN EtherType 0 hex Tag Inner YLAN1 EtherType 0 hex Tag y Inner VLAN2 EtherType 0 hex Tag Cancel Apply OK Step 58 Enter the following PTP Flow Point options a Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias b Select the desired Administrative State c Setthe PTP Flow Point Type to OC Master and select the desired Flow ID if required d Enter the desired COS CIR EIR and Buffer Size e Deselect the Untagged frame check box if Inner and or Outer VLAN tags need to be entered Select the desired Inner Outer VLAN tag check box es to allow tag entry then enter the desired EtherType and VLAN Tag s f Select OK A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity in the selection tree pane Step 59 Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view config uration details Step 60 Enter a right click on the Master Clock Interface entity and select Cre ate Master Virtual Port A Create M
202. Create Telecom Slave window displays Figure 103 Create Telecom Slave w ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File y Application B xX amp E System E NG Create Telecom Slave E Identification Create Boundary Clock Create Master Clock TS Index Boal a Alias 8 Clock Identity 0080ea33b0a00001 hex Create Telecom Slave EJ Alarm Attributes State Administrative Management y Secondary n a Operational n a TS Configuration PTP Domain Number B 0 Clock Recovery Mode Two Way Time Holdover Accuracy ns 5000 y Clock Recovery State Not Available Sync Configuration Sync Reference Disabled Network Clock Type Option 1 SDH Regional Clock QL Mode SI Disab Assumed QL gt QLEECI y Sync ID a Expected QL QLNONE y Received QL Not Available Cancel Apply OK Step4 Enter the following Telecom Slave options a Enter the desired Alias and Clock Identity b Select the desired Administrative State Select the desired Time Holdover Accuracy in nanoseconds and Clock Recovery Mode One Way frequency or Two Way fre quency and phase c Enter the desired PTP Domain Number Installation and Operations Manual 211 a ADVA Sa ale v 7 VA w YA Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP il Networking e Select the desired Sync Configuration options Sync ID is the PTP reference clock and can be free running None or the Sync clock SYNC 1
203. DE ESF ESFS ESJ ESMF_ ESMP ESO ESOF ESOP ESP ESP64 ESP65 current 13 00 00 12 45 00 12 30 00 12 15 00 12 00 00 11 45 00 11 30 00 11 15 00 11 00 00 10 45 00 10 30 00 10 15 00 10 00 00 09 45 00 09 30 00 09 15 00 09 00 00 08 45 00 08 30 00 08 15 00 08 00 00 07 45 00 07 30 00 07 15 00 07 00 00 06 45 00 06 30 00 Figure 197 Current PM Threshold View of a Network Port ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring File Application v A x E D D E NE 1 z Summary 15 Minute 1 Day NTESP100 E1000 N 1 NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 MT DESC DIR Loc 15MIN ABR RX Average Bit Rate Received Receive Near End o o ABR TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted Transmit Near End o o ESBF Broadcast Frames Sent Transmit Near End o o ESBP Broadcast Packets Received Receive Near End o o ESBS Bytes Sent Transmit Near End o o ESC Collisions Receive Near End o o ESCAE CRC Aligned Errors Receive Near End 37055 3557280 ESDE Drop Events None Near End 37055 3557280 ESF Fragments Receive Near End 370553557280 ESFS Frames Sent Transmit Near End o o ES Jabbers Receive Near End o o ESMF Multicast Frames Sent Transmit Nea
204. DV ns N A Minimum Syne Path Delay ns N A El Clock Analysis Average Mean Path Delay ns N A Number Of Forward RPDY Results In High Range o E PTP Clock Probes Average Reverse RPDV ns N A Number Of Forward RPDV Results In Low Range o PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Average Sync Path Delay nsi N A Number Of Forward RPDV Results In Medium Range 0 E History Estimations Maximum Mean Path Delay ns N A Number Of Reverse RPDV Results In High Range 0 Maximum Sync Path Delay ns N A Number Of Reverse RPDV Results In Low Range o PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT Minimum Forward RPDV ns N A Number Of Reverse RPDV Results In Medium Range 0 TS 1 1 Minimum Mean Path Delay ns N A Total Number Of Forward RPDV Results 0 El PTP Network Analysis Minimum Reverse RPDV ns N A Total Number Of Reverse RPDV Results 0 El PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Ej Synejack Schedules SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 air m Network Usability Score Statistics Forward Direction Total Time Forward Score 3 s O Total Time Forward Score 5 s 0 Total Time Forward Score 4 s 0 Reverse Direction Total Time Reverse Score 3 s 0 Total Time Reverse Score 5 s 0 Total Time Reverse Score 4 s 0 PTP Messages Statistics Delay Response Message Lost 0 Sync Messages Lost o Delay Response Message Received 0 SyncMessages Received 0 Step 12 Select the PTP Network Analysis entity in the Sel
205. DYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application v A x 5 U E System Create PTP Flow Point E NE 1 A NTESP100 Identification E1000 N4 Edi PTPFP ID 2 E1000 A e Alias E TS 1 1 Associated Port NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 E Alarm Attributes AdminState Administrative S Secondary None Operational Not Available Configuration 4 PTP FlowPoint Type OC Slave y cos 0 Flow ID ix CIR 0 bps EIR B 0 bps Buffer Size 0 KB LAN Configuration Untagged Y Outer VLAN EtherType 0 hex Tag E Inner VLAN1 EtherType 0 hex Tag M Inner VLAN2 EtherType 0 hex Tag Cancel Apply OK Installation and Operations Manual 213 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP ADVA VO E emp wz Y Optical Networking Step 10 Enter the following PTP Flow Point options Step 11 a Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias b Select the desired Administrative State c For Boundary Clock Master Clock set the PTP Flow Point Type to OC Master For Slave set the PTP Flow Point Type to OC Slave d Enter the desired COS CIR EIR and Buffer Size e Deselect the Untagged frame check box if Inner and or Outer VLAN tags need to be entered Select the desired Inner Outer VLAN tag check box es to allow tag entry then enter the desired EtherType and VLAN Tag s f Select OK A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity in the selection tree
206. Definition Secondary States ACT Entity is active Equipment and AINS Automatic in service Facilities DSBLD Disabled FAF Facility failure FLT Fault detected LPBK Loopback state MAINT Maintenance state MEA Mismatched equipment STBY Standby hot SGEO Supported entity outage UAS Unassigned UEQ Unequipped OAM Administration Disabled Disabled State Enabled Enabled OAM Discovery State Active Send Local Active send local Fault Fault detected Passive Wait Passive wait Send Any Send any Send Local Remote Send local remote Send Local Remote OK Send local remote OK File Services Status Cannot revert Cannot revert Failure Failure File not found File not found In progress In progress Install failed Installation failed Invalid file type Invalid file type Login failed Login failed No backup database There is no backup database No space left No disk space left No software to install There is no software to install Permission denied Permission denied Revert failed Revert failed Server unreachable Server unreachable Success Successful completion Software not installed Software not installed Upgrade failed Upgrade failed Validation timer not active Validation timer not active 434 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 36 State Codes a
207. Delay Response Receipt Timeout i als Master Sync Message Rate iy Master Sync Receipt Timeout 10 2 255 intervals Master Lease Duration E 300 60 1000 sec Cancel Apply OK Step 7 Enter the following SOOC options a Enter the desired Alias b Select the desired Administrative State c Select the Flow Identifier fixed at None Enter the Slave IP address and subnet mask Enter an Interface Name mandatory 212 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning f Enable or Disable Unicast Message Negotiation for FSP 150 Dynamic Remote Slave unit Enable Unicast Message Negotia tion g Enter the desired Unicast Timeout and Unicast Restart Timer h Select the desired Priority Mode and enter the desired Priority i Select the Master Clock Type and Master Delay Mechanism j Enter the Master Priority k Select the Master Protocol type and enter the Master Clock IP Address I Select the desired Master Clock Message Rates Duration Time out options m Select OK An SOOC entity appears below the Telecom Slave eniity in the selec tion tree pane Step 8 Select the SOOC entity to view configuration details Create a PTP Flow Point Step9 Expand the NTESP100 entity Enter a right click on the Network or Access Port associated with the Flow for the clock source and select Create PTPFP A Create PTP Flow Point screen displays Figure 105 Create PTP Flow Point ES A
208. Delete USM User Entry Then in the Details Pane select the USM User to delete from the selection box and click on OK Installation and Operations Manual 463 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E aap WN Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Dying Gasp Edit Dying Gasp SNMP Dying Dropdown list for each configured Target Address to Gasp Enable or Disable SNMP Dying Gasp on that Target No Target Addresses Address At System Defaults no Target Addresses Exist are configured Administration Users Add User Edit User or Edit Password User Name User Identifier log in name The new login name for the user account Must be at least 1 alphanumeric character long and no more than 32 alphanumeric 1 to 32 characters characters If the password security strength is set to high the minimum length of a User ID is 6 characters 7 e See Security Policy Spaces are not allowed The system supports three A i Edit Policy on levels of username and password security and is 467 dependent on the security policy setting See Security P Policy Edit Policy on p 467 The default Superuser f blank user ID is root Only a Superuser may create or delete a user ID This option is available when selecting Add User or Edit Password Pass
209. E 0 Subnet Mask ol of ol 0 Interface Name PTP Clock Type 3 One Step w Max Announce Message Rate 3 1 Packetper 1 Second w Delay Mechanism 2 End To End Max Sync Message Rate 3 32 Packets per Second w Max Slaves Supported A 1 Max Delay Response Message Rate 32 Packets per Second v Max Static Slaves Supported 0 Max Lease Duration 300 60 1000 sec Cancel OK Step 28 Enter the following Master Clock Interface options a Enter the desired Alias and Master Clock Interface Index ey Set the Administrative state to IS ig Select the desired IP Protocol a Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask o Enter the Interface Name mandatory Select enter the desired Priority Mode and Priority gt Select the desired PTP Clock Type and Delay Mechanism Q h Enter the number of Max Slaves Supported maximum number of Dynamic Slaves maximum number of Static Slaves and Max Static Slaves Supported i Select enter the remaining PTP options j Select OK Step 29 Expand the Boundary Clock entity in the selection tree The Master Clock Interface entity is present Step 30 Select the Master Clock Interface entity to verify entry details 220 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 31 Expand the NTESP100 entity Enter a right click on the Network or Access Port associated with the PTP F
210. FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on Page 5 276 Procedure Step 1 Click on the Maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Step 2 Determine the next step Desired Activity Then Perform Software Upgrade Continue with the next step Cancel scheduled activation Go to Step 16 Accept or reject upgrade during validation period Go to Step 14 Step 3 Expand System Administration right click on Upgrade and select Transfer The default display is the Web file transfer view shown below Figure 55 Transfer Upgrade Web View File Application EA B gt 6 E System E NE 1 E Synchronization Method Communications Transfer Upgrade E Alarm Attributes E Administration Upgr HTTP Transfer ata Software Image can eziadas Defa nstall 9 No file selected Defar Activate Validate Cancel OK Confi Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Ej Software Licensing Step 4 Determine the next step Desired Activity Then Use Web Browser HTTP to transfer software Continue with the next step Use FTP SFTP or SCP to transfer software Go to Step 7 156 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Enter the path to the proper image file img file extension or use the browse button to search for the file location and select
211. FSP 150SP 100 Fiber Service Platform 150SP 100 Installation and Operations User Manual Product Release 6 1 1 i a ADVA J a Document Issue A February 2014 a w Optical Networking Copyright 2001 2014 ADVA Optical Networking SE All rights reserved Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by ADVA Optical Networking SE ADVA Optical Networking the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Teodor Danciu http jasperreports sourceforge net and or other open source software Some software was created using ORBacus for Java by Object Oriented Concepts Inc Trademarks The terms ADVA M FSP 30000 Etherjack and the Etherjack logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of ADVA Optical Networking in the United States Germany and or other countries All other company products or services mentioned in this document may be trademarks or service marks of ADVA Optical Networking or their respective owner Patents The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of ADVA Optical Networking The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these pat ents Disclaimers Nothing in this document shall be construed as granting any license or rights with respect to its content or the patents and trademarks mentioned above The content of this document may include technical inaccuracies or typographical
212. Frequency Lock frequency source reference and provisioning Time Reference Telecom Slave provisioned as Time Refer N A Locked Out ence for the Time Clock and has been Minor N A N A locked out Time Reference Telecom Slave provisioned as Time Refer N A Forced Switch ence for the Time Clock and has been Minor N A N A Forced S9PO 10113 SESNEI aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey OLY enue y suoneledo pue uogejesu Table 30 Telecom Slave Alarms Continued di Description NSA Default SA Default LED poneo Typs Probable Cause Hubo Cleaning Procedure Notification Notification Indication Time Reference Telecom Slave provisioned as Time Refer Check the Telecom Slave Fre Unavailable ence for the Time Clock and Unavailable quency traceability status Syncjack clock analysis is required If Syncjack is not Minor N A N A available check the Telecom Slave Frequency Recovery state Time Reference Telecom Slave provisioned as Time Refer Check the Telecom Slave Degraded ence for the Time Clock and can t provide Time traceability status Sync valid TOD jack clock analysis is required Minor N A N A If Syncjack is not available check the Telecom Slave Phase Recovery state Telecom Slave Telecom Slave is not locked to TOD N A Minor N A N A in Time Freerun Telecom Slave Telecom slave time recovery is in Holdover N A in Time NR N A N A Holdover T
213. G Modem Using the Serial Port on p 282 Step 2 Ensure that a physical Ethernet connection from the DCN PC to the FSP 150SP has been established or the 3G modem is provisioned and operational Step 3 Verify the user s PC IP address and netmask match the values pro vided by the Network Administrator so that it has access to the net work the FSP 150SP is on Step 4 Establish a connection to the FSP 150SP Management Interface or 3G modem via an internet browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater Installation and Operations Manual 285 a ADVA sale A 7J E MED WAI n Provision Communications Optical Networking IE 8 0 recommended or Firefox 2 0 or greater Firefox 3 6 recom mendea by performing the following a Open up the appropriate internet browser and enter the following address http XXX XXX XXX XXX or https Xxx XXX XXX XXX where xxx xxx xxx xxx s the IP address of the FSP 150SP to be connected to This will be the IP address that has been assigned to the FSP 150SP during initial IP configuration if none has been set the default address is 192 168 0 2 The Web Interface will open and the Login Screen will be dis played b Login with the following details e Account name root or as appropriate see Provision Secure Access on Page 4 171 e Password ChgMeNOw or as appropriate Security details will also be displayed on the screen c Press Continue The Web Interface FSP 150SP Main Menu will b
214. HEDULE 1 1 1 1 MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection TIE ns 30 5 2 14 00 12 36 a ES el 116 145 174 Elapsed Time s Reference and Source Signal Reference time input can be BITS IN SyncE port 10 MHz port 1PPS port or PPS signal from the embedded GPS receiver Source time options are OC S recovered phase or frequency System Clock EEC external PPS signal from the 1PPS port external 10 MHz signal from the 10MHz port external T1 E1 2048 KHz signal from the BITS IN port e recovered clock from GPS TS SyncE Reference and source signals are continuously monitored for accuracy qualifi cation e Source failure or Reference failure is reported if a fault is detected Faults can be physical defects e g LOS Loss of Link or clock signal defects such as excessive frequency deviation SSM QL falling below a configurable value ESMC failure etc TIE Post Processing TIE post processing consists of the following Maximum Time Interval Error MTIE the maximum peak to peak delay varia tion of a given timing signal with respect to an ideal timing signal within an observation time t nt0 for all observation times of that length within the mea surement period T Observation interval range 0 1 to 100 000 seconds Three observation intervals per decade Installation and Operations Manual 37 ADVA 7J E a m WN u
215. HW Test STOP User Break Detected Force PP Software BOOTLDR 300 misc max MTPS 2 Sec Min N HRESET RUN COMMs Image Verified Ay Provisioned All LEDs Off Software Upgrade Force Cold Reset Software Running Lifetime Installation and Operations Manual 113 a ADVA 7J E eam WN u Connect Power Cables and Apply Power Optical Networking LED Start Up Use the following procedure shows the sequence of LEDs during start up Please note that the following steps can complete so quickly that you may not see a particular LED transition Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Power up the SP 100 by applying power to the SP 100 while observ ing the following start up sequence e Insert the power plug into the AC power receptacle e Insert the power connectors at the SP 100 48 VDC 24 variant Red Between power up of the power controller on the card and the other power supplies being enabled and before they are all within acceptable tolerance of nominal the Status LED is red all other LEDs are off during initialization Yellow The Status LED transitions from red to yellow after the volt age rails have come up and while the card is configuring hardware or performing hardware tests i
216. I configuration files when executed Load function modify the active data base one line item at a time These files are managed using CLI commands see the FSP 750SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide or eVision These or edited versions of these files on an external server are used to configure newly installed systems to transition from an installation network to the traf fic carrying network or to reprovision a system following a database reset to System or Factory Defaults The CLI commands for managing configuration files are Description e List e Load e Remove Restart with configfile Save Show e Transfer File These commands are detailed at CLI Configuration File Management on p 255 254 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning CLI Configuration File Management CLI configuration files are text files based on the CLI command show run ning config These files reflect the delta between the default and active data base at the time they are created and can be used to reconfigure the system by running them manually or scheduling them for execution upon system resets The user can create and store up to four files on the system While these files can not be edited on the system they can be exported edited then imported back onto the system A file can be created marked for execution upon system reset and files can be displayed and deleted The CLI configuration
217. II characters long blank Administrative Defines the administrative state See Entity State Unassigned State Descriptions on p 430 IS Squelch Control A hierarchy to be established for Squelch control of Never TOD timing interface The hierarchy is as follows Holdover NEVER where the output is never squelched HOLDOVER where output is squelched only in freerun state Lock LOCK where output is squelched in holdover and freerun states GPS 1 1 1 1 Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long up to 64 characters blank 458 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings every other interface that has RIP enabled Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Administrative Defines the administrative state See Entity State Unassigned State Descriptions on p 430 IS GPS Generation Defines the antenna configuration for the GPS signal 1SAT Condition whether it is monitoring 1 satellite or 3 Selection is made from a drop down list 3SATS Antenna Cable Defines the length of the cable connecting the antenna Length to the GPS interface Length is set in meters Range is 0 from 0 to 100 4 5 nsec me
218. Jack File Application A x 5 System A gt NM a Network Element E NEI Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 CLOCK PROBE 1 2 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 E Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis E PTP Network Probes SYNCIACK GLOBAL CLOCK ACCURACY CLOCK ANALYSIS PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 E Synejack Schedules SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 lt m G Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 To initialize the PM registers right click on the PTP Network Probe and select Init Registers and follow the procedure in Initializing PM Registers on p 331 To edit the PM Thresholds right click on the PTP Network Probe and select Edit Thresholds and follow the procedure in Editing PM Thresholds on p 332 To delete a SyncJack Schedule right click on the desired schedule under SyncJack Schedules and select Delete Schedule A Delete SyncJack Schedule pane appears Select OK To delete a SyncJack PTP Clock Probe right click on the desired probe and select Delete PTP Clock Probe A Delete Clock Probe pane appears Select OK End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 377 a ADVA
219. L SSU A If the interface s QL Mode is disabled the specified QL SSU B Assumed QL value is the Quality Level of the interface In this case Assumed QL can not be set to QL NONE If the interface s QL Mode is enabled the specified Assumed QL value overrides the received Quality Level of the interface unless Assumed QL is set to QL NONE If the Network Clock Type is SONET Option2 and QL Mode is disabled the Assumed QL is automatically set to QL STU and is not editable f QL EEC1 If the Network Clock Type is changed from SONET to SDH and QL Mode is Disabled the Assumed QL defaults to QL EEC1 For both SDH and SONET options if QL Mode Enabled and the Network Clock Type is changed the Assumed QL defaults to QL NONE Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL NONE QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Default is QL EEC1 QL Mode Disabled Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL NONE QL EEC2 QL PRS QL STU QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL PROV QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Default QL STU QL QL PRS Mode Disabled QL SMC QL STU QL ST2 QL ST3E QL TNC Installation and Operations Manual 499 a ADVA J E WED wz 8 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking Table 48 Create Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Expected QL Specifies the expected Quality Level QL when the QL NONE Eth
220. LOCK PROBE 1 1 History Estimations Tea e MIH i A E PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes i h Syncjack Schedules 6 H SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 l iD Result Analysis gt i MTIE comparison Eo ill W I fh i AA Raw Data Collection E y I Vil it Pp ii l ih ANN f i N M U 12 It i Se yw lal UNO 24 30 5 2 14 d0 12 36 2 EJ ey 116 145 174 203 232 261 290 ado Elapsed Time s the Syncjack scheduled window the failed region is indicated by a red shadowed area of the TIE TE graph see example in the following Note figure If a source or reference failure occurs and eventually recovers during Figure 221 Example Clock Probe TIE TE Graph with Failed Region ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 34 16 SyncJack File Application y a xX ED 6 E System E NE 1 E Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Results Clock Analysis PTP Network Analysis Synejack Schedules E Result Analysis Raw Data Collection Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Hee TIE ns 2 1 14 20 55 46 176 352 528 704 880 1 056 1 232 1 408 1 584 1 760 1 936 Elapsed Time s 356 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 18 Select the Recent TIE Graph tab to view the last 2000 seconds of test results Step 19 After the test is completed a subset of
221. Link Down is generated when a Insert or repair cable Removed physical connection is lost on a good e A Facility link on the Ethernet interface port Red Access or Network A Cable i A De Minor Critical Removed notification is sent when it is onthe Link Rate determined that the link is down due to f Off a cable being locally removed from its RJ 45 port connection Link Down Link Down is generated when a Test and repair far end m oa q a Facility Auto Negotiation physical connection is lost on a good equipment A Red Failed link on the Ethernet interface port si ae Minor Critical Access or Network Auto negotiation a q Link Rate fault indicates the Far End is not O ES Off advertising its auto negotiation rate Link Down Link Down is generated when a Perform an Etherjack Facility physical connection is lost on a good Diagnostic test Repairthe port Red link on the Ethernet interface port using test results Minor Critical Access or Network Link Rate Off Link Down Link Down Master Slave Configuration Verify Master Slave Facility Master Slave configuration Red Config Minor Critical Link Rate Off Receiving Jabber The total number of packets received Verify the signal leaving the far were longer than the MTU size and end NID through any inter had either a bad Frame Check mediate equipment and at the Facilit Sequence FCS with an integral near end Probable Cause Minor Major Red y
222. Low Range Installation and Operations Manual 493 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA vJ E aap W a Optical Networking Table 47 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued Monitored Type Definition Direction Location H ay RESPDVREVMEDIUM Total Number Of Reverse Receive NearEnd 0 0 Residual Packet Delay Varia tion Results In Medium Range RESPDVREVHIGH Total Number Of Reverse Receive NearEnd 0 0 Residual Packet Delay Varia tion Results In High Range RESPDVREVTOTAL Total Number Of Valid RPD Receive NearEnd 0 0 Vrev Results FWDSCORE5 Total Time Forward Score 5 Receive Near End 0 0 FWDSCORE4 Total Time Forward Score 4 Receive Near End 0 0 FWDSCORE3 Total Time Forward Score 3 Receive NearEnd 0 0 REVSCORE5 Total Time Reverse Score 5 Receive NearEnd 0 0 REVSCORE4 Total Time Reverse Score 4 Receive NearEnd 0 0 REVSCORE3 Total Time Reverse Score 3 Receive NearEnd 0 0 SYNCSRX Number of Received Sync Receive NearEnd 0 0 Messages LOSTSYNCMSGS Number of Lost Sync Mes Receive NearEnd 0 0 sages DELAYRSPSRX Number of Received Delay Receive NearEnd 0 0 Response Messages LOSTDELAYRSPMSGS Number of Lost Delay Receive NearEnd 0 0 Response Messages 494 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules PTP Configuration Options and Rules The following section describes Pre
223. NE 1 Type E EVPL Port Shaped Speed 0 bps SNMP AFP i AFP All y Administration Q in Q EtherType E 0 hex Users Q in Q EtherType Override Disabled w Remote Authentication Security Policy SFP Key Generation Vendor Name ADVA SFP Connector Type LC Serial Number EWTDO73400006 Media Type Single Mode Part Number 0061003008 Link Length 15000 m Date of Manufacture 2007 08 27 Laser Wavelength 1310 00 nm Cancel Apply OK The operations and provisioning options in a Details Pane are displayed in a series of fields The information provided in the Details Pane enables the user to gain information on the operation of the FSP 150SP and to input and or select data that is required for the desired operation Operations and Provisioning Field Types The field types that may appear on a Details Pane are Display only fields which are provided to display status information These fields are gray and cannot be selected or changed Provisionable fields which have a white background are used to indicate a field that can be edited by direct data input o aselectable drop down menu which provides context sensitive provi sioning options o a check box or toggle button a right click menu of options configuration files only 140 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Command Buttons Actions are selected via command buttons that are available at th
224. NTP Restore System Defaults y Active server Primary z SYNC 1 1 1 1 3 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 OSEA Apply oK E BITS 1 BITS IN Step 36 Select enter the desired NTP options The Polling Interval can be set to 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 seconds The default is 16 seconds Enter the corresponding IP address for Primary Server and if applica ble the Backup Server If both a Primary and Backup Server are configured either one can be made Active by selecting the desired Active server Select OK The display updates to show the edited information Installation and Operations Manual 199 a ADVA an 5 A We VA Wel YA Provision Synchronization Optical Networking Step 37 Enter a right click on the System entity and select Edit System An Edit System window displays Figure 96 Edit System Time of Day D O OSP 100 o o File Application ax E gt k S Edit Security Log Identity 5 Q Edit Alarm Log S Edit Audit Log Mere 3 g FSP 150SP 100 DA Edt syslog Description FSP 150SP 100 Location SP100 35 98 Edit ACL Contact SP100 35 98 Edit Banner CLI Prefix ADVA Edit NTP Restore System Defaults Configuration Provisioning Mode Autoprov gt FTP Enabled x Release Version 6 1 1 049 HTTP Enabled DCN IP Address 10 10 35 98 Enabled y DCN Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 E Strength Erea 1 DCN DHCP
225. Name Loca tion and Contact After editing the NE information click on OK The display updates to show the edited information The NE 1 identity information that is available for editing on this screen except for CLI Prefix is the same identity information that displays in the System view Note Installation and Operations Manual 169 Provision NE 1 Common Units Optical Networking End of Procedure Configure NTESP100 The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 If a sign appears next to NE 1 in the selection tree pane click on it to expand the NE view then click on the sign next to NTE20x to expand it Right click on NTESP100 in the selection tree pane and select Edit Configuration and the following screen displays i bs 71 Edit NTESP100 File Y Application v E System E1000 A 1 DCN ethO 3G Modem Synchronization Communications SNMP Administration DE le EN x B y 4 Edit Configuration ntification Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 Alias SP100 35 98 State Administrative S Ty Secondary ACT Operational Normal Physical Inventory Name FSP150SP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 Physical Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c0 Software Revis
226. Near End 0 0 Discards PTPPDELAYFOLLOWUPSD PTP PDelay Follow up Receive Near End 0 0 Message Discards PTPINVTLVLENSD PTP Invalid TLV Length Transmit Near End 0 0 Discards PTPINVTLVTYPESD PTP Invalid TLV Type Receive Near End 0 0 Discards AVGSYNCPD Average Sync Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 nsec MINSYNCPD Minimum Sync Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 nsec MAXSYNCPD Maximum Sync Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 nsec AVGSYNCPDV Average Sync PDV nsec Receive Near End 0 0 490 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 45 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued Monitored Type Definition Direction Location aie ES MINSYNCPDV Minimum Sync PDV nsec Receive Near End 0 0 MAXSYNCPDV Maximum Sync PDV nsec Receive Near End 0 0 AVGMEANPATHDELAY Average Mean Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 nsec MINMEANPATHDELAY Minimum Mean Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 nsec MAXMEANPATHDELAY Maximum Mean Path Delay Receive Near End 0 0 nsec AVGOFM Average Offset from Master Receive Near End 0 0 nsec MINOFM Minimum Offset from Master Receive Near End 0 0 nsec MAXOFM Maximum Offset from Receive Near End 0 0 Master nsec Installation and Operations Manual 491 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking T
227. Near End 0 0 Received SIGNALINGTX PTP Signaling Messages Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted SYNCSRX PTP Sync Messages Receive NearEnd 0 0 Received SYNCSTX PTP Sync Messages Transmit Near End 0 0 Transmitted AVGSYNCRESTIME Average Residence Time for Receive NearEnd 0 0 PTP Sync Messages MINSYNCRESTIME Minimum Residence Time for Receive Near End 0 0 PTP Sync Messages MAXSYNCRESTIME Maximum Residence Time Receive NearEnd 0 0 for PTP Sync Messages AVGPDELAYREQRESTIME Average Residence Time for Receive NearEnd 0 0 Peer Delay_Req Messages MINDELAYREQRESTIME Minimum Residence Time for Receive Near End 0 0 PTP Delay_Req Messages MAXPDELAYREQRESTIME Maximum Residence Time Receive Near End 0 0 for Peer Delay_Req Messages AVGDELAYREQRESTIME Average Residence Time for Receive NearEnd 0 0 PTP Delay_Req Messages MINPDELAYREQRESTIME Minimum Residence Time for Receive Near End 0 0 Peer Delay_Req Messages MAXDELAYREQRESTIME Maximum Residence Time Receive Near End 0 0 for PTP Delay_Req Messages AVGPDELAYRSPRESTIME Average Residence Time for Receive Near End 0 0 Peer Delay_Rsp Messages MINPDELAYRSPRESTIME Minimum Residence Time for Receive Near End 0 0 Peer Delay_Rsp Messages MAXPDELAYRSPRESTIME Maximum Residence Time Receive Near End 0 0 for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages Installation and Operations Manual 489 Configuration Settings Rules and Depen
228. O E VUE wl Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parametar Applicable Rules Defaults Expected QL Set the Expected Quality Level If Line Type is set to QL NONE 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable QL PRC QL SSU A Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL NONE QL SSU B QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Default is QL NONE QL EEC1 Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL NONE QL EEC2 QL PRS QL STU QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL PROV QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Default QL NONE QL PRS QL SMC QL STU QL ST2 QL ST3E QL TNC BITS OUT Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long blank Administrative Defines the SYNC administrative state See Entity Unassigned State State Descriptions on p 430 BITS will not show up IS as a potential synchronization reference if the administration state is set to Unassigned Management Line Type Sets the BITS line type If a 2048kHz or E1 is the El desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type T1 should be set to Option 1 Ifa T1 is the desired BITS Line Type then Network Clock Type should be set to Option 2 AIS or LOF will be detected at the BITS interface endpoints if mismatch
229. OK OK cam w 50 32 NOR oK PTP Network Analysis E m 100 44 oK OK PTP Network Probes zoe Se a SE 500 N A N A A Synejack Schedules rs 1000 NA NA NA SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 2000 N A N A N A Result Analysis poste o 5000 NA O MA O NA 10 10000 NA N A NA MTE comparison 20000 N A N A N A Raw Data Collection 50000 NA NMA MA or bil vr apr iai 100000 na MA N A Tau sec Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name ClkProbe1 State Completed Running Failed Count 0 Actual Test Start Time 2014 02 04 23 49 31 Actual Test Duration s 300 Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Source TS 1 1 Source Type Frequency MTIE Mask 6823 Pdh Mask Margin 210 Scheduler SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Step 14 Observe test result details by interval by viewing the Test Result table or hovering the mouse over the interval marker in the graph see the following figure Figure 216 View Clock Probe Test Result Details em ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP SP 100 SyncJack File Application ax gt 6 a gee status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph Cl Tests Result amp History Results Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 oT NA NA N A CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 1000000 0 2 N A N A N A Clock Analysis 0 5 N A N A
230. P address of the slave clock for paral lel mode must be as configured for the PTP SOOC Reference the signal reference for this Probe The available refer ences are populated in a drop down list Reference Expected QL clock quality level of the selected reference The available QLs are provided in a drop down list RPDV fw Low ns enter the desired Residual Path Delay Variation RPDV forward low in nanoseconds RPDV fw Medium ns enter the desired RPDV forward medium in nanoseconds RPDV fw High ns enter the desired RPDV forward high in nanosec onds RPDV rev Low ns enter the desired RPDV reverse low in nanosec onds RPDV rev Medium ns enter the desired RPDV reverse medium in nanoseconds RPDV rev High ns enter the desired RPDV reverse high in nano seconds PDV Cluster Range Assured ns enter the desired value in nano seconds PDV Cluster Range Satisfied ns enter the desired value in nano seconds Select OK Step 5 Expand PTP Network Probes in the Selection Tree The newly created PTP Network Probe entity is present Step6 Select the newly created PTP Network Probe entity to verify entry A PTP Network Probe can be edited after creation by right clicking on the entity name and selecting Edit Clock Probe All fields except the Clock Probe Index can be edited When a probe is scheduled it Note Cannot be modified or deleted Step 7 Enter a right click on SyncJack Schedules
231. P100 entity To view PTP Flowpoint PM counts also expand the Network or Access entity in the selection tree Step 3 Select the desired entity in the selection tree and select the Statistics tab The PM Counts pane appears see Figure 203 on p 338 Installation and Operations Manual 337 PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring Optical Networking Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 File Application System E NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 E MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves Dynamic Slaves DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 E NTESP100 E E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 sooc 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes sooc Telecom Slave Select the desired tab to view Summary 15 Minute counters 1 Day counters or Threshold levels Use sliding bars to view data as required An asterisk in the Time column indicates data that is sus pect See Figure 204 on p 339 and Figure 205 on p 339 If desired 15 Minute and 1 Day counts can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet by selecting the Excel button An export file pane appears see Figure 206 on p 340 Choose the desired application to open or select the Save to Disk option The filename dispexecel php will be created in the selected application Excel is the default application see Figure 199 on p 330 Edit or save the exported file as desired End of Procedure Figure 203 Summary PM Counts View
232. PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 A 1 which is Microsoft Excel 97 2003 Worksheet ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 16 45 00 from http 10 10 35 98 16 30 00 E TS 1 1 What should Firefox do with this file SOOC 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes Open with Microsoft Excel default sooc Save File Telecom Slave Do this automatically for files like this from now on 13 30 00 13 15 00 13 oo 12 45 00 12 30 00 12 15 00 12 00 00 11 45 00 11 30 00 11 15 00 11 00 00 10 45 00 10 30 00 olololo olo olo olo o olololo olo olo olo o 4 m 340 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Initializing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Registers For PTP entities PM data is maintained in individual monitored parameter bins for each interval The system maintains bins for the following time periods Current 15 minute bin Current 24 hour 1 day bin Current intervals are indicated as current and older periods are assigned incremental numbers The index allows a user to identify the current previous Bin Index 1 or one of the historical bins Bin Index 2 to 32 with 32 being the oldest bin or All History Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the PTP icon or select PTP from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Expand the Network Element
233. PTP Messages tab to view raw PTP Receive Statistics Average Residence Time for PTP Delay_Req Messages Average Residence Time for PTP Sync Messages Average Residence Time for Peer Delay_Req Messages Average Residence Time for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages Maximum Residence Time for PTP Delay_Req Messages Maximum Residence Time for PTP Sync Messages Maximum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Req Messages Maximum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages Minimum Residence Time for PTP Delay_Req Messages Minimum Residence Time for PTP Sync Messages Minimum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Req Messages Minirnum Residence Time for Peer Delay_Rsp Messages Sogo oto ogno oH oE o PTP Announce Messages Received PTP Delay Req Messages Received PTP Delay Resp Follow Up Messages Received PTP Delay Resp Messages Received PTP Delay_Req Messages Received PTP Delay_Resp Messages Received PTP Follow_Up Messages Received PTP Management Frames Received PTP Signaling Messages Received PTP Sync Messages Received PTP messages discarded No MCI Destination IP match Unknown PTP Messages Received Transmit Statistics PTP Announce Messages Transmitted 0 PTP Delay Req Messages Transmitted o PTP Delay Resp Follow Up Messages Transmitted o PTP Delay Resp Messages Transmitted o PTP Delay_Req Messages Transmitted 11735 PTP Delay_Resp Messages Transmitted 0 PTP Follow Up Messages Transmitted PTP Management Frame
234. Provision Synchronization Comes Networking Edit PPS Port s Refer to the following procedure for provisioning the Pulse Per Second PPS port s amp PPS 1 1 1 1 is fixed as Input only PPS 1 1 1 2 may be configured for Input or Output Note amp If PPS is to be provisioned for Output signal direction the desired Source EID must be provisioned prior to selecting its entity as an out Note Put source Step 16 Enter a right click on the PPS 1 1 1 1 or PPS 1 1 1 2 entity and select Edit Configuration An Edit PPS window displays Figure 89 Edit PPS 1 1 1 2 Interface Configuration S ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application Xx FA D D System Edit Configuration NE 1 NTESP100 Identification Synchronization NE 1 Entity ID PPS 1 1 1 2 NTESP100 Alias SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 state BITS 1 Secondary UAS BITS IN Operational Outage BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Configuration CLK 1 1 1 2 A PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Signal Direction 3 Input x PPS 1 1 1 2 Squelch Control Lock TOD 1 1 1 EON Input Rate Pulse Per Second GPS 1 1 1 1 Cable Delay Compensation ns 0 a Communications Source Eid TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 SNMP w Administration Cancel Apply OK Step 17 Enter the following PPS options a Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative state b For PPS 1 1 1 2 Select the desired Signal Direction
235. Ps which are used when an entity is provisioned The default thresholds are configurable A TCA is only reported once during a bins time period unless it is initialized and then is crossed again Threshold Crossing Alert Messages When a PP threshold has been met or exceeded a TCA is generated The fol lowing table outlines the attributes that are specified in the TCA message Table 25 Threshold Crossing Alert Attributes Attribute Description Values Entity Identifier The monitored entity s id Variable Monitor Type The name of the PP that has crossed its threshold See Performance This will be presented in mnemonic form Monitoring Settings on p 478 for Monitor Type mnemonics Time Period In which time period the threshold was crossed 15 Minute 1 Day Time The time the threshold was crossed Timestamp 336 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Table 25 Threshold Crossing Alert Attributes Continued Attribute Description Values Location The location of the TCA generation This is Near end determined in relation to the monitored entity in that Far end the PP has occurred None e Locally to the entity or at the near end Remotely to the entity or at the far end Direction The direction in relation to the monitored entity Receive Transmit Monitored Value The value of the PP count when the threshold was Up to
236. QL Mode is enabled the specified Assumed QL value overrides the received Quality Level of the interface unless Assumed QL is set to QL NONE If the Network Clock Type is SONET Option2 and QL Mode is disabled the Assumed QL is automatically set to QL STU and is not editable QL EEC1 If the Network Clock Type is changed from SONET to SDH and QL Mode is Disabled the Assumed QL defaults to QL EEC1 For both SDH and SONET options if QL Mode Enabled and the Network Clock Type is changed the Assumed QL defaults to QL NONE Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL NONE QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Default is QL EEC1 QL Mode Disabled Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL NONE QL EEC2 QL PRS QL STU QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL PROV QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Default QL STU QL QL PRS Mode Disabled QL SMC QL STU QL ST2 QL ST3E QL TNC Installation and Operations Manual 471 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E ea ws Y Optical Networking Table 41 Network Port Configuration Settings Edit Configuration Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Expected QL Specifies the expected Quality Level QL when the QL NONE Ethernet Network Port is enabled for QL Mode This QL PRC object is only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet QL SSU A capable ports when QL Mode is Enabl
237. QL QL NONE attribute is used to define the minimum QL that the QL PRC system timing can accept If the system timing QL QL SSU A drops below this selected value the BITS OUT is OL SSU B turned off i e no BITS OUT signal is provided QL EEC1 QL DNU Line Build Out Option to set impedance for cable length or dB Only 0 133 Ft applicable if Line Type is T1 133 266 Ft 266 399 Ft 339 533 Ft 533 655 Ft 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB CLK 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 and PPS 1 1 1 2 Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long blank Administrative Defines the administrative state See Entity State Unassigned State Descriptions on p 430 The entity does not show up IS as a potential synchronization reference if the administration state is set to Unassigned Management Signal Direction Defines the signal direction for this interface Options Input CLK 1 1 1 2 are Input or Output selected from a drop down list and CLK 1 1 1 1 and PPS 1 1 1 1 are input only and Output PPS 1 1 1 2 Signal Direction is grayed out Installation and Operations Manual 457 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E emp wl Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings
238. ROBE RESULT MIER Ej PTP Network Analysis E syr Create PTP Network Probe SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 4 m r Step 4 Identification PTP Network Probe Index 1 Name Configurations PTP Flowpoint 2 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 IP Version 8 IPv4 y Master IP Address a of off off of Slave IP Address dA of off olf o Reference PPS 1 1 1 1 y Reference Expected QL QL NONE x RPDY fw Low ns RPDY fw Medium ns RPDY fw High ns RPDY rev Low ns RPDY rev Medium ns RPDY rev High ns FPP Cluster Range Assured ns FPP Cluster Range Satisfied ns 200 500 2000 200 500 2000 25000 150000 Cancel OK Enter the following to configure the Clock Probe PTP Network Probe Index EID for the probe Enter a number from 1 to 9 Create only Name a text identifier up to 15 characters no spaces or special characters for the probe Required entry PTP Flowpoint select the desired PTP Flowpoint from the drop down list 372 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring IP Version select the desired IP version from the drop down list Only IPv4 is supported version for the current release Master IP Address enter the IP address of the master clock for par allel mode must be as configured for the PTP SOOC Slave IP Address enter the I
239. SF ESFS EsJ ESMF ESMP Eso ESOF ESOP ESP y d Opening NETWORK_PORT 1 1 1 1_2014 02 04 csv You have chosen to open El NETWORK _PORT 1 1 1 1_2014 02 04 csv which is Microsoft Excel 97 2003 Worksheet from http 10 10 35 98 ojojojojojoo 15 15 00 y SE 15 00 00 What should Firefox do with this file o ojoo 14 30 00 Open with Microsoft Excel default 14 15 00 14 00 00 Save File 13 45 00 13 30 00 Do this automatically for files like this from now on 13 15 00 o 10 00 00 09 45 00 09 30 00 ololololo ololololololoJololo aJolalolalolalolalo olololololololo o olo o o o olololololol lololo olololojololo o olo o o o olo ojo o o ojo o ojo o o oj o olo o o o olojojo o lolo o o o lolololo Installation and Operations Manual 329 a AMIA 7J UN amp WA u Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Optical Networking Figure 199 15 Minute PM Counts Exported to Excel A i Y cu Calibri li1 At a E ci ye lp a le Tat a Wwe Aqa Se pS ETWORK_PORT 1 1 1 1 2012 02 08 csw Read Only Microsoft z gt Wrap Text General y E i a ia a E Fi 43 Copy 7 paste Pl a B Z U r fa Merge amp Cent
240. SNMP and EFM envi ronments to ensure seamless network level views via the FSP 150 enterprise Management Information Base MIB For further information regarding man agement via SNMP refer to the SNMP Reference Guide eVision Web Browser Management Tool The FSP 150SP supports an eVision Web Browser Management Tool to pro vide a web based Graphical User Interface GUI for OAM functions For further details on the eVision Web Browser Management Tool refer to Chapter 2 eVi sion Web Browser Management Tool on p 125 Installation and Operations Manual 59 Management Overview a ADVA J E emp wl Y Optical Networking Figure 28 eVision Web Browser Management Tool File Application v a x 5 D ty E System x Configuration Resources E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 DCN etho Alias SP100 35 98 3G Modem State Ej Synchronization El NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT NTESP100 Operational Normal SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Physical Inventory W BITS 1 Name FSP1505P 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Physical Address 00 80 e3 39 d2 c0 Software Revision 6 1 1 049 CLK 1 1 1 2 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN USI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen PPS 1 1 1 2 CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Environmental
241. SP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v x B W amp A System Security Policy NE 1 E Synchronization Policy Strength Communications Strength SNMP E Administration Users Cancel Apply OK Ej Local netadmin Policy Description root High user i Remote 1 User Name must be 6 to 32 characters in length and no spaces allowed 2 Password must be 12 to 32 characters in length 3 Password must contain only alphanumeric and special characters 9 _ and must not begin with 4 Password must contain upper and lower case characters at least 2 special characters and at least 1 digit 5 Password must not contain more than 2 letters or digits repeated consecutively 6 Password must not contain a sequence of 3 consecutive alphanumeric characters in ascending or descending order 7 Password must not be the same as the User Name 8 Password must not be password passwOrd in lower upper or mixed case Remote Authentication Key Generati Medium 1 User Name must be 1 to 32 characters in length and no spaces allowed 2 Password must be 8 to 32 characters in length 3 Password must contain only alphanumeric and special characters 96 _ and must not begin with 4 Password must contain upper and lower case characters at least 1 special character and at least 1 digit 5 Password must not contain more than 2 letters or digit
242. Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view config uration details o gt Step 34 Enter a right click on the Master Clock Interface entity and select Cre ate Master Virtual Port A Create Master Virtual Port entry screen displays Installation and Operations Manual 221 ADVA 7J E a m WM u Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP Optical Networking Figure 116 Create Master Virtual Port File Application A x 5 System Create Master Virtual Port E NE 1 f MASTER CLOCK 1 1 Identification E MASTER cLocwmirenrace 111 Edit la Master Virtual Port Index 2 sy Delete Alias IEEE NTESP1 Edit Thresholds Configuration TS 1 1 PTP Flow Point ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 y Alarm Attributes sooc Cancel Appl OK Telecam Slave pey Step 35 Enter the following Master Virtual Port options a Enter the desired Master Virtual Port Index and Alias b Select the desired PTP Flow Point c Select OK A Master Virtual Port entity appears below the associated Master Clock Interface entity in the selection tree pane Step 36 Select the Master Virtual Port entity to view configuration details Step 37 If the Remote Slave unit has already been provisioned with Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled Dynamic Slave and the Master Clock Interface entity has been provisioned with the correct number of Max imum Slaves Supported to accept the Dynamic Slave unit then the Dynamic Slave enti
243. Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Assumed QL Assumed QL Specifies the assumed Quality Level QL NONE QL on the interface Only applicable for Synchronous QL PRC Ethernet capable ports QL SSU A If the interface s QL Mode is disabled the specified AL S5U58 Assumed QL value is the Quality Level of the interface In this case Assumed QL can not be set to QL NONE If the interface s QL Mode is enabled the specified Assumed QL value overrides the received Quality Level of the interface unless Assumed QL is set to QL NONE Ifthe Network Clock Type is SONET Option2 and QL Mode is disabled the Assumed QL is automatically set to QL STU and is not editable QL EEC1 If the Network Clock Type is changed from SONET to SDH and QL Mode is Disabled the Assumed QL defaults to QL EEC1 For both SDH and SONET options if QL Mode Enabled and the Network Clock Type is changed the Assumed QL defaults to QL NONE Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL NONE QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Default is QL EEC1 QL Mode Disabled Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL NONE QL EEC2 QL PRS QL STU QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL PROV QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Default QL STU QL QL PRS Mode Disabled QL SMC QL STU QL ST2 QL ST3E QL TNC Installation and Operations Manual 455 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA V
244. Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or disabled for Synchronous Ethernet Mode Default is Disabled Disabled Enabled QL Mode Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or disabled for Quality Level QL Mode This option is only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports when this option is set to Enabled When enabled on receive side port shall PEER the Synchronization Status Messages SSM slow protocol PDUs and take appropriate action When enabled on transmit side port shall periodically once a second transmit QL TLV information PDUs When disabled on receive side port shall terminate and discard any SSM slow protocol PDUs When disabled on transmit side port shall not transmit any SSM slow protocol PDUs Disabled Enabled 470 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 41 Network Port Configuration Settings Edit Configuration Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Assumed QL Assumed QL Specifies the assumed Quality Level QL NONE QL on the interface Only applicable for Synchronous QL PRC Ethernet capable ports QL SSU A If the interface s QL Mode is disabled the specified ORSOVA Assumed QL value is the Quality Level of the interface In this case Assumed QL can not be set to QL NONE If the interface s
245. Step4 Click OK End of Procedure 238 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step5 Expand Administration right click on Default Database and select Copy To Remote The display is the Copy To Remote File Transmit Method view shown in the following figure Figure 133 Copy System Default Database To Remote Web View ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application A B gt 6 E System NE 1 Synchronization Method Communications Alarm Attributes E Administration Upgrade Cancel OK Copy System Default Database To Remote Le File Transfer Method Database Default Datab Save Default Settin g Copy to Remote Configuration Last Reset Cal Copy from Remote Transfer Log New E Software Licensing Step 6 Determine the next step Desired File Transfer Method Then Web HTTP Continue with the next step FTP SFTP or SCP Go to Step 8 Step 7 Click on OK then click on the underlined here for HTTP File Trans fer You are prompted to open or save the file Select the save option to save the file The options presented for file saving are dependent on the browser being used and the options the user has selected for browser operation For example MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name and where the file should be saved Firefox will save the file with the default file name backupdb bi
246. TS is locked to the Master Locked Figure 107 OCS Port Configuration Status Unclalibrated El ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP a x 5 File Application v E System E NE 1 E NTESP100 E E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 E TS 1 1 E SOOC 1 1 1 OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Alarm Attributes Step 15 X x t Configuration Identification Entity ID OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 Alias TS1 Identity 0080ea33b0a000000000 State Administrative IS Operational Normal Secondary ACT Configuration PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Port State Uncalibrated Select the PTP Flow Point entity and Statistics tab to view PM data Ensure that messages are being received otherwise troubleshoot accordingly Current PTP statistics are displayed Installation and Operations Manual 215 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP a ADVA 7J E amv wz n Optical Networking Figure 108 Network Port PTP Flow Point Statistics S ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application B X 5 K E System a A Configuration Statistics El NE 1 E 1000 N 1 Summary 5 Minute 1Day Thresholds INET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 5 _ E1000 A 1 Clear Refresh Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds TS 1 1 E sooc 1 1 1 OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes Step 16 Select the SOOC entity Statistics tab and Summary tab to view PM data If required select the Raw
247. Telecom Slave PM registers right click on the Telecom Slave TS 1 1 under Clock Analysis and select Init Registers and follow the proce dure in Initializing PM Registers on p 331 To edit the Telecom Slave PM Thresholds right click on the Telecom Slave TS 1 1 under Clock Analysis and select Edit Thresholds and follow the proce dure in Editing PM Thresholds on p 332 Figure 236 Telecom Slave Configuration View S ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File y Application y System E NE 1 Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 a xX BOYS 5 Configuration Statistics Identification Entity ID TS 1 1 E History Results Alias toSymmCommTS CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 Status CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 Clock Analysis Clock Recovery State Normal PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Freq Traceability True El History Estimations Time Since Freq Traceability Changed 7909 sec PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT Freq Recovery Target G823 PDH Traffic Current Clock Recovery Score oss TiSstat Last Clock Recovery Score Time 2013 08 28 14 26 02 E PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes Time Traceability True Synejack Schedules Time Since Time Traceability Changed 6909 sec SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Target Phase Recovery Accuracy 500 ns SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 Current Phase Recovery Score xS it r Last Phase Recovery Score Time 2013 08 28 14 42 42 370 In
248. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms 484 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 43 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued Monitored at dera Loca 5 15 Type Description Direction tion Min 1 Day ESMF EtherStats Multicast Frames The Multicast Transmit Near 0 0 Frames Sent in the egress direction End ESMP EtherStats Multicast Packets Received Receive Near 0 0 EtherStats Multicast Packets Received End The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address ESO EtherStats Octets Received The total Receive Near 0 0 number of octets of data including those in End bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESOF EtherStats Oversize Frames The total Transmit Near 0 0 number of frames transmitted that were End oversized ESOP EtherStats Oversize Packets The total Receive Near 37055 3557280 number of packets received that were End longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed ESP EtherStats Packets Received The total Receive Near 0 0 number of packets including bad packets End broadcast packets and multicast packets received ESP64 EtherSta
249. Time Traceability N A Minor N A N A status is Holdover Time Not Traceable Time Clock Time Traceability N A Minor N A N A status is Not Traceable Time Of Day TOD Port Output Squelch Output of the TOD port has Verify and troubleshoot TOD port been squelched due to change source Minor N A N A 1 When using Ethernet encapsulated management tunnels the source IP address of the ping used to validate reachability of the trap host is the IP address assigned to the management tunnel and not the system IP address Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BupyomieN e911dO am awe E A WAU enue y suoneledo pue uone jeysu ely Precision Time Protocol PTP Alarms This section describes Precision Time Protocol PTP alarm conditions SOOC Alarms Refer to the following table for PTP Slave Only Ordinary Clocks SOOC alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure Table 29 SOOC Alarms Condition Type Description Probable Cause Trouble Clearing Procedure NSA Default Notification SA Default Notification LED Indication PTSF Loss Sync Packet Timing Signal Fail Loss of Syn chronization A Sync Followup is not received before syncReceiptTimeout or Delay Response is not received before del RespReceiptTimeout A loopback on the port on which the PTP Flowpoint of the SOOC exists will result in
250. Tool This section provides the following configuration settings information Factory Default Parameters and Maximum Bandwidth on p 437 System Configuration Options and Rules on p 445 e Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 469 e Access Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 473 Performance Monitoring Settings on p 478 PTP Configuration Options and Rules on p 495 SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules on p 514 e Scheduled SyncJack Activity Settings on p 521 436 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Factory Default Parameters and Maximum Bandwidth When the database of the FSP 150SP is modified it stores the changes in non volatile memory If a power loss system reboot occur all configuration data is retained There are three versions of the database always resident on the system plus a standby copy of the current database The three versions are the current running configuration System Default a copy that may be modi fied by a user and Factory Default a copy that cannot be modified When first commissioned these three database versions are identical As provisioning occurs the current running configuration database is updated with each change entered Refer to Table 38 on p 437 for ADVA Optical Networking factory default con figuration settings Each functional area and default configura
251. VCs are not user editable Ifan EVC Entity is in In Service state its child entities policers shapers is in In Service If an EVC Entity is in Management state its child entities is in Management If an EVC Entity is in Unassigned state its child entities is in Unassigned state Changing the Equipment entity state from In Service to Management will have the side effect of changing the Port state from In Service to Management Any Port that was already in an OOS state i e Management Maintenance or Dis abled will stay in that state Any Port that was already in the Unassigned state will stay in the Unassigned state Changing an Equipment entity from Management to In service will NOT have any side effect on the Port state The Port state will remain as it was Due to the many to one relationship between Port entities and EVCs Flows the following behaviors is implemented editing a Port entity from In service to Management Maintenance or Dis abled will result in ALL EVCs Flows that are children of that Port being changed from In service to Management If an EVC was already Manage ment or Unassigned prior to the edit of the Port state it will not change editing a Port entity from In service Management Maintenance or Disabled to Unassigned will result in ALL EVCs Flows that are children of that Port being changed to Unassigned This effect will also occur as a result of an edit of the Port s parent en
252. X Green The RJ 45 electrical Access Ethernet port has two LEDs associated with the connector The definitions of the LEDs are shown in the following table Table 6 Access Port Electrical RJ 45 Connector LED Definitions Connector LED Color Definition RJ 45 e Unassigned oe Off Activity e No Traffic j Flashing Green Traffic TX or RX Activity off Unassigned ine Link Link Down n Green Link Detected 70 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Network Ethernet Port LEDs Associated with the Network optical Ethernet port are two LEDs Link and Rate as defined in the following table Table 7 Network Optical Ethernet Link and Rate LEDs Connector LED Color Definition SFP Unassigned only applies to Port 2 Rate Off eid RT Yellow 100M Operation e Green 1000M Operation Unassigned only applies to Port 2 Link Off SFP not present Activity e Link Down LK Green Working Link detected Flashing Traffic TX or RX Green The Network Port RJ 45 electrical Ethernet port has two LEDs associated with the connector The definitions of the LEDs are shown in the following table Table 8 Network Port Electrical RJ 45 Connector LED Definitions Connector LED Color Definition RJ 45 Unassigned Pa Off BA Activity e No Traffic 7 Flashing Green Traffic TX or RX A
253. XX 00 0B 90 XX XX XX or Enabled Installation and Operations Manual 445 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Proxy ARP This option defines if the proxy ARP functionality should be enabled If two or more ADVA Optical Networking FSP 150s are connected via Management Tunnel as well as connected to the same LAN then only one of the NEs NIDs should have the PROXYARP option enabled Otherwise there will be multiple ARP responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP Address Disabled Enabled Date Time The date in format yyyy mm dd and the time in format hh mm ss If Unicast is selected for NTP Mode and an NTP server has been linked changing the date and time is denied If a date time entered exceeds the provisioned user GUI timeout value in respect to the current system time then the user session will time out varies System Time of Day Selects the desired system Time of Day mode Local the Time of Day is based on the local oscil lator NTP the Time of Day is updated based on an external NTP server PTP Clock the Time of Day is updated based on the Telecom Slave s Time of Day PTP Clock is only applicable when a Telecom Slave has been provisioned Local NTP
254. a right click on the associated port entity and selecting Cre ate PTPFP To edit a PTP Flow Point enter a right click on the PTP Flow Point entity e g ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 and select Edit To delete a PTPFP enter a right click on the PTPFP entity and select Delete Table 50 Create Edit PTP Flow Point Parameter Settings Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults PTPFP ID Transparent Clock Identifier 1 33 Create only Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64 characters identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable blank ASCII characters long Administrative Enables or disables the Transparent Clock See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management PTP Flowpoint Defines the Flowpoint as either an OC Slave OC Master OC Slave Type or Monitoring type OC Master Create Only OC Slave is used when configuring a Telecom Slave and monitoring the t3 slave timestamp locally or t1 master timestamp remote of this PTP session is desired OC Master is used when configuring a Master Clock Interface have a remote slave and monitoring the t3 Monitoring slave timestamp remote is desired e Monitoring is used when monitoring a PTP session that works regardless to this SP 100 and the traffic is mirrored to the SP 100 it can monitor t3 slave to master or t1 master to slave Flow ID Flo
255. a static route on the PC to communicate to the SNE e g from Windows command prompt enter route add 192 168 2 3 mask 255 255 255 255 192 168 2 2 according to the example in Figure 191 on Page 5 313 This will allow you to con nect to the SNE Verify connectivity to FSP 150SP 1 and FSP 150CC 2 from the eVi sion Workstation Open a web browser window Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater IE 8 0 recommended or Firefox 2 0 or greater Firefox 3 6 recommended and enter the IP address of FSP 150SP 1 to access the FSP 150SP eVision Web Browser Management Tool Logon using a valid user name and password The default login and pass word are root and ChgMeNOW respectively Repeat for FSP 150CC 2 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 317 ADVA oats A J E WI Wa n Provision Communications Optical Networking 318 Installation and Operations Manual a ADVA 7J a amv ws n Optical Networking Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Introduction This chapter contains information and procedures for the following Etherjack and Syncjack testing features e Network Access Port Loopbacks Network Access Port Performance Monitoring e SyncJack Testing Network Access Port Loopbacks To assist with Ethernet service fault isolation the system supports Port VLAN and Payload loopback modes on all Ethernet traffic carrying ports see Note The loopba
256. able Diagnostic tests when the cable is removed from the port Enables or disables Drop Eligibility Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Installation and Operations Manual 469 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E aap WN Y Optical Networking Table 41 Network Port Configuration Settings Edit Configuration Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Port Shaping Enables or Disables Network Port Shaping Shaping is Enabled useful to limit the burst size of the traffic being offered Disabled to the network Port rate shaping at the Network Port enables over subscription of client services without exceeding a specified Network Port bandwidth Port Shaped Speed Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Network Port in bps Applicable when Port Shaping is Enabled This allows a carrier to force a virtual maximum bandwidth on a Network Port and allows Access Port services EIR to compete for bandwidth allocation Setting can not be lower than the CIR setting for the Access Port 0 to 1 000 000 000 Q in Q EtherType Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to interoperate with Q in Q frames with other vendors Only editable if Q in Q EtherType Override is enabled 0 hex Q in Q EtherType Override Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType Enabled Disabled Edit Sync E Sync E Mode
257. ach end unit For 23 rack installation attach one 1U 19 to 23 extender bracket to each left and right unit 19 mounting ear using four 10 32 x 0 375 screws For ETSI rack installation attach one 1U 19 to ETSI extender bracket to each left and right unit 19 mounting ear using four 10 32 x 0 375 screws See Figure 34 on p 91 If installing in a Standard configuration set the brackets flush with the SP 100 If installing in an Extended configuration line up the rear set of bracket holes to the SP 100 so that the SP 100 is recessed from the front of the bracket Step 3 Mount the dual mated SP 100s to the 23 rack or ETSI rack with four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and four M6 nuts End of Procedure 90 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Figure 34 Mounting Dual SP 100s via EXT 23 ETSI Configuration 19 Mounting Bracket Short 19 to 23 or 19 to ETSI Extender Tab 12 24x0 5 or M6x20 POZI Screws and M6 Nuts 10 32x0 375 Screws M3x5 POZI Screws 12 24x0 5 19 to 23 or or 19 to ETSI M6x20 POZI Screws Extender Tab and M6 Nuts Installation and Operations Manual 91 Physical Installation a ADVA 7J a amv wa n Optical Networking Mounting the SP 100 to a Wall Use the following procedure to install a single chassis on a wall The single rack wall mounting kit part number 1013904013 supports
258. agement and SecuritY oooooooo ooo 60 Local User Profile Management 0 000 eee eens 60 SNMP User Management s m rre S444 2 ESSE ee es 61 ACL Management vis ou exe aed be ee AR 61 Security Banner 1 es 61 RADIUS Or TACACS Ha aces med ON o ERENCE RR EO 61 PrOVISIONING so rurea eee AREA A a 61 Communications Provisioning 2025i 02 aa te ae eas 61 Operations Provisioning 4 cs cr a a 62 Provisioning System Options o o ooo ooo e 62 Provisioning Network Elements 0000 cee ooooo o 62 Provisioning Secure ACCESS 1 es 62 Provisioning AUIS os ae we ace ee ws a cea See eae Haw a 62 Provisioning Performance Monitoring 000 ee eee eae 63 Alarm Generation and Monitoring 0 0 0 cee eee es 63 SP 100 Hardware Description 0 0 ccc e 63 POWEr SUPONE vu a aca 8 Fe e A eR ds ae Be RRA 65 Connector and LED Descriptions 0 0 0 cee es 65 Front Panel Connector Descriptions ooooooo o 65 System LEDS 2 4044 a eee a Ea eee AA ee NERS 68 Local Management Port LEDS 0 00 eee eee ees 69 Ethernet Access Port Client Ethernet Facility LEDS 69 Network Ethernet Port LEDS visir a a a 71 4 Installation and Operations Manual Table of Contents Chapter 2 Physical Installation 73 Introd ctHOM as oe eee re oe ee ee ee ee ee ee 73 Physical Installation 4 0 0 a sox 4am 4ah6 ate we Sow 6 ae 2 a ae dd ae
259. agement tunnel interface Invalid character Invalid first character Invalid character xxx at position yyy Invalid engine ID contains non hex characters Invalid engine ID must be 12 octets long first bit is 0 Invalid engine ID must be 5 to 32 octets long first bit is 1 Invalid engine ID must be even number of octets Invalid IP Address Invalid port Invalid Port Number Invalid shelf state state not supported IP Addr Overlaps with other interface IP is 0 0 0 0 for nexthop route ipaddr port format required Key invalid or not strong enough 392 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response 512 continued Where Why is Length exceeds limit must be 1 to xxx LTM Egress ID must be in hexadecimal format LTM Egress ID must contain 8 octets Max value cannot be less than min value Message processing model xxx Metric must be 0 xxx MAX Min value exceeds max value Mixed DOS and UNIX path More than 1 enabled server has priority Multi COS is disabled Multi COS flow must have N2A Rate Limiting enabled Must be disabled for given Line Type Must have only a z A Z 0 9 and _ Name must be 1 xxx characters long and contain only alphanumeric charac ters Name must be unique Negative number Network Port disposition is set to xxx No upper case characters No lowercase characters Not a valid IP address No
260. ailure occurs and eventually recovers during Figure 232 Example PTP Clock Probe TIE TE Graph with Failed Region ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 34 16 SyncJack File y Application v A x 5 D D Ej System El NE 1 E Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Results E Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 Es History Estimations TS 1 1 E PTP Network Analysis E Synejack Schedules SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 EJ Result Analysis Raw Data Collection m r Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph 2 1 14 P1 47 1 eb 160 2 0 400 480 560 640 720 800 Elapsed Time s 366 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 18 Step 19 If the test duration is longer than 2000 seconds select the Recent TIE Graph tab to view the last 2000 seconds of test results After the test is completed a subset of the PTP Clock Probe Status Tab data are available in a history entity To view history results expand the History Results entity under the PTP Clock Probe entity and select the desired PTP Clock Probe Result s to view A PTP Clock Probe History Result pane appears Figure 233 View PTP Clock Probe History Result E File Application A A System NE 1 Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT
261. al user access security policy can be configured for low medium or high security levels see Configure Security Policy on p 174 Access can be restricted by using the Access Control List ACL where only designated IP addresses or subnetworks are permitted to access the sys tem see Configure ACL on p 166 e Access to the system can be limited by use of locally defined users includ ing user ID password and access level Superuser provisioning mainte nance or monitoring See Configure Local Users on p 176 Access to the system can be restricted by using remote authentication with an externally defined and controlled user set See Configure Remote Authentication on p 179 Configure Security Keys The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on as a superuser using eVision Changing the security keys may interrupt any current secure sessions that have used the existing keys for authentication Note Installation and Operations Manual 171 Provision Secure Access Optical Networking From the Configuration view with the Administration tree expanded Procedure Step 1 Left click on Key Generation in the selection tree pane and the fol lowing screen displays to show the current SSL Certificate and SSH Key inform
262. and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 58 Create Edit Clock Probe Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Raw Data Enables or disables Raw Data to be sent to a remote Enabled Collection Raw Data Collection server Disabled Measurement Selects the measurement type Frequency Type Phase Clock Analysis Parameters Create Edit a PTP Clock Probe A PTP Clock Probe may be created by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu expanding System NE 1 and Clock Analysis in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the PTP Clock Probes entity and selecting Create PTP Clock Probe To edit an existing PTP Clock Probe enter a right click on the PTP Clock Probe entity PTP Clock Probe 1 1 and select Edit To delete a PTP Clock Probe enter a right click on the PTP Clock Probe entity PTP Clock Probe 1 1 and select Delete then select OK Table 59 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings Description Option Settings identify this entity This string can be up to 15 printable ASCII characters long paramere Applicable Rules Defaults PTP Clock PTP Clock Probe Index Number is automatically Probe Index indexed but is user editable 1 32 Create only Name A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely 1 to 15 characters blank
263. anding System and NE 1 in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the Raw Data Collection entity and selecting Edit Raw Data Server Table 64 Edit Telecom Slave Analysis Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults File Transfer Drop down list to select the desired File Transfer FTP Method Method The desired protocol must be enabled at the SCP System level see System Configuration Options and Rules on p 445 SFTP Server IP The IP Address of the Raw Data Server 0 0 0 0 User ID The User ID of the Raw Data Server empty User Password The User Password of the Raw Data Server empty 524 Installation and Operations Manual
264. ane Tab Move through editable fields This key enables the user to move down through the editable fields and the command buttons on a status pane Up arrow Move through the options of a drop down list This key Down Arrow enables the user to move up or down through the items of a drop down list eVision Applications The eVision web browser management tool provides the user with the following major applications Configuration Maintenance Performance Monitoring PTP SyncJack 142 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Each of the Applications can be selected from the Menu Bar see Menu Bar on p 135 or the Tool Bar see Tool Bar on p 136 The Title Bar displays the lat est application that has been selected see Title Bar on p 135 Configuration View Configuration view allows you to perform provisioning functions and view provi sioning attributes of the entity that is selected in the Selection Tree or the entity Details Pane Left clicking an item in the Selection Tree displays current status and configuration in the Details Pane Right clicking an item in the Selection Tree displays a selection window for editing configuration items for the selected entity Selecting an editing option brings up an edit view in the Details Pane Alarm status is displayed in the Alarms Pane located at the bottom of the screen providing constant visibility a
265. ane is always displayed no matter what application is currently selected thereby providing continuous alarm monitoring Configuration This provides the user with the ability to view the current status of the FSP 150SP system view the current configuration of the FSP 150SP system provision the FSP 150SP for operation See Configuration View on p 143 for further details Maintenance This provides the user with a single view from which to perform all testing and maintenance related operations such as 126 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool e view current conditions reboot system perform lamp test raise clear test alarm Ping trace route flush ARP cache loopbacks perform sync reference switching edit alarm attributes software upgrade database management e CLI configuration file management Software Licensing See Maintenance View on p 145 for further details Performance Monitoring Network and Access Ethernet Ports This provides the user with the ability to obtain Performance Monitoring PM reports and chart them view and configure Performance Parameter threshold values See Performance Monitoring View on p 151 for further details Precision Time Control PTP The Precision Time Protocol PTP feature provides the ability to create and monitor End to End E2E functionality and Telecom Slave TS functio
266. ansmitted 0 PTP Delay Resp Follow Up Messages Transmitted 0 PTP Signaling Messages Transmitted eso PTP Delay Resp Messages Transmitted o PTP Sync Messages Transmitted 2737948 PTP Delay_Req Messages Transmitted o Unknown PTP Messages Transmitted o PTP Delay_Resp Messages Transmitted 2735174 m 338 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 204 15 Minute PM Counts View of a PTP Flowpoint ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP ile Application v A x 5 Syst z P oti em Configuration Statistics E NE 1 E MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 Summary 1 Day Thresholds MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves Export E Dynamic Slaves Ts ANNOUNCESRX ANNOUNCESTX DELAYREQSRX DELAYREQSTX DELAYRSPSRX DELAYRSPSTX current 40 20864 o 20864 DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 18 00 00 3 28800 A 3 E NTESP100 17 45 00 28800 E1000 N 1 17 30 00 28800 17 15 00 28800 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 17 00 00 28800 E1000 A 1 16 45 00 28800 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Hem TS 1 1 16 00 00 s00c 1 1 1 15 45 00 Alarm Attributes aN 15 15 00 SOE 15 00 00 Telecom Slave 14 45 00 13 45 00 13 30 00 13 15 00 13 00 00 12 45 00 12 30 00 12 15 00 12 00 00 11 45 00 lololojojojolojo oojoojooooloolooolooloolo 11 15 00 11 00 00 10 45 00 10 30 00 10 15 00 olololo olololololool
267. anual Table of Contents Editing Alarm AttribUteS s ss oa ae ae oe ee ee 149 POO ON A IN ee OS BS ee AN 151 Performance Monitoring View 1 0 ce es 151 Precision Time Protocol vk eae eee KEP Rae REE DAR ee ew OG 151 SYNC IAG a had wo he ae Gk AAA ONDAS AAA ARA Aa e 151 Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning 153 TNE o as Sse eho ey eta tee aes a Seo cslet a see at eyes caer Gots a ee 153 Provisioning the SP 100 eras rica Wd oe be So RESO a ee eS 153 Recommended Sequence of Steps for Initial Turn Up of an SP 100 153 Upgrade Software Version o ooo 154 Provision System Options daria tra a 162 Configure System Identity and Configuration o 162 Configure LOS 000 cio Bae aos ye dedo a Ta ee Sew oe aw 8 163 CONTIQUTS BOL co s de radar ARA AAA 166 Edit the Secunity Banners sa seeren si ad aaa ls a 167 Configure NTP So ado tera as a id ae Sd a a de Rg 168 Provision NE 1 Common Units 0 00 cee ee es 169 Configure NE 1 FSP 150SP 100 0 anaa aaa o 169 Configure NTESPLOO cece eee mera ee ee ee eee 170 Provision Secure ACCESS 1 es 171 Configure Sec rity KeyS jus hoy be oe AA AA 171 Configure Security Policy 22 2s44235 64294 vda bs bee s ei ae badass 174 Configure Local Users vivre 244660 i ee 48 46 564440 464 176 Configure Remote Authentication 0 0000 aa 179 Provision SNMP ACCESS 0 0 o o o ooo 181 Provision Access Port 0 0c
268. apter 8 Provisioning Rules When in the Management or Maintenance state all alarms against that entity is suppressed The entity will otherwise function as normal When in the Disabled state user data traffic is suppressed In order to perform maintenance actions on an entity e g Loopback Diag nostics etc the entity must first be put into the Maintenance state An entity in the Disabled state will not pass user data traffic Management traffic i e Management Tunnel traffic and EFM OAM will continue to pass in this state The Operational State of an entity can be either o Normal o Outage The Operational state of an entity is Outage when Admin state of the entity is Unassigned e Secondary state is FAF FLT SGEO UEQ MEA The facility Administrative state model will utilize all states described above The exception to this is the following o The Disabled State only applies to Access Ports Network Ports do not support the Disabled state In regards to Network Ports the Unassigned State does not apply to the working Network port o The working Network port cannot be Unassigned e The DCN facility Administrative state model is limited to the following states In service o Management Unassigned e EVC Flows Policers and Shapers support the following states In service o Management Disabled o Unassigned EVC Flows Admin state control between In service and Mana
269. ar End 37055 3557280 ESDE EtherStats Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped it is just the number of times this condition has been detected None Near End 37055 3557280 ESF EtherStats Fragments The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment This is because it counts both runts which are normal occurrences due to collisions and noise hits Receive Near End 37055 3557280 ESFS EtherStats Frames Sent The Frames Sent in the egress direction If there is link down during the interval the bin is not accessible Transmit Near End Installation and Operations Manual 479 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking Monitored a PEN Loca 5 15 Type Description Direction tion Min 1 Day ESJ EtherStats Jabbers The total number of Receive Near 0 0 packets received that were longer than End 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had eit
270. ards o PTP Delay Req Message Discards 0 216 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 110 SOOC Raw PTP Messages File A x5 Application Ej System E NE 1 NTESP100 E E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 TS 1 1 Mm S00c 1 1 1 OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Alarm Attributes a Step 17 Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port Statistics Configuration Identification Entity ID SOOC 1 1 1 Alias TS1 Last Announce Message Received Raw Announce Message 0B 02 00 40 02 00 04 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 EA 39 D2 CO 00 01 00 01 00 2D 05 04 00 00 52 FO 17 03 OD 63 60 AC 00 23 00 80 54 15 00 00 80 00 80 EA 39 D2 CO 00 01 00 01 20 Last Sync Message Received Raw Sync Message 00 02 00 2C 02 00 04 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 EA 39 D2 CO 00 01 00 01 SC 04 00 7F 00 00 52 FO 17 05 2F SD B9 78 Last Delay_Resp Message Received Raw Delay_Resp Message 09 02 00 36 02 00 04 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 EA 39 D2 CO 00 01 00 01 SC 04 03 7F 00 00 52 FO 17 05 2F 60 7E 18 00 80 EA 33 BO AO 00 00 00 01 State Wait until the Port Status changes to Slave Locked Figure 111 OCS Port Configuration Status Slave File Application y B XxX 5 E System E NE 1 E NTESP100 E El1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 A4 1 E TS 1 1 E sOOc 1 1
271. arranty or covered by a maintenance contract To display ADVA Optical Networking s Technical Support web site that includes all contact information go to the home page at http www advaoptical com and select the Support button 26 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Customer Login ADVA Optical Networking s service options include 24X 7 telephone support web based support tools on site support e technical training both on site and at company facilities in Germany the UK and the USA expedited repair service e extended hardware warranty service ADVA Optical Networking s customer login provides a suite of interactive net working services that provide immediate access to information and resources at any time from anywhere in the world This highly integrated internet application is a powerful easy to use tool for doing business with us The customer login s broad range of features and services help customers to streamline business processes and improve productivity Through your cus tomer login you will find information tailored especially for you including net working solutions services and programs In addition you can resolve technical issues with online support services download and test software pack ages and order training materials Contact your local sales office for information on obtaining a customer login Access your customer login via the home
272. aster Raw Data Collection 3 Disabled IP Version IPy4 Measurement Type Frequency Master IP Address 10 206 206 1 Step 16 After the test is completed select the Tests tab to view test results in tabular format Scroll over to determine if any thresholds have been crossed Step 17 Select the TIE Graph tab Test results are provided in a TIE Graph Installation and Operations Manual 365 ADVA A VO a MID wa n SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 231 SyncJack PTP Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph IS ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application ax oo 3 E status Tests TieGraph RecentTieGraph Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 ES History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Clock Analysis be PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Estimations ze PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis gt E PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 E Synejack Schedules z g SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 2 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 E Result Analysis MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection ES 39 52 65 19 9 13 14 39 4 174 347 521 604 868 1 041 1 215 1 388 1 562 Elapsed Time s the Syncjack scheduled window the failed region is indicated by a red shadowed area of the TIE TE graph see example in the following Note figure If a source or reference f
273. aster Virtual Port entry screen displays 228 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 123 Create Master Virtual Port B ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application A x 5 my System A Create Master Virtual Port f NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 Identification y MASTER CIOCI MATO ICAO 4 1 1 Edit 1 Master Virtual Port Index 2 sy Delete Alias D Create Master Virtual Port NTESP1 Edit Thresholds Configuration TS 1 1 PTP Flow Point ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 w f Alarm Attributes sooc Cancel Appl OK Telecam Slave HY Step 61 Enter the following Master Virtual Port options a Enter the desired Master Virtual Port Index and Alias b Select the desired PTP Flow Point c Select OK A Master Virtual Port entity appears below the associated Master Clock Interface entity n the selection tree pane Step 62 Select the Master Virtual Port entity to view configuration details Step 63 If the Remote Slave has already been provisioned as a Dynamic Slave and the Master Clock entity has been provisioned with the cor rect number of Master Slaves Supported to accept the Dynamic Slave then the Dynamic Slave entity should be present Go to Step 71 to verify the Dynamic Slave connection and for reference steps to provision the Remote Slave unit as a Dynamic Slave If the Remote Slave is will be provisioned as a Remote Static Slave go to Step 64 Installation and Op
274. ata is retained There are three versions of the database always resident on the system plus a standby copy of the current database The three versions are the current running configuration a System Default that may be modified and saved by a user and a Factory Default that may not be modified When first commissioned these three database copies are identical As provisioning occurs the current running configuration database is updated with each change entered At some point the user may determine that the cur 236 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning rent copy should be the default database for this unit at which time the user should perform the Setting a Default Database procedure Then if required the database can be restored to these settings by performing the Restore System Defaults procedure The Factory Default Database never changes and as a last resort troubleshoot ing tool or upon decommissioning the current database can be reset to factory defaults by performing the Restore Factory Defaults procedure The Default Database can also be reset to Factory Defaults using the New option in the Setting a Default Database procedure The difference is when using the New option selection any user uploaded Default Settings will be erased To view the configuration database information in eVision select Maintenance view expand the Administration entity and then s
275. atabase and Configuration Files Optical Networking Resetting the database to factory defaults will drop all traffic and erase all communications and user settings including the loss of the A eVision connection to the NE This operation should not be performed lightly It may be advisable to backup the current database so that it CAUTION can be restored later Step 2 To reset the current database to the factory defaults select OK End of Procedure CLI Configuration Files In addition to the ICF database files see Database and Configuration Files on p 236 the system also supports text based configuration files based on the output from the CLI command show running config see the FSP 750SP 7100 Command Line Reference Guide and CLI Configuration File Management on Page 4 255 Since they are text based they can be viewed and edited The system supports keeping up to four CLI configuration files in persistent memory These files can be created deleted loaded marked for execution after reboot ing the system or copied to and or from a remote server using FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer protocols They are mentioned here because they persist in memory after a Restore System Defaults or a Restore Factory Defaults and since the database restoration requires a reboot if a CLI configuration file is marked for loading following a reboot it may change the configuration again immediately following the reboot CL
276. ation Figure 72 Display SSL Certificate and SSH Key El ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v Xx Eb D 4 El System Key Generation a Synchronization SSL Certificate 4 Communications SNMP Country Us State Texas Locality Richardson Organization ADVA Optical Networking Organization Unit Ethernet Access Name ADVA Email support advaoptical com Valid From Date 2014 01 02 19 48 55 Valid Until 2033 12 28 19 48 55 SHA 1 Fingerprint 4B 34 D6 AE 28 25 EC 60 39 75 60 F0 9E 46 F8 42 B2 FB 47 54 MDS Fingerprint 60 F6 BB 10 FE 15 2B 4D 3A 6D B4 B6 4F 1D F0 46 E Administration Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation 4 w j SSH Key SHA1 Fingerprint 22 80 02 D2 93 C1 7F 3D 20 15 B4 84 09 B3 FO CO 6C BF 40 67 MD5 Fingerprint 5B 4F 3F 00 B0 2D 1E D4 32 D7 1F EA 25 64 19 39 Regeneration Status Status Idle Step 2 To regenerate the SSL Certificate or SSH Key right click on Key Generation in the selection tree pane and select Regenerate Keys and the following screen displays see Figure 74 on p 173 172 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 73 Regenerate Keys ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v xX B amp B gt amp System Regenerate Keys E NE 1 Synchronization Generate Cert
277. ation E NE 1 Synchronization Identification E Communications DCN etho Entity ID MANAGEMENT TUNNEL 1 3G DCN Tunnel Name Bridge Associated Port ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Management Tunnels A NE 1 Interface SNMP g Encapsulation Type Ethernet MTU 1500 bytes Ej Administration Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode VLAN S Tag VLAN Disabled YLAN Id 4095 S Tag VLAN Id 4095 Management Traffic Bridging Enabled Bandwidth CIR 256000 bps Buffer Size 32 EIR 768000 bps cos 7 Step 13 If anything in the Configuration data requires modification right click on the management tunnel ID and select Edit Configuration see the following figure Figure 174 Edit Management Tunnel Bridging ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B amp B YO amp System A Sl Edit Configuration E NE 1 E Synchronization Identification E Communications DCN etho Entity ID E Wiesen TUNNEL 1 Tunnel Name Bridge 3G DCN E Associated Port ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Management Tunnels E NE 1 Interface SNMP Edit Configuration Encapsulation Type Ethernet MTU 1500 bytes Delete Administration E al El Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode VLAN Based y S Tag YLAN Disabled y VLAN Id 4095 4 4095 S Tag VLAN Id 4095 1 4095 Management Traffic Bridging Enabled Bandwidth GIR 256000 bps Buffer Size 32 KB EIR 768000 bps COS all 7 Cancel
278. ation Codes 0 000 ce eee 399 System Alarms and EventS 00000 eee eee ene 401 SOOC A ADE gt vv lod o E ee Re RO ee Ra E e o 8 413 Telecom Slave Alarms i lt s esa 08 eee ea eee a sas 414 Installation and Operations Manual 21 a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 31 Network Port and Access Port Alarms ooo 417 Table 32 Clock Probe AlarmS nnana aaa es 421 Table 33 PTP Clock Probe AlarmS aana a 422 Table 34 PTP Network Probe Alarms o o o oooo 422 Table 35 Alarm Masking RuleS naaa aaa es 423 Table 36 State Codes and Descripti0NS 0 oooooooo 433 Table 37 User Authorization Privilege LevelS 436 Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings 437 Table 39 Maximum Network Port Access Port Bandwidth 444 Table 40 System Configuration SettingS 0 0 cc eee es 445 Table 41 Network Port Configuration Settings Edit Configuration 469 Table 42 Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service 473 Table 43 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings 483 Table 44 PTP Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings 488 Table 45 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings 490 Table 46 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings 492 Table 47 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings 493 Table 48 Create Edit Telecom S
279. ation File Procedures 1 0 0 0 cee es 258 CLI Configuration File Procedure o ooo ooooo oo 258 Configuration File Procedure Using eVision 261 Default Settings Value File oooooo ooo 266 8 Installation and Operations Manual Table of Contents Bulk Log Transfers os sacii ea a e A Ae ee lc a 269 Test the FSP LOS ice coa a a a a a dd a e a a a a 271 Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning 273 INErOdUCHOM es k s do rr a Oe eR ea ee E Ra 273 Provision CommunicationS asasan aa a a 274 Management Communication to the FSP 15085P 274 serial CONNECHON ue toe bee eS bee ew ee ele eee ees 276 Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN ethO Port Using the Serial Port 276 Set Up the 3G Modem Using the Serial Port 282 Browser based IP Connection o oooooooo oo e 285 Edit DCN eth0 Configurations cake ie cee aa ee 286 Configure Management Tunnel 0 0 00 eee ee ees 290 Configure Source Address naasa aaa a es 298 Add Delete Static Route saaa aa ee ee ee ee ee 299 Add Delete Static ARP Entry aoaaa es 302 Configure Access Control List ACL aasa cee ee ee 304 Configure 3G Modem Using eVision 000 eee eee eee 304 Sample Network GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel 313 Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring 319 Introductions eci us A are Seeded a a
280. ation displays when you first open eVision The FSP 150SP system view located in the Details Pane provides a physical represen tation of the FSP 150SP its current provisioning configuration and alarm status Installation and Operations Manual 133 Getting Familiar with eVision ADVA VO E VUE ws Y Optical Networking Figure 45 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Components Menu Bar Tool Bar Title Bar Se ADVA FSP 150 P100 8 File y Application E DW D Syam Configuration Resources E NE 1 Wal E Mieseing Identification t m E1000 N 1 7 Sys e E1000 A 1 NTESP100 1 1 1 Na me DCN etho SP100 35 98 3G Modem State Synchronization EJ NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT E NTESP100 Operational Normal Selectio 1 1 gt Physical Inventory Tree Pane E Name FSP150SP 100 Physical Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c0 Part Number 1078904650 01 Hardware Revision 01 01 Software Revision 6 1 1 049 Firmware Revision m60237 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN USI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 View Tabs Environmental Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 mv DCN etho 3G DCN Settings El Management Tunnels Details NEGT SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled Pane wi El Administration Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Notif
281. ation mode in the receive direction the port is able to recover the clock from the incoming signal This recovered clock provides the stable reference to the system clock from which the transmit clock for ports is derived Ports can be enabled to process the Ethernet Synchronization Messag ing Channel ESMC and extract the encoded Synchronization Status Message Quality Level SSM QL value In the transmit direction ports are locked to a common clock derived from the system clock and can be enabled to insert the ESMC channel with the appropriate SSM QL value In non synchronous operation mode in the receive direction the port s recov ered clock is not used by the system clock and the port does not terminate the ESMC channel In the transmit direction the port may be locked to the system clock which is either synchronized to another reference clock or is free running but does not generate an ESMC channel System Clock Reference The system clock on the SP 100 can be synchronized to one of several timing references e the recovered clock of an Ethernet port operating in Synchronous Ethernet mode an external clock provided on the Building Integrated Timing Supply BITS input port a 1OMHZ Clock CLK input port a PPS input port or GPS signal an internal crystal oscillator Synchronous Ethernet interfaces CLK IN and the BITS IN port can be selected as synchronization sources and can be assigned an expected SSM QL value If
282. ational State This attribute contains the current actual state of the entity It is based on the provisioned state plus the actual physical state of the entity Secondary State This attribute refines or provides added information regarding the Operational State of the entity Refer to the following table for state values and their definitions Table 36 State Codes and Descriptions Definition User Traffic is not passed in this state management traffic is passed Alarms are squelched in this state Normal in service traffic passing state of the entity Mandatory state for initiating loopbacks Etherjack Diagnosis Alarms are squelched in this state Out Of Service state of entity traffic is still passed alarms are squelched i e not reported Traffic user or management not passed in this state Alarms are not monitored in this state Normal in service traffic passing state of the entity State Entity State Administration State Disabled Equipment and Facilities IS Maintenance Management Unassigned Operational State Normal Equipment and Facilities Outage The entity is not operational due to alarm condition Installation and Operations Manual 433 Entity State Descriptions a ADVA Va E a uw w Y Optical Networking Table 36 State Codes and Descriptions Continued State Entity State
283. ations Guide is appli cable to the SP 100 software release 6 1 1 For defect resolution and functional additions please refer to the Release Notes Although this document focuses primarily on using the eVision web browser for configuring and monitoring the SP 100 equivalent CLI or SNMP commands may be used For more information regarding the CLI command structure refer to the FSP 750SP 100 Command Line Interface Reference Guide For more information regarding the SNMP command structure refer to the FSP 150SP 100 SNMP Reference Manual Before installing and provisioning the SP 100 familiarize yourself with the SP 100 equipment its functions and requirements The following chapters sup port the installation and operation of the SP 100 Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview contains product overview information and feature descriptions Chapter 2 Physical Installation contains procedures to physically install the SP 100 and contains a recommended work flow sequence for new installations including support for software upgrades Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Too contains an overview of the eVision web browser management tool workspace and contains procedures for logging in and logging off Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning contains step by step operations and provi sioning procedures for the SP 100 system It is organized in the recommended workflow for new installations and can be applied to existing systems Chapter 5 Communicati
284. ations status diagnostic results and cable benchmarks Entering a right click provides menu options for perform ing Loopbacks and raising clearing a test alarm o Access port view operations status diagnostic results and cable benchmarks Entering a right click provides menu options for raising and clearing test alarm and performing Loopbacks Synchronization By expanding the Synchronization entity the NE 1 entity the NTESP100 entity and selecting the SYNC entity or Time Clock entity the Configuration and Sta tus tabs for SYNC Time Clock are displayed Entering a right click on the SYNC Time Clock entity allows switching Sync references The operations available are Forced Switch e Manual Switch Sync only Lock Out e Clear Wait To Restore Clear Lock Out e Clear Switch Communications Selecting the Communications entity allows viewing of the Routing Table ARP Table the results of the last ping command and the results of the last trace route command Ping Trace Route and Flush ARP Cache options are available when a right click is entered on the Communications entity Alarm Attributes By expanding the Alarm Attributes and selecting a listed entity the current alarm attribute settings for that entity are displayed Entering a right click on the entity allows editing the alarm severity of each listed condition The NE entities avail able for viewing and editing in Maintenance View are 10Mhz CLK Port
285. ator to set up an Ethernet test set at a central location to inject traffic into the network Figure 25 CO Based Testing Using Ethernet Loopback Central Office As shown in the example in the figure above traffic is looped back into the net work and back to the test set The test set can look for any anomalies such as frame loss or out of sequence frames The loopback eliminates the need to con nect a test set in the field or atthe customer premise to verify round trip service Only Port Facility loopbacks are available The following loopback functions are available Facility Port Loopback Facility Port Timed Loopback When using eVision to remove a loopback click on the drop down list for Loop back Configuration and select None then click on OK Port Facility Loopback Port loopbacks consists of Facility loopbacks which may be applied in a con stant or timed manner Placing a port in facility loopback mode connects all traf fic frames received from the port to the associated transmitter see Figure 26 on p 57 Loopbacks will loop back all traffic frames including EFM OAM messages resulting in a disruption of service Selecting the timed loopback option can min imize the amount of time service is disrupted while allowing a specified duration 56 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview of testing Port loopbacks ignore any traffic shaping and allow testing at the fu
286. ature must be enabled and the Time Clock must first be provisioned Step 38 through Step 47 A second priority reference in addition to the first priority reference may be provisioned as a backup in case the first priority reference is lost see Edit GPS on p 195 A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time It is recommended that the time clock is locked before creating the master clock Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu Expand the System and NE 1 entities in the selec tion tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Enter a right click on the NE 1 entity and select Create Master Clock A Create Master Clock window displays Figure 120 Create Master Clock File y Application a Xx System NE 1 A mi Create Telecom Slave Create Boundary Clock CE 1 1 1 Create Master Clock ER T 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves 3 Dynamic Slaves DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 NTESP100 E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 sooc 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes Step 51 B bl Create Master Clock Identification Master Clock Index 2 Alias 0080e839d2c0000 hex Clock Identity State Administrative Management Secondary n a Operational n a Master Clock Configuration PTP Domain Number 4 P
287. ault or dyinggasp or Inkdownmasterslavecfg Inkdownautonegfailed Link Down Auto Negotiation Failed Inkdownautonegfailed and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdeactivated or Inkdownmasterslavecfg Inkdowncablefault Link Down Cable Fault Inkdowncablefault and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdeactivated or Inkdownmasterslavecfg Inkdowncableremoved Link Down Cable Removed Inkdowncableremoved and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdeactivated or Inkdownmasterslavecfg Inkdownlpbkfault Link Down Loopback Fault Inkdownlpbkfault and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdeactivated Inkdownmasterslavecfg Link Down Master Slave Config Inkdownmasterslavecfg and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdeactivated Buiysey wey BupyoMmieN e911dO am Aa E Pa VAU Vy jenueyy suoneledo pue uonejesu Szr Table 35 Alarm Masking Rules Continued Condition Type SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name Alarm Rule Inkdownunisolated Link Down Cause Not Determined Inkdownunisolated and not Inkdownlpbkfault or Inkdownautonegfailed or Inkdowncablefault or Inkdowncableremoved or Inkdeactivated or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp or Inkdownmasterslavecfg
288. ault settings were carefully vetted to avoid potential serious conflicts in these set tings Changing them may result in corruption of the database or inability to work with certain created objects This procedure should DM only be done by properly trained personnel with a file that was tested in a lab to ensure proper operation Restore Factory Defaults will CAUTION erase any user defined Default Settings file This procedure is NOT part of original Provisioning procedures If the user has determined that the default value settings applied when a new entity is created are not applicable or unacceptable an XML file containing alternate settings can be downloaded and applied to the FSP 150SP using the following procedure The following procedure includes steps for performing applying a new Default Settings file using the eVision tool It is also possible to perform this process using CLI See the FSP 750SP 7100 Command Line Reference Guide for details The following procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Click on the maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Step 2 Expand Administration and select Default Settings The display is the Copy System Default Settings From Remote view
289. ave The Holdover state is entered when 1000 Create only Telecom Slave is currently locked to the Master Clock 1500 and when the active SOOC s OC S PTP Virtual Port 5000 goes to LISTENING or UNCALIBRATED In this state the phase lock can be sustained for certain amount of time specified as Holdover time before the accuracy becomes insufficient for holdover accuracy requirement 10000 The provisioned value and the assembled oscillator sta bility co determine the Holdover time Clock Recovery Selects one way or two way clock recovery mode One Way are Create One way delay request response messages are not only used and in this mode only frequency can be recov ered only sync message ony sy ge Two Way Installation and Operations Manual 497 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 48 Create Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Sync Reference Enable or Disable allowing the Telecom Slave to be used as Sync Reference Default is Disabled If set to Enabled the TS port is available as a possi ble reference for the system Sync object e If set to Disabled the TS port is not available as a possible reference for the system Sync object SYNC 1 1 1 1 The system Sync object may be used to drive PTP if this option is disabled AND SYNC 1 1 1 1 is selected in
290. ay have the same priority value Second Server 1 to 3 Random ordering is chosen for those servers with Third Priority equal priority values Server 1 default is First Server 2 default is Second and Server 3 default is Third Remote The IP address of the specified Remote Authentication Authentication Server 0 0 0 0 Server 1 to 3 IP Address Edit Server Check box that if selected allows the editing of the deselected Secret Server Secret Remote Defines the shared secret used for authenticating the Authentication SP 100 with the Remote Authentication server Valid Server 1 to 3 entry is a string of up to 128 non whitespace up to 128 characters Server Secret characters To make an entry select the Edit Server Blank Secret check box Remote Defines the UDP port to use when communicating with Authentication the Remote Authentication server Default is 1812 if 1 to 65535 Server 1 to 3 Authentication Protocol is setto RADIUS or None 1812 RADIUS Port default is 49 if Authentication Protocol is set to 49 TACACS TACACS Remote Defines the UDP port to use for accounting when Authentication communicating with the Remote Authentication f ae f 1 to 65535 Server 1 to 3 server Default is 1813 if Authentication Protocol is set Accounting Port to RADIUS or None default is 49 if Authentication Cros 9 nie 49 TACACS Protocol is set to TACACS Only editable if Accounting is Enabled Remote Defines the timeout in second
291. b Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Remote File No file selected Default Database Default Setting Save Configuration F Copy to Remote Last Reset Co EG Transfer Log New 5 y HTTP Transfer Cancel OK Ej Software Licensing Step 11 Determine the next step Desired File Transfer Method Then Web HTTP Continue with the next step FTP SFTP or SCP Go to Step 13 Step 12 Enter the path to the file to restore or browse to the file location then click on OK The file will be copied from the source location and the Detail Pane will indicate when the file transfer is 100 complete End of Procedure Step 13 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the following figure The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP views are identical Installation and Operations Manual 241 a ADVA A P v 7 VA w YA Database and Configuration Files rici Networking Figure 137 Copy Database From Remote SCP View ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A BB K E System Copy System Default Database From Remote E NE 1 Synchronization Method C icati dde File Transfer Method SCP Alarm Attributes Administration
292. be History Result 0 00 eae 367 View Clock Analysis Result Meter o oo 368 View Global and Clock Analysis Dashboard 368 Telecom Slave Configuration View o ooooo o 370 Edit Telecom Slave Statistics Summary View 371 Edit Telecom Slave Analysis View o oooooo 371 Create PTP Network Probe VieW 0 o eee 372 Create SyncJack Sch dules 02 40 a RA 374 View SyncJack PTP Network Probe State Running 375 View SyncJack PTP Network Probe Statistics 376 View PTP Network Analysis Result Meter 376 View Global and PTP Network Analysis Dashboard 377 Configure MTIE Comparison 0 00 cee eee ee 378 MTIE Comparison Results a birra a A A 379 Installation and Operations Manual 19 ADVA 7J a amw ws n Optical Networking 20 Installation and Operations Manual ADVA VO E emp we Y Optical Networking List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Front Panel Connectors Left to Right 66 System LEDS 22 4004 6 ac ee Re e a o Re ee de a 68 Local Management LAN Port LEDS
293. ber command to enter the Wireless Access Number ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt dial number 650 2222222 ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt Run user name command to enter the user name for wireless con neciton ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt user name tommy J ADVA NE 1239 den 1 1 1 1 gt Run password command to enter the password for wireless conneci ton ADVA NE 1 3g den 1 1 1 1 gt password xx ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt Run admin state command to transfer the 3G Modem to in service state ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt admin state in service ADVA NE 1 39 den 1 1 1 1 gt Navigated to the Communication level and ran show 3g dcn com mand If the 3G port has obtained an IP address the wireless connec tion is ready ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt home ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt configure 3g dcn ADVA comms 3g dcn gt show 3g dcn MTU 1500 IP Address 172 21 66 94 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Primary DNS 210 21 196 6 Secondary DNS 221 5 88 88 Connect to the device with the IP address on CLI SNMP or GUI Go to Step 3 Run enable pin command to enable pin authentication once pin authentication is enabled user has to run pin aunthenticaion to access the 3G Modem ADVA NE 1 3g dcn ADVA NE 1 3g_ dcn Go to Step 3 Run diable pin command to disable pin authentication once pin authentication is disabled the user doesn t have to run pin aunthenti
294. ber optic cables Use local practices for protecting all cables and connectors End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 103 a ADVA 7J E a m WM u Connect Power Cables and Apply Power Optical Networking Connect Power Cables and Apply Power The system is powered by either an internal AC and or DC Power Supply They are physically accessed at the front of the unit where source connections are provided DC PSUs have an input polarity guard If the power is connected with the polarity reversed the unit does not power up Connect the power cables and apply power to the SP 100 using the following procedure Use the following precautions when connecting power cables and applying power to the SP 100 1 ALWAYS remove power from supply leads when connecting or disconnecting DC power cables and always ensure that the protec tive earth terminal is grounded otherwise there is a risk of severe electrical shock and personal injury 2 ALWAYS connect the accessory 3 pin power cord to a 3 pin grounded power outlet when supplying AC power to the SP 100 If power is supplied without the protective earth grounded there is a risk of severe electrical shock and personal injury 3 Two SP 100 DC variants are available The 48 VDC nominal variant and a 24 VDC nominal variant Each is designed for use with a telecommunications DC supply As such this should only be installed in a restricted access location by train
295. bracket long to the SP 100 using four M3x5 CSK POZI screws For 23 rack installation attach one 1U 19 to 23 extender bracket to each 19 mounting ear short and long using four 10 32 x 0 375 screws For ETSI rack installation attach one 1U 19 to ETSI extender bracket to each 19 mounting ear short and long using four 10 32 x 0 375 screws See Figure 32 on p 87 If installing in a Standard configuration set the brackets flush with the SP 100 If installing in an Extended configuration line up the rear set of bracket holes to the SP 100 so that the SP 100 is recessed from the front of the bracket Mount the SP 100 to the 23 rack or ETSI rack with four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and four M6 nuts End of Procedure 86 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Figure 32 Mounting a Single SP 100 via EXT 23 ETSI Extended Configuration 19 Mounting 19 to 23 or Bracket Short 19 to ETSI Extender Tab 12 24x0 5 Phillips or M6x20 POZI Screws and M6 Nuts 10 32x0 376 Screws 19 Mounting Bracket Long 10 32x0 376 Screws 19 to 23 or 19 to ETSI Extender Tab 12 24x0 5 Phillips or M6x20 POZI Screws and M6 Nuts Installation and Operations Manual 87 Physical Installation ADVA VO E ea ws Y Optical Networking Mounting Dual SP 100s via a 19 Standard or Extended Configuration Prior to m
296. btaining Technical Assistance Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for ADVA Optical Networking products through your ADVA Optical Networking distribution channel Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract customers who need technical assistance with an ADVA Optical Networking product that is under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract To display ADVA Optical Networking s Technical Support web site that includes all contact information go to ADVA Optical Networking s home page at http www advaoptical com and select the Support button ADVA Optical Networking s service options include 382 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes 24X 7 telephone support Web based support tools e On site support e Technical training both on site and at ADVA Optical Networking facilities in Germany and the USA Expedited repair service Extended hardware warranty service customer Login ADVA Optical Networking s customer login provides a suite of interactive net working services that provide immediate access to ADVA Optical Networking information and resources at any time from anywhere in the world This highly integrated internet application is a powerful easy to use tool for doing business with ADVA Optical Networking The customer login s broad range of features and services
297. by selecting Note Tools Compatibility View Settings and adding the FSP 150SP IP address to the list of websites data field Installation and Operations Manual 129 ADVA VO E amw was Logging On and Off Optical Networking Logging On and Off Logging On Use the following procedure to log on to the FSP 150SP eVision web browser management tool This procedure assumes that HTTP and HTTPS access is enabled factory defaults Procedure Step 1 Ensure that a DCN connection to the FSP 150SP has been estab lished or the PC is connected to the DCN port as required Step2 Open up the appropriate Internet Browser and enter the following address http XXX XXX XXX XXX were xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP address of the DCN that the FSP 150SP is connected to This will be the IP address that has been assigned to the DCN port eth0 during initial IP configuration or if none has been set the default address of 192 168 0 2 eVision opens and the Login Screen is displayed as shown below ADVA FSRA BOMS Windows Intennet Exploren Bn Ele Edit yew Fi s Toos Help 7 EL Logout search 9 MOD web snapshots o wesna Emos QR O a E We E Dioni a ADVA ga a amv we Optical Networking Step 3 Enter a valid User ID and Password default is root and ChgMeNOW respectively See Provision Secure Access on p 171 for additional login information 130 Installation and Operati
298. by the SP 100 service module base unit prior to ini tialization This check is performed to ensure that only ADVA Optical Network ing approved SFP units are used SFP units are individually qualified by ADVA Optical Networking to ensure the quality of the optical output and conformance to the Multiuser Agreement MSA If the SFP transceiver and rate do not match the configured application an SFP mismatch alarm is raised The port is then configured to prevent traffic to pass If SFP cannot pass ADVA Optical Networking check criteria but SFP transceiver and rate do match the configured application a NON qualified SFP standing condition is raised Refer to the FSP 150 Ethernet Access Compatibility Matrix document which contains up to date information on which SFPs are certified for each product This document may be obtained through ADVA Technical Support or via the product support site on www advaoptical com 1 The insertion of SFP Interfaces other than those approved by ADVA Optical Networking even those approved for other ADVA Optical Networking products will result in exceeding safety certification for the FSP 150SP A WARNING 2 NEVER insert metal objects such as a screwdriver or a finger with jewelry into open SFP Interface slots when the FSP 150SP is powered on 3 To avoid eye injury from debris always wear safety glasses when working with canned compressed air For effective environmental protection
299. caion to access the 3G Modem ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt admin state in service ADVA NE 1 3g_ dcn 1 1 1 1 gt enable pin Go to Step 3 Run unlock pin command to unlock the SIM and set a New PIN This command must be ran in the cases where the PIN has been mistak enly entered 3 times ADVA NE 1 38 0cn 1 1 1 1 gt unlock pan eee AIRE KKK K I 1 gt admin state in service 1 1 gt enable pin 284 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt Step 17 Goto Step 3 Step 18 Change the PIN ADVA NE 1 3g_dcn 1 1 1 1 gt change pin art KKK End of Procedure Browser based IP Connection This procedure details the steps used to access a web accessible FSP 150SP HTTP and or HTTPS enabled using a web browser on a PC with connectivity to the DCN or 3G modem the FSP 150SP is connected to To ensure a reliable connection to a FSP 150SP over an Ethernet DCN network the IP address of the FSP 150SP s Management Interface should be configured to a unique address compatible with the network it is to be present on Procedure To make an Ethernet DCN connection to the FSP 150SP perform the following steps Step 1 Ensure that a unique IP address has been configured for the FSP 150SP s Management Interface or 3G modem See Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 or Set Up the 3
300. ce Agreement MSA If the SFP transceiver and rate do not match the configured application an SFP mismatch alarm is raised The port is then configured to prevent traffic from passing If the SFP cannot pass ADVA check criteria but the SFP transceiver and rate do match the configured application a SFP is not qualified standing condition is raised and traffic is allowed For more information on SFPs see the FSP 150SP 100 Technical Descriptions document For information on connectors and LED descriptions see Connector and LED Descriptions on p 65 For details on connector pin assignments see Connec tor Pin Assignments on p 118 The dimensions of the chassis are e Width without mounting brackets 220 mm Height 1U 44 mm Depth without International Electrotechnical Commission IEC and optical connectors 212 mm The depth allows the chassis to fit into a 300 mm 11 81 in deep European Telecommunication Standardization Institute ETSI cabinet Cable handling for the SP 100 is provided by means of an integral Cable Tie Support This is positioned at the top of the AC and DC PSU chassis and pro vides a means to tie down all cables as well as unit insertion and removal The chassis may be positioned as a standalone unit or it may be rack mounted or wall mounted Adaptation to rack mounting is possible by using mounting brackets which may be ordered separately One mounting kit is applicable to a variety of
301. ces Unavailable Reference of Time Clock and ensure that Sync 1 1 1 Operational Minor N A N A Unavailable to serve as valid state is Normal and Clock Mode is reference Locked Time Reference Sync 1 1 1 provisioned as Time N A Degraded Reference of Time Clock and can t provide valid TOD This Minor N A N A condition is persistently reported Time Reference Sync 1 1 1 provisioned as Time N A Unavailable WTR Reference of Time Clock and is Minor N A N A recovery process from Unavailable condition S9PO 10113 sesneyd aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey CLV enue y suoneledo pue uogejjesu Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued of state of the entity serving as the port s source eds Description NSA Default SA Default LED Condition Type Probable Cause Trouble Cleaning Procadur Notification Notification Indication Time Reference Sync 1 1 1 provisioned as Time N A Degraded WTR Reference of Time Clock and in the recovery process from i Degraded condition Note this Minor NA WA condition is never reported for Sync 1 1 1 Time Clock Time Clock Not Time Reference Locked Out N A Minor N A N A Locked Time Frequency Time Clock Time Traceability N A Minor N A N A Lock status is Time Freq Lock Time Frequency Not Time Clock Frequency Trace N A Traceable ability status is Not Traceable Naiman NA WA Time Holdover Time Clock
302. ch History Index Indicates a bin from the historical list of bins For 15 Minute history bins this number is 1 to 32 1 being the most recent e For 1 Day history bins this number is 1 e For current and Rollover bins this number is 0 Installation and Operations Manual 335 ADVA 7J E am WN u PTP and SyncJack Performance Monitoring Optical Networking Performance Parameter Counters Bins and Bin Periods Each PP is grouped together for a monitored entity and accumulated into Bins associated with a predefined time period i e 15 Minute or 1 Day The user can reset any individual or all PP counters to zero The following performance bin periods will exist 1x Current 15 Minute Bin 1x Current 1 Day 24 Hour Bin e 32 x Historical 15 Minute Bins 1x Historical 1 Day 24 Hour Bin 1 The 32 Historical 15 Minute Bins provide the most recent 8 hours of performance data 2 The Historical 1 Day Bin provides the performance data from the Note Previous day starting from 12 00am i e midnight 00 00 Performance Parameter Thresholding Each PP has a threshold for each bin period which is configurable for each entity instance The PP count is compared to the configured threshold and if met or exceeded a Threshold Crossing Alert TCA is generated rs Provisioning a threshold to zero will disable threshold monitoring for that entity Note Each entity type has default thresholds for its P
303. chronization Identification E Communications DCN etho Entity ID MANAGEMENT TUNNEL 1 3G DCN Tunnel Name Dallas2 Associated Port ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Management Tunnels E NE 1 Interface Montsant Edit Conf a atio Contiguration SNMP pl Encapsulation Type Ethernet MTU 1500 bytes Delete E Administration Networking DHCP Disabled x IP Address 110 12 23 4 DHCP Client ID Control Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Client ID Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode VLAN Based X S Tag YLAN Disabled Y VLAN Id 4095 1 4095 S Tag VLANId 4095 1 4095 Management Traffic Bridging Disabled System Default Gateway Edit System Default Gateway Gateway IP Address 10 10 32 1 RIP RIPv2 Disabled Bandwidth GIR 256000 bps Buffer Size _32 KB EIR 768000 bps cos 7 Cancel Apply OK Edit the appropriate data Click on OK Step7 Goto Step 1 Step8 To delete a management tunnel right click on the management tun nel ID and select Delete see the following figure Click on OK 294 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Figure 171 Delete Management Tunnel ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v x B YD amp Syst Arayan Delete Entity E NE 1 E Synchronization Identification Communications
304. chronization Line Type El Line Code E1 HDB3 et Frame Format E1 CRC4 BITS OUT SA Bit Bit 4 QL Mode Disabled Squelch QL QL NONE Line Build Out None Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned Signal Direction Input BESO Squelch Control Never Squelch QL QL NONE Assumed QL QL EEC1 Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned Signal Direction Output misil de Squelch Control Never Squelch QL QL NONE Assumed QL QL EEC1 440 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Functional Area Entity Parameter Default Setting Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned Signal Direction Input Poway Squelch Control Lock Input Rate Pulse Per Second Delay Compensation 0 Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned PPS 1 1 1 2 Signal Direction Output Synchronization Squelch Control Never Continued Input Rate Pulse Per Second Delay Compensation 0 Alias blank TOD 1 1 1 1 Administrative State Unassigned Squelch Control Never Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned GPS 1 1 1 1 PPS generation condition 1SAT Antenna Cable Length 0 meters IP Address 192 168 0 2 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 RIPv2 Disabled DHCP Disabled DCN eth0 DHCP Role DHCP Client DHCP Client ID Control Disabled DHCP Client ID System Name Edit System Default Not selec
305. cision Time Protocol PTP option settings The options described in this section are performed using the PTP application located on the Tool Bar or selectable via the Application menu once the license of this feature has been turned on The PTP License may be enabled by selecting the Maintenance application expanding the Administration and Soft ware Licensing entities entering a right click on Feature Management and selecting Edit Feature In addition to configuring PTP options alarm attributes are editable when the PTP application is selected see Precision Time Protocol PTP Alarms on p 413 Telecom Slave Provisioning Order PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Telecom Slave Enable Software Licensing for PTP Create a flow on the Associated Port must be In Service Create Edit a Telecom Slave o Create Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC o Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP o Create Edit an Ordinary Clock Slave OCS Port Edit an Ethernet Ports Delay Asymmetry setting The TS once provisioned and Locked the OCS Port State changes to Slave state may be added as a Sync Reference to the System Sync Domain SYNC 1 1 1 1 selected as a timing source for Boundary Clock and or Time Clock selected as an output reference for the PPS PPS 1 1 1 1 or Time of Day TOD 1 1 1 1 output ports selected as the Source TOD Clock of System Time of Day ToD B
306. ck qualification and clock selection For now all the devices shall support one SYNC Timing Domain which is the System SYNC Timing Domain SYNC Timing Domain generally involves selection from multiple SYNC references These SYNC references can be SyncE from Ethernet ports other forms of frequency inputs like 10MHz BITS Time Clock or PTP recovered fre quency Currently the systems supports only System SYNC Timing Domain and one PTP Timing Domain In the future some devices shall support up to 4 PTP Timing Domains PTP Timing Domain It provides both frequency and phase PTP Timing Domain involves a Telecom Slave TS that selection of a PTP stream from one or more Slave Only Ordinary Clocks SOOC and recovering frequency and phase from it e System Clock This indicates the frequency output by the System SYNC Timing Domain which is one of the SYNC references of SYNC Entity e SYNC Entity Object This is basically the abstraction of the System SYNC Timing Domain and is used interchangeably with System SYNC Timing Domain Installation and Operations Manual 51 ADVA A A 7J E WM Wa n Product Applications Optical Networking The following figure shows the various clock interface functions and intercon nections Figure 21 Clock Interface Functions and Interconnections Ethernet Access P
307. cket Per 4 Seconds 1 Packet Per 2 Seconds 1 Packet Per 1 Second Max Sync Message Rate Create only Maximum Sync Message Rate 1 Packet Per Second 2 Packets Per Second 4 Packets Per Second 8 Packets Per Second 16 Packets Per Second 32 Packets Per Second 64 Packets Per Second 128 Packets Per Second Installation and Operations Manual 509 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 54 Create Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Max Delay Response Message Rate Create only Maximum Delay Response Message Rate 1 Packet Per Second 2 Packets Per Second 4 Packets Per Second 8 Packets Per Second 16 Packets Per Second 32 Packets Per Second 128 Packets Per 64 Packets Per Second Second Max Lease Duration Create only Maximum Lease Duration 60 1000 secs 300 Create Edit a Master Virtual Port Once a PTPFP has been created which occurs when creating a Master Clock Interface a Master Virtual Port may be created by expanding the Boundary Clock or Master Clock entity in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the Master Clock Interface entity and selecting Master Virtual Port To edit a Master Virtual Port
308. cks allow the user to setup an Ethernet test set at a central location to inject traffic into the network Loopbacks of all varieties except VLAN necessarily result A WARNING in blocking normal traffic flows and are therefore service affecting As shown in the example in following figure traffic is looped back into the net work and back to the test set The test set can look for any anomalies such as frame loss or out of sequence frames The loopback eliminates the need to con nect a test set in the field or at the customer premise to verify round trip service Installation and Operations Manual 319 Network Access Port Loopbacks ADVA J E emp wa Y Optical Networking Figure 192 CO Based Testing Using Ethernet Loopback Customer Premise Performing FSP 150CC CO Based Test Head FSP 150CC Customer Premise Central Office The following loopback functions are available Facility Port Facility Port Timed Loopbacks Using eVision From the Maintenance application entering a right click on a Network Port or Access Port and selecting Loopbacks provides a Loopback view From this view the Network Port or Access Port can be placed in the Maintenance state and a loopback can be performed Port loopbacks ignore traffic shaping allowing use of the full port bandwidth Selecting the Swap SADA Swapping the Source Address SA with the Desti nation Address DA option during the loopback directs th
309. created is dependent on the Max Slaves Supported entries made when creating the Master Clock Interface up to 4 If the PTP Extended Remote Slaves feature is enabled number of remote slaves is extended from 4 to up to 16 or up to 32 if the max rate of each is up to 64 at the maximum PTP mes sage rate I To delete a Dynamic Slave enter a right click on the Dynamic Slave entity and select Delete Table 57 Create Edit Dynamic Slave Parameter Settings Paramet r Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely i i A h up to 64 characters identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable blank ASCII characters long Administrative Enables or disables the Static Remote Slave See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management Installation and Operations Manual 513 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules The following section describes SyncJack option settings The options described in this section are performed using the SyncJack application located on the Tool Bar or selectable via the Application menu once the license of the PTP feature has been turned on The PTP License may be enabled by selecting the Maintenance application expanding the Administration and Software Licensing entities entering a
310. ctional entity that carries out PD PDV and packet loss measurements and provides performance metrics In diagnostic mode raw PD and PDV data are collected and processed pro ducing performance metrics such as MinTDVE MAFE etc The following figure shows an example of PTP Network Probe Statistics results ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application Ba XE OO amp El System Configuration Statistics E NE 1 Clock Accuracy Entity ID PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 E Clock Probes Summary 15 Minute 1Day Thresholds CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 Path Delay Statistics Clear Refresh Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 Average Forward RPDV ns N A Minimum Syne Path Delay ns N A El Clock Analysis Average Mean Path Delay nsi N A Number Of Forward RPDV Results In High Range o El PTP Clock Probes Average Reverse RPDV ns N A Number Of Forward RPDV Results In Low Range o PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Average Sync Path Delay ns N A Number Of Forward RPDV Results In Medium Range 0 E History Estimations Maximum Mean Path Delay ns N A Number Of Reverse RPDY Results In High Range o Maximum Sync Path Delay ns N A Number Of Reverse RPDV Results In Low Range 0 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT Minimum Forward RPDY ns N A Number Of Reverse RPDY Results In Medium Range 0 TS 1 1 Minimum Mean Path Delay ns N A Total Number Of Forward RPDV Results o PTP Network Anal
311. ctivity aaa ooo 55 Figure 25 CO Based Testing Using Ethernet Loopback 56 Figure 26 Facility Loopback without Swap SA DA 000 0a 57 Figure 27 SNMP Dying GaSe 24454 aa a AAA AAA 58 Figure 28 eVision Web Browser Management Tool 60 Figure 29 SP 100 1U Chassis y e 00 e eee ee ee ae A 64 Figure 30 Front Panel Connectors and LEDS 000 eee uae 66 Installation and Operations Manual 13 a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Figure 31 Mounting a Single SP 100 via EXT 19 Configuration 85 Figure 32 Mounting a Single SP 100 via EXT 23 ETSI Extended CONTIQUESCION so se as a OSE Mee Ee RRS 87 Figure 33 Mounting Dual SP 100s via EXT 19 Configuration 89 Figure 34 Mounting Dual SP 100s via EXT 23 ETSI Configuration 91 Figure 35 Installing Wall Mounting BracketS 0 ooo oo 93 Figure 36 Rear Panel Frame Ground Point oooooo o 105 Figure 37 Grounding Detail svi ccesees ici nb ee es a 106 Figure 38 48 VDC Power Supply Unit Connector 108 Figure 39 24 VDC Power Supply Unit ConnectorS 110 Figure 40 LED Flow Diagram es tac tetas ws eGR Sw ee ae wee wee 113 Figure 41 48 VDC Power Supply Unit Connector 118 Figure 42 24 VDC Power Supply Unit ConnectorS 119 Figure 43 eVision Web Browser Management Tool 126 Figure 44 L
312. ctivity Off e Unassigned TA Link Link Down Green Link Detected Also associated with the Network optical Ethernet port are two LEDs Network NET and Active Standby ACT as defined in the following table Table 9 Network Optical Ethernet Facility and Active LEDs LED Color Definition Off Unassigned only applies to Port 2 Yellow Remote Fault Degraded Facility Network ar Ay Flashing Facility in loopback Facility Yellow NET Green Operating Red Link Fault Off Not assigned to a protection group Active r a Standby Green Active the active path in a protection group ACT Yellow Standby a standby port providing redundancy for the Active port Installation and Operations Manual 71 ADVA PEt vJ a nav wa Y SP 100 Hardware Description Optical Networking 72 Installation and Operations Manual ADVA vJ E ea wz Y Optical Networking Chapter 2 Physical Installation Introduction This Chapter deals with the physical installation of the SP 100 and the external cabling for power management and traffic to and from the chassis Additionally this chapter includes links to technical information and procedures elsewhere in the document that are needed or helpful in successfully completing the installa tion process Physical Installation This section provides the information required to successfully install an SP 100 system Installation con
313. ctronics Engineers IEEE 802 3 1998 Ethernet standard See LAN Connector Pin Assignments on p 120 Local Serial Console Port Connection For provisioning the FSP 150SP via the serial management port For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors may be used An adapter to the PC serial port F DB9 is required See Serial Console Port Connector Pin Assignments on p 121 The Serial Console Adapter is shipped with the unit in the Accessory Kit and may also be ordered separately Part Number 1036904035 Local Management LAN Port Connection For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ45 connectors may be used for connection to a DCN port See LAN Connector Pin Assignments on p 120 Installation and Operations Manual 77 Physical Installation ADVA VO E ea ws Y Optical Networking 3G DCN Port Connection Insert the 3G modem into the USB port Available ADVA Optical Networking qualified 3G modems are as below ZTEMT 119 HWE1750 If cable extension is required an ADVA Optical Networking qualified cable must be used BITS IN and BITS OUT Port Connections F
314. d Figure 18 BITS Output Port Off Office A Expected SSU L Received SSU T MGMT LAN BITS Out CLKIN PPSIN CLK PPS GPS 000 Precision Time Protocol PTP Generic synchronization distribution consists of the recovery and distribution of timing to and from a variety of network elements and interface types Histori cally networks are synchronized by distributing frequency over the physical layer of the transport media e g fiber optic cable for SDH SONET and SyncE Installation and Operations Manual 45 Product Applications a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking or twisted pair copper cable for DS1 E1 However as mobile networks and ser vices grow in sophistication and complexity the ability to distribute precise time also referred to as phase through the network is required Network Time Proto col NTP provides time distribution however it does not satisfy the time accu racy and precision requirements for next generation mobile networks IEEE 1588 2008 also known as 1588v2 defines the Precision Time Protocol PTP which is intended for use in high accuracy time and frequency synchroni zation applications PTP is a layer 5 protocol which can be transported over a variety of lower layer packet technologies e g PTP UDP IPv4 ENET PTP UDP IPv6 ENET PTP ENET etc It supports both unicast and multicast messaging and provides message formats for synchronization distribu
315. d the HTTP server is restarted and web access is unavailable during this time approximately 15 seconds Regenerate SSH Radio button to create a new SSH certificate Key unselected When an SSH Key is generated all SSH users are logged off Country Edit SSL Certificate Data Country US State Edit SSL Certificate Data State Texas Locality Edit SSL Certificate Data Locality Richardson Organization Edit SSL Certificate Data Organization ADVA Optical Networking T Edit SSL Certificate Data Organization Unit Ethernet Access Name Edit SSL Certificate Data Name ADVA Email Edit SSL Certificate Data Email support advaoptical com Valid Until Edit SSL Certificate Data Valid Until varies 468 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Network Port Configuration Options and Rules Refer to the following table for Network Port configuration settings Also see the following associated options and rules in the FSP 750SP 700 Technical Descriptions document Default settings are identified in bold The following Network Port settings are shown in order as seen when using the eVision web browser management tool in Configuration mode Table 41 Network Port Configuration Settings Edit Configuration Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults E1000 N 1 Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64 characters ide
316. d priority In IEEE 1588 each PTP port in each ordinary clock and boundary clock runs an independent state machine Using the Best Master Clock Algorithm BMCA contents of all Announce messages received on the port and the data sets of the OC or BC clock data sets are ana lyzed to determine the state of each port of the clock This approach makes the timing network dynamic where it is reconfiguring itself by electing a master depending on factors like clock class clock accuracy and priority of the avail able timing sources As mentioned above this is not suitable for telecom net works To support the notion of selection between multiple master clocks ITU T G 8265 1 defines Telecom Slave which is the entity that recovers frequency based on timestamps from the selected master clock An entity called the Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC is defined which is basically a IEEE 1588 OC S that gets its PTP packets from a Grand Master GM For protection more than one SOOC shall be defined each receiving timing from a different GM Based on the clock class in Announce messages QL priority and Packet Timing Signal Fail PTSF master is selected PTSF is based on PTSF lossSync PTSF los sAnnounce or PTSF unusable PTSF unusable is undefined in G 8265 1 and this could be used to indicate conditions such as the high PDV that could result in inaccurate clock recovery Today G 8265 1 defines selection only based on the quality of the GM priority and lack o
317. d select Validate The display is the Validate Upgrade view shown in the following fig ure Figure 60 Validate Upgrade View ADVA FSP 150 File Application v E System NE 1 Ej Synchronization Communications E Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Datat Defay Install Defau Activate Last Reset Cause Transfer Transfer Log E Software Licensing ax B gt V Validate Upgrade Accept Upgrade gt Cancel upgrade revert to previous load and reboot Cancel OK Step 15 To accept the upgrade ensure the radio button next to Accept Upgrade is selected To cancel the upgrade ensure the radio button next to Cancel Upgrade is selected Click on OK End of Procedure 160 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 16 Click on Upgrade in the selection tree pane then select Activate An Activate Upgrade screen displays as shown in the following figure Figure 61 Software Activate ADVA p 0 P OSP 100 aintenance File Application A x E o 6 System E NE 1 E Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes E Administration Activate Upgrade Activate Now Schedule Activation Date 2013 08 26 yyyy mm dd Time 1936 hh mm Cancel Previous Scheduled Activation Enable Validation Timer Time Out 0100 hh mm 00 Upgrade Da
318. ddress Configuration may be edited by entering a right click on the Communications entity The DCN eth0O entity or the 3G DCN Modem entity is accessed by expanding the Communications entity and management tunnels are accessed by expand ing the Management Tunnels and NE 1 entities These entities are provisioned by expanding the Communications entity entering a right click on the desired entity in the selection tree and selecting the applicable menu option SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Communities Target Addresses Target Parameters User based Security Model USM User entries and SNMP Dying Gasp are viewed by selecting the SNMP entity and selecting the associated tab in the Details Pane These entities are provisioned by enter ing a right click on SNMP in the selection tree and selecting the applicable menu option Administration Users Remote Authentication Security Policy and Key Generation are viewed by expanding the Administration entity and selecting the entity in the selection tree These entities are provisioned by expanding the Administration entity entering a right click on the desired entity in the selection tree and selecting the applicable menu option Maintenance View Maintenance View allows performing maintenance functions such as diagnos tics loopbacks raising and clearing test alarms setting and retrieving alarm attributes rebooting upgrading software database backup and restore and c
319. de Fast fstsync no masking Acquisition frngsync Sys Clock Mode frngsync no masking Freerunning hidovrsync Sys Clock Mode Holdover hidovrsync no masking losloc Sys Clock Mode Loss of losloc no masking Lock wtr Sys Clock Mode Wait To wtr no masking S9P0 10113 SESNEI aiqeqoig pue sjuang suuely Jaeldey ZAA enue y suoneledo pue uonejesu Table 35 Alarm Masking Rules Continued Device Unknown Condition Type Alarm Rule SNMP Alarm Name eVision GUI Alarm Name BITS In ais Alarm Indication Signal ais and not los freqoff Frequency Offset freqoff no masking lof Loss of Frame lof and not los or ais los Loss of Signal los no masking qlinvalid Sync QL Invalid qlinvalid no masking qlmismatch Sync QL Mismatch qlmismatch and not qlinvalid syncref Sync Reference Failed syncref no masking BITS Out qlsqleh QL Squelch qlsqlch no masking Ethernet Port bwexceedednegspeed Bandwidth Exceeds bwexceedednegspeed no masking Negotiated Speed freqoff Frequency Offset freqoff no masking Inkdeactivated Link Down De activated Inkdeactivated and not SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxfault or dyinggasp autonegunknown Duplex Mode of Farend autonegunknown and not Inkdownunisolated or Inkdownlpbkfault or Inkdowncableremoved or Inkdowncablefault or Inkdownautonegfailed or Inkdeactivated or rxjabber or SGEO or sfpmismatch or sfpremoved or sfptxf
320. de Software Version on p 154 Database Configuration Management Operations available for managing configuration data are determining database configuration status restore system defaults backup database and restore database modify the system default database reset to system defaults reset to factory defaults and change the default value file For more information see Database and Configuration Files on p 236 Restore Database on p 248 or Restore System Defaults on p 252 128 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Minimum System Requirements Prior to running eVision ensure that the management system Personal Com puter PC meets the following minimum system requirements 200Mhz processor supported Operating System OS versions Microsoft Windows XP Vista 7 A browser such as Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater IE 8 0 recommended or Firefox 2 0 or greater Firefox 3 6 recommended Other browsers may suf fice no browser is certified by ADVA Optical Networking 128 Mb of Random Access Memory RAM Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 0 or greater 6 0 is included Recommended display 1024 x 768 with 16 color bits If using Internet Explorer 8 in order to view certain eVision elements i correctly namely data provided in Maintenance View e g Restore 5 factory defaults Restore system defaults Restore database New System Defaults File enable Compatibility View in IE
321. de because the port configuration does not support SSM Cannot enable QL Mode unless SyncE Mode is also enabled Cannot enable SVlan on xxx Cannot enable SyncE on a port with speed of 10Mbps Cannot set Administrative State to Maintenance Disabled Cannot set name to empty string Community xxx used by Target Parameter yyy Component does not exist for xxx Component ID must be access port or network port Current Network Clock Type does not support this QL value Data TLV exceeds the allowed maximum of xxx MIN yyy MAX Delay must be xxx MIN yyy MAX DHCP client is enabled on xxx DHCP server already enabled on other interface Disposition cannot be set to xxx Distrubution History Bin index xxx not in range Duplicate VLAN member xxx at positions yyy and zzz Dying Gasp is already enabled for IP xxx on Target Address yyy Empty string Ether type can only be 0X88a8 or 0X8100 Filename is empty Filename must begin with digit or alphabet letter Flows with UNTAGGED support need to be MultiCOS enabled For TOS should not be higher than xxx MAX Given IP address is not valid Given IP mask is not valid History Bin index xxx not in valid range ID xxx already used by yyy ID must be 1 Illegal network mask xxx In DHCP Server mode mask cannot be 255 255 255 254 and 255 255 255 255 Ingress PUSH PVID change disallowed Inner VLAN Tag enabled without Outer VLAN Tag enabled Interface must be ethO or man
322. dencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Slave Only Ordinary Clock Monitored Types The following performance parameters and associated default settings are for each of the thresholds which are supported on a Slave Only Ordinary Clock The following PMs are accessed via the Precision Time Protocol application when PTP software licensing is enabled and a Telecom Slave is created Table 45 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Monitored Type Definition Direction Location a Ey PTPMGMTMSGSD PTP Management Message Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPINVMSGLEND PTP Invalid Message Length Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPUNKMASTERD PTP Unknown Master Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPUNKDOMAIND PTP Unknown Domain Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPMULTIANNOUNCED PTP Multicast Announce Receive Near End 0 0 Message Discards PTPOOSANNOUNCES PTP Out Of Sequence Receive Near End 0 0 Announce Messages PTPMULTISYNCD PTP Multicast Sync Receive Near End 0 0 Message Discards PTPTWOSTEPSYNCD PTP Two Step Sync Receive Near End 0 0 Message Discards PTPFOLLOWUPSD PTP Follow up Message Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPDELAYREQSD PTP Delay_Req Message Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPPDELAYREQSD PTP PDelay_Req Message Receive Near End 0 0 Discards PTPPDELAYRSPSD PTP PDelay_Resp Message Receive
323. des constant visibility and access to current alarms enabling continuous alarm monitoring no matter what application is currently selected In the Alarms Pane all alarms are color coded by severity red Critical orange Major and yellow Minor For further information on the Alarms Pane see Chapter 2 eVision Web Browser Management Tool on p 125 SP 100 Hardware Description The SP 100 1U Chassis is a modular chassis based system that comprises the following main components One Network interface that operates in optical mode 100BaseFX or 1000BaseX or Copper SFP via Small Form factor Pluggable SFP or electri cal mode 100 1000BaseT via RJ45 connector One Access interface configured as either electrical 10 100 1000BaseT via RJ45 connector or optical 100BaseFX or 1000BaseX or Copper SFP via an SFP transceiver 3G Modem Input connector labeled USB a front mounted USB connector T1 E1 External Clock Input connector labeled BITS IN and T1 E1 External Clock Output connector labeled BITS OUT are both front mounted RJ48c connectors Local Management LAN Port labeled MGMT LAN front mounted RJ 45 connector Local Serial Port labeled RS 232 front mounted RJ 45 connector Time of Day Input Output connector labeled ToD front mounted RJ 45 RS 422 input output capable Pulse Per Second Input connector labeled PPS IN front mounted SMB TTL 50 ohm impedance Pulse Per Second Input Output connec
324. ding Security Alarm Audit and System Logs system security such as the configuration of users Access Control List ACL and the login security banner see Management Features on p 60 the Network Time Protocol NTP Provisioning Network Elements Facilities are provided to provision NEs including the following a Network Element Identity Configuring Network Access Interfaces including configuring Port Services Provisioning Secure Access Facilities are provided to ensure that access to the FSP 150SP management system is secure This could entail configuring SNMP details Users including o Adding Editing Deleting Users o Editing Passwords o Editing GUI Login Time outs Remote Authentication Provisioning Alarms Facilities are provided to modify alarm notification codes for given alarm condi tion types displayed in the Alarms Pane The options available for notification codes are Critical Major Minor Not Alarmed or Not Reported For further infor mation on Alarm Monitoring see Alarm Generation and Monitoring on p 63 62 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Provisioning Performance Monitoring Facilities are provided to edit PM threshold levels and initialize PM registers as a precursor to monitoring performance Alarm Generation and Monitoring Alarm status is displayed in the Alarms Pane located at the bottom of the eVi sion screen This provi
325. dress User defined text number string used to identify this up to 32 characters Name target address Entry can be up to 32 characters long blank Transport IPv4 address Address one Port Port of the SNMP trap receiver 162 Target Params Name Selectable list of user defined target parameter names The associated Target Parameters must first be entered prior to selecting this option See Add Selectable list of user defined target parameter names Delete Target Parameters see Note on p 462 blank Timeout 1 100s Length of time to wait before timeout occurs in 1 100s 2 of a second Retry Count How many times to retry 3 Tag List Drop down list to select the desired type of tag list for info this target address trap SNMP Dying Whether or not SNMP dying gasp is enabled on the Enabled Gasp SP 100 Disabled Note Up to 10 Target addresses are supported To delete an existing Target Address select the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree and the Target Addresses tab Then enter a right click on the desired Target Address and select Delete Entry Installation and Operations Manual 461 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E emp wz Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Target Parameter Name Add Delete Target Parameters see Not
326. dth CIR 256000 bps Buffer Size 32 KB EIR 768000 bps cos 7 Cancel Apply OK Step 11 Enter select the following data to configure the management tunnel see Management Tunnel Configuration Options and Rules on p 521 for details on each item Identification Management Tunnel Index integer from 1 to 255 Management Tunnel Name 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters Associated Port select from drop down list only one tunnel per port Interface Encapsulation Type Ethernet Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode only VLAN Based supported in this release VLAN Id 1 to 4095 default is 4095 S Tag VLAN Enabled Disabled default is Disabled S Tag VLAN Id 1 to 4095 default is 4095 only applicable if S Tag VLAN is Enabled Bandwidth CIR 64000 to 8000000 bps default is 256000 bps Max of 8 Mbps for all management tunnels combined EIR 0 to 80000000 bps default is 768000 bps Buffer Size 32 to 15000 KB default is 32 KB COS 0 to 7 default is 7 Click on OK 296 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 12 Expand the NE 1 entity under Management Tunnels left click on the management tunnel ID and verify the data entered see figure below Figure 173 Display Management Tunnel Configuration Bridging S ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application y xXx B YO amp System z A syste Configur
327. e 138 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Figure 47 Tab Selections and Scroll Bars in the Details Pane File Application xXx B o 6 E System F Configuration Resources E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 pal ID NTESP100 1 141 DCN etho Alias H SP100 35 98Tabs 3G Modem aie State E Synchronization E NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT Ej NTESP100 Operational Normal SYNC 1 1 1 1 1 roll TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 am Physical Inventory Sc O Window E Name FSP1S0SP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 Resizingcu n1 1 IN Physical Address 00 80 8a 39 d2 c0 Software Revision 6 1 1 04 Bars CLK 1 1 1 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN USI LBADVA 71131800045 Manufacturing Site ShenzAen PPS 1 1 1 2 CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 TOD 1 1 1 1 E GPS 1 1 1 1 En nmental El Communications Temperate 46 deg Voltage 13000 mv DCN ethO 3G DCN Pe 4 m E Management Tunnels Se Notification Interface Code Description Date Time Lannad in ac rant If data is too large to fit in the current Details Pane size the browser window can be resized or maximized to view a larger area you can use the window resizing bars to open the viewing area or you can use the scroll bars located in the Details Pane to view the remaining data see Figure 47 on p 139
328. e Description Probable Cause Trouble Clearing Procedure NSA Default Notification SA Default Notification LED Indication PPS Port Output Squelch Output of the PPS port has been squelched due to change of state of the entity serving as the port s source Verify and troubleshoot PPS port source Minor N A N A SYNC 1 1 1 All Input Sync Referenced Failed All synchronization references in the system clock selector list have failed The system clock selector list must have at least one member in order for this condition primitive to exist Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Major N A N A Sys Clock Mode Fast Acquisition System Clock Mode Fast Acquisition Synchronization This indicates the clock selector is acquiring the phase of the selected reference No action necessary Not Reported N A N A Sys Clock Mode Freerunning System Clock Mode Free Running Synchronization This indicates the internal oscillator is the source of the system clock Verify synchronization provisioning to ensure option is set correctly Otherwise no action is necessary Not Reported N A N A Sys Clock Mode Holdover System Clock Mode Holdover Synchronization This indicates the selected reference is invalid and no other valid input reference is available and the system clock has previously locked to the now invalid reference
329. e Provision Synchronization on p 186 Installation and Operations Manual 185 ADVA an 5 A v a VA W u Provision Synchronization ell Networking Provision Synchronization Provision Synchronous Ethernet Sync E and Precision Time Protocol PTP SP 100 provides Sync E functionality on the Network Port and Access Port The following procedure provides the steps necessary to configure Sync E on the SP 100 Sync E is enabled on a per Ethernet Port basis The Sync E mode attribute sup ports the values of enabled or disabled default for all ports is disabled If a port has Sync E mode enabled then it can be selected as a reference source for the System Clock If Sync E mode is disabled for that port it is not shown in the pick list for System Clock references SP 100 supports both SDH Option 1 and SONET Option 2 synchronization capability The default is SDH Option1 For SDH the BITS interfaces support both E1 and 2048 kHz options For SONET the BITS interfaces support T1 only For Synchronization provisioning rules see Synchronization on p 451 While the BITS IN and BITS OUT interfaces can be individually enabled and configured they share basic configuration settings so that changing the line type or coding of one simultaneously changes the same settings on the other Steps in Provisioning Sync E and PTP Edit System Sync E Provision BITS IN OUT e Provision PTP e Provision and Enable
330. e User defined text number string used to identify this set of target parameters Entry can be up to 32 up to 32 characters blank characters long Security Model Drop down list for selection of a security model for this SNMPv1 set of target parameters SNMPv2c USM Security Level Sets the security level for the new Target Parameter Only applicable if Security Level USM is selected No Authentication Auth No Priv Auth Priv Security Name Drop down list of available security names for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c Drop down list of available security names for USM private public ADMIN MONITOR OPERATOR PROVISION Note To delete an existing Target Parameter right click on the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree and select the Delete Target Parameters item Then enter a right click on the desired Target Address and select Delete Entry Add Delete USM User see Note User Name Entry for a valid user name Valid entry contains only 1 Es 1 to 32 characters to 32 of the following characters are accepted a z blank A Z 0 9 _ Engine ID An SNMP engine s administratively unique identifier Valid entry is 5 to 32 characters In a simple agent this value is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value of local The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate Objects of this type are for ident
331. e Access Port facility administrative state The IS State administrative state controls the generation of alarms and Management event reports When an entity is in the In Service state it is Maintenance fully operational The Administrative State must be set to d pae Disabled Maintenance prior to initiating a loopback or an Etherjack Diagnostic The Administrative State must first be set to Unassigned Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type For more information on Administrative States see Entity State Descriptions on p 430 Installation and Operations Manual 473 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 42 Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Media Type Defines the port media type It can be Fiber or Copper Fiber Copper MTU Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size Minimum 1518 9600 MTU is 1518 Maximum is 9600 MDIX Defines the Media Dependent Interface Crossover Auto copper or function for copper interfaces MDIX allows the interface to Crossed copper SFP change cable signal assignments to compensate for using Uncrossed the incorrect cable type Configured Sets the configured speed for the access interface The Auto Speed u
332. e FSP 150SP provides provisioning options for the various NE functions The following provides a brief overview of provisioning options supported by the FSP 150SP For detailed provisioning information see Operations Provisioning on p 153 and the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document Communications Provisioning The FSP 150SP provides facilities to set up a management communication con figuration for a particular site or specific network configuration and supports sev eral management configurations and options Typical deployment scenarios are in common IP network configurations and within an IP environment the FSP 150SP can be connected in many different ways e g connected to a LAN through direct connections a router or an Ethernet switch Installation and Operations Manual 61 Management Overview ADVA VO E nav ws Y Optical Networking e static routes can be created to enable connections between a workstation and an FSP 150SP e different IP functions can be used to achieve specific network goals e g Address Resolution Protocol ARP enables one LAN connected FSP 150SP to serve as a gateway for other equipment that is not connected to the LAN Operations Provisioning Provisioning System Options Facilities are provided to provision system options including common system options such as o system identity o IP connectivity time access o SNMP traps information logs inclu
333. e FSP 150SP to look up the MAC address of frames being received and swap out the Source Address with the Destination Address allowing the Layer 2 cloud to forward the frames Only one Swap SADA loopback may be performed per system Once Swap SADA loopback has been operated a second Swap SADA loopback may not be performed on another entity If Facility Port Timed is selected the Timer is set by the user for 1 to 300 sec onds the duration of the loopback See the following figure for an example of a loopback view For a description of the eVision web browser management tool functions see Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool on p 125 For a list of loopback setting options rules and associated default settings see Performance Monitoring Settings on p 478 To remove a loopback click on the drop down list for Loopback Configuration and select None then click on OK For more information regarding loopback operation overview see Port Loop back on p 56 320 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 193 Loopback View ADVA FSP 150 P100 8 e e File y Application A ES E D a E System Loopbacks NE 1 NTESP100 Identification maa Loopbacks Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Raise Clear Test Alarm Alias A 4 Synchronizatir Communications State Alarm Attributes Administrati
334. e Line Service Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Expected QL Specifies the expected Quality Level QL when the QL NONE Ethernet Network Port is enabled for QL Mode This object QL PRC is only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports QL SSU A when QL Mode is Enabled This option allows the user to Pas QL SSU B set a minimum expected received Quality Level on the port The valid values depend upon the SYNC entity s Network Clock Type A value of None represents that a minimum Quality Level is not expected Choices available depend on the Network Clock Type setting option1 SDH or option2 SONET QL EEC1 The default value is QL NONE If the Network Clock Type is changed Expected QL defaults to QL NONE regardless of previous setting Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 QL NONE Default is QL NONE Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL PRS QL STU QL PRS QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL EEC2 QL SMC QL STU QL PROV QL NONE Default is QL NONE QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Installation and Operations Manual 477 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E VUE wa Y Optical Networking Performance Monitoring Settings Refer to the following tables for Performance Monitoring PM Threshold Cross ing Alert TCA moni
335. e bottom of the Details Pane The common Command Buttons available on a Details Pane are OK which accepts the information in a status pane and closes the pane Cancel which cancels any changes that have been made to the information in the status pane and closes the pane e Refresh which reads and displays the latest values of the fields in the sta tus pane e Apply which applies any changes made to the information in the status pane without closing the pane e Next gt which opens the next page screen of data e lt Back which opens the previous page screen of data Alarms Pane The Alarms Pane provides quick visibility and access to current alarms All alarms are color coded by severity red Critical orange Major e yellow Minor Each alarm is listed as a separate line item with the following details Interface type e Notification Code Description Date Time stamp Keyboard Navigation It is usual for the mouse to be used to navigate the Workspace and select menu options However a number of keys on the PC keyboard can be used to navigate around the Menu Bar the Selection Tree Pane and the Details Pane as outlined in the table below Key Function In the eVision Workspace Tab Move through Workspace areas This key enables the user to move through the Menu Bar the Tool Bar the Selection Tree Pane and the Details Pane In the Menu Bar Return Select This ke
336. e data required in the screen to access the FTP SFTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path Noi and file name of the software file to transfer ote The file transfer will begin and show a screen similar to the following displays Figure 135 Transfer Progress Screen w ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A B 9 6 E System Transfer Upgrade E NE 1 Ej Synchronization Mode Software Download Communications Status In progress Alarm Attributes El E Administration Upgrade 27 Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing 240 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning When the Status changes from Progress to Success the file has been transferred End of Procedure Step 10 Expand Administration right click on Database and select Copy from Remote The display is the Copy From Remote view shown in the following figure Figure 136 Copy Database From Remote Web View ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File y Application A B Oo 6 E System Copy System Default Database From Remote G NE 1 amp Synchronization Method Communications File Transfer Method We
337. e displayed as described in Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool on p 139 Commands from the internet browser are authenticated by a per ses pos sion cookie i e a cookie that is not stored permanently If a login to the Web Interface is not possible check that the internet browser is Note configured to accept such cookies End of Procedure Edit DCN eth0 Configuration The Management LAN Interface can be configured as a DHCP Server as a DHCP Client or have DHCP functionality disabled If DHCP Client mode is not used the IP Address and Netmask can be edited Additionally RIPv2 function ality can be enabled or disabled This procedure covers editing the DCN options The factory default settings are with the DHCP disabled in the client role with RIPv2 disabled 286 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN See Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded Procedure Step 1 Right click on DCN eth0 and select Edit Configuration The follow ing Edit DCN eth0 screen displays Figure 167 Edit DCN eth0 E BO File Application System 3 NE 1 Synchronization Communications
338. e list of SNMP target addresses as displayed is polled every 5 minutes to resolve target addresses and verify reachability It may take up to 10 minutes for a target address to be resolved Upon reboot a resolved SNMP target address is not displayed until a second 5 minute cycle has completed Outside of a reboot changes are reflected after each 5 minute poll cycle Resolving target addresses entails using trace route to determine the appropri ate interface It does not guarantee that the target address can be reached over that interface Reachability uses ping ICMP Echo in an attempt to reach the target address If the Ping fails an SNMP Dying Gasp Trap Host Unreachable Via Ping alarm is raised Note that reaching the IP address does not equate to an SNMP trap receiver running at that IP address It is also possible that the ping could fail e g be filtered by the network even though an SNMP trap would get through If an SNMP target address is unresolved the SNMP Dying Gasp trap cannot be transmitted for that SNMP target address Each interface may have one target address resolved for it This means that a device that has two management tun 58 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview nels with a resolved target address on each tunnel will send out two SNMP Dying Gasp traps one for each interface The first target address per interface that is resolved is considered as the resolved one
339. e provisioned see Step 2 through Step 18 Expand the Dynamic Slaves entity in the selection tree pane The Dynamic Remote Slave entity is present Select the Dynamic Slave entity and select the Configuration tab to view configuration details and status If the remote node is provi sioned and connected correctly the Dynamic Remote Slave entity is present and Status results are displayed Figure 128 Verify Dynamic Remote Slave L ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP System NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves Dynamic Slaves NTESP100 TS 1 1 SOOC 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes sooc Telecom Slave Step 73 File Application A x EA ONS Configuration Statistics Identification Entity ID DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 Alias i Clock Identity 0080ea33b0a00000 State Administrative IS Secondary ACT Operational Normal Configuration IP Address 10 206 206 6 Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled Messages Rates Announce Message Rate 1 Packet per 16 Seconds Sync Message Rate 32 Packets per Second Delay Response Message Rate 32 Packets per Second Status Announce Negotiated Lease Duration s 300 Announce Remaining Lease Duration s 120 Sync Negotiated Lease Duration s 300 Sync Remaining Lease Duration s 120 Delay Response Negotiated Lease Duration s 300 Delay Response Remaining Lease Duration s
340. e selected 0 MTIE Mask Range is from 0 to 100 Raw Data Enables or disables Raw Data to be sent to a remote Enabled Collection Raw Data Collection server Disabled Measurement Selects the measurement type Frequency Type Phase Telecom Slave Edit Telecom Slave Analysis Parameters A Telecom Slave Analysis may be edited by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu expanding System NE 1 and Clock Analysis in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the Tele com Slave entity TS 1 1 and select Edit Telecom Slave Analysis To edit thresholds enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity TS 1 1 and select Edit Thresholds 518 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 60 Edit Telecom Slave Analysis Recovery Target target Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Frequency Drop down list to select the desired frequency recovery G823 PDH Traffic G823 PDH Sync G8261 1 Output Wander Phase Recovery Target Enter the desired phase recovery target Range is from 1 to 100 000 nanoseconds Default is 500 500 PTP Network Analysis Parameters Create Edit a PTP Network Probe PTP Probe A PTP Network Probe may be created by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu expanding System NE 1 and PTP Network Analysis in the Selection Tree
341. eStamp Failure No NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Slave To Master Measurement Type Frequency on IPv4 Step 20 Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other program by Step 21 SS Note selecting the Export button Select the Clock Analysis entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Analysis results via Dashboard meter If two Clock Probes have been scheduled as shown below the results of both Clock Probes are displayed The Clock Analysis meter will display test results only if the associated SyncJack schedule is present Each result is associated with a color coded radio button according to its Probe Score green yellow or red If gray this indicates the SyncJack schedule has been deleted or no score results are present Installation and Operations Manual 367 ADVA 7J E am Wea u SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 234 View Clock Analysis Result Meter l ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application BD XB D S B System Clock Analysis NE 1 Clock Accuracy CLOCK ANALYSIS Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Glock Analysis PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Ors 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 2 Clock Recovery Score History Estimations Phase Recovery Score PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 1 TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PRO
342. ear safety glasses when working with canned compressed air This product contains electro static sensitive devices Appropriate anti static handling precautions should be followed i e IEC 61340 5 1 1998 Four rack mounting kits are available for mounting the SP 100 SP 100 Single Rack Mounting Brackets part number 1013904010 SP 100 Dual Rack Mounting Brackets part number 1013904011 SP 100 Extended Rack Mounting Brackets part number 1013904012 SP 100 Wall Mounting Brackets part number 1013904013 For certain applications multiple kits are required See the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document for kit components and refer to the following mounting options for details on which kits are required for your application o oO o o Mounting Options The chassis may be rack mounted wall mounted or placed as a standalone unit Use one of the following procedures to mount the FSP 150SP Table 10 SP 100 Mounting Procedures Single Dual Mounting Kit s SP 100 SP 100 Mounting Type Required Procedure X 19 Standard or 1013904010 Mounting a Single FSP Extended SP 100 via a Standard or Extended 19 Configuration on p 84 X 23 Standard or 1013904010 and Mounting a Single SP 100 via Extended 1013904012 a 23 Standard or Extended X ETSI Extended 1013904010and ETSI Extended Configuration 1013904012 on p 85 19 Standard or 1013904011 Mounting Dual SP 100s via a Extended 1
343. ec Identification Entity ID PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name PTPCIkProbel State Completed Event Message Failure No Running Failed Count 0 Mask Failure No Actual Test Start Time 2014 01 27 18 58 56 Mask Crossed Time 30 Actual Test Duration s 599 Mask Margin Failure No Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Crossed Time 0 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Last TIE Result ns 0 PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Time Of Last TIE Result 2014 01 27 19 09 28 Measurement Direction Slave To Master Raw Data Collection Disabled IP Version i IPv4 Measurement Type Frequency Master IP Address 10 206 206 1 Slave IP Address 10 206 206 6 Clock Analysis Status GUI The GUI provides an overall status of the Clock Analysis function shown as Green Yellow or Red in the GUI The status of each configured PTP Clock Probe is also provided see the following figure Figure 14 Clock Analysis Status CLOCK ANALYSIS ts 1 1 Clock Recovery Score Phase Recovery Score O PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 O PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 2 Installation and Operations Manual 41 PTP Network Analysis Optical Networking PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Analysis provides a PTP usability score based on packet delay packet delay variation and packet loss statistics of PTP event messages PTP Network Analysis does not require but may use a reference timing signal PTP Network Analysis supports one PTP Network Probe Fun
344. ection Tree to view the PTP Network Analysis results via Dashboard meter see Figure 243 on p 376 Figure 243 View PTP Network Analysis Result Meter ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 ncJack File Application a x5 o 65 E System PTP Network Analysis E NE 1 E Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 CLOCK PROBE 1 2 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 E Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT TS 1 1 E PTP Network Analysis E PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS Optp NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Forward Network Usability Score Reverse Network Usability Score Step 13 Select the Network Element entity in the Selection Tree to view the PTP Network Analysis and Global results via Dashboard meter 376 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Ss Note The Clock Analysis meter will display test results only if the associated SyncJack schedule is present Each result is associated with a color coded radio button according to its Probe Score green yellow or red If grey this indicates the SyncJack schedule has been deleted or no score results are present Figure 244 View Global and PTP Network Analysis Dashboard ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Sync
345. ed This option bee QL SSU B allows the user to set a minimum expected received Quality Level on the port The valid values depend upon the SYNC entity s Network Clock Type A value of None represents that a minimum Quality Level is not expected Choices available depend on the Network Clock Type setting option1 SDH or option2 SONET QL EEC1 The default value is QL NONE If the Network Clock Type is changed Expected QL defaults to QL NONE regardless of previous setting Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 QL NONE Default is QL NONE Valid entry for SONET Network Clock QL PRS QL PRS QL STU QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL EEC2 QL STU QL SMC QL PROV QL NONE Default is QL NONE QL ST2 QL TNC QL ST3E QL EEC2 QL SMC QL PROV Edit A2N Shapers Buffer Size The buffer size in KB of the shaper Each of the 8 0 15360 shapers can be set independently 128 for E1000 N 1 N A for E1000 N 2 472 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Access Port Configuration Options and Rules The following Access Port provisioning options and rules are described for each option setting available Access Port 1 may be either Copper or Fiber The following option descriptions are provided as a detailed reference for build ing services It provides entry range values dependencies and identifies default data For general instructions on building services see Provisi
346. ed screen the response is divided into multiple pages if this option is enabled Disabled 464 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings When TACACS Privilege Level Control is Enabled this value is automatically configured to Not Applicable Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Remote Authentication Edit Remote Authentication Authentication Sets the Remote Authentication Protocol type NONE Protocol RADIUS TACACS Authentication Remote authentication type Options available are PAP Type Password Authentication Protocol PAP or Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP CHAP TACACS When Enabled the system expects the User Privilege Disabled Privilege Control level to be returned from the TACACS server Enabled When Disabled the system does not expect User Privilege level information from the TACACS server but uses the privilege level set in the TACACS Default Privilege Level attribute TACACS Default When TACACS Privilege Level Control is Disabled Retrieve Privilege this value is used as the user s privilege level once Maintenance authenticated by the TACACS server Provisioning Superuser Not Applicable NAS IP Address The IP address of the Network Access Security server This option is only applicable if Authentication Protocol is setto RADIUS
347. ed personnel WARNING 4 When connecting to a 240v AC supply the unit should be con Note nected using a 3 Amp double pole branch circuit breaker 5 Circuit Overloading Consideration should be made when con necting the equipment to the supply circuit Consider the effect over loading the circuits might have on current protection and supply wiring Appropriate consideration of the equipment current rating should be taken when addressing this concern 6 For AC variants the power inlet connector is the disconnect device For DC variants a readily accessible disconnect device should be incorporated in the building RT installation wiring When connecting power to a PSU make sure that the office supply is correct according to the rating label of the SP 100 The rating label can be found on the back of the SP 100 104 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Connect Optional Earth Frame Ground Cable An optional Earth Frame Ground connection may be attached to the Earth ter minal point located at the rear of the unit Each SP 100 unit is supplied with an Earth Terminal Kit and a 10 foot 16 gauge grounding cable to facilitate this connection Ss Note A terminal tab is provided within the Earth Terminal Kit for optional push on connection to the Earth terminal point which is not the method described in the following procedure The following procedure connects to a frame ground
348. ed screen is displayed Authentication Failed Windows Internet Explorer Ge y Shttp 172 17 23 31 2uthFai hton E a e Xi Live Search File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ON Logout a Search po ro Web Snapshots 0 wasna Ae QB A O amp Md MOT e le o EZ mh v Page Gh Tools we amp 22 Authentication Failed a ADVA TM vJ E UD WI n Optical Networking Authentication Failed Please log in You can log in here When this occurs simply select here from the Authentication Failed screen to go to the FSP 150SP login screen and continue with the logon sequence see Step 3 of Logging On on p 130 Getting Familiar with eVision The eVision web browser management tool provides a web based Graphical User Interface GUI for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM functions The eVision Web Browser Management Tool workspace is arranged to allow you to focus on the task you wish to perform while continually displaying alarm information The Menu Bar Tool Bar and Selection Tree provide easy access to the desired workflow e g provisioning an entity or performing main tenance functions The Details Pane provides a different set of viewing and editing options depend ing on the application and entity selected The Alarms pane provides continuous alarm monitoring regardless of the application currently selected The Configuration Applic
349. een displays 164 Installation and Operations Manual FSP 150SP 100 R6 1 1 80000026364 Issue A 2014 ADVA Optical Networking SE Confidential Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 66 Edit Syslog View ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application E Syste EA Edit Syslog Edit Security Log Edit Alarm Log Edit Audit Log E NE Edit ACL E Sy Edit Banner E Edit NTP Restore System Defaults EEEE SYWC I I I T E BITS 1 Sie oy ooo BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Step 8 Enter Syslog Server information IPv4 Address and Port for up to 3 servers the default port number is 514 Click on OK End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 165 ADVA De v 7 VA w YA Provision System Options cal Networking Configure ACL The Access Control List ACL allows the user to limit access to the NE via the DCN or management tunnels to specific IP addresses or IP address ranges subnetworks Up to ten entries can be made and each entry can be individu ally enabled or disabled All enabled entries apply to all management interfaces The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Right click on System
350. elecom Slave Clock Analysis Monitored Types The following performance parameters and associated default settings are for each of the thresholds which are supported on a Slave Only Ordinary Clock under Clock Analysis in SyncJack The following PMs are accessed via the Syn cJack application when PTP software licensing is enabled and a Telecom Slave is created Table 46 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Monitored Type Definition Direction Location dl TA in Day TOTALTIMECR5 Total time clock recovery score 5 Receive Near End 0 0 TOTALTIMECR4 Total time clock recovery score 4 Receive NearEnd 0 0 TOTALTIMECR3 Total time clock recovery score 3 Receive NearEnd 0 0 TOTALTIMEPR5 Total time pulse recovery score 5 Receive Near End 0 0 TOTALTIMEPR4 Total time pulse recovery score 4 Receive NearEnd 0 0 TOTALTIMEPR3 Total time pulse recovery score 3 Receive Near End 0 0 492 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules PTP Network Probe Monitored Types The following performance parameters and associated default settings are for each of the thresholds which are supported on a PTP Network Probe The fol lowing PMs are accessed via the SyncJack application when PTP software licensing is enabled and a PTP Network Probe is created Table 47 SOOC Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings
351. elect the Database entity see Figure 131 on p 237 for an example of a default database configuration The display shows the current database version for both the active and standby par titions as well as the status Figure 131 Database Status Display File Application v EA BB E System NE 1 E Synchronization Configuration Communications Database E Active 02 02 Standby 01 01 00000 lal Alarm Attributes File Services Mode Idle File Services Status Success Administration U d Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Setting a Default Database At the original commissioning of the unit the Default Database and the Factory Default Database are identical At some point it may be desirable to reset the current database to something other than the Factory Defaults especially if a specific and complex management communications and or remote access con figuration has been provisioned The FSP 150SP permits the user to designate the current configuration as the Default Database or to reset the Default Database to factory defaults using this procedure Installation and Operations Manual 237 ADVA 7J E am WM u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking The following procedure includes steps for setting a Default Database using the eVision tool It is also possible to perform this process using CLI See the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide fo
352. em Name NE 1 and NTESP100 entities in the Selection Tree by clicking on the signs next to each entity c Select the Access Port facility E1000 A 1 in the Selection Tree The Access Port facility status window Is displayed and the Con figuration Tab is selected Step 2 Right click on the Access Port facility and select Edit Configuration An Edit Configuration window appears Installation and Operations Manual 181 Provision Access Port a ADVA 7J E amw WM n Optical Networking Figure 83 Edit Access Port EVPL Configuration View ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 1505P 100 Configuration File Application x B Y D System Edit Configuration NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 Ema Entity ID ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 Edit Sync E 36 Moure ar Synchronization ae 4 Communications Administrative Is i x Secondary ACT SNMP Operational Normal Administration le Users Port Remote Authentication y L MAC Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c2 Negotiated Speed Auto 1000 Full Security Policy i s z n EE ti Media Type Fiber w Loopback Configuration None ey Generauon MTU 9600 bytes Loopback Status None Max Speed 1 000 000 000 Swap SA DA None Configured Speed Auto 1000 Full x Auto Diagnostic Disabled y MDIX Not Applicable Service Port Mode CO Port Shaping 3 Disabled y Type EVPL Port Shaped Speed 0 bps AFP i AFP All
353. ement Tool Loopbacks Entering a right click on a Network Port or Access Port under the NTESP100 entity and selecting Loopbacks provides a Loopback view From this view the Network Port or Access Port entity can be placed in the Maintenance state and a loopback can be performed See the following figure for an example of a loopback view For loopback proce dures see Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring on p 319 When using eVision to remove a loopback click on the drop down list for Loop back Configuration and select None then click on OK Figure 54 Loopback View ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 35 98 Maintenance File y Application A x B D 4 System Loopbacks NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification 1000 MEA Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Raise Clear Test Alarm Alias Synchronizatio Communications 5 Alarm Attributes tate Administration Administrative S z Secondary ACT Operational Normal Loopback Configuration Loopback Configuration z Loopback Status None SwapSADA None z Timer 10 10 300 sec Cancel Apply OK Performance Monitoring View See Network Access Port Performance Monitoring on p 321 Precision Time Protocol See Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP on p 208 SyncJack See SyncJack Testing on p 344 Installation and Operations Manual 151 ADVA k Va m
354. en the system is not working in management traffic bridging mode Perform the following procedure to set up the 3G modem port using the RS 232 Serial Port on the FSP 150SP RS 232 and the CLI command structure For more information on the CLI command structure see the FSP 750SP 700 Com mand Line Interface Reference Guide You will need the following items for this procedure PC with a serial communications port e g COM1 or COM2 2 Category 5 LAN Cables with RJ 45 connectors 282 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning DB 9 to RJ 45 converter ADVA Optical Networking PN 2036904035 01 or 1036904035 see Table 65 RJ 45 RS 232 Serial Console Port and DB9 Adapter Pin Assignments on p 575 Acommunications program like TeraTerm Pro Web a free software termi nal emulator for MS Windows An Internet browser e g Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater IE 8 0 recom mended or Firefox 2 0 or greater Firefox 3 6 recommended etc This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a stand alone procedure An ADVA Optical Networking qualified 3G modem ZTEMT 119 or HW E1750 This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a Stand alone procedure The default DHCP setting for the FSP 150SP DCN port is disabled and as a DHCP client The CLI entries shown in these procedures are for example purposes only The in
355. enter a right click on the Master Virtual Port entity e g MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 and select Edit To delete a Master Virtual Port enter a right click on the Master Virtual Port entity and select Delete Table 55 Create Edit Master Virtual Port Parameter Settings Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long up to 64 characters blank PTP Flow Point Create only PTP Flow Point Identifier to associate with this Master Virtual Port The Service Flow associated with Flow Point and Master Virtual Port must be the same drop down list of provisioned PTP Flow Point IDs 510 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Create Edit a Static Slave Once a Master Virtual Port has been created by creating a Master Clock Inter face a Static Remote Slave may be created by expanding the Boundary Clock and Master Clock Interface entities in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the Static Slave entity and selecting Create Static Slave To edit a Static Slave enter a right click on the Static Slave entity e g STATIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 and select Edit The number of Static Slaves that may be created is dependent on the Max Slaves Supported and Max Static Slaves Supported entries made when crea
356. entifier up to 15 characters no spaces or special characters for the probe Schedule Type Select the desired type from the drop down list Only One Shot is currently supported Duration Select either the Forever or Fixed radio button If Fixed is selected enter the desired duration in seconds Start Time select Now or Future radio button If Future is selected enter the date and time for the test to start Schedule SJ Test Items select the desired Probe s for this test from the list provided by clicking the related check box es Select OK Step9 Expand Syncjack Schedules in the Selection Tree A new Syncjack Schedule entity is present Step 10 Step 11 Select the Syncjack Schedule entity to verify entry Select the desired PTP Clock Probe entity in the Selection Tree to observe the SyncJack Schedule State and test progress State indi cates whether the test is Not Scheduled Failed Waiting Scheduled Future Running or Completed A PTP Clock Probe Status pane displays Figure 228 PTP Clock Probe State Running File Application axu YO w amp System NE 1 Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph History Results 30000000 4 Tests Result CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 q age 0 1 N A N A NA CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 ydi 0 2 I N A N A I N A C
357. entity is opened the entity item is expanded displaying nested items A pointing hand cursor displayed when hovering the cursor over an entity within the selection tree indicates there are menu selectable items available for that entity and if a right mouse click is entered on that entity applicable menu selectable items appear See Figure on p 138 for an example of a Selection Tree with menu selected Menu selectable items are bold and non selectable items are grey If an l beam cursor is displayed it indicates there are no menu selectable items for that entity within the currently selected application When an entity is selected within the Selection Tree the corresponding entity status is displayed in the Details Pane The status displayed in the Details Pane is dependent upon which application is currently selected For example if Con figuration application is selected and a Access Port facility is selected in the Selection Tree facility status information such as assigned state and opera tional state is displayed If the same Access Port facility is selected in the Selec tion Tree while in Maintenance view the Details Pane will display Etherjack diagnostics results and alarm attributes Installation and Operations Manual 137 Getting Familiar with eVision a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Optical Networking Figure 46 Selection Tree with Menu Selected L ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 35 98 Configuration x BO 5 F
358. ents and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response 829 Transfer execute failed 830 Error string returned 831 Bad archive file 832 Error syncing with scu 833 Error processing topology change event 834 SCU push failed 835 Flash erase failed 836 Flash partition sync failed 837 Install Failed 838 Activate Failed 839 Cancel Activate Failed 840 Validate Failed 841 Revert Failed 842 Operation not allowed in current state 843 Invalid Validation Time 844 Invalid Reboot Time 845 Operation not allowed Database upload in progress 846 Operation not allowed Database download in progress 847 Operation not allowed Database backup in progress 848 Operation not allowed Database restore in progress 849 Operation not allowed Software download in progress 850 Operation not allowed Software install in progress 851 Operation not allowed Software upgrade in progress 852 Operation not allowed Software validate in progress 853 Operation not allowed Software cancel upgrade in progress 854 Operation not allowed Software revert in progress 855 Operation not allowed System rebooting 856 Operation not allowed System software being upgraded 857 Software is incompatible for Network Element 858 Sysdefdb directory is empty RESOURCE ERRORS 1024 Exhausted Total Number of Policers 1025 Exhausted Total Number of Queues 1026 Exhaus
359. ep Installation and Operations Manual 311 a ARAVA ei ee Va HU AID ws a Provision Communications Optical Networking Step 23 To verify the connection to the SP 100 via the 3G Networking IP address open a new web browser window enter the IP address in the address bar of your Web browser and log onto the SP 100 End of Procedure 312 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Sample Network GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel This is an example of setting up communications between two FSP 150SP s using a management tunnel in a laboratory or back to back small network con figuration The Figure below shows an example of back to back FSP 150SPs where the eVision workstation Gateway NE GNE and Subtending NE SNE are on the same subnet and WAN connectivity between FSP 150SPs is via a manage ment tunnel FSP 150SP 1 and the Workstation reside on LAN Segment A FSP 150SP 2 has no management LAN connection and has a WAN manage ment tunnel connection to FSP 150SP 1 Figure 191 Workstation GNE SNE on Same Subnet GNE FSP 150SP 1 FSP 150SP_ plis Network Port 00600 Management Tunnel VLAN Based VLAN ID 100 Layer 2 Protocol Ethernet DHCP disabled RIP V2 Packets enabled IP Address 10 10 10 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 MGMT LAN Port IP Address 192 168 2 2 Netmask 255 255 255 0 DHCP disabled RIPv2 disabled Proxy ARP enabled De
360. er Fixed sees PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 StartTima Now History Estimations Future yyyy mm dd hh mm ss TS 1 1 El PTP Network Analysis Schedule SJ Test Items E PTP Network Probes aman PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Seach ON reste Schedule PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Result Analysis MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection m Cancel Apply OK 350 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Enter the following to configure the SyncJack Schedule Schedule Index EID for the schedule Enter a number from 1 to 255 Activity ID a text identifier up to 15 characters no spaces or special characters for the probe Schedule Type Select the desired type from the drop down list Only One Shot is currently supported Duration Select either the Forever or Fixed radio button If Fixed is selected enter the desired duration in seconds Start Time select Now or Future radio button If Future is selected enter the date and time for the test to start Schedule SJ Test Items select the desired Clock Probe s for this test from the list provided by clicking the related check box es Select OK Expand Syncjack Schedules in the Selection Tree A new Syncjack Schedule entity is present Select the Syncjack Schedule entity to
361. er Password enter the server User Password Select OK System configuration See Configure System Identity and Configuration on p 162 5 The desired File Transfer Method to be used must be enabled in the Note Installation and Operations Manual 347 SyncJack Testing ADVA 7J a amv ws n Optical Networking Step 4 Select Raw Data Collection in the selection tree to verify entry End of Procedure Performing Clock Accuracy Testing SP 100 Clock Accuracy testing uses a user selected reference clock and a source clock and measures the difference between them The output of the measurement is expressed as TIE where TIE n ref n src n and MTIE Constant difference between the clocks is rejected so only the frequency differences matter The procedure for performing Clock Accuracy testing assumes that SP 100 is properly connected to the clock inputs to be measured and the appropriate SP 100 interfaces have been configured See Provisioning the SP 100 on p 153 Step 1 Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu then expand the System folder in the selection tree Step 2 Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the Clock Accuracy entity Step 3 Enter a right click on Clock Probes in the selection tree and select Create Clock Probe A Create Clock Probe pane appears Figure 211 Create Clock Probe View File Application a x o 65
362. er gt 9 48 38 ee formats e Inse Delete format 2a Clipboard Te Font z Alignment z Number A Styles Cells Al Ml Fe B c po formnule Bac aa 6 H l J K L M N o P a a 2 3 4 9 TS ABR RX ABR TX ESBF ESBP ESBS ESC ESCAE ESDE ESF ESFS ES ESMF ESMP ESO ESOF ESOP 6 Descriptic Average B Average B Broadcast Broadcast Bytes Sen Collisions CRC Align Drop Ever Fragment Frames Se Jabbers Multicast Multicast Octets Re Ether Stat Oversize 7 Direction Receive Transmit Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Receive None Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Receive Transmit Receive 8 Location NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd NearEnd Near End 9 current 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 683 43712 0 0 10 10 30 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 11 10 15 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 12 10 00 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 13 9 45 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 14 9 30 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 15 9 15 00 507 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 892 57088 0 0 16 9 00 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 17 8 45 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 18 8 30 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 19 8 15 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 20 8 00 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 val 7 45 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 L 22 7 30 00 506 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 891 57024 0 0 23 7 15 00 506 0 0 0 0 0 0
363. er the desired duration in seconds Start Time select Now or Future radio button If Future is selected enter the date and time for the test to start Schedule SJ Test Items select the desired Probe s for this test from the list provided by clicking the related check box es Select OK Select the PTP Network Probe entity and Configuration tab to view the Syncjack Schedule State and test progress State indicates whether the test is Failed Waiting Scheduled Running or Com pleted 374 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 241 View SyncJack PTP Network Probe State Running File Application y E Ej System E NE 1 El Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 El History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 E Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT TS 1 1 Ej PTP Network Analysis E PTP Network Probes E Synejack Schedules SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 SYNCIJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 4 m r A z 5 Y a Configuration Statistics Identification Entity ID PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Name NetProbe01 Configuration PTP Flowpoint IP Version Master IP Address Slave IP Address Reference Reference Expected QL RPDY fw Low ns RPDY fw Medium ns RPDY fw High ns RPDY rev Low ns
364. erStats Drop Events The total number Receive Near 37055 3557280 of events in which packets were dropped End due to lack of resources Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped it is just the number of times this condition has been detected ESF EtherStats Fragments The total number of Receive Near 37055 3557280 packets received that were less than 64 End octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error ora bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment This is because it counts both runts which are normal occurrences due to collisions and noise hits ESFS EtherStats Frames Sent The Frames Sent Transmit Near 0 0 in the egress direction End ESJ EtherStats Jabbers The total number of Receive Near 0 0 packets received that were longer than End 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error ora bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE 802 3 section 8 2 1 5 10BASE5 and section 10 3 1 4 10BASE2 These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms
365. erations Manual 229 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP ADVA VO E VUE ws Y Optical Networking Create a Static Remote Slave The following procedure is performed at the Boundary Clock Master Clock site for this remote slave SS Note Step 64 Prior to creating a Static Remote Slave the Remote Slave should be connected and provisioned If the Remote Slave is an FSP150 unit it must already have a Telecom Slave provisioned see Step 2 through Step 18 Enter a right click on the Static Slaves entity in the Selection tree and select Create Static Slave A Create Static Remote Slave window is displayed Figure 124 Create Static Remote Slave l ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application System NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Sl Create Static Slave y Dynamic NTESP100 TS 1 1 Alarm Attributes s00c Telecom Slave Step 65 Step 66 a x PIs Create Static Remote Slave Identification Static Remote Slave Index 1 Alias 8 State Administrative Management Secondary n a Operational n a Configuration IP Address a ol off ol 0 Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled Messages Rates Announce Message Rate Sync Message Rate E cke Delay Response Message Rate 32 Packets pe Cancel OK Enter the following Static Remote Slave options a Enter the desired Static Re
366. ernet Network Port is enabled for QL Mode This Po QLPRCE object is only applicable for Synchronous Ethernet QL SSU A capable ports when QL Mode is Enabled This option QL SSU B allows the user to set a minimum expected received Quality Level on the port The valid values depend upon the SYNC entity s Network Clock Type A value of None represents that a minimum Quality Level is not expected Choices available depend on the Network Clock Type setting option1 SDH or option2 SONET QL EEC1 The default value is QL NONE If the Network Clock Type is changed Expected QL defaults to QL NONE regardless of previous setting Valid entry for SDH Network Clock QL PRC QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 QL NONE Default is QL NONE 500 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Create Edit a Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC Once a Telecom Slave has been created a Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC may be created by entering a right click on the TS 1 n entity and selecting Cre ate SOOC To edit an SOOC enter a right click on the SOOC entity SOOC 1 1 1 1 1 and select Edit To delete an SOOC enter a right click on the SOOC entity and select Delete Table 49 Create Edit SOOC Parameter Settings Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string ca
367. es 181 Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Service Provisioning 181 Provision Network Port s448 lt i eee ewe de eae EOP RA 184 Configuring Network Port 2 466228 vee et be dwe eee Ge Ye be ee ee ee 184 Provision Synchronization 2 0 0c es 186 Provision Synchronous Ethernet Sync E and Precision Time Protocol PTP cias mos dl ae Wik scat Be den Mal Be db We Mee had MC oie a Gah Be oo Maho ot She eB 186 Edit System SMC cosa ae 228 Gabe eee PLES A ES Da ES 188 EdIEBIESIN a Se Ce ww SG A 189 Edit BITS OUT rare BG Rak EO a ee 190 Edit 10 MHz Clock Porras tiarniada daras BERENS SE 191 Edit PPS POMS as 44044 a AA a dc 192 Edit TOD Port es oven ea a a it ae ele Se is a een ape 194 Edit GPS ha 5 a AAA oe ed eh AAA a a a 195 Installation and Operations Manual 7 a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Edit System Time of Day is a RR A a RO dl 197 Edit Sync E on a Network Port or Access Port o ooooooo 202 Add a Sync Referente xisco iaa a a 203 Edit a Sync Reference o oooooooon 204 Delete a Sync Reference sa aa eed ee sanar a 205 Enable Software Licensing for SyncJack PTP Feature S 206 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP o o ooooooooo ooo 208 Telecom Slave Provisioning Order o oo oooooonomos 208 Boundary Clock Provisioning Order o oooooooomos 208 Master Clock Provisioning Order o ooo oo coo o o 209 Create a Telecom
368. es of the FSP 150SP s 2048 kHz Network Clock Type and the FSP 150SP s line type are provisioned Line Type should be set prior to selecting other BITS OUT Configuration options Line Code Sets the BITS line code If Line Type is set to E1 then E1 HDB3 the options available are E1 HDB3 and El AMI If Line E1 AMI Type is set to T1 then the options available are T1 T1 B8ZS B8ZS and T1 AMI If Line Type is set to 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable T1 AMI Frame Format Sets the BITS Frame Format If Line Type is set to E1 El Unframed then the options available are E1 Unframed El CRC4 E1 CRC4 and E1 DualFrame If Line Type is set to T1 then the options available are T1 SuperFrame and T1 Extended SuperFrame If Line Type is set to 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable E1 DualFrame T1 SuperFrame T1 Extended SuperFrame 456 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parametar Applicable Rules Defaults SA Bit Select the Signalling Associated SA Bit SA Bit is None only applicable if Line Type is set to E1 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 QL Mode Set the Quality Level Mode If Line Type is set to 2048 Disabled kHz then this option is not applicable Enabled Squelch QL Set the Squelch Quality Level The Squelch
369. esources El NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 1000 A 1 Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 DCN etho Alias SP100 35 98 3G Modem E State Ej Synchronization El NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT E NTESP100 Operational Normal SYNGC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Physical Inventory E BITS 1 Name FSP150SP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Physical Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c0 Software Revision 6 1 1 049 CLK 1 1 1 2 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN usI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen PPS 1 1 1 2 CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Environmental A Communications Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 mv DCN eth0 3G DCN Settings E Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled SNMP Ej Administration E Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Notification Interface Gale Description Date Time fanned in ac rant Step 20 From the File menu select Logout and verify that the browser shows the Login screen Step 21 Return to the serial port session and logoff by entering quit See the following example ADVA comms gt quit Logged Out Login Step 22 Disconnect the serial cable from the RS 232 connector on the FSP 150SP End of Procedure Step 23 Use an ethernet cable to connect the MGMT LAN RJ 45 connector to the network DCN 280 Installation and Operations Man
370. ess Subnet Mask valid IPV4 mask Gateway IP Address valid IPV4 address of Gateway Interface Name Select desired Interface Name from the drop down list Metric 0 to 65535 Advertise Route select Disabled or Enabled Click on OK If Management Traffic Bridging is enabled only ethO is allowed for Interface Name To enable Management Traffic Bridging refer to Table 30 System Configuration Settings on p 464 Go to Step 1 Left click on Communications and select the Static Routes tab see Figure 177 on p 300 Figure 177 Display Static Routes ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 File Application v E System NE 1 Synchronization DCN ethd 3G DCN Management Tunnels SNMP Administration Configuration x D a Static Routes Static ARP Entries Source Address Config Static Route Table Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Advertise Disabled Interface Metric etho 0 Destination 0 0 0 0 Gateway 10 10 32 1 300 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 6 Step 7 Go to Step1 To delete a Static Route right click on Communications and select Delete Static Route see the following figure Figure 178 Delete Static Route S ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B YO 6 System Delete Static Route E NE 1
371. estore Database and Activate Database Default Database Entering a right click on the Default Database entity allows selection of the Save create a new default database Copy to Remote Copy from Remote and New revert the default database back to factory defaults Installation and Operations Manual 147 Maintenance View a ADVA vJ E VUE wz Y Optical Networking Default Settings Selecting the Default Settings entity allows the copying of a remote default value file to the FSP 150SP via Web FTP SCP or SFTP Configuration Files Selecting the Configuration Files entity displays the current list and status of the configuration files resident on the unit Entering a right click on the Configuration File entity allows the user to Create a new configuration file or Copy from Remote Entering a right click on a configu ration file in the table in the details pane yields a list of configuration file options including Save Edit Description Copy to Remote Restart with File and Remove Last Reset Cause Selecting the Last Reset Cause entity displays the Last Reset Type and Last Reset Cause information along with identifiers for up to three debug files if any exist Entering a right click on the Last Reset Cause entity allows the user to Copy to Remote the debug file s Transfer Log Entering a right click on the Transfer Log entity allows the user to select the desired log Alarm Audit or Security to transfer Softwa
372. ettings other than the factory defaults and or establishing a system default database see Database and Configuration Files on p 236 with user specified DCN settings or configuring a management tunnel on one or more Network or Access Ports The system also supports Management Traffic Bridging which implements an Ethernet Bridge between the Management LAN eth0O and all configured Man agement Tunnels This allows having only a single IP address for all manage ment interfaces on the system and eliminates the need for static routes routing protocols or proxy ARP in an SNE GNE configuration The Ethernet Bridge functionality supports MAC learning and flooding of un learned MAC addresses If Management Traffic Bridging is Enabled see System Configuration Settings on p 464 management tunnels do not support provisioning for IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP or RIP Another system level option Management Traffic Bridging Security limits acceptance of DCN packets to those with source MACs containing an ADVA Optical Networking OUI Management Traffic Bridging also facilitates the use of a Hot Sparing configuration When bridging is disabled existing http https telnet ssh sessions are unresponsive for up to 3 seconds When bridging is enabled existing http https telnet ssh sessions are Note unresponsive for up to 10 seconds Management Communication to the FSP 150SP A connection can be made between a PC or laptop and the FSP 150SP ma
373. evel This chapter contains the following step by step procedures Viewing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Counts and Threshold Values on p 337 Initializing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Registers on p 341 Editing PTP Flowpoint and SOOC PM Thresholds on p 342 SP 100 Probing Features on p 345 Performing Clock Accuracy Testing on p 348 Performing Clock Analysis on p 360 Performing PTP Network Analysis on p 372 For PM commands using CLI refer to the FSP 750SP 100 Command Line Ref erence Guide PM Features The following features are provided retrievable performance data for each managed entity so the user can determine past and current system operation PM data collection is per formed via a polling mechanism were primitives are gathered into accumu lated counts After a defined interval e g 15 minutes or 1 day the counts are binned and stored in a database e the checking of PM counts against a threshold to see if the threshold has been crossed If so a Threshold Crossing Alert TCA is reported so that corrective actions can be taken 334 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring PM supports threshold setting and automatic TCA message generation e Current and History PM bins provide a continuous record of service perfor mance allowing for accurate SLA conformance stateme
374. f PTP messages required for clock recovery and does not base selection on network quality between GM and SOOC This will be an area of future improvement The following is the functional model for Boundary Clock and Master Clock Installation and Operations Manual 49 ADVA e VO E VUE wa Y Product Applications Optical Networking Figure 20 Boundary Clock and Master Clock Functional Model Network Element A o 1 14 f O MA yom iaaa a e y f A OI NA Timing Source i Master Clock ii Boundary Clock TA i i ot 7 l gt i i i HT Master Clock Interface Master Clock Interface i 1 1 1 Master Virtual Port Remote Slave i i Master Virtual Remote Slave Clock Port Clock Master Clock Functional Entities i Boundary Clock Functional Entities The following are some terminologies and definitions of the various PTP func tional entities Boundary Clock BC Boundary Clock maintains timing information of the PTP domain Boundary Clock is configured with timing source as one of the TS that recovers timing information of the domain e Master Clock MC Master Clock drives timing information for the PTP domain Master Clock functionality is similar to the Boundary Clock e TimeClock TimeClock represents timing source of the master clock Time Clock allows configuration of up to two Time References and selection swi tchover of the active source T
375. f range allowed Value DEFER is not allowed for MD MHF Creation Control VID list cannot be empty VID list contains duplicate entries VID member xxx VLAN member xxx already exists at position xxx VLAN member xxx does not exist VPN OUI out of range 0 OxFFFFFF Tunnel IP address is being used as system source IP address Two vlan entries cannot have the same VID list for the same port The File description is invalid length of string is 0 127 and can t contains double The file name must be 1 32 characters long must have only a z A Z 0 9 VID list size exceeds the maximum of MaxVlanMbrs including the Primary VID 276 Attribute values are inconsistent 277 _entityname_ does not exist 278 Invalid Admin State _why_ Where Why is xxx not valid for entity xxx state is not supported A port in the reference selector list cannot be unassigned Admin State is in xxx state Admin State is not in xxx state Cannot enable QL mode if AdminState is set to unassigned Entity xxx is in xxx state Parent state xxx higher than yyy Port must xxx to change service type Port state xxx higher than yyy Installation and Operations Manual 389 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Error Codes and System Responses Optical Networking Error Code Response 279 Invalid Loopback configuration _why_ Where Why is xxx is currently active on this port xxx Loopback cannot have Vlans
376. f the 48 VDC or 24 VDC power supply to the SP 100 DC variant power connector or remove the power cable from the AC out let fora SP 100 AC variant End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 117 a ADVA 7 A v a VA Wesel u Connector Pin Assignments ell Networking Connector Pin Assignments Power Supply Unit Connector Pin Assignments Refer to the following for 48 VDC and 24 VDC PSU connector pin designa tions and cable wire assignments Figure 41 48 VDC Power Supply Unit Connector Power Input 48 to 60V DC Lil vos j MGMT LAN Position Connector Release Tab at top of power connector Table 12 48 VDC PSU Cable Wire Assignments Pin PSU Connector Description European Wire North American Number Connection Color Wire Color 1 Return for battery source Blue Black 2 Gnd Ground Yellow Green Yellow Green 3 48 VDC 5A Battery Grey Red 118 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Figure 42 24 VDC Power Supply Unit Connectors Power Input 24VDC _ U UY 2 a 7 Position connectors under set screws of power connector Table 13 24 VDC PSU Cable Wire Assignments PSU Connection Connector Description pe adi we sad coe 24 VDC 5A Battery Grey Red Gnd Ground Yellow Green Yellow Green Retur
377. f the following when using this doc ument Internet Protocol IP addressing Network port facility provisioning requirements Access port Ethernet Virtual Circuit EVC provisioning requirements fiber handling and cleaning procedures if connecting fiber cables power handling and connection procedures if connecting DC power Related Documentation Refer to the following documents for additional information about the FSP 150SP 100 e FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide e FSP 150SP 100 Technical Descriptions e FSP 150SP 100 Quick Start Guide e FSP 150SP 100 SNMP Reference Manual e Safety Guide Documentation Feedback We want our manuals to be as helpful as possible Feedback regarding the manuals are therefore always welcome You can e mail your comments sug gestions to global techdocu advaoptical com To submit your comments suggestions by mail use the following address ADVA Optical Networking SE Technical Documentation Marzenquelle 1 3 98617 Meiningen Dreissigacker Germany We appreciate and value your comments suggestions to improve the quality of our manuals Obtaining Technical Assistance Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for our products through your ADVA Optical Networking distribu tion channel Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract customers who need technical assistance with a product that is under w
378. f the time at the slave depends on the accuracy of delay measurement between master and slave The delay is calculated by halving the round trip time between the master and slave To increase accuracy the PTP protocol sepa rates the link level delay which is symmetric and if needed adjusts for fixed asymmetry and variable delay which is mostly within the devices Another important aspect to improve accuracy of time at slave is for all the timestamps in PTP event messages should recorded as close to the physical interface in ingress and egress direction To minimize the delay asymmetry between Ordi nary Clock Master OC M and Ordinary Clock Slave OC S it is recommended that each device between the OC M and OC S provide either a Transparent Clock TC if fan out of timing is not required or a Boundary Clock BC if fan out is required TC calculates eliminates inaccuracy due to delay asymmetry in a device in either direction by calculating residence time in the device and record ing it in the PTP messages passing through BC involves at least one slave port and one or more master ports where PTP messages are terminated and time is recovered by the slave function and the master ports generate new stream of PTP messages using the time recovered by the slave function 48 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview ITU T developed G 8265 and G 8265 1 to specify transport of frequency over packet network using packet based mec
379. fault Router 192 168 2 1 Static Route Not Required Management Tunnel VLAN Based VLAN ID 100 Layer 2 Protocol Ethernet DHCP disabled RIP V2 Packets enabled IP Address 10 10 10 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 LAN Segment A eVision Workstation IP Address 192 168 2 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 2 2 Note 1 If a DHCP server is available on LAN Segment A then enable DHCP on the MGMT LAN Port of FSP 150SP 1 If DHCP is enabled then the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Router are assigned by the DHCP server Note 2 User must create a static route on the eVision Workstation PC to reach the SNE OR set the PC s Default Gateway to the GNE s IP Address If there is difficulty logging on to the SNE after initial setup the ARP cache on the Workstation should be flushed Network Port SNE FSP 150CC 2 MGMT LAN Port IP Address 192 168 2 3 Netmask 255 255 255 0 DHCP disabled RIPv2 enabled Proxy ARP disabled Default Router N A Admin State unassigned Static Route Required Installation and Operations Manual 313 Provision Communications a ADVA VO E VUE wl Y Optical Networking E Note For management tunnels where RIP is enabled under a Denial of Service attack scenario RIP PDUs will likely be discarded resulting in all RIP learned routes being withdrawn from the routing table On the GNE this will have the affect
380. ference in addition to the first priority reference may be provisioned as a backup in case the first priority reference is lost Note Step 43 Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configu ration from the Application Menu Expand the System Synchroniza tion NE 1 and NTESP100 entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step 44 Enter a right click on the Time Clock entity and select Add Time Clock Reference An Add Time Clock Reference window appears Figure 118 Add a Time Clock Reference ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x EA D y En Add Time Clock Reference NE 1 NTESP100 Identification Synchronization NE 1 TimeREF Index 2 NTESP100 Alias SYNC 1 1 1 1 ENTRA TIME CLON Edit Time Clock eet z qe N Add Time Clock Reference poriv 1 el Sme oil Edit Time Clock Reference Time Clock Reference Sources TS 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 Delete Time Clock Reference CLK 1 1 1 2 Cancel Apply OK PPS 1 1 1 1 IN PPS 1 1 1 2 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Communications SNMP 4 Administration 224 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 45 Step 46 Step 47 Figure 119 Time Clock Status Enter the following Time Clock Reference options a Select the desired TimeREF Index number and enter the desired Alias b Select the desi
381. for that interface Other target addresses that would be reach able on that same interface are listed as unresolved Management Overview The following describes the general management communications architecture and the management features supported in the FSP 150SP The FSP 150SP supports the following management interface connectors Local Area Network MGMT LAN port 10 100 BaseT with RJ45 connector for connection to a management Data Communications Network DCN or a local Personal Computer PC Serial Port RS232 with RJ45 connector to enable access to the Command Line Interface CLI from a local PC VLAN based management tunnels The FSP 150SP supports one manage ment tunnel on each Network and Access Port 3G Modem support via the front panel USB port Management Interfaces Management interfaces consist of a eVision Web Browser Management Tool interface a Command Line Interface and a Simple Network Management Proto col interface Command Line Interface This document assumes the use of eVision for configuring and monitoring the FSP 150SP However a CLI is also available The CLI command structure pro vides a text based system for local configuration and management of FSP 150SP functions For further information regarding the CLI and the command structure refer to the Command Line Interface Reference Guide Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The FSP 150SP provides seamless integration between
382. formation you enter should be determined from local sources At the finish of the procedure the 3G modem gets into in service state and connects itself to the local 3G wireless network with the credential provided Please consult the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for the details of running each command Procedure Step 1 Connect a serial cable between the FSP 150SP RS 232 Serial Port and a PC and logon using procedure Serial Connection on p 276 Step 2 Navigated to the 3G Modem Command Level ADVA gt network element ne 1 ADVA NE 1 gt configure nte NTESP100 1 1 1 ADVA NE 1 NTESP100 1 1 1 gt configure usb ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt Step 3 Determine the next step Desired Operation Then Set a wireless connection with a PIN authentication enabled Continue with the next step 3G Modem Set a wireless connection with a PIN authentication disabled Go to Step 5 3G Modem Disable Pin Authentication Go to Step 14 Unlock the SIM card Go to Step 16 Change the PIN Go to Step 18 Step4 Runpin authenticaition command to get authenticated ADVA NE 1 3g dcn 1 1 1 1 gt pin authentication Installation and Operations Manual 283 Provision Communications a ADVA VO E aa ws Y Optical Networking Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Run dial num
383. front panel connectors if they are not already connected Installation and Operations Manual 315 Provision Communications ADVA VO E saa ws Y Optical Networking Perform the following at FSP 150SP 1 GNE Step 10 Note Step 11 Note Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 A At FSP 150SP 1 perform the procedures Connect Power Cables and Apply Power on p 125 and Serial Connection on p 276 You should currently be logged onto the FSP 150SP 1 s RS232 serial port using CLI Provision a management tunnel using the following CLI command ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt add mgmttnl 1 phoenixl ethernet vlan based 100 disabled 10 10 10 4 255 255 255 0 network 1 1 1 1 According to the example in Figure 191 on p 313 the FSP 150SP 1 s management tunnel should be set to Ethernet Layer 2 Protocol VLAN based with the VLAN ID set to 100 DHCP disabled the IP address should be set to 10 10 10 4 with a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 and RIPv2 should be set to enabled Edit the management tunnel to enable RIPv2 packets ADVA comms gt configure mgmttnl mgmt_tnl 1 ADVA comms mgmt_tnl 1 gt rip2Pkts control enabled Provision the ethO system IP address using the following CLI com mand entry ADVA comms mgmt_tnl 1 gt home ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt configure eth0 ip address 192 168 2 2 200 2005200 20 ADVA comms gt home Enable Proxy ARP by
384. g Figure 202 Edit PM Threshold View of a Network Port Part 2 ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring File Application E System E NE 1 NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 A x E D D Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Edit Thresholds MT ESC DIR LOC 15MIN 1DAY R E Near ABR RX ge Bit Rat End o 0 i s Near ABR TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted Transmit Eng 0 o ESBF Broadcast Frames Sent Transmit Ne 0 0 End a Near ESBP Broadcast Packets Received Receive png 0 o Byt Transmit Ne 0 0 3 yt ransmit ESS z Near Esc Collisions Receive 0 0 End CRC Aligned Errors Naar 37055 3557280 y End ESDE Drop Events None n 37055 3557280 a Near ESF Fragm 37055 3557280 End ESFS Frames Sent Transmit NS 0 o End ES Jabb ie o o 3 Jabbers End ESMF Multicast Frames Sent Transmit el 0 0 Nea ESMP Multicast Packets R Ead 0 0 ESO Octets Received Receive Near 0 0 End Eth Nea Transmit Eng 0 0 5 A Near ESOP Oversize Packets Received Receive 3 37055 3557280 ESP Packets Near A 7 y aaas End 4 2 Near ESP64 64 Octets Frames Received Receive ang 0 o 65 to 127 Octets Fran near 0 0 AAA End Near ESP128 128 to 255 Octets Frames Received Receive End 0 0 ES 2 s Frames R Hear 0 o 3 2 ts Frames Her hloa Installation and Operations Manual 333 ADV
385. g SNMP Dying Gasp Unfortunately the FSP 150SP can not process EFM OAM Dying Gasp mes sages The SNMP Dying Gasp feature may be used to enable peers to receive power failure notification as an SNMP trap When SNMP Dying Gasp is enabled Ethernet frame particulars such as Virtual Local Area Network VLAN and source MAC address are obtained from each interface s provisioned MAC or VLAN based management tunnel and a Dying Gasp message is prepared for transmission to the first reachable SNMP target address should a power fail ure occur See the following figure for details Figure 27 SNMP Dying Gasp Access Third Party System FSP 150SP Access SNMP Dying Gasp sent to resolved SNMP Target Address Note that SNMP Dying Gasp which is intended to supplant EFM OAM Dying Gasp only functions on traffic carrying ports i e not the Management Local Area Network LAN port To set up the SNMP Dying Gasp feature first create the appropriate Ethernet encapsulated VLAN based management tunnel the SNMP Dying Gasp feature only applies to Network and Access interfaces and are not applicable to the Management LAN or Serial Port Then configure SNMP Target addresses on the FSP 150SP Then enable SNMP Dying Gasp at the system level Once an SNMP target address is configured and resolved the SNMP Trap Dying Gasp Interface displays indicating that the SNMP Dying Gasp feature is operational Resolving Target Addresses Th
386. g IP Address Log Server 1 2 3 Port 514 Access Control List Network Address 0 0 0 0 ACL Network Mask 255 255 255 255 Entries 1 10 Control Disabled System Security Banner This is a private system Continued Banner Unauthorized access or use may lead to prosecution State Disabled Polling Interval seconds 16 NTP Primary Server 0 0 0 0 Backup Server 0 0 0 0 Active Server Primary Name FSP150SP 100 f Location blank NE Configuration Contact blank NE 1 CLI Prefix NE 1 Administrative State IS Alias blank NTESP100 Administrative State IS Configuration SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled Alias blank Administrative State Management Media Type Copper NTE MTU Size 9612 bytes a Configured Speed Auto 1000 Full MDIX Auto Auto Diagnosti Enabled lo Never Pon pe AE aaa Enabled Facilities Port Shaping Disabled E1000 N 1 Port Shaped Speed 0 bps Q in Q Ethertype 88a8 hex Q in Q Ethertype Disabled Override Sync E Mode Disabled QL Mode Disabled Assumed QL QL EEC1 Expected QL QL NONE 438 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Enable Disable Change Authenticate Unlock Functional Area Entity Parameter Default Setting Alias blank Administrative State Unassigned Media Type Copper 1 MTU Size 9600 Configured Speed Copper Auto Fiber
387. gement is sup ported Disabled and Unassigned is derived from the parent port Policers and Shapers Admin state is read only State is ALWAYS derived from parent EVC Users may edit the state of the Equipment Port and EVC Flow The Policer and Shaper states are derived directly from the EVC Flow state Editing the EVC state is allowed according to the rules outlined below Note that the state of the individual EVC can be overwritten by a subsequent edit of the parent Port object see behavior rules defined below Parent Child rules for Equipment entities Ifan Equipment entity is In service its child entities Port entities can be any state Supported by that entity Ifan Equipment entity is Management its child entities can be any Out of Service state or Unassigned If an Equipment entity is Unassigned its child entities must be unassigned Installation and Operations Manual 431 Entity State Descriptions a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Parent Child rules for Port entities Ifa Port Entity is in In Service state its child entities EVCs can be in In Service Management or Unassigned state Ifa Port Entity is in Management Maintenance or Disabled state its child entities can be in Management or Unassigned state Ifa Port Entity is in Unassigned state its child entities must be in Unas signed state Parent Child rules for EVC Flow entities Note that child entities of E
388. ggested trouble clearing procedure Table 33 PTP Clock Probe Alarms Description NSA Default SA Default LED E ype Probable Cause HU SIA Procedure Notification Notification Indication SJTEST Probe Reference signal failed May be For case of external signal Reference Fail caused by signal loss or signal accuracy check cable connection Minor N A N A degradation detected SJTEST No PTP Clock probe does not receive valid Make sure PTP Clock under Timestamp timestamps in the PTP event messages test event messages comprise Minor N A N A valid timestamps SJTEST No PTP Clock probe does not receive PTP Validate PTP Clock Probe con Messages event messages from the Clock under test figuration check connectivity Minor N A N A to the Clock under test PTP Network Probe Alarms Refer to the following table for PTP Network Probe alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default notifica tion code and suggested trouble clearing procedure Table 34 PTP Network Probe Alarms Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seinquiy wey enue y suoneledo pue uogejesu eds Description NSA Default SA Default LED Gondinon Type Probable Cause Trouble Liearing Procedure Notification Notification Indication SJTEST Probe Reference signal failed May be For case of external signal Reference Fail caused by signal loss or signal accuracy check cable connection Minor N A N
389. gure 66 Edit Syslog View 0 ccc es 165 Figure 67 Edn AG 2a be ee aa aa a Be ee eee ae 166 Figure 68 Edit Banner iis cc via eve eee ed ee eee we Nee ee Ee ewe 167 14 Installation and Operations Manual List of Figures Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Bit NP ee cei awe is Wonca ak eRe A Vow eee aa ee we aa ge 168 EdIENESD gt ada Sais Horan he ets choad x Modo aint ae Tec Ha certs Ghai ee 169 Edit NNESPIOO cn heh oe ee ae ee ee Beet he de des 170 Display SSL Certificate and SSH Key o o oooooooo 172 Regenerate KeyS oo oooo oo 4 4 173 Regenerate SSL Certificate ooooooooo 173 Regenerate SSH Key iaa E ERA BR work 174 Edit Policy Strength y cora ii E 175 Add SEP an ai Gah iyi e io a Ey a a A 176 Edit User qa aani ay Ri oe e a ek E AA 177 Edit User Password a aaa aaa a a 178 Delete User ina ed t dia ee ee Ee oe ee ke eee RS 178 REMOVE LOCK sa Wee eee eS hee eee ee Rime ere 179 Edit Remote Authentication 0 0000 eee ees 180 Edit Access Po
390. hanisms without physical layer timing Repeated transmission of PTP packets allows recovery of frequency Initially version 1 of PTP as define in IEEE 1588 2002 was developed for indus trial automation The second version which is IEEE 1588 2008 was extended to be applicable to other applications such as Telecom IEEE 1588 2008 defines the concept of PTP profiles which defines required options prohibited options and ranges defaults of configurable attributes ITU T G 8265 1 defines a PTP profile for telecom applications using ordinary clocks using PTP over UDP in unicast environment ITU T G 8265 1 only defines recovery of frequency and does not cover phase or time of day align ment For accurate frequency recovery it would be ideal to receive the PTP packets with precise time stamps with minimum packet delay variation PDV It is not practical in a packet network to expect PTP packets without PDV and this PDV introduces inaccuracy in recovered frequency The recovery algorithm should try to minimize the impact of PDV on the recovered frequency Another important aspect defined by G 8265 and G 8265 1 is the definition of protection schemes for synchronization based on standard operational prac tices in telecom networks The key aspects of synchronization in telecom net works is synchronization network is designed and configured in a fixed arrangement Protection scheme is based on selection between multiple master clocks based on received QL an
391. has the ability to retrieve and edit alarm profile Notification Codes To modify alarm Notification Codes for a given alarm condition type using eVision select Maintenance view right click on the desired entity in the Selection Tree and select Edit Alarm Attributes The options available for notification codes are Critical Major Minor Not Alarmed or Not Reported For LED locations associ ated with an alarm condition refer to Connector and LED Descriptions on p 65 Valid Notification Codes are provided in the following table Table 27 Alarm Profile Notification Codes Notification Description Code CR Critical A severe service affecting condition has occurred and that immediate corrective action is imperative MJ Major A serious disruption of service or a malfunction or failure of an important system function MN Minor Trouble that does not have a serious effect on service to customers or for trouble in functions that are not essential to the NE operation NA Not Alarmed A condition that is reported only as an event and can be retrieved from the system NR Not Reported A condition that is not reported but can be retrieved from the system CR Clear This value can not be used in an alarm profile Used with event reporting only Installation and Operations Manual 399 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Alarm Attributes Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing Optical Networking Ala
392. he external GNSS Antenna LNA should be as low as possible with a recommended maximum of 1 5 dB It is recommended that the gain of the GNSS Antenna LNA exceeds amp the antenna cable loss that is measured from the GNSS Antenna out put to the device Antenna input by 10 dB For example if the cable loss is 10 dB the recommended minimum gain for the GNSS Antenna LNA is 20dB In order to keep losses at the antenna input to a minimum it is recommended to keep the antenna cable as short as possible Note Connect the antenna cable into the GPS port 98 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation BITS IN and BITS OUT Cables For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 48c connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 48c connectors may be used for connection to BITS IN and BITS OUT ports See RJ 48c BITS Con nector Pin Description and Assignments on p 122 Procedure Step 1 Route the BITS IN and BITS OUT cable s from the SP 100 to the appropriate location Step 2 Connect the one end of the BITS cables to the appropriate location of the clocking device or cross connect panel Step 3 Connect the BITS IN and BITS OUT cables to the appropriate con nectors on the front panel of the FSP 150SP Step 4 Dress cables as required End of Procedure Time of Day Cable For EMI Cla
393. he password click on OK The display will update to show the edited information End of Procedure amp Deleting a user requires superuser privilege Note Step 9 Right click on the User Name to be deleted select Delete User and the following screen displays Figure 80 Delete User A 2 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 1508 O Configuration File Application v ec NE 1 Synchronization Communications SNMP Administration E Users E Local netadmin Edit User Edit Password Remove Lock Delete User 178 Installation and Operations Manual FSP 150SP 100 R6 1 1 80000026364 Issue A O 2014 ADVA Optical Networking SE Confidential Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 10 Verify that the selected user is the one to be deleted Click on OK The display will update to show the deleted information End of Procedure amp Removing a lock out from a user requires superuser privilege Note Step 11 Right click on the User Name that is locked select Remove Lock and the following screen displays Figure 81 Remove Lock ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application Ba x 5 D System Remove Lock NE 1 Remove Lock from user user Synchronization Cancel OK E DE Communications SNMP Administration E Users E Local netadmin m root US Remote Edit User Remote Ai Edit Password Key Genet Delete User Step 12 Ve
394. her a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE 802 3 section 8 2 1 5 10BASE5 and section 10 3 1 4 10BASE2 These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms ESMF EtherStats Multicast Frames The Transmit Near 0 0 Multicast Frames Sent in the egress End direction If there is link down during the interval the bin is not accessible ESMP EtherStats Multicast Packets Received Receive Near 0 0 The total number of good packets received End that were directed to a multicast address Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address ESO EtherStats Octets Received The total Receive Near 0 0 number of octets of data including those End in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESOF EtherStats Oversize Frames The total Transmit Near 0 0 number of frames received that were End oversized ESOP EtherStats Oversize Packets The total Receive Near 37055 3557280 number of packets received that were End longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed ESP EtherStats Packets Received EtherStats Receive
395. hin the performance target range Score 3 Red o Bad performance the recovered frequency may not be within the per formance target range Performance target range is configured as an MTIE mask Clock recovery score statistics are collected and binned Phase Performance Estimation Phase Performance Estimation uses a score for the assessment of the phase recovery performance o Score can be in the range of 3 to 5 Score 5 Green o High confidence that the recovered phase is within the max specified phase error Score 4 Yellow Low confidence that the recovered phase is within the max specified phase error Score 3 Red o Bad performance the recovered phase may not be within the max specified phase error Performance target is configured as maximum allowed phase error Clock recovery score statistics are collected and binned Installation and Operations Manual 39 ADVA Va E am Wa u PTP Clock Probe Optical Networking PTP Clock Probe PTP Clock Probe is the functional entity that measures the TIE between the clock under test and the reference timing signal Supports up to four 4 PTP clock probes All probes share the same reference timing signal e Maintains up to sixteen 16 TIE history bins Figure 12 PTP Clock Probe Tapping Mode Operation Master Mirrored Port VLAN Mirrored PTP packets Mirroring Port VLAN NID 4 Y Slave Clock Sh aaa EB Cell Site SyncProbe
396. his r re caurion Procedure This procedure is NOT part of original Provisioning procedures There are two types of database resets available on the FSP 150SP Restore System Defaults and Restore Factory Defaults The difference between System Defaults and Factory Defaults is explained in Determining Database Configura tion Status on Page 4 236 The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision in Configuration view Procedure Step 1 Click on the Maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Right click on Administration in the selec tion tree pane and select Restore Factory Defaults and the following screen displays Figure 151 Restore Factory Defaults ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A B gt 6 System E NE 1 EJ Synchronization All configuration will be lost Confirm Restore Factory Defaults Communications Ey Alarm Attributes E peel o Restore System Defaults Restore Factory Defaults Cancel OK Upgral cota Factory Defaults Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Installation and Operations Manual 253 ADVA a z J a WI wz 8 D
397. i n Communicatior Administrative Unassigned v Secondary UAS DCN etho Disable PIN Operational Outage 3G DCN Change PIN Managemen PIN Authentication Modem SNMP Unlock with PUK d Vendor Name Model masa hon Serial Number IMEI Hardware Ver Firmware Ver Physical Configuration Connection Status Not Available Service Provider MTU z0 Max Speed si Current RSSI Not Available 3G Dail Up Configuration User Name Redial Timer 10 Sec Password seese APN Dial Not Available Cancel Apply OK Step 4 Fill in the Alias as appropriate Select IS for Administrative State The Modem information and Physical Configuration information will display automatically once the 3G modem is plugged in Enter the 3G Dial Up Configuration Click on OK Installation and Operations Manual 305 Provision Communications a ADVA J E ea ws Y Optical Networking Step 5 Left click on 3G Modem under NTESP100 Verify the data entered and observe the SIM status by selecting the corresponding tab see the following two figures Refer to Table 21 on p 307 for SIM status result descriptions The SIM status will be used in the next step Figure 183 3G Modem Configuration Information S ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration A x BY 5 File Application y E System E NE 1 E NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 DCN ethO Ej Synchronization Ej Communications DCN eth0 3G D
398. ical Networking Restore Database Restoring the database is a multi step process First the database file has to be transferred from an external repository to a temporary location on the NE The NE supports transfer via HTTP Web FTP SFTP and SCP protocols Second the database file must be transferred to standby memory on the NE Third the database is activated which causes the NE to reset and tempo rarily interrupt traffic and cancel active user sessions The following procedure includes steps for performing the database restore pro cess using the eVision tool It is also possible to perform this process using CLI See the FSP 750SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide for details The fol lowing procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVi sion Procedure Step 1 Click on the Maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Step 2 Expand Administration right click on Database and select Copy from Remote The display is the Copy From Remote view shown in the following figure Figure 145 Copy Database From Remote Web View ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v E System EE E a X B 9 Copy System Default Database From Remote
399. ication 4 Interface i Description ane Date Time Logged in as goot User Name Alarms Pane Alarm details are displayed in the Alarms Pane Refer to Figure 45 on p 134 for an example of a system entity selected in Configuration view and each compo nent of the web browser window About the Workspace The eVision workspace consists of the following components Title Bar on Page 3 135 Menu Bar on Page 3 135 Tool Bar on Page 3 136 e Selection Tree Pane on Page 3 137 Details Pane on Page 3 138 Alarms Pane on Page 3 141 134 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Title Bar The Title Bar displays the current application that has been selected from the Menu Bar Application menu or the Tool Bar Menu Bar Each item on the Menu Bar provides a pull down menu which contain the menu options available in eVision Menu options are selected by pointing and clicking with the mouse in the File or Application drop down menu and then clicking the mouse on the desired option The menus available on the Menu Bar are File which provides the following options Logout Application which provides the following options o Configuration o Maintenance o Performance Monitoring o PTP o SyncJack The selections available on the Application pull down menu may also be selected from the Tool Bar See Tool Bar on p 136 Note Installation a
400. ics Tab 0ooooooooononono 216 Figure 110 SOOC Raw PTP Messages ooicvocmmmmricrsa eee awe 217 Figure 111 OCS Port Configuration Status Slave 217 Figure 112 Edit PTP Network Port Delay ASsyMmMetrY 218 Figure 113 Create Boundary Clock 0 oooooooo coso 219 Figure 114 Create Master Clock Interface for Boundary Clock 220 Figure 115 Create PTP Flow Poidt ooooooooooo co 221 Figure 116 Create Master Virtual Port oooo o 222 Figure 117 Edit Time Clock ser ais a AR AA A Be 223 Figure 118 Add a Time Clock Reference o oooooooo ooo 224 Figure 119 Time Clock STATUS 2 airis eae Rea ww Ree ec 225 Figure 120 Create Master Clock baw ce cas AA ee ae 226 Figure 121 Create Master Clock Interface for Master Clock 227 Figure 122 Create PTP Flow Point 2 0 0 cee ee es 228 Figure 123 Create Master Virtual Port aasa ee eee eG we ee oR 229 Figure 124 Create Static Remote Slave ooooooo es 230 Figure 125 Static Slave Configuration and StatuS 231 Figure 126 Static Slave Statistics ts4 4 4 4ade wee wy eo eee ee ee eae 231 Figure 127 Slave OCS Port State cc es 232 Figure 128 Verify Dynamic Remote Slave o ooooooomo 233 Figure 129 Dynamic Slave Statistics aca aay eee aa HO 234 Figure 130 Slave OCS Port State naaa aaa es 234 Figure 131 Database Status Display
401. id xxx found in the VID list of eid Primary VID cannot be in the VID list Primary VID MA NET name xxx is not same as MA COMP primary VID Primary VID MA NET name is not same as MA COMP primary VID xxx Protecting port is in Sync Reference list Protection Group does not exist for port Protection Switching is not supported in xxx mode Regeneration currently in progress Security level of the user xxx is yyy SFTP can not be set to enabled when trying to disable SSH Shaper is used by Policer xxx Shaped speed greater than Configured speed Shaped speed cannot be 0 388 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response 271 275 Where Why is Continued SSH can not be set to disabled when trying to enable SFTP Switch Action is not supported in xxx mode System in Db Maintenance Mode System Defaults Database is busy System Defaults Value File is busy Test not active Test stream not active quotation marks semicolon and pound and _ but can not be or There are MA COMP entries for this MA There are MA Network entries for this MD There are MEP entries for this MA There is a Y1731 probe xxx This entity has an active ESA Probe xxx This object cannot be deleted This will cause MIPs limit to exceed Tunnel IP address is being used by SNMP v1 trap PDU Valid Until date is in the past Valid Until date is out o
402. ificate or Key Communications E ES Regenerate SSL Certificate Regenerate SSH Key Administration E Users Cancel OK E Local MMMM netadmin root user Remote Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generati Regenerate Keys Step3 To regenerate the SSL Certificate select the Regenerate SSL Certif icate radio button click OK for the message pop up and the following screen displays see Figure 74 on p 173 restarted and web access will be unavailable during this time approx When an SSL Certificate is generated the HTTP server will be imately 15 seconds Note Figure 74 Regenerate SSL Certificate ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x FE VY System Regenerate Keys E NE 1 Ej Synchronization Generate Certificate or Key Ej Communications a ER SNMP Regenerate SSL Certificate Regenerate SSH Key E Administration E Edit SSL Certificate Data E Local netadmin Country US root State Texas User Locality Richardson Remote Organization ADYA Optical Networking PAETA Organization Unit Ethernet Access Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Name ADVA Email support advaoptical com Valid From Date 2013 03 01 Valid Until 2 2023 02 27 y v vy mm dd Cancel OK Step 4 Edit the Certificate Data then click on OK Installation and Operatio
403. ification not for addressing even though itis possible that an address may have been used in the generation of a specific value The value for this object may not be all zeros or all ff H or the empty zero length string 5 to 32 characters blank Security Name Security Name Valid entry contains only 1 to 256 of the following characters are accepted a z A Z 0 9 1 to 256 characters __ Mandatory entry If no entry is provided User blank Name is substituted automatically Security Level Options are No Authentication Authentication with No No Authentication Privacy key or Authentication with Privacy key Auth No Priv Auth Priv User Access Specifies the user access type Read Only Type Read Write 462 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings other than No Authentication Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Auth Protocol Drop down list of established authentication protocols MD5 This option is only available if the Security Level is SHA1 Auth Key Entry for an Authentication Key This option is only applicable if Auth Priv or Auth No Priv Security Level is selected A valid entry contains the following 1 Contains only alphanumeric and special characters and must not begin with 2 Length from 8 to 32 characters 3 Contains a mix
404. iguration view Installation and Operations Manual 143 Configuration View a ADVA VO E ea ws Y Optical Networking Figure 49 NTESP100 Resources Tab File Application x Fy D 4 System Configuration Resources E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 DCN ethO 3G Modem Resources 5 K Associated EID Description Allocated Available Reserved i Synchronization Flow T 0 10 0 E Communications Policer 0 256 0 SNMP NTESPA00 1151 Shaper 22 106 15 ini j _ Traffic Queue 5140 KB 26200 KB O KB Administration A 10112000 bps 989888000 bps 0 bps fail ER 0 bps 8000000000 bps Tee CIR 10112000 bps 989888000 bps O bps NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Ep f 0 bps 8000000000 bps O bps Figure 50 Edit Network Port Configuration View ADYA FSP 150 P100 8 Co o Fie y Application v A x 5 D a System Edit Configuration NE 1 NTESP100 Identification eee Edit Conf EA oit Configuration Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Don ien Alias 3G Modem Synchronization State EJ Communications Administrative S y Secondary ACT SNMP Operational Normal Administration Port MAC Address 00 80 ea 39 d2 c1 Negotiated Speed Auto 1000 Full Media Type F Copper y Loopback Configuration None MTU 612 bytes Loopback Status None Max Speed 1 000 000 000 Swap SA DA No
405. ile Application v El System Configuration Resources Ej NE 1 Elf AqK A k eee El NTESP100 Identification OO Est Coniguration Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 DCN ethe Edit Sync E Alias SP100 35 98 3G Modem State E Synchronization M NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT E NTESP100 Operational Normal SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Physical Inventory EJ BITS 1 Name FSP1S0SP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Physical Address 00 80 83 39 d2 c0 Software Revision 6 1 1 049 CLK 1 1 1 2 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN USI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen PPS 1 1 1 2 CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Environmental El Communications Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 mV DCN ethD 3G DCN Settings El Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled SNMP E Administration E Users Remote Authentication Details Pane When an item is selected from the Selection Tree with the left mouse button see Selection Tree on p 137 a status view related to that item is displayed in the Details Pane to the right of the Selection Tree The details displayed are dependent upon the Application currently selected If details are provided by more than one status pane tabs are provided to toggle between each pane See Figure 47 on p 139 for an example of tab selections in the Details Pan
406. ile gt Transfer File To export or import a configuration file use the transfer file command From the highest level prompt all configuration file commands are accessed by entering admin config file The configuration file transfer file command under config file is ADVA config file gt transfer file lt ftp scp sftp gt lt get put gt lt user name gt lt password gt lt ipaddr gt lt filename gt This command uses the selected file transfer protocol to move a configuration file to put or from get a remote server List To list all configuration files use the list command as in ADVA config file gt list File Name Description S 2 2 2 Ss be 2 configfile2 psu and root configfile3 configfile4 ADVA config file gt list The command response shows the filename and the description for the file The description can be edited using the description command Restart with configfile The restart with configfile command is used to force an immediate system reset then execute the designated configfile The basic command is ADVA config file gt restart with configfile configfile4 yes ADVA config file gt U Boot 2009 03 14408 Jul 13 2013 14 21 19 MPC83XX Load To run a configuration file now use the load command as in ADVA config file gt load configfile4 ADVA config file gt 256 Installa
407. ile Notification Codes 1 0 aaa a es 399 Alarms and EventS lt lt 4 04 280000 a e a Dba ee Shaws 400 Precision Time Protocol PTP AlarMS 1 000 0c eee ee es 413 SOOG Alarms us e A i a a E E 413 Telecom Slave Alarms 22024494 h46 800 2 454608 6464924 bees 414 Network Port and Access Port AlarMS o o o o oooooooo oo 417 Syncjack AAA 421 Clock Probe Alarm lt 4 44 0 s0s 8 2 eae dada da naaa 421 PTP Clock Probe Alarms lt yr oO eee ee he ale ee 422 PTP Network Probe Alarms 0 aaa es 422 10 Installation and Operations Manual Table of Contents Alarm Masking oa ae eae ee eae A ae ee Ba ee eek ee a 423 Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules 427 Introduction eo go as a UO ae ee eS AR 427 SP 100 Physical Desi cria 40088049 A AA RA 428 Physical DESION 0 daa Aaa ARA AA RIA A 428 SP 100 Equipment Configuration Opti0NS 0 o 428 Component Descriptions Common to the SP 100 429 Mounting BrackelS sara ee bw eee Oe eae a 429 Cable Handling Rack Integral codi ee a be ee ees 429 Entity State Descriptions io te at ace a e ja ww aa ae es Ow ek at alee Be 430 Administration StglGrs 344 2 446555 228d AA oe Cb ees ee 430 Administration State Model Details 0 cc eee eee 430 Operational State auauua io ceo ee se Se es Wade we Mey ete ee ae ar BS 433 Secondary State aaa da dee ewe a Na OER eee ee ee 433 User Authorization Privilege LevelS
408. iles ADVA J E VUE wa Y Optical Networking Note The options presented for file saving are dependant on the browser being used and the options the user has selected for browser operation For example MS Internet Explorer will prompt for file name and where the file should be saved Firefox will save the file with the default file name backupdb bin to the computer desktop A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop up blocking enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully downloaded to the system With this configuration the system logs may indicate successful file download when the browser has not properly saved the file The file may be successfully downloaded and saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or disabling pop up blocking or using the browser s pop up override capability to allow the file save to complete End of Procedure Step 7 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the figure below The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP views are identical Figure 143 Copy Database to Remote SCP View 52 a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance A E B B 9 5 File Application E System Lt E dE NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Set
409. ime Reference Telecom Slave provisioned as Time Refer N A Unavailable ence for the Time Clock and is in recovery Minor N A N A WTR process from Unavailable condition Time Reference Telecom Slave provisioned as Time Refer N A Degraded WTR ence for the Time Clock and is in recovery Minor N A N A process from Degraded condition Bunea ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BuIy10MI19N e911dO 7m ae E Pa WAU enue y suonyeledo pue uoneljeysu LLY Network Port and Access Port Alarms Table 31 Network Port and Access Port Alarms Refer to the following table for Network Port and Access Port including Line Card Access Port alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure a cable fault on a copper RJ 45 port po Description NSA Default SA Default LED Condition Type Probable Cause Trouble Cleaning Procedure Notification Notification Indication Duplex Mode of Duplex mode of the connected Determine the expected port Far End Device equipment is unknown The unit speed setting and ensure that Unknown determined it cannot conclude both ends are configured to negotiation with remote end on the reflect that setting Minor Major Facility Ethernet port Although auto J Yellow negotiation failure is a minor alarm it is usually followed by a critical alarm due to link down Link Down
410. imeReference TimeReference represents TimeClock reference signal Time reference can be set to Internal GPS receiver TS or System Sync Master Clock Interface MCI Master Clock Interface serves as PTP mas ter port of the BC or MC and maintains PTP Protocol for the single Ethernet connection PTP Flowpoint PTPFP PTP Flowpoint serves as PTP flow termination point A single PTP Flowpoint may serve several Master Clock Interfaces 50 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview e Master Virtual Port Master Virtual port is used to bond between specific Master Clock Interface and PTP Flowpoint The Remote Slaves are served through Master Virtual Port and may be attached in the following ways o With E Line service while each Master Virtual Port serves single Remote Slave o With E LAN service while each Master Virtual Port serves a number of Remote Slaves E Line E LAN service with Remote Slaves connected with IP Router Remote Slave Remote Slave Instance of the Master Clock Interface repro duces OC S served over this interface Remote Slave may be of the two types o Static Slave provisioned explicitly for the Master Clock Interface Dynamic Slave discovered by Master Clock Interface by means of Uni cast Messages Negotiation Protocol UMN Timing Domain It is a source of timing that provides frequency and or phase SYNC Timing Domain It provides only frequency and it involves clo
411. in the selection tree pane and select Edit ACL and the following screen displays Figure 67 Edit ACL ma a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B gt amp Systet Egit System Edit Access Control List NE A Edit Security Log al j Access Control List Edit Alarm Log ACL ID Filter Action Network Address Network Mask Control Edit Audit Log 1 Permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled Edit Syslog 2 Permit of of 0 O 255 255 255 255 Disabled e 3 Permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled Edit ACL 4 Permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled E Syr Edit Banner 5 Permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled Edit NTP 6 Permit O 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled 7 Permit 0 0 0 O 255 255 255 255 Disabled Restore System Defaults 8 Permit O 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled y SYNC 1 1 1 1 9 Perrnit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled y E BITS 1 10 Permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Disabled BITS IN Cancel Apply OK BITS OUT Step 2 The Access Control List contains 10 entries Each entry consists of an IP address and network mask and each entry can be enabled or dis abled Edit the Control status Network Address and Network Mask for each entry and click on OK The display will change to reflect the entered data E
412. ing Error Code Response 271 275 Where Why is Continued Max MEP count exceeded for the primary VID or Max MEP count exceeded for the port Max MEP count exceeded Maximum MA name length supported in xxx is yyy Maximum management bandwidth xxx bps exceeded yyy bps remaining MD Name cannot be empty MD Name cannot be greater than xxx MAX MD Name cannot be set when MD name format is NONE MD Name format cannot be set to xxx when eid Name format is set to ICC format MD Name is not set MD Name should be set when changing the MD format MEP at level xxx MAX cannot generate AIS MEP at this MD level already exists for the primary VID MEP ID xxx is not in the MEP list of MA Network MEP ID xxx not found in the list N2A Rate Limiting is disabled NE already accepted Network clock type may be set onlty via Sync No VID based MEP can be created on network port 2 NTP client is enabled OAM is disabled on port Only down MEP is allowed on network ports Only COPPER port available Only init suspended completed schedule can be deleted Only one MA COMP can be created under an MA Network Only one MEP allowed under this MA Network Only one port based down MEP can be created on a port Out of range Enter a 2 byte integer Port based Up MEP is not allowed on access ports Port does not exist for xxx Port is a FROM PORT of Network Element xxx Port OAM is enabled Port QL Mode is enabled Port Rx Pause is enabled Primary v
413. ion SNMP Unlock with PUK E Administration Gancel Apply OK 308 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 11 Input PIN and click OK 3G Modem SIM will not be locked if the PIN is disabled Once the PIN is disabled the operations such as Change PIN PIN Authentication Unlock with PUK are disabled Note Step 12 Goto Step 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step Step 13 To change the 3G Modem PIN right click on the 3G Modem entity and select Change PIN The following screen displays Figure 187 Change 3G Modem PIN Zi ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application A xx 5 E System F Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port E NE 1 k NTESP100 Identification E TS 1 1 E S00C 1 OCS Port ID 1 Edit E Alarm Attribute Init Registers F Edit Thresholds Onfiguration Delete PTP Flow Point Create OCS Port Cancel Apply OK Step 14 Enter the current PIN and the new PIN then repeat the new PIN to confirm the input Click OK amp The new PIN will take effect in the next time when PIN input is required Note Step 15 Go to Step 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step Step 16 To unlock the SIM by PIN authentication right click on the 3G Modem entity and select PIN Authentication The following screen displays Note the number of
414. ion 6 1 1 049 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 USI LBADWA7 1131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 Environmental Temperature 46 deg Voltage 13000 mV Settings SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled y Cancel Apply OK 170 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 2 The Administrative State can be changed between IS default value and Management See Entity State Descriptions on p 430 An alias can be entered to permit easy identification of this particular NTESP100 SNMP Dying Gasp can be Enabled Default is Disabled After editing the NTESP100 information click on OK The display will update to show the edited information End of Procedure Provision Secure Access Secure Access involves several different aspects The FSP 150SP accommodates various methods of access to the system including serial port telnet SSH HTTP HTTPS FTP SFTP and SCP These are viewable and editable from the System and Edit System view respectively see All System options are provisioned using the Configura tion application by clicking on the Configuration icon or selecting Configu ration from the application drop down list on p 162 e Access via SSH and SSL based protocols uses certificates and keys that are user configurable see Configure Security Keys on p 171 The loc
415. ion s 899 Mask Margin Failure No Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Crossed Time rile Reference Expected QL QL NONE Measurement Rate measurements s 1 Source 2 TS 1 1 Measurement Type Frequency Source Type Frequency MTIE Mask 6823 Pdh Mask Margin 0 Source Failure No Reference Failure No Step 20 History Test results may be exported to Microsoft Excel or other pro gram by selecting the Export button Step 21 Select the Clock Accuracy entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Accuracy results via Dashboard meter If two Clock Probes have been scheduled as shown below the results of both Clock Probes are displayed The Clock Accuracy meter will display test results only if the associated SyncJack schedule is present Each Probe is associated amp with a color coded radio button according to its test result green yellow or red If gray this indicates the SyncJack schedule has been Note deleted Installation and Operations Manual 357 a ADVA 7J E am Waza u SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 223 View Clock Accuracy Result Meter w ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application a xX B O amp E System NE 1 E Clock Accuracy CLOCK ACCURACY E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 CLOCK PROBE 1 2 E History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 E Clock Analysis Clock Probe Status O CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E PTP Network Analysis E Synejac
416. ion file Go to Step 16 Delete a configuration file Go to Step 18 Done working with configuration files Go to Step 20 Step 2 Enter the following command 258 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 save lt configfile name gt Where configfile name is 1 to 32 characters no spaces or slashes The configfile will contain the delta between the default database and the current active database Go to Step 1 Enter the following command save lt configfile name gt Where configfile name is an existing configfile The configfile will contain the delta between the default database and the current active database and will overwrite the existing file Go to Step 1 Enter the following command list Go to Step 1 Enter the following command restart with configfile lt configfile name gt yes Where configfile name is the an existing configfile This will result in an immediate reboot of the system followed by an execution of the designated configfile Go to Step 1 Enter the following command transfer file lt ftp scp sftp gt lt get put gt lt user name gt lt password gt lt ipaddr gt lt filename gt This command uses the selected file transfer protocol to move a con figuration file to put or from get a remote
417. is the default value See Entity State Descriptions on p 430 Management NTESP100 Configuration NTESP100 Edit Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long blank Administrative Defines the SP 100 administrative state IS is In IS State Service and is the default value See Entity State Descriptions on p 430 Management SNMP Dying Enables or disables dying gasp message via SNMP Enabled Gasp When enabled OAM dying gasp messages are sent Disabled on EFM enabled interfaces Network Ports and Access Ports See Network Port Contiguration Options and Rules on p 469 and Access Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 473 DCN eth0 Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long blank Administrative Enables or disables the Data Communications IS State Network IS is In Service and is the default value See Management Entity State Descriptions on p 430 Unassigned Configured Defines the line rate of the port and whether it is in half Auto Speed duplex or full duplex mode Auto 100 Full Auto 100 Half Auto 10 Full Auto 10 Half 100 Full
418. isioning the SP 100 see Operations Provisioning on p 153 Note Procedure Connect a Category 5 6 or 7 cable for serial interface from a PC or Laptop to the SP 100 RS 232 port as follows Step 1 Route the serial console port cable from the SP 100 to the appropri ate location Step2 Connect one end of the cable to an unused DB 9 RS 232 port on the PC or Laptop using the RJ 45 to F DB9 adapter ADVA Optical Net working PN 2036904035 01 or 1036904035 see Serial Console Port Connector Pin Assignments on p 121 Installation and Operations Manual 97 ADVA II A 7 VA We YA Route and Connect Copper Cables Optical Networking Step3 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ45 connector labeled RS 232 on the front panel of the SP 100 Step 4 Dress cables as required End of Procedure USB Port Connections Insert the 3G modem into the USB port Available ADVA Optical Networking qualified 3G modems are as below ZTEMT 119 HW E1750 If cable extension is required an ADVA Optical Networking qualified cable must be used GPS Port Connections Refer to the following table for SP 100 hardware compatibility for GPS GNSS connection Table 11 SP 100 GPS GNSS Compatibility SP 100 Hardware Hardware Ready for GPS GNSS Antenna OCXO Version GLONASS Galileo Power Supply 1 01 No 3 3V Stratum 3 1 02 No 3 3V Stratum 3E 1 03 Yes 5V Stratum 3E The noise figure for t
419. ity Name PROVISION Security Level No Authentication User Access Type Read Write Authentication Protocol None Privacy Protocol None SNMP Dying Gasp no target addresses are SNMP Dying Gasp provisioned thus this option is disabled 442 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Local Users Functional Area Entity Parameter Default Setting Local User netadmin User Name netadmin Password ChgMeNOW Privilege Provisioning CLI Paging Enabled Comment Default User Login Timeout 15 minutes Local User root User Name root Password ChgMeNOW Privilege Superuser CLI Paging Disabled Comment Default User Login Timeout 15 minutes Local User user User Name user Password ChgMeNOW Privilege Maintenance CLI Paging Disabled Comment Default User Login Timeout 15 minutes Administration Key Generation Edit SSL Certificate Data No remote user entries N A Remote Users are entered at default Authentication Protocol None Authorization Type PAP Access Order Local TACACS Privilege Enabled Remote Control Authentication TACACS Default N A Privilege NAS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Accounting Disabled Remote Authentication Disabled Servers 1 3 Security Policy Policy Strength High Country US State Texas Locality Richardson
420. ive Near 0 0 the A2N direction The total number of End good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets ESBS EtherStats Bytes Sent Transmit Near 0 0 End ESC EtherStats Collisions The best estimate of Receive Near 0 0 the total number of collisions on this End Ethernet segment The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe Section 8 2 1 3 10BASE 5 and section 10 3 1 3 10BASE 2 of IEEE standard 802 3 states that a station must detect a collision in the receive mode if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously Installation and Operations Manual 483 a ADVA J E WED wz 8 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking Table 43 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued Monitored el er Loca 5 15 Type Description Direction tion Min 1 Day ESCAE EtherStats CRC Cyclic Redundancy Receive Near 37055 3557280 Check Aligned Errors The total number of End packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error ESDE Eth
421. k Schedules 5 CLOCK PROBE 1 2 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Clock Accuracy Step 22 Select the Network Element entity in the Selection Tree to view the Clock Accuracy and Global results via Dashboard meter Figure 224 View Global and Clock Accuracy Dashboard ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application aA xX B D k System NE 1 Clock Accuracy Network Element Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 SYNCJACK GLOBAL CLOCK PROBE 1 2 History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 EJ Clock Analysis E PTP Network Analysis Syncjack Schedules CLOCK ACCURACY CLOCK ANALYSIS PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Step 23 To delete a SyncJack Schedule right click on the desired schedule under SyncJack Schedules and select Delete Schedule A Delete SyncJack Schedule pane appears Select OK Step 24 To delete a Clock Probe History Result right click on the desired result under History Results and select Delete History Result A confirmation screen appears Select OK 358 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 25 To delete a SyncJack Clock Probe right click on the desired probe and select Delete Clock Probe A Delete Clock Probe pane appears Select OK End of Procedure In
422. ket based syn chronization network lt is equivalent to a PRC PRS clock in a traditional fre quency based synchronization network For redundancy more than one Grandmaster exists within the same network time domain An SOOC is the recipient of the timing information and synchronizes to the Grandmaster to within a specified accuracy tolerance For current mobile backhaul applications Slave Clock accuracy is currently required to be within 1 5us however 1 0us has been accepted as the industry requirement with a future target of 200ns for MIMO applications To minimize the effects of PDV IEEE 1588 2008 defines two additional clock types a Boundary Clock and a Transparent Clock to account for the variable packet delay incurred by PTP messages while in transit from the master to the slave A Boundary Clock is typically a multi port device residing between an upstream master and one or more Slave Clocks A Boundary Clock is similar to an SSU or SEC in SDH and provides a timing boundary or partition between the master and slave clocks A Boundary Clockterminates the PTP messages received from an upstream master clock recovers the time and or frequency based on the received PTP messages and generates new PTP message flows to down 46 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview stream slave clocks based on its recovered version of the upstream master time frequency A Transparent Clock does not participate
423. kkkkk Disabled This is a private system Unauthorized access or use may lead to prosecution Do you wish to continue Y N gt SNMP Engine ID Allows the user to edit the SNMP Engine ID which Oxhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh consists of 22 Hexadecimal characters hhhhhhh Installation and Operations Manual 447 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E enw wz Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Security Log Edit Security Log Syslog Enable or Disable logging of security related activity to Disabled the Syslog server Enabled Alarm Log Edit Alarm Log Syslog Enable or Disable logging of alarm activity to the Disabled Syslog server Enabled Local Logging Enables or Disables sending Alarm messages to the Enabled local log If set to Enabled view logs by selecting the Disabled Alarm Log tab Audit Log Edit Audit Log Syslog Enable or Disable logging of audit related activity to Disable the Syslog server Enable Local Logging Enables or Disables sending Audit messages to the Enabled local log If set to Enabled view logs by selecting the Disabled Audit Log tab Syslog Edit Syslog IP Address IP Address of a Syslog Server Entering an IP address enables transmission of alarm information to a Syslog Server
424. larm Attributes Administration Upgrade Databa mA Backup Database Default Copy to Remote Default Copy from Remote Config Restore Database Last R i Transfe Activate Database E Software Licensing Step 9 File y Application v A 5 D E System Restore Database NE 1 Restore database now Cancel OK Click OK and the screen shows a progress bar When the restore completes right click on Database in the selection tree pane then select Activate Database An Activate Standby Database screen dis plays as shown in the following figure Figure 149 Activate Standby Database View i a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v E System NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration E E E Upgrade Database Default Backup Database Default Copy to Remote Config Copy from Remote Last Re Restore Database Trans fee MBE SE Software Licensing E Step 10 Step 11 a xl 5 Activate Standby Database Activate standby database now Cancel OK To accept the restored database click on OK The NE will reboot 250 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning If restoring a database taken from a different unit e g if replacing a failed unit with another unit and restoring a database backup from the amp first unit the original units SNMP engine ID snmpEngineld is
425. lation and Operations Manual 385 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Error Codes and System Responses Optical Networking Error Code Response 271 275 Operation denied _why_ Create denied _why_ Delete denied _why_ Edit denied _why_ Retrieve denied _why_ Action denied _why_ Where Why is EID MD name causes MA ID length to exceed limit xxx MIN yyy MAX EID Probe s Source MEP eid2 is in xxx state xxx not supported on CP unit return xxx is used by IPV4 PROXY ARP ENTRY xxx is used by IPV4 STATIC ARP ENTRY xxx is used by IPV4 STATIC ROUTE xxx state is not support on CP Unit A2N Policer not specified for CTAG s Priority xxx A member in the VID list xxx matches the primary vid of vlan entry eid A MEP exists with associated component ID Address cannot be broadcast mutlicast or all O s Admin State is xxx Admin State is not in xxx state AIS client MD level xxx must be greater than MEP MD level of yyy AIS generation cannot be enabled at MD level xxx AIS Trigger has duplicate values An Ethernet port with speed configured as xxx cannot be added to the refer ence selector list Associated MA COMP entity does not exist At least 1 xxx must exist on a Flow At least 1 Policer must exist on a Flow At least 1 Shaper must exist on a Flow At least 1 VLAN Member must exist Authentication Protocol cannot be xxx Because there is a Y1731 probe xxx Both Primary and Backup server have zero IP addresses Bui
426. lation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Copper Cables Observe the following precaution for copper cables The intra building port s of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to intra building or unexposed wiring or cabling only The intra building port s of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the Outside Plant OSP or its wiring These interfaces are designed for use as intra building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as WARNING described in GR 1089 and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring This product is classified as Type2 equipment and requires the use of shielded cable which is terminated at both ends per GR1089 R4 18 on the following interfaces WARNING GPS PPS PPS IN CLK CLK IN TOD Bits In Bits Out Obtain and verify the following for copper cables Do all LAN port copper electrical cables have RJ45 connectors Access Port Copper Connections For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors may be used The cable should be no longer than 100m and should be compliant with the Institute of Electrical and Ele
427. lation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Ethernet DCN Connections For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors may be used for connection to a DCN port See LAN Connector Pin Assignments on p 120 Procedure Connect an Ethernet cable from a PC or Laptop to the DCN connection as fol lows Step 1 Route the DCN Ethernet cable from the SP 100 to the appropriate location Step 2 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the 10 100BASE T Ethernet port of the DCN PC or Laptop Step 3 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the RJ 45 Ethernet port labeled Management LAN on the front panel of the SP 100 Step 4 Dress cables as required End of Procedure Serial Console Port Connection For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors may be used An adapter to the PC serial port F DB9 is required See Serial Console Port Connector Pin Assignments on p 121 The Serial Console Adapter is shipped with the unit in the Accessory Kit and may also be ordered separately Part Number 1036904035 amp This connection may be made prior to prov
428. lave Parameter Settings 497 Table 49 Create Edit SOOC Parameter SettinQ9S 501 Table 50 Create Edit PTP Flow Point Parameter Settings 504 Table 51 Create Edit OCS Port Parameter Settings 505 Table 52 Create Edit Boundary Clock Parameter SettingS 506 Table 53 Create Edit Master Clock Parameter SettingS 507 Table 54 Create Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings 508 Table 55 Create Edit Master Virtual Port Parameter Settings 510 Table 56 Create Edit Static Slave Parameter Settings 511 Table 57 Create Edit Dynamic Slave Parameter Settings 513 Table 58 Create Edit Clock Probe Parameter Settings 514 Table 59 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings 516 Table 60 Edit Telecom Slave AnalySiS oo ooooooo ooo 519 Table 61 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings 519 Table 62 SyncJack Schedule Configuration SettingS 521 Table 63 Configure MTIE Comparison Analysis o 523 Table 64 Edit Telecom Slave AnalySiS ooooooocooo 524 22 Installation and Operations Manual a ADVA VO E QUE ws Y Optical Networking Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview The ADVA Optical Networking FSP 150 family of Ethernet access products pro vides devices for Ethernet demarcation extension and aggregation to support delivery of intelligent Ether
429. ld Shadow Tree failed Cannot delete a scheduled probe Cannot delete an active reflector Cannot edit Network port 2 Cannot edit Protecting Port attributes Cannot have both Primary and Backup server s IP addresses set to zero Cannot not suspend an active reflector Cannot resume a schedule that is not suspended Cannot start non suspended schedule Cannot stop non active schedule Cannot suspend non active schedule Can t reopen System Default Db Card xxx found in slot Chosen DMM Packet Interval consumes xxx CIR and EIR cannot both be 0 Clear not supported on CP unit Community xxx used by Target Address yyy Community xxx used by Target Parameter yyy 386 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response 271 275 Where Why is Continued Config file is busy Config operation failed Configfile is not in progress Create or Open configfile failed Db State is not ok DHCP is enabled Diagnostics are active on Port Diagnostics not supported on network port Data TLV exceed the allowed maximum of xxx MAX Disable SFTP first to disable the SSH Duplicate MA Name conflicts with xxx Duplicate MD name conflicts with eid Duplicate MD name same MD level conflicts with eid Duplicate MEP ID list Duplicate VID list duplicate entry xxx found in eid ECPA test is active on Port Ecpa test not active enable SSH first to enable SFTP E
430. led BITS OUT are both front mounted RJ 48c connectors balanced 120 Ohm impedance e 10 100 Base T Management LAN port RJ 45 e RS 232 Serial Console maintenance port RJ 45 One non redundant Power Supply Unit PSU GPS Input connector front mounted SMA TTL 50 ohm impedance Time of Day input connector labeled ToD front mounted RJ 45 RS 422 input output capable Pulse Per Second input labeled PPS IN and a Pulse Per Second input out put connector labeled PPS both are front mounted SMB TTL 50 ohm impedance External 10MHz Frequency Reference input labeled CLK IN and an External 10MHz Frequency Reference input output labeled CLK both are front mounted SMB Figure 30 Front Panel Connectors and LEDs MGMT LAN l USB BITS Out BITS In TOD CLKIN PPSIN CLK PPS GPS 0 Table 1 Front Panel Connectors Left to Right Section Connectors Description AC power AC power connector on AC power Psy supply unit DC power 24 VDC or 48 VDC power connector on DC power supply unit RS 232 RJ 45 RS 232 Serial Console maintenance port Management MGMT LAN RJ 45 10 100 BaseT Management LAN port supports automatic Medium Dependent Interface Crossover MDIX capabilities Synchronization USB USB port for 3G Modem connection 66 Installation and Operati
431. lete Static ARP Entry on p 302 Configure Access Control List ACL on p 304 Configure 3G Modem Using eVision on p 304 Sample Network GNE to SNE over Management Tunnel on p 313 Installation and Operations Manual 273 ADVA 7J E am WN u Provision Communications Optical Networking Provision Communications The FSP 150SP supports several management configurations and options This section does not provide typical deployment scenarios of the FSP 150SP in common IP network configurations as there are simply too many different net work configurations in common use as to be practical Additionally most entities deploying the product have network administrators who either do the provisioning or provide work orders with provisioning details This section also does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP network ing concepts The factory default settings for the FSP 150SP provide for connecting the MGMT LAN DCN RJ45 connector to the local remote DCN This interface eth0 is preconfigured by factory defaults with Dynamic Host Configuration Pro tocol DHCP in client mode with the DHCP function disabled The user can ascertain quickly the status of the DCN by using the RS 232 serial port to query the NE for the DCN settings This same interface can be used to enable DHCP or set the IP address of the eth0 interface if DHCP is not used on the DCN The user has the option of deploying the unit with s
432. ll port bandwidth Figure 26 Facility Loopback without Swap SA DA Access Facility Loopback Network Facility Loopback Network FSP 150CC SP FSP 150CC SP All traffic is looped back including EFM OAM messages A simple facility loopback is sufficient for back to back FSP 150CC and or FSP150SP configurations with no Layer 2 cloud between them However if a Layer 2 cloud does exist between each unit traffic will not reach its intended destination Within each Ethernet frame is a Media Access Control MAC address from which the frames are sent Source Address and the MAC address of the intended recipient of those frames Destination Address A Layer 2 cloud looks at the Destination Address to determine where to send the frames and if the Destination Address is the same address from where the frames are received the Layer 2 cloud will discard the frames Selecting the Swap SA DA Swapping the Source Address SA with the Desti nation Address DA option during the loopback directs the unit to look up the MAC address of frames being received and swap out the Source Address with the Destination Address allowing the Layer 2 cloud to forward the frames Only one Swap SA DA loopback may be performed per system Once a Swap SA DA loopback has been operated a second Swap SA DA loopback may not be per formed on another entity Installation and Operations Manual 57 Product Applications a ADVA J E VUE wl Y Optical Networkin
433. llow and it stays yellow while the processor is initializing STA Equipment initializing Flashing Green Yellow The card is in the boot loader stage and the image is in the process of Flashing Yellow being validated and loaded e It also can indicate that software down load or database backup restore oper ations are in progress e Equipment Failure Also during boot up the Status LED is momentar Red ily lit Red until all card power rails are up and within tolerance Equipment doesn t match provisioning 68 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Local Management Port LEDs The names and functions of each local management LAN port LED are described in the following table Table 3 Local Management LAN Port LEDs Connector LED Color Definition RJ 45 LAN Off No link Link Activity Link Green Link Activity Flashing Activity Rate Green k Off No link Ma Rate Yellow 10 Mbps operation Green 100 Mbps operation Ethernet Access Port Client Ethernet Facility LEDs Associated with the electrical Client Ethernet port is a facility LED and associ ated with the optical Client Ethernet port is a facility LED which are defined in the following table Table 4 Access Port Ethernet Facility LEDs LED Name Color Definition Off Unassigned Green Assigned and no defects Duplex Mismatch Link
434. loca tion identification Refer to Alarm Attributes Probable Cause and Trouble Clearing on p 399 for a description of the alarm condition probable cause and suggested trouble clearing procedures To clear alarm conditions it is suggested that you start by using the trouble clearing procedure in Recommended Steps for Trouble Clear ing on p 381 using the associated eVision alarm condition Front Panel Connector Descriptions All interface connections except the power connectors are located at the SP 100 front panel The front panel of the SP 100 is shown in Figure 30 on p 66 The following connectors are provided on the front panel of the SP 100 Network 1GbE optical port The Network interface uses single or dual SFP optical transceivers SMF or MMF that support 1000 Base SX LX ZX or Copper SFPs Network electrical port uses an RJ 45 100 1000BaseT copper connector Electrical Client 10 100 1000BaseT copper connector LAN port RJ 45 Installation and Operations Manual 65 SP 100 Hardware Description ADVA J E aa wa Y Optical Networking Optical Client 1GbE optical LAN port The optical LAN interface uses an SFP optical transceiver SMF or MMF that supports 1000 BaseLX10 or 1000 BaseLH or single fiber 1000 BaseBX10 or Copper SFPs 3G Modem input port is a USB connector T1 E1 External Clock Input connector labeled BITS IN and T1 E1 External Clock Output connector labe
435. lock Analysis 0 5 N A N A N A PTP Clock Probes Hai ji N A N A N A PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E dE N A NA EES ERR retsh 5 OR O ES History Estimations T 10 10 OK OK TS 1 1 a 20 10 OK OK PTP Network Analysis s m x x PTP Network Probes E 1 200 N A N A NYA Synejack Schedules s00 wa Na NA gt SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 100 1000 A E wa va 2000 N A N A A SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 S000 N A WA Ta Result Analysis 0 A A 10000 N A N A N A MTIE comparison 20000 N A N A N A i 50000 N A N A N A Raw Data Collection 3 p Y Topo Tajo mpo 100000 N A N A N A Tau sec Identification Entity ID PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name PTPCIkProbel State Running Event Message Failure No Running Failed Count 0 Mask Failure No Actual Test Start Time 2014 01 27 18 58 56 Mask Crossed Time 0 Actual Test Duration s 158 Mask Margin Failure No IP Version TimeStamp Failure 3 IPv4 Master IP Address 10 206 206 1 Slave IP Address 10 206 206 6 MTIE Mask G823 Pdh Mask Margin Cia Scheduler SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 Reference Failure No No Measurement Type Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Crossed Time 0 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Last TIE Result ns 70 PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Time Of Last TIE Result 2014 01 27 19 01 28 Measurement Direction Slave To Master Raw Data Collection Disabled Frequency Installation and Operations Manual 363 ADVA
436. lowpoint for the Master Clock Interface and select Create PTPFP A Create PTP Flow Point screen displays Figure 115 Create PTP Flow Point ADVA y O OSP 100 PTP File Application a x BN G E System i Create PTP Flow Point NE 1 A NTESP100 Identification E1000 N4 ule PTPFP ID 2 E1000 A Create PTPFP Alias E TS 1 1 E Alarm Attributes Associated Port NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 rx AdminState Administrative S X Secondary None Operational Not Available Configuration PTP FlowPoint Type OCSlave w cos D Flow ID iv CIR 0 bps EIR i 0 bps Buffer Size 0 KB VLAN Configuration Untagged Y Outer VLAN EtherType 0 hex Tag E Inner VLAN1 EtherType 0 Chex Tag Al Inner VLAN2 EtherType 0 hex Tag H Cancel Apply OK Step 32 Enter the following PTP Flow Point options Enter the desired PTPFP ID and Alias Select the desired Administrative State Set the PTP Flow Point Type to OC Master a a0 O Flow ID is fixed to None Enter the desired COS CIR EIR and Buffer Size Deselect the Untagged frame check box if Inner and or Outer VLAN tags need to be entered Select the desired Inner Outer VLAN tag check box es to allow tag entry then enter the desired EtherType and VLAN Tag s g Select OK A PTP FLOW PT entity appears below the associated Ethernet Port entity n the selection tree pane Step 33
437. ls The following procedure includes steps for performing the database backup pro cess using the eVision tool It is also possible to perform this process using CLI See the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide for details The fol lowing procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVi sion Procedure Step 1 Click on the maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Step2 Expand Administration right click on Database and select Backup Database The display is the Backup Database view shown in the figure below Figure 140 Backup Database View imal a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A B 3 6 E System Backup Database Backup database now Cancel OK NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Ba Backup Database Dei Copy to Remote i Det Cor Las Tre Activate Database Copy from Remote Restore Database E Software Licensing Step 3 Click on OK wait a few seconds then click on Database in the selection tree pane and the Details Pane will show the results of the Back Up operation See the following figure 244 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 O
438. m drop down list only one tunnel per port Interface Encapsulation Type Ethernet or PPP Networking DHCP Enabled Disabled default is Disabled not applicable for PPP Enable Disable DHCP Client ID Control not applicable for PPP Edit if desired DHCP Client ID only available if DHCP Client ID Control is Enabled not applicable for PPP IP Address valid IPV4 address not applicable for PPP Subnet Mask valid IPV4 mask not applicable for PPP Installation and Operations Manual 291 Provision Communications a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Step 5 Layer 2 Configuration Tunnel Mode only VLAN Based supported in this release VLAN Id 1 to 4095 default is 4095 S Tag VLAN Enabled Disabled default is Disabled S Tag VLAN Id 1 to 4095 default is 4095 only applicable if S Tag VLAN is Enabled System Default Gateway Gateway IP Address is editable if the checkbox is selected not selectable if DHCP is Enabled RIP RIPv2 Enabled Disabled default is Disabled not applicable for PPP Bandwidth CIR 64000 to 8000000 bps default is 256000 bps Max of 8 Mbps for all management tunnels combined EIR 0 to 80000000 bps default is 768000 bps Buffer Size 32 to 15000 KB default is 32 KB COS 0 to 7 default is 7 Click on OK Expand the NE 1 entity under Management Tunnels left click on the management tunnel ID and verify the data entered see figure below
439. met AC Voltage 120 240 VAC nominal 50 60Hz nominal external fuse should be rated at 4A 48 VDC Voltage Central Office 48 60 VDC nominal external fuse Type should be rated at 4A 24 VDC Voltage Mobile 24 VDC nominal external fuse should Backhaul be rated at 4A Max Power Consumption DC AC 21W power Connectors IEC 60320 C14 AC socket DC input Terminal block Installation and Operations Manual 75 Physical Installation a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Are the following operating temperature specifications met Operating Temperature 40C to 65C Max Relative Humidity Max 95 non condensing Requirements In order to install the FSP 150SP several types of cables tools equipment and software applications are needed The requirements are described in the follow ing sections Cables Power Cables Frame Ground Cable Fiber optic Cables Ensure that the cable types under the following headings are readily available as appropriate for installation Alternating Current Straight connection International Electrotechnical Commission IEC lead with Central European UK US plug One is required for each AC power supply vari ant with external fuse rated at 4A Direct Current For connecting the FSP 150SP to a fuse panel use a Direct Current DC power cable Power wires AWG 16 and 4A minimum slow blow fuses DC power cables are not supplied wi
440. mirrored PTP event messages Parallel Mode Refer to the following figure for an overview of Parallel Mode interconnectivity and the following description of its function Figure 7 Parallel Mode Operation Ethernet NID SyncProbe Slave m Cell Ste Slave In this mode SP 100 runs Slave clock OC S Clock Accuracy Measures the accuracy of the phase and frequency recovered by the inter nal Slave clock with respect to a reference timing signal Measures the accuracy of the incoming SyncE clock with respect to a refer ence timing signal Clock Analysis Assesses the performance of the internal clock recovery function when a reference time signal is not available PTP Network Analysis e Provides performance metrics for PTP event messages e Assigns usability score to the PTP network 34 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview In Parallel Mode operation SP 100 may also be used for clock recovery and hand off to the client equipment Tester Mode Refer to the following figure for an overview of Tester Mode interconnectivity and the following description of its function SyncProbe SP 100 connects to the clock under test via dedicated timing interfaces BITS 10M 1PPS TOD Traffic interfaces may be used for in band management and SyncE testing Clock under test may not be PTP capable e g SSU legacy BTS NodeB with no PTP support
441. mmand DVA comms mgmt tnl 1 gt home DVA gt network element ne 1 DVA NE 1 gt configure nte ntel14 1 1 1 DVA NE 1 NTE114 1 1 1 gt configure den DVA NE 1 dcn 1 1 1 1 gt admin state unassigned A A A A A ADVA NE 1 dcn 1 1 1 1 gt home Step6 Add a static route to point to the management tunnel on FSP 150SP 1 using the following CLI command ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt add ip route nexthop 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 10 4 phoenixl 1 disabled Step 7 Enter a show system and verify that Proxy ARP is disabled If Proxy ARP is enabled enter the following command otherwise continue to the next step ADVA comms gt home ADVA gt configure system ADVA system gt proxy arp disabled Ensure that the Proxy ARP option is set correctly for the FSP 150SP If two or more ADVA Optical Networking NEs or FSP 150CCs are connected via SDCC or Management Tunnel as well as connected to A the same LAN segment then only one of the them should have the Proxy ARP option enabled Otherwise there will be multiple ARP CAUTION responses for a single ARP request for a remote reachable IP address from each NE FSP 150CC in the same LAN that has Proxy ARP enabled Step 8 Logoff the CLI session and remove any commissioning cables Ether net cable and or console cable from the FSP 150SP front panel con nectors as required Step 9 Connect the optical cables to the FSP 150SP Network Port
442. mote Slave Index and Alias b Set the Administrative state to IS c Enter the IP address of the Static Remote Slave and enable or disable Unicast Message Negotiation If set to Disabled then select the desired message rates for each type announce sync delay response d Select OK A Static Slave entity appears below the associated Static Slaves entity in the selection tree pane Select the Static Slave entity and select the Configuration tab to view configuration details and status If the remote node is provisioned and connected correctly Status results are displayed 230 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 125 Static Slave Configuration and Status L ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application A x 5 System E syste Configuration Statistics E NE 1 E BOUNDARY CLOCK 1 1 Identification E MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 Entity ID Alias Clock Identity 0080ea39d42c00000 STATIC SLAWE 1 1 1 1 E Static Slaves STATIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 Dynamic Slaves State Fl NTESP100 Ej E1000 N 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Operational Normal E1000 A 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Configuration B TS 1 1 IP Address 10 206 206 6 E SOOC 1 1 1 Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled OCS PORT 1 1 1 1 E Alarm Attributes Messages Rates k m Announce Message Rate 1 Packet per 1
443. mounting environments see the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descrip tions document Wall mounting 64 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview standard 19 inch rack mounting e 19 inch extended recessed mounting in order to ensure that optical fiber bend radius is maintained when installed in some cabinets with doors e standard 23 inch rack mounting standard ETSI rack mounting ETSI extended recessed mounting in order to ensure that optical fiber bend radius is maintained when installed in some cabinets with doors All brackets are designed to be screwed to the sides of the chassis and the screws supplied have ETSI compatible threads Power Supply Power is supplied to the SP 100 by one non redundant integral PSU module with Alternating Current AC and Direct Current DC variants available In the event of a complete system power failure the system maintains internal voltages for a period that is sufficient to allow a dying gasp alarm to be raised via the in band management channels SNMP trap or 802 3ah EFM Dying Gasp messages For more detailed specification information see the FSP 150SP 100 Technical Descriptions document Connector and LED Descriptions Refer to the following for SP 100 connectors and LED descriptions when per forming the following procedures They may be used as supporting technical information for troubleshooting faults as well as connector and LED
444. munications IP Address MAC Address Interface DCN etho 110 110 50 3 aa aa aa aa aa aa TS1 3G DCN le Management Tunnels SNMP Administration Step6 Goto Step 1 Step 7 To delete a Static ARP Entry right click on Communications and select Delete Static ARP Entry see the following figure Figure 181 Delete Static ARP Entry ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v xXx B amp B 9 6 m System Delete Static ARP Entry NE 1 Synchronization Static ARP Entry Table Communi Add Static Route Select IP Address MAC Address Interface DCN Add Static ARP Entry 110 110 50 3 aaiaaiaaiaaiaaiaa TS1 Seek Delete Static Route Back Manag Delete Static ARP Entry SNMP s Administr Edit Source Address Config Click the radio button in the Delete column for each ARP entry to be deleted Click on OK Installation and Operations Manual 303 a ADVA 7J E team Wea u Provision Communications Optical Networking Step 8 Goto Step 1 End of Procedure Configure Access Control List ACL See Configure ACL on p 166 Configure 3G Modem Using eVision The 3G DCN USB port provides a wireless management port that can be accessed via a 3G network so that the user can connect to the SP 100 without local DCN cable connections or it can work as a back up management port when the DCN LAN port
445. n Black Battery Return wire to the terminal e Green yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal Red 24V wire to the terminal European application Blue Battery Return wire to the terminal e Green yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal e Grey 24V wire to the terminal Route the wire harness to the SP 100 Connect the following wires to the DC power supply terminals at the SP 100 see Figure 39 on p 110 Verify that all power terminal connections are tight and that no strands of wire are shorting terminals together North American application e Green yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal Black Battery Return wire to the terminal e Red 24V wire to the terminal European application e Green yellow Ground wire to the Gnd terminal Blue Battery Return wire to the terminal e Grey 24V wire to the terminal Reconnect the power source reinstall fuses reset breakers or turn on power supply Use a volt meter to verify the power and ground at the SP 100 power terminals Connect the positive voltmeter lead to the terminal and the negative voltmeter lead to the terminal Ensure that the voltage between and terminals measures between 18 and 30 VDC Using a volt meter measure the voltage between and GND termi nals Verify that 2 VDC or less is present Replace the cover to the source power terminal strip The Status LED on the SP 100 should be illuminated Green Observe the system STA LED afte
446. n EE Communications f Alarm Attributes Administration qj Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Configuration Files Status Status Completed Action Save Information Files File Name Description ale Save Edit Description Copy to Remote Restart with File Remove Select Copy to Remote Follow the instructions in the detail pane to move the selected config uration file to the remote location using the selected transfer protocol Go to Step 2 Select Configuration Files then right click on the menu icon beside the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane The following screen displays 264 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 158 Configuration Files Edit Description ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A B 39 6 E System Configuration Files E NE 1 E Synchronization Status Communications F o Status Completed Action Save E Alarm Attributes Administration Information Upgrade Files Database File Name Description Default Database Em A Save Default Settings E Configuration Files Edit Description Last Reset Cause Copy to Remote Transfer Log Restart with File E Software Licensing Remove Step 20 Select Edit Description
447. n agement interface using Command Line Interface CLI on a direct local serial link However to connect to the FSP 150SP from a remote DCN connection can also be made via a DCN network A valid IP address for the Management LAN Interface is required when connect ing via the DCN Although the FSP 150SP is shipped with a default IP address 274 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning loaded 192 168 0 2 24 the default is the same for each unit To ensure a reli able connection to the FSP 150SP the IP address of the Management LAN Interface should first be configured to a unique address compatible with the net work it is on This is usually performed automatically by using DHCP or manu ally by making a serial connection to the FSP 150SP and performing IP Configuration during installation See Serial Connection on p 276 for further details Note Regarding examples shown The use of a PC or Laptop running Microsoft MS Windows and the terminal emulation program detailed in this section are used as illustrations only Other terminal emulation programs run ona preferred platform may be used instead For more information contact ADVA Optical Networking Technical Support using the contact details given in the Preface Technical Support It is outside of the scope of this document to describe the use of any computer operating system terminal emulation program or internet brow
448. n to the user s download folder amp A browser with File Download Prompting enabled and pop up blocking enabled may not allow a transferred file to be successfully downloaded to the system With this configuration the system logs may indicate successful file download when the browser has not properly saved the file The file may be successfully downloaded and saved by either disabling configuration of File Download Prompting or disabling pop up blocking or using the browser s pop up override capability to allow the file save to complete End of Procedure Note Installation and Operations Manual 239 ADVA A P v 7 VA w unu Database and Configuration Files Eval Networking Step 8 For File Transfer Method select FTP SFTP or SCP from the drop down list The display changes to the FTP SFTP or SCP file transfer view shown in the following figure The figure shows the SCP view the FTP and SFTP views are identical Figure 134 Copy Database To Remote SCP View File Application A B 6 E System Copy Database To Remote NE 1 EJ Synchronization Method Communications Alarm Attributes Administration File Transfer Method Oe File Transfer Upgrade Database Server IP olf olf off oj Default Database User ID Default Settings User Password Configuration Files Remote File Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Cancel OK E Software Licensing Step 9 Enter th
449. n 1 4294967295 nanoseconds 200 Residual Packet Delay Variation reverse medium in nanoseconds Must be higher than the RPDV rev Low setting and lower than the RPDV rev High setting 1 4294967295 500 RPDV rev High ns Residual Packet Delay Variation reverse high in nanoseconds 1 4294967295 2000 FPP Cluster Range Packet Delay Variation Assured in 1 4294967295 Assured ns nanoseconds 25000 FPP Cluster Range Packet Delay Variation Satisfied in 1 4294967295 Satisfied ns nanoseconds 150000 520 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Scheduled SyncJack Activity Settings The following section describes scheduled SyncJack activities option settings A scheduled SyncJack is invoked by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree entering a right click on SyncJack Schedules and select ing Create Schedule Default settings are identified in bold Up to 10 SyncJack Schedules may be created Table 62 SyncJack Schedule Configuration Settings Create Schedule only this SyncJack Schedule Parameter Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Identification Schedule Index An Identifier value used to uniquely identify 4585 Activity ID Activity identifier 1 to 15 ASCII characters This is a user specified unique
450. n be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters ASCII characters long blank Administrative Enables or disables the Telecom Slave See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management Flow ID Create only Flow Identifier to associate with this SOOC drop down list of provisioned Flow This is a read write attribute and will apply to next restart of request unicast transmission signaling messages IDs Slave IP Valid IPv4 address The IP address must be unique Address across all IP interfaces in the system 0 0 0 0 Create only Slave Subnet Valid IPv4 subnet mask Mask 0 0 0 0 Create only Interface Name When an SOOC is created an IP interface is created Create only with the Interface Name IP Address and Subnet Mask The IP address and Interface Name must be unique blank across all IP interfaces in the system The interface name is from 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters no spaces This entry is mandatory Unicast Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled Message Negotiation Disabled Create only Unicast Timeout Unicast timeout is user configurable The range is 1 to 600 seconds The default value is 1 second 1 sec 1 600 seconds Unicast Restart Unicast restart timeout is user configurable The range is Timer 30 to 1800 seconds The default value is 60 seconds 60 sec This is a read write attribute and will apply to the next 30 to 1800 restart of reques
451. n for battery source Blue Black Installation and Operations Manual 119 ADVA 7 A v 7 VA We YA Connector Pin Assignments el Networking LAN Connector Pin Assignments Refer to Table 14 on p 120 for the RJ 45 10 100 Base T connector pin assign ments and refer to Table 15 on p 120 for 1000 Base T LAN port connector pin assignments I Table 14 10 100 Base T LAN Port RJ 45 Connector MDI MDI X 10 100 Base T Signal Name TX TX RX Co y O oaj A ojl N aj A N f N ojlo l Table 15 1000 Base T LAN Port RJ 45 Connector MDI MDI X 1000 Base T Signal Name Bl D1 BI D1 BI D2 BI D3 BI D3 BI D2 BI D4 BI D4 BI D Bi directional Data o J Dj a A j N aj A N NI 09o o 120 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Serial Console Port Connector Pin Assignments The SP 100 is a DCE device refer to the following table for the RJ 45 RS 232 Serial Console port connector pin assignments which follows the EIA TIA 232 F standard The installation kit also provides an RJ 45 to DB9 con version adapter pin assignments are shown in the following table Table 16 RJ 45 RS 232 Serial Console Port and DB9 Adapter Pin Assignments Signal Name Description RJ 45 DB9 Not used 1 DSR Data Set Read
452. n is not accessible ESBP EtherStats Broadcast Packets Received Receive Near 0 0 The total number of good packets received End that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets 478 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Monitored Type Description Direction Loca tion 5 15 Min 1 Day ESBS EtherStats Bytes Sent The Bytes Sent in the egress direction If there is link down during the interval the bin is not accessible Transmit Near End ESC EtherStats Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe Section 8 2 1 3 10BASE 5 and section 10 3 1 3 10BASE 2 of IEEE standard 802 3 states that a station must detect a collision in the receive mode if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously Receive Near End ESCAE EtherStats CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Aligned Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Receive Ne
453. n public distribution systems Public low voltage is 230 VAC 10 i e 207 253 VAC 50Hz 6 4 47 52 Hz Maximum power con sumption for the SP 100 AC power supplies is 21 watts Use the following procedure to connect AC power to each of the AC power PSUs as required Procedure Step 1 Use an AC tester to verify the integrity of the AC outlet Rectify any grounding isolation etc issues identified Step 2 Route the AC power cable from the SP 100 to the designated power outlet externally fused at 4 Amps Step 3 Connect the AC power cable to the SP 100 power connector The AC variant PSU will require a right angled IEC power lead if the chassis is positioned in 19 ETSI racking Note Step 4 Do Not Insert the power plug into the power receptacle s at this time They will be inserted later during the procedure Step 5 Dress cables as required Step6 Insert AC Power cable into AC receptacle The Status LED on the SP 100 should be illuminated Green Observe the system STA LED after applying power See Start Up LED Sequence on p 112 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 107 a ADVA Va E a m WM u Connect Power Cables and Apply Power Optical Networking Connect 48 VDC Power Use the following procedure to connect 48 VDC power to a SP 100 48 VDC variant as required Maximum power consumption for the SP 100 is estimated at 21 watts for SP 100 Refer to Power Supply Unit Connect
454. n the NE 1 view and is editable on the NE 1 Note Edit Configuration display Step 3 Check that the information entered in Step 2 is what is desired and click on OK The display will change to reflect the entered data End of Procedure Configure Logs The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit Security Log and the following screen displays Figure 63 Edit Security Log View ma a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B 5 z a ni Edit System Edit Security Log El Configuration Edit Alarm Log Edit Audit Log Syslog Disabled y Edit Syslog Edit ACL Cancel Apply OK E S Edit Banner Step 2 Select Enabled to include Security Log messages in the Syslog or Disabled to not include Security Log messages in the Syslog and click on OK Step 3 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit Alarm Log and the following screen displays Installation and Operations Manual 163 a ADVA Va E eam WM u Provision System Options Optical Networking Figure 64 Edit Alarm Log View m ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v x F
455. n upper and lower case characters at least 1 digit Password must not contain more than 2 letters or digits repeated consecutively Password must not contain a sequence of 3 con secutive alphanumeric characters in ascending or descending order Password must not be the same as the user name Password must not be password passwOrd in lower upper or mixed case Low 4 2 3 User Name must be 1 to 32 characters in length and no spaces allowed Password must be 1 to 32 characters in length Password must contain only alphanumeric and special characters _ and must not begin with Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Security Policy Edit Policy Security Policy The system supports the following three levels of High Strength security strength for local user passwords This setting Medium is used for the basis of user name and password entry Low Installation and Operations Manual 467 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E VUE wz Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Key Generation R egenerate Keys Regenerate SSL Radio button to create a new SSL certificate If Certificate selected then Edit SSL Certificate Data options are applicable unselected When an SSL Certificate is generate
456. naaa rr eke E E A A 38 Clock Analysis ss AAA EA AA AAA eee a aa 38 Frequency Performance Estimation a o o 38 Phase Performance EstiMati0DN o o oooooooo ooo 39 PTE Clock o A aed ee eek aa BS a a Ge acca ae ae Be 40 Clock Analysis Status GUI 6 60604 cc cee e ee ee ewe ee Pe ee 41 PTP Network Analysis 9 0 ier stoi om yal ae acre ee a ad Se eS at goes Je ea dea 42 PTP Network Usability SCOre i234 26564 Goer GS a eh Se ews 42 Installation and Operations Manual 3 a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking PTP Network Analysis Status GUI 1 0020 02 0 a 43 Product Applications o ooooocoo mam e aaa 43 Timing and Synchronization cuisomsarca rara 43 Synchronous Ethernet score eee BERG R RG eae HEY Eo 43 System Clock Reference anaana Seas Oe ewe ee dee aad oes 44 Precision Time Protocol PTP 10 6 cea chee eee ee ee ee 45 Port Loopback aasa aaa a 5 4458 oe oda da 56 Port Facility Loopback cesos dada tee eh ebb Oe Bee eee eRe we 56 SNMP Dying Gasp xe x eae ed ee Re Ree ea ke A 58 Resolving Target Addresses 1 0 cc es 58 Management Overview saasaa Ha here ir ee RA Rae Oe ae Rae ee 59 Management INtemaces 6 5 4 4 6 0 rs Se Re Be ROCESS Bee be 59 Command Line Interface 0 0 cee es 59 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 59 eVision Web Browser Management Tool 0 0000 ee eee 59 Management Features 0 es 60 User Man
457. nality for use in high accuracy time and frequency synchronization applications Func tions supported include create edit delete telecom slave create PTP Flow Point PTPFP monitor configure PTPFP statistics e create edit delete Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC e monitor configure SOOC statistics e create edit delete Ordinary Clock Slave OCS Port edit alarm attributes for SOOC and TS SyncJack Monitor and analyze clock and PTP Network Functions supported include view overall sync network status e clock accuracy o create edit delete clock probe o monitor TIE History measurements Installation and Operations Manual 127 a ADVA 7J E am Wa u Introduction Optical Networking clock analysis o create edit delete PTP clock probe o monitor TIE History estimations o monitor edit Telecom Slave analysis o edit TS thresholds PTP network analysis create edit delete PTP network probe o monitor PTP network probe statistics edit PTP network probe thresholds manage SyncJack schedules Users and Security Users and associated security levels can be viewed entered and modified by the Superuser Other users can view and modify their own user accounts For more information see Configure Local Users on p 176 Software Upgrade Software may be easily updated to the current release level using the Browser Management Tool provided by the GUI interface For more information see Upgra
458. name gt Example ADVA config file gt remove configfile2 ADVA config file gt list File Name Description J PHS SSS S HSH SSS SSS E S5 2 3 2333 SSS SSS SSeS SSeS SSS configfile3 configfile4 set accessl to EVPL and create a flow ADVA config file gt Configuration File Procedures Below are two procedures for working with Configuration Files The first is based on using CLI commands which is the basis for Configuration Files The second details how to perform the same operations using eVision CLI Configuration File Procedure The user should be logged on to a CLI session as a superuser then have entered admin config file at the user prompt See the FSP 150SP 100 Com mand Line Reference Guide for details on CLI interface operation and com mands Descriptions and examples of the commands referenced in this procedure are given in CLI Configuration File Management on p 255 Procedure Step 1 Determine the next step Desired Operation Then Create a new configuration file Continue with the next step Update an existing configuration file Go to Step 4 List check status of the configuration files Go to Step 6 Reboot the system and execute a configuration file Go to Step 8 Import export a configuration file Go to Step 10 Run Load a configuration file now Go to Step 12 View the contents of a configuration file Go to Step 14 Edit the description of a configurat
459. nd Descriptions Continued State Entity State Definition Database or Upgrade Current State Database Backup Database Download Database backup Database download Database Restore Database restore Database Upload Database upload Idle Idle Rebooting Rebooting Software Cancel Upgrade Software cancel upgrade Software Download Software download Software Install Software install Software Upgrade Software Validate Software upgrade Software validate Software Revert Software revert Protection Group Status FORCED PROTECT FORCED WORKING Forced to Protect Forced to Working LOCKOUT PROTECT Lockout to Protect MANUAL PROTECT Manual to Protect MANUAL WORKING Manual to Working NO OUTSTANDING REQUEST There is no outstanding request SD PROTECT Signal Degrade on Protect SD WORKING Signal Degrade on Working SF PROTECT Signal Failure on Protect SF WORKING Signal Failure on Working WAIT TO RESTORE Wait to restore Protection Unit State Active Indicates this is the active unit Standby Indicates this is the standby unit Test Status Aborted Test has been aborted Diagnostics Completed Test has completed Initial Test is initiating In progress Test is in progress Stopped Test has been manually stopped Installation and Operations Manual 435
460. nd Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Bulk Log Transfer The Audit Log Alarm Log and Security Log can be bulk transferred to a remote repository The NE supports transfer via HTTPS Web FTP SFTP and SCP protocols Transferring the Security Log requires the user to have Superuser access The following procedure includes steps for performing the bulk file transfer pro cess using the eVision tool It is also possible to perform this process using CLI See the FSP 750SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide for details The fol lowing procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVi sion Procedure Step 1 Click on the maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Step 2 Expand Administration right click on Transfer Log and select the desired log file to Transfer Alarm Log Audit Log Security Log The display is the Transfer Log view shown in the figure below The examples use the Alarm Log all others are similar Figure 163 Transfer Log View Ls a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v Fl System NE 1 amp Synchronization Communications E Alarm Attributes E Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration
461. nd Operations Manual 135 Getting Familiar with eVision ADVA VO E nav ws Y Optical Networking Tool Bar The Tool Bar contains a set of tool buttons that can be selected for quick access to eVision applications The tool buttons available are Ea Note Configuration which accesses the Configuration application It allows you to perform provisioning functions such as editing system equipment facilities or users Various views are provided when Configuration is selected depending on what entity is selected in the Selection Tree When entering a right click on a folder or entity from the Selection Tree provisioning options become available in menu form Options available to the user are dependent upon the user access permission level Maintenance which accesses the Maintenance application It allows you to perform maintenance functions such as loopbacks diagnostics software upgrade database backup and restore When entering a right click on a folder or entity from the Selection Tree maintenance options become available in menu form Various views are provided depending upon what folder or entity is selected in the Selection Tree Options available to the user are dependent upon the user access permission level Performance Monitoring which accesses the Performance Monitoring application It allows you to retrieve performance monitoring counts in columnar or chart format Performance monitoring thresholds can be
462. nd access to current alarms Options avail able are dependent upon the user access permission level and the current entity status For procedures regarding provisioning of specific entities refer to Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning on p 153 The following configuration changes can be applied and current status can be viewed within Configuration View System System level settings can be viewed by selecting the System entity in the selec tion tree Additional system level settings may be viewed by selecting one of the following tabs Identification Security Log Alarm Log Audit Log Syslog ACL Access Control List Banner or NTP Network Time Protocol You can edit system options by entering a right click on the System entity and selecting the desired menu option System Defaults may also be restored at this menu level Network Element NE NE level settings can be viewed by selecting the NE 1 entity in the selection tree Expanding the NE 1 entity reveals all equipment associated with the NE By expanding the NE 1 entity under the System entity selecting the NTESP100 entity and then selecting the Resources tab of the NTESP100 entity all allo cated and available system traffic resources are displayed see Figure 49 on p 144 Network Port Access Port DCN and 3G Modem provisioning may be per formed within the NE 1 hierarchy in the selection tree See Figure 50 on p 144 for an example of an Edit Network Port Conf
463. nd of Procedure 166 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit the Security Banner The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit Ban ner and the following screen displays Figure 68 Edit Banner File Application v a x 5 U al mm acon Edit Banner Edit Security Log Edit Alarm Log Edit Audit Log E Edit Syslog Edit ACL Edit NTP Restore System Defaults Banner This is a private system Unauthorized access or use may lead to prosecution Cancel Apply OK Step 2 The Banner is displayed for each CLI or GUI login The banner can be edited to contain a customized message of up to 1024 characters The default banner message is This is a private system Unautho rized access or use may lead to prosecution Edit the Banner then click on OK and the screen will update to dis play the edited banner message End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 167 ADVA 7J E team WM u Provision System Options Optical Networking Configure NTP The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected
464. ne Configured Speed Auto z Auto Diagnostic Enabled Y MDIX i Auto Service Port Shaping Disabled y Q in Q EtherType D Chex Port Shaped Speed D bps Q in Q EtherType Override Disabled y Cancel Apply OK Synchronization By expanding the Synchronization and NE 1 entities and then selecting the SYNC 1 1 1 1 entity the current Network Clock Type is displayed Entering a right click allows editing network synchronization administration state and clock type or synchronization reference source Select the Status tab to display the current synchronization status including any user requests or synchronization reference list status By expanding the NTESP100 and BITS 1 entities and then selecting the BITS IN or BITS OUT entity the current configuration and received transmit quality level is displayed Similarly selecting the CLK 10MHz Clock PPS Pulse Per Second Clock TOD Time Of Day or GPS Global Positioning Sat 144 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool ellite entities allows viewing the current configurations Entering a right click allows editing the synchronization administration state and configuration set tings Communications Static Routes Static ARP Entries and Source Address Configuration are viewed by selecting the Communications entity and selecting the associated tab Static Routes and Static ARP Entries may be added or deleted and Source A
465. net services both in region and out of region The evolving state of synchronization services raises issues of maintenance operation and performance assurance For this purpose ADVA Optical Network ing has introduced a new concept called Syncjack Syncjack is a comprehen sive technology for timing distribution monitoring and timing service assurance A Dashboard indicator displays analysis results see Figure 1 on p 23 The Global status reflects a composite of 3 status meters Clock Accuracy Clock Analysis and Precision Time Protocol PTP Network Analysis For the indicator bar a horizontal line indicates N A green indicates normal operation yellow indicates some issue exists red indicates a significant problem Figure 1 SyncJack Dashboard Indicators ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application a xX E oo amp Network Element Ej Clock Accuracy E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 SYNCIACK GLOBAL CLOCK PROBE 1 2 Ej History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 2 Clock Analysis E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 E History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis Ej PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 E Synejack Schedules CLOCK ACCURACY CLOCK ANALYSIS PTP NETWORK ANALYSIS La lt 4 lt A The Syncjack GUI concept provides several layers of indicators allowing for step by
466. nfiguration None MTU 9612 bytes Loopback Status None Max Speed 1 000 000 000 Swap SA DA None Configured Speed Auto y Auto Diagnostic Enabled y MDIX CO Service Port Shaping Disabled Q in Q EtherType _ Ol hex Port Shaped Speed 0 bps Q in Q EtherType Override Disabled 2 Cancel Apply OK Step 3 Various Port and Service data can be edited For details on each edit able item see Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 469 184 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 4 Note Enter the Network Port facility changes Identification a Enter an Alias as required State b Set the Administrative State to IS ort o v Select the desired Media Type Enter the desired MTU size Select the Configured Speed option a o gt Select the Port MDIX option copper Enable Disable Auto Diagnostic h Enable Disable Drop Eligibility Indicator Service i Enable Disable Port Shaping j Enter the desired Port Shaped Speed Setting can not be lower than the CIR setting for the flow if Port Shaping is Enabled k Enable Disable Q in Q EtherType Override I Edit the Q in Q Ethertype setting if desired requires Q in Q Over ride Enabled Click on OK Q For configuration of PTP functionality see Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP on p 208 For configuration of Sync E functionality se
467. ng clock types to be used to transport time phase Ordinary Clocks Boundary Clocks Transparent Clocks While the standard defines these as clocks they are actually logical functions that recover distribute and or support synchronization PTP supports both unicast and multicast operation and also defines support for two clock modes one step clock mode and two step clock mode The one step mode involves embedding the timestamp associated with a mes sage within the message itself while the two step mode requires the transmis sion of an additional message for transporting the timestamp of the original message The implementation in the SP 100 products is the one step mode Because of their logical versus physical nature the FSP150CC products asso ciate each E2E TC function with a specific service flow The associated service flow may or may not be transporting user traffic along with PTP messages As a result each SP 100 product may support many simultaneous E2E TC functions Figure 19 on p 48 shows an example application involving an End to End E2E Transparent Clock TC Installation and Operations Manual 47 a ADVA A A 7J E MED Wa n Product Applications Optical Networking Figure 19 OC Master OC Slave with TC Interconnect Clock Time Domain 3 Bw Clock Source Ordinary Clock Master Network Element 2 A a End to End E2E Transparent Clock Function
468. ng note The chassis is designed for passive fanless air cooling The number of units that can be stacked are determined by the environment the unit will be installed in not the unit type that will be installed The following are requirements for maintaining internal temperatures within design limits When units are installed in an Temp Industrial environment units can be stacked 1 high and must be mounted as a single unit only Dual unit mounting in an Temp environment should not be amp implemented When units are installed in a C Temp Commercial environment units can be stacked 4 high If it is necessary to install a single SP 100 unit in an l Temp environment or 4 rows of SP 100s in a C Temp environment above other heat producing components it is recommended that a heat deflector is installed below the SP 100 s If it is necessary to install heat sensitive equipment above a single SP 100 unit in an Temp environment or 4 rows of SP 100s in a C Temp environment it is recommended that a heat deflector is installed above the SP 100 s Note Installation and Operations Manual 81 Physical Installation a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Before installing FSP 150SP refer to Preparing for Installation on p 74 for details on site verification the tools and equipment required for installation and procedures for installing the FSP 150SP he Mounting Kits To avoid eye injury from debris always w
469. ns Embedded GPS receiver Interfaces for external clock inputs Timing output Interfaces SP 100 provides the following capabilities Active Passive Probing and monitoring of multiple telecom physical signals as well as multiple packet timing signals Probing of physical signals packet timing signals and the network can be done simultaneously ease finding correlation between network impair ments and clock performance Bi directional Probing of network Packet Delay Variation PDV e Measurement network asymmetry Integrated Master Slave BC Can be used as In service or Portable solution Packet Classification PDV and Path Delay recording Multiple channel testing 2 Clock probes 4 PTP clock Probes Any to any ratio clocks of source reference testing Installation and Operations Manual 31 Syncjack Suite a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking 1PPS alignment test SyncE wander testing Local oscillator Stratum3 3E optional 8nsec timestamp resolution SP 100 can be used for the following e Sync delivery using Boundary Clock Master Clock e Sync delivery using Telecom Slave e Field Active Passive probing and monitoring of Sync Sync SLA network PDV First level testing pre sale Main features of SP 100 Timing SLA Tools o Clock Accuracy 2 Clock Probes MTIE of physical clocks o Clock Analysis 4 PTP Clock Probes packet MTIE PTP Network Analysi
470. ns Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview passwords for preconfigured user accounts is ChgMeNOW Default login time out is 15 minutes for each preconfigured user account A user account is locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3 unsuccessful login attempts not applicable when RADIUS authentication is used The number of unsuccessful login attempts are displayed in the user profile The lockout period is not configurable SNMP User Management SNMP MD5 SHA1 authentication protocols and AES DES privilege protocols are supported Four preconfigured SNMP user accounts are provided as default ADMIN MONITOR OPERATOR and PROVISION ACL Management The system maintains an optional Access Control List ACL to restrict the IP addresses from which management connections are accepted The ACL allows the operator to add up to 10 sub networks or individual IP addresses to the ACL list When the ACL is active management of the system is restricted only to those valid IP addresses contained in the ACL Security Banner The security banner feature allows an operator to define a custom security ban ner which is displayed whenever a user logs onto the system This banner is displayed on CLI and web browser logins The system is shipped with a default security banner RADIUS or TACACS Up to three RADIUS or TACACS servers may be configured for remote authentication Both support accounting Provisioning Th
471. ns Manual 173 a ADVA 7J E a m Waza u Provision Secure Access Optical Networking Step5 To regenerate the SSH Key select the radio button next to Regener ate SSH Key click OK on the message pop up and the following screen displays 5 When an SSH Key is generated all SSH users will be logged off Note Figure 75 Regenerate SSH Key ma a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application v By amp System Regenerate Keys NE 1 Synchronization Generate Certificate or Key Communications E E EE Regenerate SSL Certificate Regenerate SSH Key Administration Users E Local Cancel OK Step6 Click on OK End of Procedure Configure Security Policy The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on as a superuser using eVision From the Configuration view with the Administration tree expanded 174 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Procedure Step 1 Right click on Security Policy in the selection tree pane and select Edit Policy and the following screen displays to show the current Pol icy Strength setting and a description of the policy rules Figure 76 Edit Policy Strength ES ADYA F
472. ns Manual 261 Database and Configuration Files ADVA J E ea ws Y Optical Networking Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Enter the desired File Name no spaces or slashes Then select OK The configuration file will contain the delta between the default data base and the current active database Go to Step 2 Select Configuration Files then right click on the menu icon beside the desired configuration file name in the table inside the details pane The following screen displays Figure 153 Configuration Files Update il Ka ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v E System NE 1 Ly E Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 BB oO amp Configuration Files Status Status Completed Action Save Information Files File Name Description Edit Description Copy to Remote Restart with File Remove Select Save The configfile is updated and contains the delta between the default database and the current active database and overwrites the existing file Go to Step 2 Select Configuration Files The following screen displays Figure 154 Configuration Files Display Status mal 2i ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File v Application
473. nstallation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 58 Create Edit Clock Probe Parameter Settings Continued Description Parameter l Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Reference Defines the expected Quality Level of the selected QL NONE Expected QL reference for the Clock Probe Available QL levels are QL PRC presented in a drop down list QL SSU A QL SSU B QL EEC1 Source Defines the source of the clock to be measured by the CLK 1 1 1 1 Clock Probe Sources available are presented ina CLK 1 1 1 2 drop down list SYNC 1 1 1 1 BITS IN 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 PPS 1 1 1 1 PPS 1 1 1 2 ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Source Type Selection for measuring frequency or phase Frequency Phase MTIE Mask Define the predefined MTIE Mask to use for G823 E1 Ssu measurements Choices are presented in a drop down G823 E1 Sec list G823 El Traffic G823 Pdh G824 T1 Traffic G824 T1 Sync G8261 El Case 1 G8261 T1 Case 1 G8261 El Case 2 G8261 EEC Opt1 G8263 G8263 temp G8272 PRTC G8261 1 G8262 EEC Opti G8262 EEC Opti temp G8262 EEC Opti G8262 EEC Opt2 Tolerance Mask Margin The margin percentage to be applied to the selected MTIE Mask Range is from 0 to 100 0 Installation and Operations Manual 515 Configuration Settings Rules
474. nt Tunnel ooooooooo o 295 Create Management Tunnel Bridging Enabled 296 Display Management Tunnel Configuration Bridging 297 Edit Management Tunnel Bridging 297 Edit Source Address Config ooo ooooo ooo 298 Add Static ROUTE daa hee ada aa 300 Display Static Routes ica o AR ve eee RA 300 Delete Static Route cie a ah ae ae a 301 Add Static ARP Entry oce 24444040 Hae ea Pew ea ee Ee 302 Display Static ARP EntrieS aii AAA We ee ke 303 Delete Static ARP Entry 1 0 cee ee es 303 Edit 3G Modem Configuration 0 00 cee eee eee 305 3G Modem Configuration Information 306 3G Modem SIM Card Status 0 cee eee es 306 Enable 3G Modem PIN o a 44 eae Soak BES Sa eee 308 Installation and Operations Manual 17 a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Figure 186 Disable 3G Modem PIN xiii a ew ee ae 308 Figure 187 Change 3G Modem PIN 0 0 ee es 309 Figure 188 3G Modem PIN Authentication 0 000 eee eee 310 Figure 189 Unlock 3G Modem with PUK 2 0000 eee ees 311 Figure 190 3G Networking Information lt o ooo 311 Figure 191 Workstation GNE SNE on Same Subnet 313 Figure 192 CO Based Testing Using Ethernet Loopback 320 Figure 193 Loopback VieW 0 ooo ooooo oo 2 321 Figure 194 System PM Configuration 0 oo oo oo o ee
475. nter a hex number following the MAC address ESA Probe belongs to an active schedule xxx Existing MEP ID xxx cannot be removed from the MEP List Flow is xxx For primary VID type range should be xxx MIN yyy MAX Incompatible xxx card for yyy slot Internal error unable to allocate resource Internal error unable to allocate VLAN entry resources Internal error unable to release resource Internal error unable to release VLAN entry resources Invalid hex number Invalid MAC address Invalid MAC INTEGER format Invalid name format xxx Invalid primary vid Invalid primary vid must be 0 component primary vid or must be from the vian table LLF Trigger has duplicate values LLF triggers are not supported on service based down MEP Loopback already exists Loopback is active on Port MA COMP s eid Primary VID xxx cannot be in VID list MA name causes MA ID length to exceed limit xxx MIN yyy MAX MA Name format cannot be set to xxx when MD Name format is set to yyy MA name is too long MA NET Name should be set when changing the MA NET format MA primary VID cannot be a VID member in VLAN table Management Tunnel Buffer Size must be at least xxx KB Management Tunnel CIR must be at least xxx bps MANET Name cannot be empty Manual Etherjack Diagnostics currently in progress Installation and Operations Manual 387 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Error Codes and System Responses Optical Network
476. ntication is required to unlock SIM Input PUK Pin protection is enabled and the PIN code is locked 3 failed attempts to input PIN has occurred Unlock with PUK is required Locked SIM is locked contact SIM provider IMSI IMSI code International Mobile Subscriber Identity of the SIM card Not Available SIM is removed Current RSSI High Medium Current Received Signal Strength or Low Indicator This value changes automatically according to the actual signal strength Not Available SIM is removed Step 6 Use the SIM status information from the previous step to determine the next step Desired Function Enable PIN Then Continue with the next Can be applied if PIN PUK status Disabled When the PIN is Enabled if the 3G Modem is unplugged or the system reboots the 3G Modem SIM must be unlocked by entering the PIN step Disable PIN Allows access without entering PIN authentication Once the PIN is disabled operations such as Change PIN PIN Authentication Unlock with PUK are disabled Can be applied if PIN PUK status OK Go to Step 10 PIN authentication required PIN PUK status input PIN Go to Step 16 Unlock with PUK required PIN PUK status Input PUK Go to Step 19 Provisioning is complete Verify 3G Networking Connection Go to Step 21 Installation and Operations Manual 307 ADVA 7J E team WM u Provision Communications Optical Networking Step
477. ntify this Network Port This string can be up to 64 blank printable ASCII characters long Administrative Defines the Network Port facility administrative state IS State The administrative state controls the generation of Management alarms and event reports When an entity is in the In Maintenance Service state it is fully operational The Administrative Unassigned State must be set to Maintenance prior to initiating a loopback or an Etherjack Diagnostic For more information on Administrative States see Entity State Descriptions on p 430 Media Type Defines the port media type Fiber Copper MTU Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size in bytes 1518 9612 Minimum MTU is 1518 Maximum is 9612 Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the network interface Auto 1000 Full Copper Fiber The user can select auto speed detect auto 1000 Full negotiation or manual configuration 100 Full Configured Speed Sets the configured speed for the network interface Auto The user can select auto negotiation or manual config uration Auto 1000 Full Auto 1000 Full Master Auto 1000 Full Slave Auto 100 Full Auto 10 Full 100 Full 10 Full MDIX If Media Type is Copper MDIX can be edited If Media Type is Fiber MDIX is not applicable Auto Crossed Uncrossed Auto Diagnostic Copper Drop Eligibility Indicator Enables or disables the automatic C
478. nts PM counts can be displayed as a summary or in tabular format in the eVision web browser management tool can be filtered and or refreshed and allows exporting data as Excel spreadsheets Performance Parameters There are several categories of Performance Parameters PPs that are col lected The following entities are monitored for performance data which is accu mulated into PPs PTP Flowpoint SOOC Telecom Slave under SyncJack application Performance Parameter Attributes Each PP can be defined by the attributes outlined in the following table Table 24 Performance Parameter Attributes Attribute Description Monitor Type The name of the PP This will be presented in mnemonic form e g ANNOUNCESRX PTP Announce Messages Received Location Whether the PP is a Near End or Far End parameter The location is determined in relation to the monitored entity in that the PP has occurred Locally to the entity or at the near end Remotely to the entity or at the far end Direction Whether the PP is a Receive or Transmit parameter The direction is in relation to the monitored entity Time Period The time period associated with the PP e 15 Minute or 1 Day Monitor The time at which the PP was collected Timestamp The current time is used for Rollover and Current counters The boundary crossing time is used for History count ers stored as number of seconds since the Epo
479. o the client Port Shaped Defines the maximum bandwidth on the Access Port in Speed bps Applicable when Port Shaping is Enabled i ga a 474 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 42 Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service Continued Description Option Settings applicable for Synchronous Ethernet capable ports when this option is set to Enabled When enabled on receive side port shall PEER the Synchronization Status Messages SSM slow protocol PDUs and take appropriate action When enabled on transmit side port shall periodically once a second transmit QL TLV information PDUs When disabled on receive side port shall terminate and discard any SSM slow protocol PDUs When disabled on transmit side port shall not transmit any SSM slow protocol PDUs Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Edit Sync E Sync E Mode Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or Disabled disabled for Synchronous Ethernet Mode Default is Enabled Disabled QL Mode Specifies whether the Ethernet Network Port is enabled or Disabled disabled for Quality Level QL Mode This option is only Enabled Installation and Operations Manual 475 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 42 Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service Continued
480. ocol Frames processed on the interface LBC Laser Bias Current retrieved from the SFP Receive Near 0 0 End OPR Optical Power Receive Received Optical Receive Near 80 80 Power in dBm retrieved from the SFP End OPT Optical Power Transmit Transmit Optical Transmit Near 80 80 Power in dBm retrieved from the SFP End OPR VAR Optical Power Received Variance The Receive Near 4 4 variance from the configured OPR End threshold that does not result in generating a TCA For example if OPR is 80 and OPR VAR is 4 no TCA is generated if OPR is between 76 and 84 Applicable only if the media type is Fiber OPT VAR Optical Power Transmit Variance The Transmit Near 4 4 variance from the configured OPT End threshold that does not result in generating a TCA For example if OPT is 80 and OPR VAR is 4 no TCA is generated if OPT is between 76 and 84 Applicable only if the media type is Fiber TEMP Temperature for the physical layer None Near 0 0 expressed in Celsius End UAS Unavailable Seconds counted if one or Receive Near 10 10 more of following exists in that second End Link down link deactivated triggered by LLF SFP faults EFM OAM discovery failure and EFM OAM local loopback Also any one of the following port based MEP conditions cross connect defect unexpected MD level or MAID Mismatch Error CCM Defect Unexpected MEP or unexpected period RMEP CCM Defect Loss of Connectivit
481. of losing the route to the SNE Procedure Step 1 E Note Step 2 Step 3 Note Step 4 Perform the following steps at FSP 150CC 2 SNE At FSP 150CC 2 perform the procedures Connect Power Cables and Apply Power on p 125 and Serial Connection on p 276 You should currently be logged onto the FSP 150CC 2 s RS232 serial port using CLI Provision the eth0 system IP address using the following CLI com mand entry ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt configure eth0 ip address 192 168 2 3 VASO AS lo A e o E O ADVA comms gt P A rovision the management tunnel using the following CLI command DVA comms gt add mgmttnl 1 phoenixl ethernet vlan based 100 disabled 10 10 10 5 255 255 255 0 network 1 1 1 1 According to the example in Figure 191 on p 313 the FSP 150CC 2 s management tunnel should be set to Ethernet Layer 2 Protocol VLAN based with the VLAN ID set to 100 DHCP disabled the IP address should be set to 10 10 10 5 with a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 and RIPv2 should be set to enabled To edit the management tunnel to enable RIPv2 packets enter the following CLI command ADVA comms gt configure mgmttnl mgmt_tnl 1 ADVA comms mgmt_tnl 1 gt rip2Pkts control enabled 314 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step5 Setthe Management LAN Port s eth0 admin state to unassigned using the following CLI co
482. of upper and lower case alpha char acters at least one special character and at least one digit 4 No more than 2 letters or digits can be repeated in consecutive character positions 5 Does not contain a sequence of 3 consecutive let ters digits in ascending descending order 8 to 32 characters blank Confirm Auth Key Reenter the key entered in the Auth Key box to confirm the key 8 to 32 characters blank Priv Protocol Drop down list of established privacy protocols This option is only available if the Security Level is Auth Priv DES AES Priv Key Entry for a Privacy Key This option is only applicable if Auth Priv Security Level is selected If A valid entry contains the following 1 Contains only alphanumeric and special characters and must not begin with 2 Length from 8 to 32 characters 3 Contains a mix of upper and lower case alpha char acters at least one special character and at least one digit 4 No more than 2 letters or digits can be repeated in consecutive character positions 5 Does not contain a sequence of 3 consecutive let ters digits in ascending descending order 8 to 32 characters blank Confirm Priv Key Reenter the key entered in the Priv Key box to confirm the key 8 to 32 characters blank Note To delete an existing USM user right click on the SNMP entity in the Selection Tree and select
483. ogged On FSP 150SP 0 cee es 132 Figure 45 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Components 134 Figure 46 Selection Tree with Menu Selected 138 Figure 47 Tab Selections and Scroll Bars in the Details Pane 139 Figure 48 Edit Access Port Pane ce es 140 Figure 49 NTESP100 Resources Tab 0 cc eee es 144 Figure 50 Edit Network Port Configuration View 144 Figure 51 Alarm Attributes View of a Network Port 149 Figure 52 Conditions List View of the NE 1 Entity 149 Figure 53 Edit Alarm Attributes Pane 0 0 cee es 150 Figure 54 Loopback VieW o oo e 4 aaa 151 Figure 55 Transfer Upgrade Web View o o oooooo o 156 Figure 56 Transfer Upgrade SCP VieW o o ooooo coo 157 Figure 57 File Transfer Progress ScreeN o oooooooconomo 158 Figure 58 Software Install Query 0 oooooo coo 158 Figure 59 Software Activate lt oooooocoooo mo 159 Figure 60 Validate Upgrade View o oooooo o uu 160 Figure 61 SoftwareActivate i siacke tesa ria ora ice ne ees 161 Figure 62 Edit SYStEM siaa ce hia eo DRG ewe Rew Re eh Ow de eRe we ee 162 Figure 63 Edit Security Log View eee coc 163 Figure 64 Edit Alarm Log VIOW 0i6see 20s 4604 eee e ara a 164 Figure 65 Edit Audit Log View sa ice eee ee eee ee ee ee ee 164 Fi
484. ole DHCP Client ene GPS 1 1 1 1 Serial Port 2 Communications Gateway IP Address OZ E SNMP Management Traffic Bridging isabled y Serial Port Auto Log Off Mgmt Traffic Bridging Security DO B SFTP 4 Administration gt Proxy ARP Disabled x SSH 3 System Up Time 2 hrs 52 mins 29 secs Telnet Date 2014 02 1 yyyy mm dd Authentication Traps Time e February y CLI Security Prompt Disabled v System Time Of Day s SM TW TFS SNMP Engine ID 800009f0030080ea39d2c0 Source TOD Clock 26 28 29 30 31 1 45678 Apply gt OK 9 11 12 13 14 15 i 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2013 2014 2015 Cancel Step 32 Enter the appropriate time in hh mm ss and select OK Step 33 Select the Identification tab to view the local entry Step 34 Goto Step 2 198 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit System Time Of Day via NTP Step 35 Enter a right click on the System entity and select Edit NTP An Edit NTP window displays Figure 95 Edit System Time Of Day NTP Method ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File y Application XK B 2 D a syg Edit System Edit NTP a i Fl Egit Security Log Edit Alarm Log Configuration Edit Audit Log State Disabled y Primary Server Edit Syslog NTP Type Unicast Backup Server Edit ACL Polling Interval 16 seconds E Edit Banner A Switch server E Edit
485. ollowing procedure for provisioning the 10 MHz Clock port amp CLK 1 1 1 1 is fixed as Input only CLK 1 1 1 2 may be configured for Input or Output Note Step 12 Enter a right click on the CLK 1 1 1 1 or CLK 1 1 1 2 entity and select Edit Configuration An Edit CLK window displays Figure 88 Edit CLK Interface Configuration E 2 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B Y a System Edit Configuration f NE 1 i NTESP100 Identification Synchronization NE 1 Entity ID CLK 1 1 1 2 NTESP100 Allas i SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 State BITS 1 Administrative Unassigned Secondary UAS BITS IN Operational Outage BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Configuration CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 Signal Direction Output Squelch Control Never PPS 1 1 1 2 Squelch QL QL NONE Ka TOD 1 1 1 1 Assumed QL QL 55U B GPS 1 1 1 1 Communications peto SNMP A Administration Cancel Apply OK Step 13 Enter the following 10MHz Clock options a Enter the desired Alias and select the desired Administrative state b Select the desired Signal Direction c Foran Output CLK select the desired Squelch Control and Squelch QL options d Foran Input CLK select the desired Assumed QL e Select OK Step 14 Select the CLK 1 1 1 1 or CLK 1 1 1 2 entity to view configuration details Step 15 Goto Step 2 Installation and Operations Manual 191 a ADVA an 5 A v VA Wesel u
486. on in the selec tion tree pane and select Restore System Defaults and the following screen displays Figure 150 Restore System Defaults p a ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application E System NE 1 Synchronization Communications Alarm Attributes EE E Transfer Log Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause a xl gt 6 Restore System Defaults All configuration will be lost Confirm Restore System Defaults Cancel OK E Administrat Upgrade Restore System Defaults Databas Restore Factory Defaults Resetting the database to system defaults may drop all traffic and erase all communications and user settings including the loss of the A eVision connection to the NE This operation should not be performed lightly lt may be advisable to backup the current database so that it CAUTION can be restored later 252 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 2 To reset the system database to the factory defaults select OK End of Procedure Restore Factory Defaults Restore Factory Defaults results in the loss of all Provisioning Data Base settings including DCN SNMP Remote Access and User data This is normally only done only when a system is decommissioned A and moved to a new location or when the software or database is cor rupted It is advisable to backup the database before performing t
487. on Access Port on p 181 For additional technical data see the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document The following Access Port settings are shown in order as seen when using the eVision web browser management tool in Configuration mode To observe the current allocated and available traffic resources expand the NE 1 entity under the System entity select the NTESP100 entity and then select the Resources tab Edit Access Port Configuration The only service type supported for an Access Port is Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Refer to the following for Access Port service configuration options and rules Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Service Provisioning Refer to the following for provisioning a port in Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Mode It is recommended that you review the following configuration options and rules and pre determine the desired provisioning details prior to making any provisioning changes to a service Default settings are identified in bold Table 42 Configuration Settings for Ethernet Private Line Service Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults E1000 A 1 Access Port Edit Configuration Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64 characters identify this Access Port This string can be up to 64 blank printable ASCII characters long Administrative Defines th
488. on Administrative S y Secondary ACT Operational Normal Loopback Configuration Loopback Status None SwapSADA None Y Timer 10 10 300 sec Cancel Apply OK Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Overview The Performance Monitoring PM feature enables in service non intrusive sys tem monitoring to aid in diagnosing and isolating issues that may occur during operation PM enables users to detect and react to potential failures prior to a customer outage In addition to providing traditional SNMP MIB Etherstats Syn cjack provides Performance Parameters PPs and features similar to those found in traditional services This allows Ethernet service assurance to be inte grated into a carrier s existing service assurance infrastructure Performance Monitoring view allows you to view performance monitoring counts and view PM thresholds Performance monitoring thresholds can be edited and registers can be initialized for users with proper user access permission level This chapter contains the following step by step procedures Configuring System Level PM on p 325 Initializing PM Registers on p 331 Editing PM Thresholds on p 332 For PM commands using CLI refer to the FSP 750SP 7100 Command Line Ref erence Guide Installation and Operations Manual 321 a ADVA fic ca VO E aa wa Y Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Optical Networking PM Fea
489. onfiguration file management When entering a right click on an entity in the Selection Tree maintenance options are available in menu form The options available are dependent upon the user access permission level and current entity status Alarm status is dis played in the Alarms Pane at the bottom of the screen providing constant visi bility and access to current alarms For more information on Maintenance operations refer to Chapter 4 Opera tions Provisioning on p 153 and Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Proce dures and Performance Monitoring on p 319 The current status is viewed and maintenance operations performed within Maintenance View Installation and Operations Manual 145 Maintenance View a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking System Selecting the System entity allows viewing of System Identification and Condi tions List Network Element NE 1 Selecting the NE entity allows viewing the conditions list associated with the NE Expanding the NE entity reveals all equipment associated with the NE Entering a right click on the NE 1 entity provides a menu option for performing a lamp test The following maintenance functions may be viewed performed for the fol lowing entities when the NE is expanded in the selection tree NTESP100 o NTESP100 Entering a right click provides menu options for raising and clearing test alarm and rebooting the NTESP100 o Network port view oper
490. onnector Pin Assignments 123 Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management TOD das daa ee da ga o AAA ca ed Wow aaa ncaa a we ow aes ae a oe ew oe 125 Users and Security su is A sd ar 128 Software Uporad ys ik da eee Laa a a a A 128 Database Configuration Management oooooooo 128 Minimum System Requirements o ooo 129 Logging On and OMA eno e i aa O de oe a e we Ch dd e alee we ca 130 LOIRE AR RA A RA AAA o4 130 Logging OM 6 da a a a A e iS 132 User Session Timeout aaau a a e ona ee a amp PR a e RE 133 Getting Familiar with eVision y 400004 nas wee RARE A A wes 133 About the Workspace n u e A a 134 Tie Bar ee Sei ap essa a e a A are ee es a a S du a a 135 Menu Bam eis a a wa cee oh ee ei ee ek a ew 135 TOON BGI a OM Bette ee oe a Mea eB Ee We oe a ew 136 Selection Tree e soe seo WS ee RRA a 137 Details Pane ss osu ta eee Shee EERE BOR Se Pe RENE PEP aa es 138 Operations and Provisioning Field Types 140 Command ButtonS dirias ioe DS see hi eee eee 141 Alarms Pane a ao ase Ob de Ye eee Oe Kd ONS ee Ee ae ow A 141 Keyboard Navigation 1 0 ooo e 4 aaa 141 eVision Applications aia aaa da Ra aaa as a 142 Configuration VICW o ow x dee aw A a Bee ae 143 Maintenance WES saasaa wes ier a ee Ria ard a e ow ee we de jas a dl 145 Viewing Entities in Maintenance VieW 0 o 148 6 Installation and Operations M
491. ons functional again Sync Reference A forced switch operation has been Evaluate reason for forced Forced Switch performed on a Sync Reference switch operation and when Minor N A N A appropriate remove the forced switch Sync Reference A manual switch operation has been Evaluate reason for the Manual Switch performed on a Sync Reference manual switch operation Minor N A N A Syncjack Alarms This section describes Syncjack alarm conditions Clock Probe Alarms Refer to the following table for Clock Probe alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default notification code and suggested trouble clearing procedure Table 32 Clock Probe Alarms La Description NSA Default SA Default LED ops Probable Cause Trouble Cleanng Procedure Notification Notification Indication SJTEST Probe Reference signal failed May be For case of external signal Reference Fail caused by signal loss or signal accuracy check cable connection Minor N A N A degradation detected SJTEST Source Probe source signal failed May be caused For case of external signal Fail by signal loss or signal accuracy degrada check cable connection Minor N A N A tion detected s po 10113 sesneyd 9 qEqOIdq pue sjuang swejy Jeldey CCV PTP Clock Probe Alarms Refer to the following table for PTP Clock Probe alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default notifica tion code and su
492. ons Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Table 1 Front Panel Connectors Left to Right Continued Section Connectors Description Electrical RJ 45 Client 10 100 1000 BaseT Access Copper LAN port Optical SFP optics Access port Optical SFP optics Network port Network Electrical RJ 45 Network 10 100 1000 BaseT Copper WAN port BITS IN and T1 E1 External Clock Input and BITS OUT Output RJ 48c connectors balanced 120 Ohm impedance Synchronization TOD Time Of Day RJ 48c connector CLK IN Clock 10MHz connector input only CLK Clock 10MHz connector provisionable for input or output PPS IN Pulse Per Second connector input only Synchronization PPS Pulse Per Second connector provisionable for input or output GPS GPS Antenna connector Installation and Operations Manual 67 a ADVA ao ait v 7 VA w YA SP 100 Hardware Description il Networking System LEDs The names and functions of each general system LED are described in the fol lowing table Table 2 System LEDs LED Name Color Definition Off No Power detected Green Normal operation Equipment Initializing The card is out of the boot loader and into the kernel Software image validation is taking place and boot kernel system kernel system initialization and system apps are all being started Equipment initializing After power rails are within tolerance the hardware sets this LED to solid ye
493. ons Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Step4 Select Login The security banner displays as shown below ADYA ESP 150 ENS Windows Internet Explorer Go y E htto 172 17 23 31 ndex phtml Fle Edit View Favorites Tools Help ELR Logout B search 9 RO web Snapshots e 0 msma wee Bl O aa A kk Dav FSP 150EMS gt Do Ge toe Grae gt a ADVA TM J E amw we Y Optical Networking This is a private system Unauthorized access or use may lead to prosecution Logout pi Elapsed time since last login 13 mins 42 secs internet A login account will be locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3 unsuccessful login attempts Note Step5 Select Continue eVision displays as shown below Installation and Operations Manual 131 a ADVA Jon MAD ws a Optical Networking Logging On and Off Figure 44 Logged On FSP 150SP ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 35 98 Configuration File Application x B amp B oO 6 System a S Configuration Resources El NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Entity ID NTESP100 1 1 1 DCN etho Alias SP100 35 98 3G Modem aa State Ej Synchronization E NE 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT E NTESP100 Operational Normal SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Physical Inventory Gl BITS 1 Name FSP1SOSP 100 Hardware Revision 01 01 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Physical Address 00 80 83 39 d2 c0 Software Re
494. ons Provisioning contains step by step procedures for provisioning the SP 100 communications interfaces It is organized in the rec ommended workflow for new installations and can be applied to existing sys tems Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Testing Procedures and Performance Moni toring contains information on service loopbacks and step by step procedures for performing Syncjack tests This chapter also contains step by step proce dures for viewing PM counters setting thresholds and initializing counters Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes contains listing of all alarms and events generated by the system and includes the probable cause of each Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules contains configuration option setting information to be used as a guide to plan operate configure and maintain the SP 100 It contains system default settings configuration options and provisioning rules using the eVision web browser management tool High level descriptions and provisioning rules are provided for each eVision configuration option Additional information for each option description can be found in the Technical Descrip tions document and Application Notes for specific features For CLI option set tings and rules refer to the FSP 750SP 1700 Command Line Reference Guide Installation and Operations Manual 25 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Document Overview Optical Networking Audience The reader must have sufficient knowledge o
495. oolooloolo lolo olololo olololalolalo lalo olololo ololololololololo o ololo lolo lolo ololo olololo ololo lolo o lojojoo l ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 PTP File Application e System Configuration Statistics NE 1 MASTER CLOCK 1 1 ty ID ACC PTP FLOW E MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE 1 1 1 MASTER VIRTUAL PORT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves E Dynamic Slaves DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 Summary 15 Minute 1 Day gt ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 MT DESC DIR LOC 15MIN 1DAY ANNOUNCESRX PTP Announce Messages Received Receive dr o o 5 NTESP100 ANNOUNCESTX PTP Announce Messages Transmitted Transmit Naar o o E1000 N 1 DELAYREQSRX PTP Delay_Req Messages Received Receive End o o NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 DELAYREQSTX PTP Delay_Req Messages Transmitted Transmit near o o E1000 A 1 DELAYRSPSRX PTP Delay_Resp Messages Received Receive Near o o ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 DELAYRSPSTX PTP Delay_Resp Messages Transmitted Transmit Near 0 o aS FOLLOWUPSRX PTP Follow_Up Messages Received Receive Nese o o z E Po silba FOLLOWUPSTxX PTP Follow Up Messages Transmitted Transmit pes s00c MGMTFRAMESRX PTP Management Frames Received Receive Near Telecom Slave MGMTFRAMESTX PTP Management Frames Transmitted Transmit us PDELAYREQSRX PTP Delay Req Messages Received Receive Near PDELAYREQSTX PTP Delay Req Messages Transmitted Transmit ne os o l o o Sl o 5H o ES
496. or EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 48c connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 48c connectors may be used for connection to BITS IN and BITS OUT ports See RJ 48c BITS Con nector Pin Description and Assignments on p 122 Time of Day TOD Port Connection For EMI Class B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections See Time of Day TOD Connector Pin Assignments on p 123 10 MHz Reference Clock CLK In CLK Port Connection A cable terminated with mini coax connector is required for connection to the 10MHz ports Pulse Per Second PPS IN PPS Port Connection A cable terminated with mini coax connector is required for connection to the PPS ports Global Positioning System GPS Port Connection A cable terminated with mini coax connector is required for connection to the GPS port 78 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Tools The tools described below are required for installation Screwdrivers The following screwdrivers may be required during installation aNo 1 Pozi or Phillips screwdriver to attach DC power cables aNo 2 Pozi or Phillips screwdriver to attach chassis rack mounting brackets ESD Protection As the FSP 150SP contains electro static sensiti
497. or LAN See Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision From the Configuration view with the Communications tree expanded Procedure Step 1 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Add a Static Route Continue with the next step Display Static Routes Go to Step 5 Delete Static Route Go to Step 7 Provisioning complete End of Procedure Step 2 Right click on Communications in the selection tree pane and select Add Static Route and the following screen displays see the following figure Installation and Operations Manual 299 Provision Communications a ADVA 7J a amv ws n Optical Networking Figure 176 Add Static Route ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration Bl x BY amp File Application v System i NE 1 H Synchronization Commu Static Route adi Add Static ARP Entry E al Delete Static Route SNMP Delete Static ARP Entry Adminis Edit Source Address Config Step 3 amp Note Step 4 Step 5 Add Static Route Add Static Route Dest IP Address 0 ol okl ol Subnet Mask gt of off off ol Gateway IP Address 0 OF okl ol Interface Name TS1 Metric sg Advertise Route Disabled y Cancel Apply OK Enter select the following data to create a static route Destination IP Address valid IPV4 addr
498. or N A N A communication configuration a Target IP address a Repair IP address connectivity or connectivity or routing problem routing problem b No NTP server NTP server b Switch to Primary NTP Server down Repair NTP server IP Address Conflict IP Address Conflict declared Verify management communication when a DHCP assigned configuration N A CR N A address overlaps with an existing subnet Data Base File Database file transfer is in No action required Not N A N A Transfer In Progress progress Reported SWDL File Transfer Software Download file transfer No action required Not N A N A In Progress is in progress Reported S9PO 10113 SESNEI aiqeqoig pue sjuang suuely Jeldey cor enue y suoneledo pue uogejesu Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued There are multiple management tunnels active Network side is unprotected with tunnel Access side also has tunnel 2 SNMP trap hosts that resolve to 2 different interfaces are supported Enabling SNMP Dying Gasp on a third trap host raises the alarm eds Description NSA Default SA Default LED condition Type Probable Cause Trouble Lenna Procure Notification Notification Indication SWDL Installation Software Download installation No action required Not is N A N A In Progress is in progress Reported SWDL Activation In Software Download activation No action required Not Alarmed N A N
499. or Pin Assign ments on p 118 for connector pin assignment information Avoid the risk of electrical shock Follow local procedures for working with electrical power High voltage may be present in the following A tasks Shut off the power from the power source or turn off the circuit breakers before proceeding Use properly insulated tools when WARNING working with power connections Do not allow any metal objects to connect across power terminals Figure 38 48 VDC Power Supply Unit Connector Y Power input 48 to 60V DC I ue 2 J MGMT LAN TS N l amai Position Connector Release Tab i Gnd at top of power connector 3 2 1 Y Procedure Step 1 Verify that the office DC power supply is set up to deliver the correct operating voltage to the SP 100 48 or 60 VDC nominal Verify that the correct fuse or breaker 4 Amp rating is installed at the power supply source and that power is turned off Repeat for a second 48 VDC power supply source if applicable Step2 Using a volt meter measure the voltages at the source power supply terminals Verify that no voltage is present Step3 Run the DC power cables from the SP 100 to the designated office battery terminals Dress cables as required When performing the following step ensure that the proper polarity of the DC power is observed as miswiring could result in damage to the A SP 100 The SP 1
500. or disabled Note Step5 Verify that all data is entered properly then click on OK End of Procedure 180 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Provision SNMP Access SNMP information is contained in the FSP 750SP 700 SNMP Reference Man ual Data on setting for SNMP settings are located at SNMP on p 461 and the FSP 150SP 100 Technical Descriptions document Provision Access Port Refer to the following procedures for provisioning and editing Access Port Ser vices Access Port is a Copper based LAN or Fiber based LAN Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Service Provisioning Refer to the following for provisioning a port in Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL Mode It is recommended that you pre determine the provisioning details and ensure that they meet the FSP 150SP s provisioning rules prior to making changes to an existing service or placing an additional Access Port into service Ensure that CIR EIR CBS EBS settings are compatible and C Tag S Tag VLAN ID Priority values will not conflict with another Access Port Flow that is in the Assigned state Refer to Access Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 473 to determine the default values value ranges and rules for each option in the following proce dure Procedure Step 1 Observe the current Service Type The status will be used in the fol lowing steps a Select Configuration view b Expand the Syst
501. ority Mode Administration Cancel Apply OK Step 4 If desired enter an Alias Ensure the Administrative State is set to IS Select the desired Network Clock Type Option 1 SDH Regional Clock or Option 2 SONET Regional Clock If desired edit the Wait To Restore WTR time Select the desired Selection Mode QL Mode or Priority Mode Changing the Network Clock Type changes the options available for Sync E functions on BITS IN BITS OUT Access Port and Network amp Port If any of these interfaces were previously configured for Sync E functions the Assumed QL Expected QL and Squelch QL settings Note revert to default values and have to be reconfigured Click on OK Step5 Goto Step 2 188 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit BITS IN Step 6 Right click on BITS IN and select Edit Configuration The following screen displays see Figure 86 on p 189 Figure 86 Edit BITS IN 5 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B Y my 3 System Edit Configuration NE 1 NTESP100 Identification Synchronization A A NE 1 Entity 1D BITS IN 1 1 1 1 NTESP100 Alias SYNC 1 1 1 1 rt TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 ae BITS 1 Administrative Unassigned x Secondary UAS ni Edit Configuration Operational Outage CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Configuration CLK 1 1 1 2 7 d PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Une Type El 7 QL Mode PPS 1 1 1 2 Line Code 1 HDB3 A
502. ors labeled PPS In and PPS External 10MHz Frequency Reference Input and Input Output Connectors labeled CLK In and CLK Observe the following precautions for connecting copper cables The intra building port s of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to intra building or unexposed wiring or cabling only The intra building port s of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the A Outside Plant OSP or its wiring These interfaces are designed for use as intra building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as WARNING described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 5 and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring This product contains electro static sensitive devices A Appropriate anti static handling precautions should be followed i e IEC 61340 5 1 1998 with RJ 45 RJ 48c connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For Class A EMI required sites a Category 5 cable Note terminated with RJ 45 RJ 48c connectors may be used i For Class B EMI required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated pe Optional ground cable on the back panel Installation and Operations Manual 95 Route and Connect Copper Cables ADVA J E VUE wl Y Optical Networking Access Network Interface Copper Cables
503. ort Access Port Right click on the System Sync Domain SYNC 1 1 1 1 and select Delete Sync Reference The following screen displays Figure 101 Delete Sync Reference ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration x BLO aed a File Application v E System El NE 1 E NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 DCN eth0 3G Modem E Synchronization Ej NE 1 E NTESP100 SYNC 1 13 TIME CLOG El BITS 1 E Communications SNMP E Administration Edit Syne Add Syne Edit Sync PPS 1 1 1 1 IN PPS 1 1 1 2 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Delete Sync Reference Identification Entity ID SYNC 1 1 1 1 Status Selected Reference TS 1 1 Clock Mode Locked Sync QL QL STU Reference Reference E BRG None Select Ref Sync Ref Eid Priority Source Source Status Received QL_ Effective QL State Alias k SYNCREF 1 1 1 1 1 1 QL STU Cancel Apply OK Step 56 Select the Radio Button for the Source to delete Click on OK Step 57 Goto Step 2 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 205 ADVA 7J E a m Wa u Enable Software Licensing for SyncJack PTP Feature s Optical Networking Enable Software Licensing for SyncJack PTP Feature s The following Software Licensing Options are available PTP MC BC enables disables Master Clock Boundary Clock license This license supports 1 Clock Probe 1 PTP Clock Probe 1 PTP Network Probe and up to 4 remote slaves at the maxim
504. ort Rx A m O 3 gt 0 al Rx gt g gt SYNC 1 1 1 1 Ethernet x Access Port Tx gt gt 2 O m BITS IN Ethernet m Access Port Tx CLK _ IN 1 10MHz gt TIME CLOCK 1 1 j gt BITS OUT 1 1 CLK_IN 2 10MHz TS 1 1 CLK OUT 10MHz GPS OCXO al PPS OUT 2 O Aa b OUT ToD_OUT PTP CLK TS NTP gt ee LOCAL gt ane 52 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview The following figure shows Clock Probes connectivity Figure 22 Clock Probes Connectivity CLOCK PROBE 1 2 CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Ethernet Access Port Rx Ethernet Access Port Rx BITS IN CLK_IN_1 10MHz CLK_IN 2 10MHz PPS IN_1 PPS_IN 2 SYNC 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 TIME_CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Y AECA SVE JA fe A EA E i Clock selector Clock selector Refernce Source Clock Probe TETIEMTIE Installation and Operations Manual 53 Product Applications ADVA vJ E saa ws Y Optical Networking Figure 23 PTP Clock Probes Connectivity The following figure shows PTP Clock Probes connectivity Ethernet Access Por
505. ositive voltmeter lead to the terminal and the negative voltmeter lead to the terminal Ensure that the voltage between and terminals measures between 36 and 72 VDC Using a volt meter measure the voltage between and GND termi nals Verify that 2 VDC or less is present Replace the cover to the source power terminal strip Dress cables as required Insert the 48 VDC power connector s at the SP 100 The Status LED on the PSU s should be illuminated Green Observe the system STA LED after applying power See Start Up LED Sequence on p 112 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 109 ADVA v 7 VA w YA Connect Power Cables and Apply Power il Networking Connect 24 VDC Power Use the following procedure to connect 24 VDC power to a SP 100 24 VDC variant as required Maximum power consumption for the SP 100 is estimated at 21 watts for SP 100 Refer to Power Supply Unit Connector Pin Assign ments on p 118 for connector pin assignment information Avoid the risk of electrical shock Follow local procedures for working with electrical power High voltage may be present in the following A tasks Shut off the power from the power source or turn off the circuit breakers before proceeding Use properly insulated tools when WARNING working with power connections Do not allow any metal objects to connect across power terminals Figure 39 24 VDC Power Supply Unit Connectors
506. ounce Message Rate 3 1 Packetper 1 Second w Delay Mechanism End To End Max Sync Message Rate 3 32 Packets per Second w Max Slaves Supported E 1 Max Delay Response Message Rate 32 Packets per Second v Max Static Slaves Supported 0 Max Lease Duration 300 60 1000 sec Cancel OK Step 54 Enter the following Master Clock Interface options a a 0 O gt 0 5 Enter the desired Alias and Master Clock Interface Index Set the Administrative state to IS Select the desired IP Protocol Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask Enter the Interface Name mandatory Select enter the desired Priority Mode and Priority Select the desired PTP Clock Type and Delay Mechanism Enter the number of Max Slaves Supported maximum number of Dynamic Slaves maximum number of Static Slaves and Max Static Slaves Supported Select enter the remaining PTP options Select OK Step 55 Expand the Master Clock entity in the selection tree The Master Clock Interface entity is present Step 56 Select the Master Clock Interface entity to verify entry details Installation and Operations Manual 227 a ADVA 7J E a m WM u Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP Optical Networking Step 57 Enter a right click on the Network or Access Port associated with the PTP Flowpoint for the Master Clock Interface source and select Cre ate PTPFP A Create PTP Flow Point screen displays Figure 122
507. oundary Clock Provisioning Order A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Boundary Clock Enable Software Licensing for PTP MC BC Create a flow on the Associated Port must be In Service e Create Edit a Telecom Slave Create Edit a Boundary Clock e Create Edit a Master Clock Interface Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP Create Edit a Master Virtual Port Create Edit a Static Slave or Edit Delete a Dynamic Slave Installation and Operations Manual 495 ADVA A v 7 VA w YA Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies il Networking Master Clock Provisioning Order A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Master Clock Enable Software Licensing for PTP MC BC Create a flow on the Associated Port must be In Service Edit the Time Clock see Synchronization Adda Time Clock Reference see Synchronization Create Edit a Master Clock e Create Edit a Master Clock Interface Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP Create Edit a Master Virtual Port Create Edit a Static Slave or Edit Delete a Dynamic Slave 496 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Create Edi
508. ounting the SP 100 please check the mounting package contents carefully One mounting kit is required the SP 100 Dual Rack Mounting Brack ets Kit part number 1013904011 The following components will be used in this procedure two 19 short rack mounting brackets two dual mounting brackets six M2x6 Phillips A2 screws eight M3x5 CSK POZI A2 screws Four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or Four M6x20 POZI screws and four M6 nuts o 0 o o Oo 1 MECHANICAL LOADING When mounting the equipment in a rack ensure that a hazardous condition is not created by uneven mechanical loading 2 Ensure that reliable grounding of the rack mounted equipment is WARNING maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit Use the following procedure to install dual SP 100s via a Standard or Extended 19 configuration Procedure The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an antistatic sur face If necessary use canned compressed air to blow off any dust particles Step 2 If necessary determine which SP 100 will reside on the left and which will reside on the right Install one of the dual mounting brackets to the right side of the left SP 100 using two M3x5 CSK POZI screws Mount the other dual mounting bracket to the left side of the right SP 100 using two M3x5 CSK POZI screws
509. owing order for Master Clock Enable Software Licensing for Syncjack PTP features Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is In Service Edit the Time Clock Add a Time Clock Reference Create Edit a Master Clock Create Edit a Master Clock Interface Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP Create Edit a Master Virtual Port Create Edit a Static Slave or Edit Delete a Dynamic Slave The provisioning steps described in this section are performed using the PTP application located on the Tool Bar or selectable via the Application menu once the license of this feature has been turned on The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on with at least a Provisioning level user permissions using eVision This Procedure is written as a stand alone operation for configuring PTP but is also called out as a part of the Synchronization procedure see Provision Synchronization on p 186 Note Installation and Operations Manual 209 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP a ADVA vJ E eam wa Optical Networking Procedure Step 1 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Enable Software Licensing for SyncJack PTP feature s See Enable Software Licensing for SyncJack PTP Feature s on p 206
510. pane Select the PTP FLOW PT entity and Configuration tab to view config uration details Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port Step 12 Enter a right click on the SOOC entity and select Create OCS Port A Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port screen displays Figure 106 Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port File Application v E System E NE 1 NTESP100 fp TS 1 1 W SOOC 17 E Alarm Attribute B x BO Create Ordinary Clock Slave Port Edit Init Registers Edit Thresholds Delete Create OCS Port Step 13 Step 14 PTP Flow Point Identification OCS Port ID 1 Alias configuration Cancel Apply OK Enter the following OCS Port options a Enter the desired Alias b Select the PTP Flow Point associated with the clock source c Select OK An OCS PORT entity appears below the associated SOOC entity in the selection tree pane Select the OCS PORT entity to view configuration details and Port State 214 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning amp Note The OC S recovered clock will achieve lock to the selected Master Clock within 5 minutes to 60 minutes depending on network condi tions If no messages have been received the Port State is Listening Once messages have been received from the Master Clock the Port State changes to Uncalibrated When the system determines it is able to calibrate time then the Port State changes to Slave when the
511. pe should be set to Option 2 AIS or LOF will be detected at the BITS interface endpoints if mismatches of the FSP 150SP s 2048 kHz Network Clock Type and the FSP 150SP s line type are provisioned Line Type should be set prior to selecting other BITS IN Configuration options Line Code Sets the BITS line code If Line Type is set to E1 then E1 HDB3 the options available are E1 HDB3 and El AMI If Line E1 AMI Type is set to T1 then the options available are T1 T1 B8ZS B8ZS and T1 AMI If Line Type is set to 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable T1 AMI Frame Format Sets the BITS Frame Format If Line Type is set to E1 El Unframed then the options available are E1 Unframed El CRC4 E1 CRC4 and E1 DualFrame If Line Type is set to T1 then the options available are T1 SuperFrame and T1 Extended SuperFrame If Line Type is set to 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable E1 DualFrame T1 SuperFrame T1 Extended SuperFrame SA Bit Select the Signalling Associated SA Bit SA Bit is only applicable if Line Type is set to E1 None Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 QL Mode Set the Quality Level Mode If Line Type is set to 2048 kHz then this option is not applicable Disabled Enabled 454 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option
512. perations Manual 281 a ADVA 7J E a m WM u Provision Communications Optical Networking Step 31 Determine the next step Current Status Then Did a login screen display Proceed to the next step Did the connection to the NE fail Check that you entered the IP address correctly that the PC is connected to the network DCN and has a valid IP address itself that the NE is connected to the network DCN and that the NE s IP address is correct If necessary return to Step 24 Step 32 Enter a valid login User ID and Password The default login and pass word are root and ChgMeNOW respectively The warning banner will then be displayed Step 33 Click on the Continue button and a display similar to Figure 166 on p 280 appears Step 34 From the File menu select Logout and verify that the browser shows the Login screen Step 35 Return to the serial port session and logoff by entering quit See the following example ADVA comms gt quit Logged Out login Step 36 Disconnect the serial cable from the RS 232 connector on the FSP 150SP End of Procedure Set Up the 3G Modem Using the Serial Port The following procedure assumes that the 3G modem has been installed either directly into the USB port or through a USB cable if required Use this proce dure for DCN connection backup purpose when the DCN eth0 port is disabled or the DCN connection is unavailable and wh
513. perations Provisioning Create a Boundary Clock Perform the following steps for creating a Boundary Clock e Note Note Step 23 Step 24 Prior to creating a Boundary Clock the PTP MC BC feature must be enabled and a Telecom Slave must first be provisioned Step 2 through Step 18 A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time Select the PTP Application on the tool bar or select PTP from the Application Menu Expand the System and NE 1 entities in the selec tion tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Enter a right click on the NE 1 entity and select Create Boundary Clock A Create Boundary Clock window displays Figure 113 Create Boundary Clock File Application System NET Create Telecom Slave M P Create Boundary Clock ACE 1 1 1 Create Master Clock RT 1 1 1 1 Static Slaves Dynamic Slaves DYNAMIC SLAVE 1 1 1 1 NTESP100 E1000 N 1 NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E1000 4 1 ACC PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 3 TS 1 1 Sso0oc 1 1 1 Alarm Attributes Step 25 ax sp Create Boundary Clock Identification Boundary Clock Index E 1 Alias Use Selected Telecom Slave Clock Identity Clock Identity DO8Dea39d2c0000 hex State Administrative Management gt Secondary n a Operational n a Boundary Clock Configuration T51
514. perations Provisioning Figure 141 Database Back Up Status View ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A X B 6 m system Database NE 1 Ej Synchronization Configuration Communications Active 02 02 Standby 01 01 00000 Alarm Attributes File Services Mode Idle File Services Status Success Administration Upgrade Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Step 4 Right click on Database and select Copy to Remote The display is the Copy to Remote File Transmit Method view shown in the figure below Figure 142 Copy Database To Remote Web View File Application y EA B gt 6 E System Copy Database To Remote El NE 1 Ej Synchronization Method Communications Pa Alarm Attributes Administration dE Upgrade Cancel OK Databa Backup Database Default Default Copy to Remote Confiqu Copy from Remote Last Re Restore Database Transfe Activate Database E Software Licensing Step5 Determine the next step Desired File Transfer Method Then Web HTTP Continue with the next step FTP SFTP or SCP Go to Step 7 Step6 Click on OK then click on the underlined here for HTTP File Trans fer You are prompted to open or save the file Select the save option to save the file Installation and Operations Manual 245 Database and Configuration F
515. ph Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Accuracy Export to excel Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results 10000000 Tests Result CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 l Ot N A N A N A Clock Analysis Opening PTP_CLOCK_PROBE 1 1_2014 01 27 csv 2 PTP Clock Probes 200000 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 You have chosen to open 4 History Estimations ie T w El PTP_CLOCK_PROBE 1 1_2014 01 27 csv PTP Network Analysis ee O Pm rm oa which is Microsoft Excel 97 2003 Worksheet PTP Network Probes Z xo from http 10 10 34 16 Syncjack Schedules SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 ee What should Firefox do with this file SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 Result Analysis so E O ca Open with Micrasoft Excel default MTIE comparison Save File Raw Data Collection ive vor Di TY TEO val Tau sec E Do this automatically for files like this from now on Identification T Entity ID PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Name PTPCIkProbel State Completed Event Message Failure No Running Failed Count 0 Mask Failure No Actual Test Start Time 2014 01 27 18 58 56 Mask Crossed Time Ait Actual Test Duration s 599 Mask Margin Failure No Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Mask Margin Crossed Time 0 Reference Expected QL QL NONE Last TIE Result ns 519 PTP Flow Point NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 Time Of Last TIE Result 2014 01 27 19 09 28 Measurement Direction Slave To M
516. port DHCP status set to the desired Go to Step 23 state of Enabled Step 7 Note Step 8 Step 9 Enter the configure communication command A next level prompt will appear For example ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt Usually the IP address and network mask information is supplied by the network administrator Enter configure ethO followed by a valid IP address network mask and default gateway for the DCN network the NE will be connected to For example ADVA comms gt configure eth0 ip address 172 LT LL IS 2552595329970 192317 LLI ADVA comms gt Enter the show ethO command to view the current IP address and net work mask setting for the DCN interface on the SP 100 See the fol lowing example ADVA comms gt show eth0 Name eth0 IP Address 172 17 11 33 Netmask 255 255 255 0 278 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning DHCP Role dhcp client DHCP disabled DHCP Client ID FSP 150SP 100 RIPv2 disabled MTU bytes 1500 Physical Address 00 80 ea 02 62 01 System Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Step 10 Determine the next step Current Status Then Is the IP address and mask wrong Go to Step 8 Is the IP address and mask correct Proceed to the next step Step 11 Step 12 Enter the show system command and verify that HTTP and HTTPS are enabled Determine the next step Current Status Then
517. ports and connectors free from dust When not in use fit Note both connector plugs and sockets with protective caps 5 SFP Interfaces are hot swappable The power to the FSP 150SP does not need to be switched off during the installation of an interface Note Use the following procedure for installing an SFP Interface Repeat the proce dure for each SFP to be installed Procedure Step 1 If so equipped remove the protective cap from the appropriate port on the front panel of the Access Port or Network Port Step 2 Take the SFP Interface out of its packaging and put it on an antistatic surface If necessary use canned compressed air to blow off any dust particles Installation and Operations Manual 101 Install SFPs and Route Optical Cables Optical bal i gt ADVA Step3 Orient the SFP Interface until the duplex LC simplex SC or RJ45 con nector is facing you and the manufacturer s label is toward the Access Port or Network Port port interface s LEDs Electrical Connector Label Latching Mechanism not visible LC Connectors Protective Plug The latching mechanism may differ between SFP Interfaces supplied by ADVA Optical Networking 1 SFP Interfaces can only be properly inserted one way If the inter face does not click when inserted remove it turn it over and reinsert Note 2 Force should not be required to insert a SFP Interface If an interface does not insert easily remove and inspect it
518. pter 4 Operations Provisioning Add a Sync Reference Step 47 For Network Ports Access Ports Telecom Slave BITS IN Right click on the System Sync Domain SYNC 1 1 1 1 and select Add Sync Reference The following screen displays Figure 99 Add Sync Reference l ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B amp B D a S ystem Add Sync Reference NE 1 Synchronization Identification NE 1 SYNCREF Index 1 Alias 3 NTESP100 SYNC Edit Sync TIME BITS 1 ETA d Edit Sync Reference Delete Sync Reference Priority 1 a Sync Reference Sources TS 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 1 IN CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN PPS 1 1 1 2 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Configuration Cancel Apply OK Step 48 Enter an Alias if desired Select the desired Priority Value from the drop down list Select the desired Sync Reference Source from the drop down list For Network and Access Ports to appear in the Sync Reference Sources list they must be configured as fiber For any interface to appear in the Sync Reference Sources list it must have Sync E Mode enabled and the interface must not be Note Unassigned Click on OK Step 49 Repeat Step 47 and Step 48 for each additional Sync entity Step 50 For Network Port Access Port Telecom Slave BITS IN Select the System Sync Domain entity SYNC 1 1 1 1 and the Status tab The Synchronization Reference List displa
519. ptical Net working re pack the equipment in the original carton For details on returning FSP 150SP equipment refer to Returning Equipment on p 81 Unless the equipment is to be installed immediately put all equipment back in the packaging otherwise proceed with the installation End of Procedure 80 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Returning Equipment If you need to return equipment use the following procedure i This product contains electro static sensitive devices Appropriate anti static handling precautions should be followed i e IEC 61340 5 1 1998 If returning equipment to ADVA Optical Networking for repair or amp replacement use the original packaging material for optimum equip ment protection Note Procedure Step 1 Repack the FSP 150SP equipment in the original packaging for opti mum equipment protection Step 2 Contact ADVA Optical Networking for assistance See Obtaining Technical Assistance on p 26 for contact details End of Procedure Install the FSP 150SP This section details the installation procedures for individual FSP 150SP Base Unit A full description of the FSP 150SP components covered can be found in SP 100 Overview on p 23 Component part numbers and technical specifica tions can be found in the FSP 750SP 700 Technical Descriptions document The chassis is designed for passive fanless air cooling See followi
520. ptions User Authorization Privilege Levels e Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Factory Default Parameters and Maximum Bandwidth on p 437 System Configuration Options and Rules on p 445 Network Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 469 Access Port Configuration Options and Rules on p 473 Performance Monitoring Settings on p 478 PTP Configuration Options and Rules on p 495 SyncJack Configuration Options and Rules on p 514 Scheduled SyncJack Activity Settings on p 521 o o o o o o o o Installation and Operations Manual 427 SP 100 Physical Design a ADVA VO E VUE wa Y Optical Networking SP 100 Physical Design Refer to the following for SP 100 component descriptions Physical Design 2 Combo Opto Electrical Ethernet Network Ports Electrical port supports 10 100 1000bps SFP port supports 100 1000bps One RJ 45 console port RS232 for management One 10 100Mbps RJ45 Ethernet port for DCN One USB2 0 port supporting 3G LTE interface for backup or DCN access SP 100 variant with 2 electrical client ports SyncE G 8262 Equipment clock EEC EEC to meet requirements of both Option 1 and Option 2 as per G 8262 One T1 E1 timing input connector front mounted RJ48c One T1 E1 timing output connector front mounted RJ48c One GPS Input connector front mounted SMA TTL 50 ohm impedance One Time of Day ToD front mounted RJ45 RS422 input
521. r PTPINVMSGLEND Length Discards Receive End Sol INEMESTEDD PTP Unknown Master a Near PTPUNKMASTERD Discarde elena PTPUNKDOMAIND O o oer Discards End PTP Multicast H PTPMULTIANNOUNCED Annou e Rg 9 End Discard PTPOOSANNOUNCES PTP Out Of Sequence o y Near Announce Messages End PTP Multi Near FIRMIGI Message Discards jEnd PTPTWOSTEPSYNCD lae EEA TEE a BB Message Discards End BA e up _ Near dt de ge Discards lend PTP Delay Req Near PTPDELAYREQSD Message Discards Receive End oTPPDELAYREC PTP Delay Req Near PTERDELAYRE h ge Discards lEnd PTPPDELAYRSPSD PTP Delay Resp Receive Near Message Discards End PTPPDELAYFOLLOWU Receive Vea End _ Near PTPINVTLVLENSD bread Receive End A PTP Invalid TLV Type _ Near PTPINVTLYT Di A End Average Sync Path ue Near AVGSYNCPD Pes Receive End SVNED Minimum Sync Path secejua Near Lb Delay nsec Receive leg MAXSYNCPD Maximum Sync Path Sand Near Delay nsec End g Average Sync PDV seceiye Near ese i Recelve End MINSYNCPDY ALA e a nsec End manu Near Nv YNCPDY E End AVGMEANPATHDELAY Average Mean Path Near Delay nsec End MINMEANPATHDELAY neath ales End MAXMEANPATHDELAY Maximum Mean Path Near Delay nsec End SUSO age from _ Near BY SOFM Master nsec End Minimum Offset from Near HINGEN Master nsec End PE set from Near MAXOFM End Cancel Apply oK Installation and Operations Manual SyncJack Testing a ADVA VO E emp ws Y Optical Networking
522. r End o o ESMP Multicast Packets Received Receive Near End o o ESO Octets Received Receive Near End o o ESOF Ether Stats Oversize Frames Discarded Transmit Near End o o ESOP Oversize Packets Received Receive NearEnd 37055 3557280 ESP Packets Received Receive Near End o o ESP64 64 Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESP65 65 to 127 Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESP128 128 to 255 Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESP256 256 to 511 Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESPS12 512 to 1023 Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESP1024 1024 to 1518 Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESP1519 1519 to MTU Octets Frames Received Receive Near End o o ESUF Unicast Frames Sent Transmit Near End o o ESUP Undersize Packets Received Receive NearEnd 37055 3557280 L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Discarded Receive Near End o o L2CPFP Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Processed Receive Near End o o UAS Unavailable Seconds Receive Near End 10 10 328 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 198 Exporting 15 Minute PM Counts to Excel i ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring File Application B x EN D AS System E NE 1 Summary 15 Minute 1 Day Thresholds NTESP100 AGATE Network Port E1000 4 1 Filter Y Expore I L ABR RX ABR TX ESBF ESBP ESBS ESC ESCAE ESDE E
523. r applying power See Start Up LED Sequence on p 112 Dress cables as required End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 111 a ADVA v 7 VA w YA Connect Power Cables and Apply Power il Networking Start Up LED Sequence Following Power On the modules in the SP 100 will take several seconds to boot up start up During this time the Status Indicators will indicate where in the boot up and start up sequence that module is The LED function is used for sig naling local operators within visible range the current status of shelves cards and interfaces on ADVA Optical Networking devices A start up condition takes place when a device initially powers up or when the device is set to do a hard reset when triggered by the backplane reset signal The guidelines in this section are implementation specific as cards may support different types of boot sequences depending upon the technology used Figure 40 on p 113 illustrates the LED transitions for a typical device during start up 112 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Figure 40 LED Flow Diagram Power Applied kega Time 12 Volts Available All LEDs Off All Board Supplies Within Tolerances Hardware Ctrl N Slot 200 ms Power Up Delay Slot 200ms Board CPLD FPGA CPU Processor Init EN Card Perform Lamp Test
524. r details The following proce dure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Click on the Maintenance icon or select Maintenance from the application drop down list Step 2 Determine the next step Desired Activity Then Set the current database as the Default Continue with the next Database step Copy the System Default Database to a remote Go to Step 5 site Copy a Default Database from a remote site Go to Step 10 Reset the Default Database to Factory Go to Step 15 Defaults Step3 Expand Administration right click on Default Database and select Save The display is the Save Configuration to System Defaults view shown in the figure below Figure 132 Save Configuration to System Defaults View ES ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v A B gt V E System Save Configuration to System Defaults E NE 1 E Synchronization Save to File communications Take a snapshot of the current configuration database and make it the system i Alarm Attributes default database E Administration Upgrade Cancel OK Database KAEO See ave Default Setti i Copy to Remote Configuratior Last Reset C Transfer Log Copy from Remote New E Software Licensing
525. r for configur mand Line Interface Reference Guide Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Although this document focuses on using the eVision web browser for configur ing and monitoring the SP 100 equivalent SNMP commands may be used The SP 100 SNMP MIB provides a system for remote configuration and manage ment of SP 100 functions For more information regarding the SNMP command structure refer to the FSP 750SP 100 SNMP Reference Manual Syncjack Suite Syncjack is a comprehensive technology for timing distribution monitoring and timing service assurance There are three main functions clock accuracy clock analysis and PTP network analysis Syncjack measures the frequency and phase accuracy relative to the sync reference which can be internal external recovered or from GPS signal Syncjack continuously performs clock analysis including frequency and phase accuracy of packet domain even when a sync reference is unavailable Syncjack also continuously performs PTP network analysis including monitoring and testing on PTP communication path The SP 100 uses three of the tools in Syncjack Clock Probe PTP Clock Probe or PTP Network Probe The Clock Probe is used to measure clock frequency and phase accuracy The PTP Clock Probe is used for PTP clock analysis while the PTP Network Probe is used for network analysis of PTP message transport In order to measure meaningful results the accuracy of the reference used by
526. r is 1 to 32 1 being the most recent For 1 Day history bins this number is 1 e For current and Rollover bins this number is 0 Performance Parameter Counters Each PP is grouped together for a monitored entity and accumulated into e Bins associated with a predefined time period i e 5 minutes 15 Minutes or 1 Day or Rollover Counters for Ethernet managed entities only The user can reset any individual or all PP counters to zero Bins and Bin The following performance bin periods will exist Periods 1 x Current 15 Minute or 5 Minute Bin e 1x Current 1 Day 24 Hour Bin e 32 x Historical 15 Minute or 5 Minute Bins Installation and Operations Manual 323 ADVA fic ca J E VUE wz Y Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Optical Networking 1x Historical 1 Day 24 Hour Bin 1 The 32 Historical 15 Minute Bins provide the most recent 8 hours of performance data 2 The Historical 1 Day Bin provides the performance data from the Note Previous day starting from 12 00am i e midnight 00 00 gt Rollover For Ethernet managed entities only a Rollover Counter is provided This gives Counter the current performance data since monitoring began The counter accumulates until it reaches its maximum size 64 bits When this happens the counter will roll over to zero and begin again Unlike Bins the Rollover Counter is not related to the time of day but to system uptime Perfo
527. rameter xxx 394 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 7 Alarms Events and Probable Causes Error Codes Error Code Response 512 continued Where Why is Value xxx out of range Value xxx out of range xxx MIN yyy MAX Value must be NONE or PUSH Value not supported for xxx VLAN member cannot be specified as Vlan members are not supported for Service Mode xxx VLAN member range must be of the form m n where xxx VLAN members must have a single wild card value xxx VLAN Tag is off but tag is specified Vlan Tags not unique 513 Mandatory attribute missing 514 Attribute cannot be set 515 Attribute not supported 516 Attribute value xxx not supported 517 Invalid MAC address 518 Invalid VLAN tag 519 Invalid password _why_ Where Why is Key invalid or not strong enough Password is same as username 520 Invalid IP Address 521 Invalid Network Mask 522 Outer VLAN Tag Control must be enabled to enable Inner VLAN Tag Control 523 _entityname_ does not exist 524 Attribute not applicable _why_ Where Why is Management Traffic Bridging is enabled Network mask is not applicable for PPP DHCP is not applicable for PPP RIPv2 is not applicable for PPP Installation and Operations Manual 395 Error Codes and System Responses a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking
528. re Licensing Features such as SyncJack Extended Scaled may be enabled or disabled by expanding the Software Licensing entity entering a right click on Feature Management and selecting Edit Feature Viewing Entities in Maintenance View When selecting an entity in Maintenance View Alarm Attributes views are avail able by selecting the associated entity in the view area under the Alarm Attri butes heading Selecting the entity displays the current Notification Code NC assigned to each Alarm Attribute Condition Type see Figure 51 on p 149 148 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Figure 51 Alarm Attributes View of a Network Port SI ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 35 98 Maintenance File Application System E NE 1 E NTESP100 E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Synchronization B x v 5 Alarm Attributes Identification Entity Type Network Port NC CT Loja DIR SA Communications MJ Duplex Mode of Far End Device Unknown Near_ RCVONLY SA E Alarm Attributes CR Link Down Cause Not Determined Near _ RCVONLY SA 1OMHz CLK Port CR __ Link Down Cable Fault Near RCVONLY SA CR Link Down Cable Removed Near RCVONLY SA 3G USB MODEM CR Link Down Auto Negotiation Failed Near __ RCVONLY SA Access Port CR Link Down Near RCVONLY SA BITS In Port MN__ Remote Fault Indication Near RCVONLY SA M
529. red Administrative state b Select the desired GPS generation condition c Enter the Antenna Cable Length in meters 4 5nsec meter is assumed in cable delay calculation d Select OK Step 26 Select the GPS 1 1 1 1 entity to view configuration details and status Installation and Operations Manual 195 ADVA 7J E am Wa u Provision Synchronization Optical Networking Figure 92 GPS Interface Configuration Details and Status S ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x A D D B System Configuration f NE 1 NTESP100 Identification f Synchronization NE 1 Entity ID GPS 1 1 1 1 NTESP100 HEE E SYNC 1 1 1 1 State TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 BITS 1 Administrative IS Secondary ACT BITS IN Operational Normal BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Configuration CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS generation condition 354TS PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Antenna Cable Length m 5 PPS 1 1 1 2 T Status Communications Survey Progress 100 Tracking Satellites 9 SNMP Satellites Usable True Antenna Status Normal PPS Generated True la Administration E Step 27 Goto Step 2 196 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit System Time of Day The following procedure provides instructions for editing the System Time of Day using Local NTP or PTP Clock configuration Step 28 Determine the next step Current Status Then Edit
530. red Priority of this Time Clock Reference c Select the desired Time Clock Reference Source d Select OK Add a second Time Clock Reference if required by repeating Step 44 and Step 45 Select the Time Clock entity and select the Status tab to verify refer ence configuration and status L ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration Step 48 File Application x zA E System NE 1 NTESP100 Synchronization NE 1 NTESP100 SYNC 1 1 1 1 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 BITS 1 BITS IN BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN PPS 1 1 1 2 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Communications SNMP Administration S x AZ Configuration Status Identification Entity ID TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Status Selected Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Clock Mode Locked Clock Class 84 Leap59 False Leap61 False Time Traceability Status Time Locked Utc Offset 35 Current QL QL PRC User Requests Request None Target None Time Clock Reference List Time Ref Eid Priority Source Source Status State TIMEREF 1 1 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference OK Active Go to Step 1 Installation and Operations Manual 225 Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP ADVA VO E aap ws Y Optical Networking Create a Master Clock Perform the following steps for creating a Master Clock Note amp Note Step 49 Step 50 Prior to creating a Master Clock the PTP MC BC fe
531. red by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu expanding System NE 1 and Result Analysis in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the MTIE Comparison entity and selecting Configure Table 63 Configure MTIE Comparison Analysis Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults MTIE Mask Define the predefined MTIE Mask to use for measurements Choices are presented in a drop down list G823 E1 Ssu G823 E1 Sec G823 El Traffic G823 Pdh G824 T1 Sync G824 T1 Traffic G8261 El Case 1 G8261 T1 Case 1 G8261 El Case 2 G8261 EEC Opt1 G8263 G8263 temp G8272 PRTC G8261 1 G8262 EEC Opti G8262 EEC Opti temp G8262 EEC Opt2 G8262 EEC Opti Tolerance Test Result Entity Checkbox Selects the Probes that have been previously scheduled To add a Probe select a Probe from the Test Result Entity list Multiple Probes up to 4 may be selected Any available probes will be displayed in the Test Result list as a checkbox selection Installation and Operations Manual 523 a ADVA 7J E a m Wa u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking Edit Raw Data Collection Parameters Raw Data Collection may be edited by selecting the SyncJack icon on the Tool Bar or selecting SyncJack from the Applications menu exp
532. reen is displayed See Figure 194 on p 326 Installation and Operations Manual 325 a ADVA P We a VA Wel u Network Access Port Performance Monitoring Sores Networking Step 3 Select the desired PM period and click on OK End of Procedure Figure 194 System PM Configuration L ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring File Application A xX D U System Edit PM Configuration By NESE TOO Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 4 1 Entity ID NE 1 Settings PM Interval 15 Minutes x Cancel Apply OK Viewing PM Counts and Threshold Values By selecting a Network or Access Port in the Selection Tree Pane the following tabs are provided in the Details Pane for each port Summary which displays a summary of both transmit and receive statistics See Figure 195 on p 327 for an example view of a Network Port summary 15 Minute or 5 Minute which displays the PM counts in the current 15 Min ute or 5 Minute performance bin See Figure 196 on p 328 for an example view of a Network Port 15 Minute PM counters If the History checkbox is selected the previous 32 periods are also displayed 1 Day which displays the PM counts in the current 1 Day performance bin If the History checkbox is selected the previous period is also displayed Thresholds which displays the details and the thresholds that have been set for each PP See Figure 197 on p 328 for an example vie
533. remaining failed attempts indicated Installation and Operations Manual 309 a ADVA oats A Va E WI wz 8 Provision Communications Optical Networking Figure 188 3G Modem PIN Authentication File Application eB x B YD amp System ERT m ay PIN Authentication E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 ciodod i Entity ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 DCN eth0 AS 8 3G Mor Edit Configuration Operation El Synchroniza E Communicat Frania RIN Input PIN DCN etht Disable PIN 3G pcn Change PIN You have 0 attempts left Managem PIN Authentication SNMP Unlock with PUK E Administration Cancel Apply OK Step 17 Input PIN and click OK If PIN is Enabled and the 3G Modem is unplugged or the system reboots the 3G Modem will be locked and the user will need to re enter PIN authentication If the PIN input fails after three attempts to authenticate PIN the 3G Modem SIM will still be locked and the SIM will need to be unlocked by entering PUK and a new PIN Note Step 19 Step 18 Goto Step 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next step 310 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 19 If a user fails to unlock the SIM via PIN after three failed attempts the SIM needs to be unlocked with PUK Enter a right click on the 3G Modem entity and select Unlock with PUK The following screen dis play
534. ress No action required Not N A N A Progress Reported Network Element 3G USB Modem Link Down Link Down is generated when a Performan Etherjack Diagnostic test physical connection is lost on Repair the port using test results Not Alarmed N A N A the port No SIM Card No SIM card is detected Unplug the 3G modem insert the SIM card into the modem and re insert the 3G modem into the USB Mot Alamed ne WA port Modem is not The modem is not qualified by Install an ADVA Optical Networking qualified ADVA Optical Networking qualified 3G modem DOr Aaimgd MA WA Modem Removed 3G modem is removed from the Re insert ADVA Optical Networking Not Alarmed N A N A USB port qualified 3G modem DCN Port Link Down Cable disconnected cable Check physical cabling MDIX is not fault improper configuration supported on DCN port Check Not Alarmed Not Alarmed N A settings on system to match DCN network requirements NTESP100 Card Communication Communication Failure Equipment is malfunctioning Repair Minor N A N A s po 10113 sesneyd 9 qEqOIdq pue sjuang suuely 19 deyp tOr enue y suonyeledo pue uogejesu Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued n Description NSA Default SA Default LED Gondinon Type Probable Cause Trouble LIeanng Procsoriig Notification Notification Indication Equipment Fault Equipment fault found Equipment is malfunctioning Repair N A Critical S
535. rial Port and a PC and logon using procedure Serial Connection on p 276 Step 2 Enter the show ip interface ethO command to view the current DHCP setting for the DCN interface on the FSP 150SP See the following example ADVA gt show ip interface eth0 Name eth0 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Netmask 255 255 255 255 DHCP Role dhcp client DHCP enabled DHCP Client ID FSP 150SP 100 RIPv2 disabled MTU bytes 1500 MAC Address 00 80 ea 02 62 01 System Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Installation and Operations Manual 277 Provision Communications a ADVA VO E ea wl Y Optical Networking Step3 Determine the next step Current Status Then Is the ethO port DHCP status set to the desired Go to Step 7 state of Disabled Is the ethO port DHCP status set to the desired Go to Step 23 state of Enabled Does the eth0 port DHCP setting need to be Continue with the next changed step Step4 Enter the configure communication command A next level prompt appears Then enter configure ethO dhcp control enabled or dhcp control disabled to set the desired DHCP state For example ADVA gt configure communication ADVA comms gt configure eth0 dhcp control enabled ADVA comms gt Step5 Enter the show eth0 command to verify the changes Step6 Determine the next step Current Status Then Is the ethO port DHCP status set to the desired Go to Step 8 state of Disabled Is the ethO
536. rify that the selected user is the one from whom the lock out is to be removed Click on OK The display updates End of Procedure Configure Remote Authentication The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Expand the System and Administration entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step 2 Right click on Remote Authentication in the selection tree pane and select Edit Remote Authentication and the following screen displays Installation and Operations Manual 179 a ADVA Peat v 7 VA w YA Provision Secure Access ica Networking Figure 82 Edit Remote Authentication File Application alx BD amp System a sy Edit Remote Authentication E NE 1 E Synchronization Remote Authentication Protocol System Level Configuration E Communications SNMP Authentication Protocol NONE NAS IP Address off off oM o Administration Authentication Type gt PAP Accounting Disabled Y E El Users TACAGS Privilege Control Enabled x Access Order Local v Remote ts ee TACACS Default Privilege Not Applicable Securit Edit Remote Authentication Remote Authentication Server 1 Key Generation
537. ring Procedure NSA Default Notification SA Default Notification LED Indication Frequency Offset Frequency Offset The synchronization circuit detected a frequency offset problem with the port s recovered clock The port must be assigned and the port must be a member of the system clock selector list for this condition to exist Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A Output Squelch The port is squelched due to the port s output signal QL being lower than the port s configured Squelch attribute The port s QL Mode attribute must be configured as enabled and the Squelch QL attribute must be configured as anything besides None for this condition to exist Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A Sync Reference Locked Out A Sync Reference has been locked out Usually due to failure configuration changes planned or maintenance operations Test the Locked Out Sync Reference and remove lock out when reference is fully functional again Minor N A N A Sync Reference Forced Switch A forced switch operation has been performed on a Sync Reference Evaluate reason for forced switch operation and when appropriate remove the forced switch Minor N A N A Sync Reference Manual Switch A manual switch operation has been performed on a Sync Reference Evaluate reason for the manual switch operation Minor N A N A
538. riority 1 128 Priority 2 gi 128 Time Clock Eid 3 TIME CLOCK 1 1 1 1 Enter the following Master Clock options Enter the desired Alias and Master Clock Index a Enter the Clock Identity ey Set the Administrative state to IS Enter the PTP Domain Number Priority 1 and Priority 2 based on IEEE 1588v2 e Select the Time Clock EID a oO 226 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning f Select OK The Master Clock entity displays below the network element entity in the Selection Tree Step 52 Select the Master Clock entity to verify entry details Step 53 Enter a right click on the Master Clock entity and select Create Master Clock Interface A Create Master Clock Interface window displays Figure 121 Create Master Clock Interface for Master Clock File Application System NE 1 Edit Mactan cuac a a xL Create Master Clock Interface Identification i 75 Delete Master Clock Interface Index 2 Aar Create Master Clock interface Mike i sooc Telecom Slave Sue Administrative Management Secondary n a Operational n a IP Interface configuration IP Protocol IP4 y Priority Mode None IP Address 0 Subnet Mask ol oh of 0 Interface Name ol o 0 Priority E 0 PTP Clock Type 3 One Step Max Ann
539. rk Clock Type and the SP 100 s line type are provisioned Option 1 SDH Regional Clock Option 2 SONET Regional Clock WTR Time Time delay in minutes from the recovery of a clock 0 12 source to its restoral as usable in an active state 5 Selection Mode Defines what system is used to select the active clock Priority Mode source QL Mode SYNC 1 1 1 1 Add Sync Reference SYNCREF Index Unique identifier of a sync reference entity While the Syncref Index is automatically indexed as sync 4 2 references are added a dropdown list of available 4 indexes is provided for the user to select the desired one Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely A up to 64 characters identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable blank ASCII characters long Priority Sets the priority for a sync reference If the Selection 1 10 Mode is set to Priority Mode this setting is used to 4 determine the sync reference hierarchy Sync Reference Sources Dropdown list of available sync references The Network Port Access Port including Line Card Ports or BITS IN has to be configured for Sync E operation and be in a proper admin state to appear on the dropdown list drop down list of provisioned Sync Reference sources SYNC 1 1 1 1 Edit Sync Reference Note A valid Sync Reference source must first be configured and In Service prior to adding a Sync
540. rmance Parameter Thresholding Each PP has a threshold for each bin period which is configurable for each entity instance The PP count is compared to the configured threshold and if met or exceeded a Threshold Crossing Alert TCA is generated gt f Provisioning a threshold to zero will disable threshold monitoring for A gt that entity Note Each Network Port Access Port and Flow entity type has default thresholds for its PPs which are used when an entity is provisioned The default thresholds are configurable A TCA is only reported once during a bins time period unless it is initialized and then is crossed again Optical Performance Parameter Thresholding Some optical PPs have a unique thresholding mechanism For the PPs Optical Power Transmit OPT and Optical Power Receive OPR a TCA is raised if the PP count varies by a fixed amount from the provisioned threshold higher or lower The target value and the acceptable variance is con figurable by the user 324 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alert Messages When a PP threshold has been met or exceeded a TCA is generated The fol lowing table outlines the attributes that are specified in the TCA message Table 23 Threshold Crossing Alert Attributes Attribute Description Values Entity Identifier The monitored entity s id Variable Monitor T
541. rms and Events Refer to the following table for system alarm conditions and their associated probable cause default Notification Code and suggested trouble clearing proce dure System components include the following subsystems System NTESP100 Card NTESP100 Shelf Synchronization Precision Time Protocol PTP Alarms Network Port and Access Port Alarms Alarm Masking 400 Installation and Operations Manual enue y suoneledo pue uonejesu LO Table 28 System Alarms and Events a Description NSA Default SA Default LED condition Type Probable Cause Trouba AENG ieee Notification Notification Indication System Primary NTP Server Attempt to connect to the 1 Verify that the IP address can be Failed Primary NTP Server failed reached respond to pings by performing both a ping and a trace route from the management tunnel s IP address 2 Verify management Minor N A N A communication configuration a Target IP address a Repair IP address connectivity or connectivity or routing problem routing problem b No NTP server NTP server b Switch to Backup NTP Server down Repair NTP server Backup NTP Server Attempt to connect to the 1 Verify that the IP address can be Failed Backup NTP Server failed reached respond to pings by performing both a ping and a trace route from the management tunnel s IP address 2 Verify management Min
542. rom a GPS receiver Refer to the following table for detailed pin assignments Table 19 TOD RJ 45 Connector and Pin Assignments Pin Number Port Direction Input Port Direction Output T1 T2 T3 PPS_IN PPS_OUT T4 GND GND T5 GND GND T6 PPS_IN PPS_OUT T7 TOD_RX TOD_TX T8 TOD_RX TOD_TX Installation and Operations Manual 123 ADVA P J a WI wz 8 Connector Pin Assignments Optical Networking 124 Installation and Operations Manual ADVA 7J a am WM n Optical Networking Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool Introduction The eVision web browser management tool provides a Graphical User Interface GUI for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM functions The eVi sion provides comprehensive support for fault configuration performance and security functions from a web browser see Minimum System Requirements on p 129 on a computer connected to the DCN port see Figure 43 on p 126 This chapter describes eVision and the features it provides to manage the FSP 150SP equipment The chapter provides the following information logging on and off getting familiar with eVision e eVision Applications descriptions Installation and Operations Manual 125 Introduction a ADVA J E emp wl Y Optical Networking Figure 43 eVision Web Browser Management Tool File Application v E System E NE
543. rowser management tool in Configuration mode System configuration options and rules consist of the following entities which are provided in Table 40 on p 445 System Configuration Network Element NE 1 Configuration NTESP100 Configuration Synchronization Communications SNMP Administration Table 40 System Configuration Settings 00 D0 8B XX XX XX This option is only available if Management Traffic Bridging is enabled mier Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults System Configuration System Edit System CLI Prefix When using CLI this string is displayed at the highest level prompt after logon This string can be up to 64 ADVA printable ASCII characters long but cannot use the space character Provisioning For SP 100 this feature has no effect on normal Autoprov Mode operation The user should not modify the default Autoprov Off setting Autoprov Confirm Management This option is used to enable the management traffic Disabled Traffic Bridging bridging feature When bridging is disabled existing http https telnet and ssh sessions are unresponsive for up to 3 seconds When bridging is enabled existing http Enabled https telnet and ssh sessions are unresponsive for up to 10 seconds Mgmt Traffic This option limits acceptance of DCN packets to those Disabled Bridging Security with an ADVA OUI in the source MAC 00 80 EA XX XX
544. rt EVPL Configuration View 182 Edit Network Interface ss orita ee a wees 184 Edit System Vii ie ao ag ee ab O AE cs oh a Tai ae eh 188 Edit BTS aU a land ae io Ee ee 189 Edit BITSOUT ea aa AR a ores aaa a 190 Edit CLK Interface Configuration 0 00000 e ae 191 Edit PPS 1 1 1 2 Interface Configuration 192 Edit Time of Day Interface Configurati0N 194 Edit GPS Interface Configuration o ooo oo 195 GPS Interface Configuration Details and Status 196 Edit System Time of Day e a AA RRA AA 197 Edit System Time Of Day Local Method 198 Edit System Time Of Day NTP Method 199 Edit System Time Of Day cc a AR AAA ee 200 Edit System Time of Day oooooooo conos 201 Edit Sync E Network Port uso rada A 202 Add Sync Referente ia AAA ee wears 203 Edit SVne Reference viii Pee eel na See es 204 Delete Sync Reference tatra iie nanang a a i a es 205 Edit Feature Management iii ow Swe A 206 Create Telecom Slave ce es 211 Create Slave Only Ordinary Cl0CkK 0 ooo 212 Create PTP FIOW POING ea EEES 213 Create Ordinary Clock Slave PO t o oooooooo 214 OCS Port Configuration Status Unclalibrated 215 Installation and Operations Manual 15 a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Figure 108 Network Port PTP Flow Point Statistics 216 Figure 109 SOOC Statist
545. rvice state i e it inherits the properties described above The additional characteristics associated with this state is that maintenance operations are allowed to be performed against an entity in this state which may affect user data or management data Maintenance state operations include things like Loopback Etherjack diagnostic etc Disabled this is ALSO an Out of Service state i e it inherits the proper ties described above The additional characteristics associated with an entity in this state is that no user data traffic passes The intended use of this state is to allow the user traffic to be disabled while still preserving management connectivity with the entity Unassigned this state is essentially equivalent to an entity being deleted An entity in this state is not factored into any of the rules checking and will not be alarmed or carry traffic The Administrative State must first be set to Unassigned state prior to changing the Service Type of a Network Port or Access Port Administration State Model Details It should be noted that the Management Maintenance and Disabled state are ALL members of the Out Of Service OOS state An entity transitional between any of these three states does not have any impact on it s Parent or Child entities The equipment Administrative state model will only utilize the In service and Management states 430 Installation and Operations Manual Ch
546. s Figure 189 Unlock 3G Modem with PUK File Application v x 5 D Syst A Syste Unlock with PUK E NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Entity ID 3G DCN 1 1 1 1 DCN etho ADE 3G Madara SS i i i Operation l Synchron Edit Configuration p E Communic Enable PIN Input PUK a _ DCN Disable PIN New PIN 3G DCI Change PIN Confirm New PIN E Manag PIN Authentication SNMP Unlock with PUK Notice Undefined variable info in Zopt htdocs comms Modemutil php on line 195 Ej Administration Cancel Apply OK Step 20 Input PUK and the New PIN then repeat the new PIN to confirm the input Click OK amp If PUK input fails to unlock SIM after 10 attempts contact the wireless ISP to unlock the SIM Note Step 21 Observe the 3G Networking information by expanding the Communi cations entity under System and selecting 3G DCN Figure 190 3G Networking Information ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x B gt 6 E System 3G DCN E NE 1 El NTESP100 3G Networking E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Name cellular MTU 0 DCN etho IP Address 0 0 0 0 DNS 1 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 DNS 2 0 0 0 0 3G Modem Ej Synchronization E Communications Step 22 To verify connection to the SP 100 via the 3G networking IP address continue with the next step Otherwise go to Step 5 to observe the current configuration and SIM status to determine the next st
547. s 1 PTP network Probe PDV statistics e Sync Delivery Tools o 1588v2 Ordinary Slave o 1588v2 Boundary Clock o 1588v2 Grand Master Monitoring of Active master and redundant masters of the downstream PTP Slave e Topology discovery SP 100 may be installed in the synchronization Network via one of the following main operation modes 32 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Tapping Mode Refer to the following figure for an overview of Tapping Mode interconnectivity and the following description of its function Figure 6 Tapping Mode Operation Master Mirrored Port VLAN Mirrored PTP packets Mirroring Port VLAN NID OOB Manag 10M_out Min 1PPS_out 1PPS_in BITS_out TOD BITS_in Eth2 SyncProbe Cell Site Networking requirements NID must support mirroring Clock Accuracy Measures the accuracy of the incoming SyncE clock with respect to a mea surement reference timing signal Clock Analysis Estimates the accuracy of the phase and frequency recovered by the Slave clock under test with respect to a reference timing signal based on tz time stamps in mirrored Delay_Req messages Can also estimate the accuracy of the Master based on t4 timestamps in mirrored Sync messages Installation and Operations Manual 33 ADVA Va E am Wa u Parallel Mode Optical Networking PTP Network Analysis Provides performance metrics for
548. s condition primitive to exist Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A Sync QL Mismatch Synchronization Quality Level Mismatch The TS receives SSM messages whose specified Quality Level is lower than the Expected QL The TS s QL Mode attribute must be configured as enabled and the Expected QL attribute must be configured as anything besides None for this condition to exist Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A Frequency Offset Frequency Offset The synchronization circuit detected a frequency offset problem with the TS s recovered clock The TS must be assigned and the TS must be a member of the system clock selector list for this condition to exist Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A Sync QL Invalid Synchronization Quality Level Invalid Verify and troubleshoot clock reference Minor N A N A Sync Reference Locked Out A Sync Reference has been locked out Usually due to failure configuration changes planned or maintenance operations Test the Locked Out Sync Reference and remove lock out when reference is fully functional again Minor N A N A Bunea ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold seInquiy wey BuIy10MI9N e911dO am awe A WAU jenueyy suonyeledo pue uoneljeysu GLY Table 30 Telecom Slave Alarms Continued ae Descrip
549. s 326 Figure 195 Summary PM Counts View of a Network Port 327 Figure 196 15 Minute PM Counts View of a Network Port 328 Figure 197 Current PM Threshold View of a Network Port 328 Figure 198 Exporting 15 Minute PM Counts to Excel 329 Figure 199 15 Minute PM Counts Exported to Excel 330 Figure 200 Initialize PM Registers Pane 0 0 o ooooo ooo o 331 Figure 201 Edit PM Threshold View of a Network Port Part 1 332 Figure 202 Edit PM Threshold View of a Network Port Part 2 333 Figure 203 Summary PM Counts View of a PTP Flowpoint 338 Figure 204 15 Minute PM Counts View of a PTP Flowpoint 339 Figure 205 Current PM Threshold View of a PTP Flowpoint 339 Figure 206 Exporting 15 Minute PM Counts to Excel 340 Figure 207 Initialize PTP Flowpoint PM Registers Pane 341 Figure 208 Edit PM Threshold View of AaSOOC oo ooo ooo 343 Figure 209 SyncJack Network Element View o oo 344 Figure 210 Edit Raw Data Server nvidia ra A 347 Figure 211 Create Clock Probe VieW 0 oo o 348 Figure 212 Clock Probe Status Tab lt lt o ooo 350 Figure 213 Create Synclack Schedule caiw a caw e een a 350 Figure 214 View Clock Probe State Running ooo ee eae 352 Figure 215 View Clock Probe State Completed
550. s Transmitted PTP Signaling Messages Transmitted PTP Sync Messages Transmitted Unknown PTP Messages Transmitted ooroo messages See the next two figures Figure 109 SOOC Statistics Tab ADVA FSP 150 P 150SP 100 PTP File Application A x 5 D D System e Configuration Raw PTP Messages E NE 1 NTESP100 Emity ISO E 1000 N 1 Summary 5 Minute 1Day Thresholds NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E 7 in00 ket ele aa _ Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds E TS 1 1 Receive Statistics FE S0O0C 1 1 1 ESO Average Mean Path Delay nsec 55 PTP Delay Req Message Discards o Average Offset from Master nsec 4 PTP Delay Resp Message Discards o EJ Alarm Attributes Average Sync PDV nsec 1 PTP Follow up Message Discards 0 Average Sync Path Delay nsec 57 PTP Invalid Message Length Discards 0 Maximum Mean Path Delay nsec 60 PTP Invalid TLV Length Discards o Maximum Offset from Master nsec 14 PTP Invalid TLY Type Discards 0 Maximum Sync PDV nsec 8 PTP Management Message Discards o Maximum Sync Path Delay nsec 68 PTP Multicast Announce Message Discards 0 Minimurn Mean Path Delay nsec 52 PTP Multicast Sync Message Discards o Minimum Offset from Master nsec o PTP Out Of Sequence Announce Messages o Minimum Sync PDY nsec o PTP Two Step Sync Message Discards o Minimum Sync Path Delay nsec 44 PTP Unknown Domain Discards o PTP Delay Follow up Message Discards 0 PTP Unknown Master Disc
551. s after which Authentication communication with this server fails This option is only 2 to 10 Server 1 to 3 applicable if Authentication Protocol is set to RADIUS 2 Timeout Remote The maximum number of tries that will be attempted Authentication with this server 0Oto5 Server 1 to 3 3 Retries 466 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Description Option Settings High 4 2 3 7 8 User Name must be 6 to 32 characters in length and no spaces allowed Password must be 12 to 32 characters in length Password must contain only alphanumeric and special characters _ and must not begin with Password must contain upper and lower case characters at least 2 special characters and at least 1 digit Password must not contain more than 2 letters or digits repeated consecutively Password must not contain a sequence of 3 con secutive alphanumeric characters in ascending or descending order Password must not be the same as the User Name Password must not be password passwOrd in lower upper or mixed case Medium 4 2 3 7 8 User Name must be 1 to 32 characters in length and no spaces allowed Password must be 8 to 32 characters in length Password must contain only alphanumeric and special characters _ and must not begin with Password must contai
552. s repeated consecutively 6 Password must not contain a sequence of 3 consecutive alphanumeric characters in ascending or descending order 7 Password must not be the same as the user name 8 Password must not be password passwDrd in lower upper or mixed case 1 User Name must be 1 to 32 characters in length and no spaces allowed 2 Password must be 1 to 32 characters in length 3 Password must contain only alphanumeric and special characters _ and must not begin with Step 2 To change the Policy Strength select the desired setting from the Strength drop down list then click on OK End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 175 ADVA 7J E team WN u Provision Secure Access Optical Networking Configure Local Users The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Expand the System Administration Users and Local entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step2 Determine the next step Current Status Then Entering a new user Continue with the next step Editing data other than the password for an Go to Step 5 existing user Editing just the password for an existing user Goto Step
553. s tab to view test results in tabular format Scroll over to determine if any thresholds have been crossed Figure 219 Clock Probe Result Tests Tab FSP 150 EMS SP100 34 16 SyncJack File Application a xXx D System En Status Tests TIE TE Graph _ Recent TIE TE Graph Clock Accuracy Tests Result Clock Probes Name Probe ID TestID Reference Source Start time Duration Mask Cross Margin Cross Mask Margin iledCount MeasurementType CLOCK PROBE 1 1 ClkProbet 1 fot GPS 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 2014 01 24 22 00 31 899 Not Available Not Available G823 Pdh 0 Frequency History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes History Estimations TS 1 1 PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes Synejack Schedules SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Result Analysis MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection Step 17 Select the TIE Graph tab Test results are provided in a TIE Graph Installation and Operations Manual 355 a ADVA VO a DMI wa SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Figure 220 Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph B File Application x amp gt 6 eae Status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph f Clock Accuracy Clock Probes 30 CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 24 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 Clock Analysis PTP Clock Probes 18 PTP C
554. secs 502 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 49 Create Edit SOOC Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Master Delay Response Message Rate Create only Master Delay Response Message Rate 1 Packet Per Second 2 Packets Per Second 4 Packets Per Second 8 Packets Per Second 16 Packets Per Second 32 Packets Per Second 64 Packets Per Second 128 Packets Per Second Master Delay Response Receipt Timeout Master Delay Response Receipt Timeout 2 255 secs Master Sync Message Rate Create only Master Sync Message Rate 1 Packet Per Second 2 Packets Per Second 4 Packets Per Second 8 Packets Per Second 16 Packets Per Second 32 Packets Per Second 64 Packets Per Second 128 Packets Per Second Master Sync Receipt Timeout Master Sync Receipt Timeout 2 255 secs Master Lease Duration Master Lease Duration Create only 60 1000 secs 300 Installation and Operations Manual 503 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E emp wz Y Optical Networking Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP Once a SOOC Boundary Clock or Master Clock has been created a PTP Flow Point PTPFP may be created by expanding the NTESP100 entity in the Selec tion Tree entering
555. sed in ethO Interface Name the SNMPv1 TRAP PDUs as the Agent s IP Address Configured Management Tunnel entries DCN eth0 Edit Configuration IP Address IP Address for the Data Communications Network This option is not applicable if DHCP is set to Enabled 192 168 0 2 and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Client Netmask Defines the subnet mask for the Data Communications Network This option is not applicable if DHCP is set to Enabled and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Client If DHCP is Enabled and DHCP A 2020 Role is set to DHCP Server the Netmask determines the number of IP addresses available for assignment RIPv2 Allows setting disabling of Routing Information Enabled Protocol V2 packets Disabled DHCP Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Enabled is enabled or disabled If this interface is set to Enabled and DHCP Role is set to DHCP Client the SP 100 sends a broadcast query requesting IP Disabled address information from a DHCP server DHCP Role Defines whether Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Server Role is as a server or a client Servers assign IP addresses Clients receive addresses This option is only applicable if DHCP is set to Enabled If the DHCP Role is set to DHCP Server the user DHCP Client must Disable and then Enable DHCP for the initialization of the server function IP Address range to take place DHCP Client ID Option to enable inserting a DHCP Client ID in DHCP Disabled Control messages when the DHCP Role
556. ser either recommended or otherwise If further details are required on the use of a particular program please refer to the documentation supplied with it Regarding login user names and passwords The default password for access to the management interface is ChgMeNow This password is used on first access to a the root netadmin or user account b an account which has been changed by an administrator When logging in using the default password a password change is enforced This minimizes possible exposure restricts access to the system and thereby increases system security See Configure Local Users on Page 4 176 for details on changing a password All account names and passwords are case sensitive When using the local password file for user authentication a login account is locked for a period of 5 minutes after 3 unsuccessful login attempts Installation and Operations Manual 275 a ADVA 7J E a m WAI u Provision Communications Optical Networking Serial Connection Information on using CLI commands utilizing the serial port are found in the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Interface Reference Guide Procedure To make a serial connection to the FSP 150SP perform the following steps Step 1 Ensure that a physical serial connection from a PC or Laptop to the FSP 150SP RS 232 connector has been established see Serial Console Port Connection on p 118 Step 2 Start a serial terminal emulation program
557. ser can select auto negotiation or manual configuration Auto 1000 Full Copper If the port is an Access Port configured as a Sync E Auto 1000 Full Reference then it must be configured as Auto 1000 Full Master aave Auto 1000 Full Slave Auto 100 Full Auto 10 Full 100 Full 10 Full Configured Sets the configured speed for the access interface The Auto 1000 Full Speed Access user can select auto negotiation or manual configuration 1000 Full Port Fiber 100 Full Auto Diagnostic Enables or disables the automatic Cable Diagnostic tests Enabled copper when the cable is removed from the port Disabled Drop Eligibility Enables or disables Drop Eligibility Enabled Indicator Disabled Service Type Defines the service type for this Access port Service type EVPL is Ethernet Virtual Private Line EVPL AFP Defines the Acceptable Frame Policy See the FSP AFP Tagged 150SP 100 Technical Descriptions document AFP Untagged AFP All QinQ Defines the Stacked Ethertype to be used to inter operate Ethertype with Queue in Queue frames with other vendors Only 0 hex editable if Q in Q EtherType Override is enabled QinQ Enables or disables editing the Q in Q EtherType Enabled EtherType Disabled Override Port Shaping Enables or Disables Access Port Shaping Port shaping Enabled limits the output traffic rate to a value below the Disabled provisioned negotiated physical port speed Shaping is useful to limit the burst size of the traffic being offered t
558. sists of the physical installation of hardware which includes preparing for installation mounting the FSP 150SP connecting cables and powering up the equipment Only suitably qualified personnel may install FSP 150SP equipment It is recommended that personnel installing the FSP 150SP be trained and authorized by ADVA Optical Networking The training necessary to install operate and service the FSP 150SP includes the following amp as a minimum background information on optical fiber communication systems Note e safety information concerning the laser classification system and the hazard levels of the FSP 150SP guidance on the safe use of the FSP 150SP equipment Installation and Operations Manual 73 Physical Installation a ADVA 7J E saa wa Y Optical Networking To successfully install and commission a FSP 150SP the following sections and the steps must be followed in the order that they are given Observe the fol lowing precautions when performing the installation tasks in this chapter Invisible Laser Radiation 1 The FSP 150SP is a class 1 laser product when equipped with Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP modules approved by ADVA Optical Networking 2 Do NOT stare into the beam of any optical e g SFP Interface or view directly with optical instruments 3 SFP Interfaces contain laser emitters on the front of the unit oper ating at a wavelength of 850 1310 1550 1610nm and
559. smit Near 4 4 variance from the configured OPT End threshold that does not result in generating a TCA For example if OPT is 80 and OPR VAR is 4 no TCA is generated if OPT is between 76 and 84 Applicable only if the media type is Fiber TEMP Temperature for the physical layer None Near 0 0 expressed in Celsius End UAS2 Unavailable Seconds Used by Receive Near 0 0 Network Service Management Systems to End 1 Valid only when the port is configured to use the fiber interfaces 2 Any second that is deemed UAS for the port will also be UAS for all the EVCs on that port Installation and Operations Manual 487 a ADVA 7J E am WN u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking Precision Time Protocol Flow Monitored Types The following performance parameters and associated default settings are for each of the thresholds which are supported on PTP Flows The following PMs are accessed via the Precision Time Protocol application when PTP Flow Points are created Table 44 PTP Flow Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings a or 5 15 1 Monitored Type Definition Direction Location Min Day ANNOUNCESRX PTP Announce Messages Receive NearEnd 0 0 Received ANNOUNCESTX PTP Announce Messages Transmit NearEnd 0 0 Transmitted DELAYREQSRX PTP Delay_Req Messages Receive NearEnd 0 0 Received DELAYREQSTX
560. ss B required sites a Category 6 or 7 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors is required for all metallic interface connections For EMI Class A required sites a Category 5 cable terminated with RJ 45 connectors may be used for connection to a TOD port See Time of Day TOD Connector Pin Assignments on p 123 Procedure Step 1 Route the TOD cable from the SP 100 to the appropriate location Dress cables as required Step 2 Connect the one end of the TOD cable to the appropriate location of the clocking device or cross connect panel Step 3 Connect the TOD cable to the TOD connector on the front panel of the SP 100 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 99 a ADVA 7J E a m Wea u Install SFPs and Route Optical Cables Optical Networking Install SFPs and Route Optical Cables Use the following information and procedures to install SFP interfaces and con nect optical cables to the Network Ports and Access Ports as required Install SFP Interfaces Each optical port of a SP 100 Service Module accepts a SFP Interface depend ing on customer requirements The interfaces are inserted into the appropriate ports on the front panel of each Service Module ADVA Optical Networking strongly encourages the use of ADVA Optical Net working sourced SFPs No support will be provided for systems that use SFPs other than those sourced by ADVA Optical Networking The SFP contains a software key that is checked
561. ss Port Step 44 Expand the NE 1 directly underneath the System entity and NTESP100 entities in the selection tree pane Right click on the desired Network or Access Port and select Edit Sync E A screen similar to the following displays see Figure 98 on p 202 pos If the port is an Access Port configured as a 1000Base T electrical interface then it must be configured as Auto 1000 Full Slave Note Figure 98 Edit Sync E Network Port 5 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x ER D D System Edit Sync E NE 1 NTESP100 Identification E1000 4 E1000 Edit Configuration Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 ocn co Alias 3G Modem Configuration Synchronization Communications Sync E Mode Disabled w Assumed QL GL EEC1 SNMP QL Mode Disabled Expected QL QL NONE x Administration Status Received QL QL NSUPP Transmit QL QL NSUPP Cancel Apply OK Step 45 Select the desired Configuration settings for Sync E Mode QL Mode Assumed QL and Expected QL 5 If using SDH Option 1 and QL Mode is disabled an Assumed QL other than None must be selected Note Click on OK Step 46 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Are there other Network or Access Ports to Go to Step 44 configure for Sync E Add Sync E reference s Go to Step 47 Other Go to Step 2 202 Installation and Operations Manual Cha
562. ssociated PTP Flow Point is set to OC Slave then Slave to Master or Master to Slave may be selected If the Flow Point Type of the associated PTP Flow Point is set to OC Master then only Slave to Master selection is allowed Reference the signal reference for this Clock Probe The available references are populated in a drop down list Reference Expected QL clock quality level of the selected reference The available QLs are provided in a drop down list MTIE Mask select the desired MTIE Mask from the drop down list Mask Margin enter the desired Mask Margin as a percentage from 0 to 99 Raw Data Collection If Raw Data Collection Server has been provi sioned enable or disable raw data to be sent to a remote raw data collection server Measurement Type select the measurement type Frequency or Phase Select OK Expand PTP Clock Probes in the Selection Tree The newly created PTP Clock Probe entity is present Select the newly created PTP Clock Probe entity to verify entry and connection status see Figure 226 on p 362 If any Failures are indi cated troubleshoot and clear the failure as necessary All PTP Clock Probes must use the same reference A PTP Clock Probe can be edited after creation by right clicking on the entity name and selecting Edit PTP Clock Probe All fields except the PTP Clock Probe Index can be edited Once a probe is scheduled it cannot be modified or deleted Installation and
563. ssumed QL TOD 1 1 1 1 Frame Format E1CRC4 x Expected QL QL NONE y GPS 1 1 1 1 SA Bit Bit4 Communications SNMP Status Administration Received QL QL NSUPP Cancel Apply OK Step 7 Enter an Alias if desired Select the desired Administrative State Select the desired Configuration settings starting with Line Type as the Line Type selection changes the options available for Line Code Frame Format SA Bit and QL Mode If using SDH Option 1 E1 and 2048 kHz are supported If using SONET Option 2 T1 is supported Line type line code frame format and SA bit for E1 settings for amp BITS IN and BITS OUT are shared Changing one changes the other For SDH Option 1 if QL Mode is Disabled Assumed QL must be Note setto a value other than None BITS will not show up as a potential synchronization reference if the administration state is set to Unassigned Click on OK Step 8 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Configure BITS OUT Go to Step 9 Other Go to Step 2 Installation and Operations Manual 189 ADVA 7J E team Waza u Provision Synchronization Optical Networking Edit BITS OUT Step9 Right click on BITS OUT and select Edit Configuration The following screen displays see Figure 87 on p 190 Figure 87 Edit BITS OUT ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x EA D D m System Edit Configuration NE 1
564. stallation and Operations Manual 359 ADVA P Va E am WM u SyncJack Testing Optical Networking Performing Clock Analysis SyncJack Clock Analysis measures the quality of timestamps generated by the clock under test The procedure for performing Clock Analysis assumes that SP 100 is properly connected to the clock inputs to be measured and the appro priate SP 100 interfaces have been configured See Provisioning the SP 100 on p 153 amp The Slave clock under test must populate the origin timestamp t3 in Delay_Req messages in order to allow monitoring Note amp This procedure requires a PTP FlowPoint To create one see Provision Precision Time Protocol PTP on p 208 Note Procedure Step 1 Select the SyncJack icon or select SyncJack from the Applications menu then expand the System folder in the selection tree Step 2 Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the Clock Analysis entity Step 3 Enter a right click on PTP Clock Probes in the selection tree and select Create Clock Probe A Create PTP Clock Probe pane appears Figure 225 Create PTP Clock Probe View File Application v a xX B YO amp E System Create Ptp Clock Probe Ej NE 1 E Clock Accuracy Identification Clock Probes ee History Results Ptp Clock Probe Index 1 Ej Clock Analysis Name TS 1 1 PTP Flowpoint NET PTP FLOW PT 1 1 1 1 1 E PTP Network Analysis IP Version 1P
565. stallation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 237 Edit Telecom Slave Statistics Summary View ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application AA System By Configuration Statistics E NE 1 E Clock Accuracy Entity ID TS 1 1 E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results SA MN CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 Total time clock recovery Score 3 0 E Clock Analysis H Total time clock recovery Score 4 0 E PTP Clock Probes PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 El History Estimations PTP CLOCK PROBE RESULT Tesi El PTP Network Analysis PTP Network Probes E Synejack Schedules Summary 15 Minute 1Day Thresholds Automatic Refresh Every 5 Seconds Receive Statistics Total time phase recovery Score 3 Total time phase recovery Score 4 Total time phase recovery Score 5 Total time clock recovery Score 5 7662 Figure 238 Edit Telecom Slave Analysis View ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application v A x 5 D D E System Edit Telecom Slave Analysis E NE 1 Clock Accuracy Configuration E Clock Analysis Frequency Recovery Target G823 PDH Tratfic y PTP Clock Probes pip cloek prabe i21 Phase Recovery Target _500 ns History Estimations PTP Clock Probe Result 1 1 1 Cancel Apply gt OK Oss PTP Net PTPN Init Registers
566. stalled in an Temp Industrial environment units can be stacked 1 high and must be mounted as a single unit only Dual unit mounting in an Temp environment should not be implemented When units are installed in a C Temp Commercial environment units can be stacked 4 high If it is necessary to install a single SP 100 unit in an Temp environment or 4 rows of SP 100s in a C Temp environment above other heat producing components it is recommended that a heat deflector is installed below the SP 100 s If it is necessary to install heat sensitive equipment above a single SP 100 unit in an Temp environment or 4 rows of SP 100s in a C Temp environment it is recommended that a heat deflector is installed above the SP 100 s e Has the rack been correctly leveled and secured to the floor If appropriate has the rack been grounded by a Safety Ground Cable according to local office policy Are the appropriate rack wall mounting kit s at hand If the FSP 150SP is to be mounted on a wall Is there sufficient clearance on either side of the chassis so that the air vents are not obscured when the chassis is positioned e Is there sufficient clearance between the unit along the wall to perform the necessary work If the FSP 150SP is to be provisioned locally is AC power available for a main tenance PC Is AC or 48 VDC or 24VDC power available for the FSP 150SP Are the following AC and or DC power input specifications
567. step monitoring and troubleshooting see the following figure Installation and Operations Manual 23 ADVA TM vJ E VUE we Y Optical Networking Figure 2 Syncjack GUI Concept d SYNCJACK GLOBAL gt i S Wane eee SS A A crock ANALYSIS el TEMES ac l ANALYSIS l pea tas i i li me Hear Hae at Ht 1 i 1 1 1 l eet Hf i ieee 1 hacen Het 1 A 4 z j i TS1 1 l O PTP Network probe1 1 eer O EE Network usability rnc e prefiero 1 l ind 1 t I ease eit 1 A S _ i Y 1 1 h nd ihe ra i od 1 I l 1 ae Vai it 1 wat at 1 l 1 ten rt l i gt Po 1 1 oe i i 1 1 ME 1 AER Mask eat nn l it De i Vass l oi ibe l 1 ae E j l Mi l e hea l i 1 1 2 J The first layer provides global indication of the Synchronization status The second layer shows performance indication of each reporting tool The third layer provides detailed information for fault localization of performance analysis 24 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview Document Overview This manual is provided to help you install configure and operate the SP 100 This manual provides an introduction to the SP 100 a description of its opera tion and a step by step walk through of the installation process This version of the FSP 750SP 100 Installation and Oper
568. supported Slave IP Address Entry for the IP address of the Slave Clock Entry is a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address according to the IP 0 0 0 0 Installation and Operations Manual 519 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 61 Create Edit PTP Clock Probe Parameter Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Reference Defines the reference source for the PTP Clock Network Probe References available are presented in a Port 1 1 1 1 drop down list Access Port 1 1 1 1 BITS IN 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 1 CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 PPS 1 1 1 2 GPS 1 1 1 1 SYNC 1 1 1 1 TS 1 1 Reference Expected QL Defines the expected Quality Level of the QL NONE selected reference for the PTP Network Probe QL PRC Available QL levels are presented in a drop down QL SSU A lia QL SSU B QL EEC1 RPDV fw Low ns Residual Packet Delay Variation RPDV 1 4294967295 forward low in nanoseconds 200 RPDV fw Medium ns Residual Packet Delay Variation forward medium in nanoseconds Must be higher than the RPDV fw Low setting and lower than the RPDV fw High setting 1 4294967295 500 RPDV fw High ns Residual Packet Delay Variation forward high 1 4294967295 RPDV rev Medium ns in nanoseconds 2000 RPDV rev Low ns Residual Packet Delay Variation reverse low i
569. surement Direction Slave To Master Raw Data Collection Disabled IP Version IPy4 Measurement Type Frequency Master IP Address 10 206 206 1 Slave IP Address 10 206 206 6 MTIE Mask GB23 Pdh Mask Margin Bis Scheduler None Reference Failure No TimeStamp Failure No Step 7 Enter a right click on SyncJack Schedules in the selection tree and select Create Schedule A Create Schedule pane appears Figure 227 Create SyncJack Schedule File Application A x 5 D ty System E sy Create Schedule E NE 1 Ej Clock Accuracy Identification E Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 History Results Ej Clock Analysis Schedule Index 1 1 255 Activity ID Schedule Parameters El PTP Clock Probes Schedule Type Duration Forever Fixed i sees PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Start Time History Estimations Future yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Teir E PTP Network Analysis Schedule SJ Test Items E PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Synejack Schedules E Result MI creo Scheie MTIE comparison Raw Data Collection CLOCK PROBE 1 1 PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Cancel Apply OK Step 8 Enter the following to configure the SyncJack Schedule Schedule Index EID for the schedule Enter a number from 1 to 255 362 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Activity ID a text id
570. t 0 Actual Test Start Time 2014 02 04 23 49 31 Actual Test Duration s 22 Reference GPS 1 1 1 1 Reference Expected QL OL NONE Source TS 1 1 Source Type Frequency MTIE Mask 6823 Pdh Mask Margin Scheduler SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Source Failure No Reference Failure No Step 12 Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe continued prog ress while the test is running Observe the Actual Test Duration s status to determine how long the test has been running how much time is left before completion if a Fixed Duration was scheduled Step 13 Click on the PTP Clock Probe entity again to observe when the test is completed see the following figure 352 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Figure 215 View Clock Probe State Completed p VA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 SyncJack File Application BD KX BB oS e a status Tests TIE TE Graph Recent TIE TE Graph do Tests Result E History Results 10000000 Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Gi NA WA WA CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 2 1000000 0 2 N A N A N A Clock Analysis oi WES us pS El 16 oK oK PTP Clock Probes 100000 2 20 ok OK PTP CLOCK PROBE 1 1 s 20 OK OK History Estimations c 10 zo ANS ok aa g 20 To
571. t ing the Master Clock Interface up to 4 If the PTP Extended Remote Slave fea ture is enabled the number of remote slaves is extended from 4 to up to 16 or up to 32 if the max rate of each is up to 64 at the maximum PTP message rate To delete a Static Slave enter a right click on the Static Slave entity and select Delete Table 56 Create Edit Static Slave Parameter Settings Description Option Settings identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable iia Applicable Rules Defaults Static Remote The index number of the Static Remote Slave 4 4 Slave Index or 1 16 Create only Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely up to 64 characters Message Rate Create only Message Negotiation is Disabled Announce Message Rate cannot be greater than the associated MCI Max Announce Message Rate ASCII characters long blank Administrative Enables or disables the Static Remote Slave See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management Static Remote Valid IPv4 address The IP address must be unique Slave IP across all IP interfaces in the system Address oon Create only Unicast Unicast Message Negotiation Enabled Message Negotiation Disabled Create only Announce Announce Message Rate Applicable only if Unicast 1 Packet Per 16 Seconds 1 Packet Per 8 Seconds 1 Packet Per 4 Seconds 1 Packet Per 2 Seconds
572. t Rx Ethernet Access Port Rx BITS IN CLK_IN_1 10MHz CLK_IN 2 10MHz PPS_IN 1 PPS_IN 2 SYNC 1 1 1 1 li ESA LA Clock selector PTP Flow 1 PTP Flow2 PTP Flow3 PTP Flow 4 Refernce gt PTP Clock Probel I p TEMTIEMTIE gt gt PTP Clock Probe 1 2 p TH TIB MTIE gt PTP Clock Probe 1 3 TETIEMTIE gt E d PTP Clock Probe 1 4 p TETIEMTIE 54 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview The following figure shows PTP Network Probes connectivity Figure 24 PTP Network Probes Connectivity BITS_IN CLK_IN_1 10MHz CLK_IN 2 10MHz PPS_IN_1 PPS_IN 2 SYNC 1 1 1 1 lt Clock selector PTP Flow Referno PTP Network Probe Network Statistics FPP RPDV Installation and Operations Manual 55 Product Applications ADVA J E emp wl Y Optical Networking Port Loopback To assist with Ethernet service fault isolation and ADVA Optical Networking s SP 100 supports port facility loopbacks on the Access and Network ports This feature allows the oper
573. t Traffic Bridging implements an Ethernet Bridge between the ethO and all configured Management Tunnels allowing a single IP address for all management interfaces on the system and eliminates the need for static routes routing protocols or proxy ARP in an SNE GNE configuration and sup ports MAC learning and flooding of un learned MAC addresses The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN See Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision From the Configuration view with the Communications and Management Tun nels entities expanded Procedure Step 1 Determine the next step Management Traffic Bridging Enabled Then No Continue with the next step Yes Go to Step 9 amp If Management Traffic Bridging is desired it must first be enabled at the System level See Provision System Options on p 162 Note Step 2 Determine the next step Desired Function Then Create a management tunnel Continue with the next step Display a management tunnel Go to Step 5 Edit a management tunnel Go to Step 6 Delete a management tunnel Go to Step 8 Step 3 Provisioning complete End of Procedure Right click on NE 1 in the selection tree pane under Management Tunnels select Create Tunnel and the following screen displays
574. t a Telecom Slave A Telecom Slave may be created by selecting the PTP icon on the Tool Bar or selecting PTP from the Applications menu expanding the system folder in the Selection Tree entering a right click on the NE 1 entity and selecting Create Telecom Slave To edit a Telecom Slave enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity TS 1 1 and select Edit To delete a Telecom Slave enter a right click on the Telecom Slave entity and select Delete Table 48 Create Edit Telecom Slave Parameter Settings Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Alias A text and or number string the user enters to uniquely identify this entity This string can be up to 64 printable up to 64 characters Two way default delay request response will be used and in this mode frequency and or phase time can be recovered ASCII characters long blank Clock Identity Clock Identity of the Telecom Slave Entry is 16 HEX varies Create only characters Administrative Enables or disables the Telecom Slave See Entity IS State State Descriptions on p 430 Management PTP Domain This PTP domain number is used in the domain Number Number Create field of the PTP header in the PTP packet This PTP 0 127 only domain number is used when PTP packet is generated by the SOOC Time Holdover Selects the time holdover accuracy in nanoseconds for 500 Accuracy the telecom sl
575. t a valid IP mask NTP is disabled Only xxx can be created Only xxx IP route can be created Only 1 xxx Flow may exist on Port Only 1 is allowed as MA COMP index Only InService and Management states are valid Out of Range 0 7 Out of Range 1 100 Out of Range xxx MAX Out of Range xxx MIN yyy MAX Password cannot be password or passwOrd Password contains character sequence Password same as username Password too long Password too short Pathname is empty Periodic schedule cannot have forever duration Port belongs to different unit Port disposition is set to xxx or yyy Port does not exist for xxx Port must be Network Port 1 Port service type is xxx Port shaping is disabled Port speed of 10 Mbps requires SyncE to be disabled Priority Out Of Range xxx MIN yyy MAX Probe s Source MEP Protocol cannot be none Installation and Operations Manual 393 a ADVA YQ a uv w Y Error Codes and System Responses Optical Networking Error Code Response 512 Where Why is continued QL Mode is enabled disable QL Mode first ROLLOVER Route to subnet host xxx already exists Sample time cannot be more than xxx Duration time Sample time cannot be more than Duration time Schedule list contains entity that is not a probe Schedule list is empty Schedule type conflicts with other attribute Security Level of user xxx is yyy Selected MEP destination type does not allow to specify
576. t an Ordinary Clock Slave OCS Port The TS once provisioned and Locked the OCS Port State changes to Slave state may be added as a Sync Reference to the System Sync Domain SYNC 1 1 1 1 selected as a timing source for Boundary Clock and or Time Clock These entities should be disabled until the OC S has achieved lock OCS Port State Slave selected as an output reference for the PPS PPS 1 1 1 1 or Time of Day TOD 1 1 1 1 output ports selected as the Source TOD Clock of System Time of Day ToD Boundary Clock Provisioning Order A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time PTP configuration options are created in the following order for Boundary Clock Enable Software Licensing for Syncjack PTP features Ensure that the Port associated with the PTP Flow Point is In Service Edit an Ethernet Port s Delay Asymmetry setting Create Edit a Telecom Slave 208 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Create Edit a Boundary Clock Create Edit a Master Clock Interface Create Edit a PTP Flow Point PTPFP Create Edit a Master Virtual Port Create Edit a Static Slave or Edit Delete a Dynamic Slave Master Clock Provisioning Order A Boundary Clock and Master Clock cannot co exist Only one or the other may be provisioned and In Service at a time PTP configuration options are created in the foll
577. t unicast transmission signaling seconds messages Priority Mode Defines the Priority Mode It identifies the lookup criteria None for the priority mapping table This table is used to TOS perform priority based lookup to determine low and DSCP normal latency and or to change the priority value Installation and Operations Manual 501 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 49 Create Edit SOOC Parameter Settings Continued Description Option Settings Parameter Applicable Rules Defaults Priority Priority Map Index Selection The following ranges of 0 Indexes are 0 7 if Priority Mode is set to TOS 0 63 if 0 7 TOS Priority Map Mode is set to DSCP 0 63 DSCP Master Clock Master Clock Type Type One Step Create only Master Delay Master Delay Mechanism Mechanism End to End Create only Master Priority Master Priority 0 0 7 Master Protocol Master Protocol IPv4 Create only Master Clock IP Master Clock IP Address Address 0 0 0 0 Create only Master Master Announce Message Rate 1 Packet Per 16 Announce Seconds Message Rate 1 Packet Per 8 Create only Seconds 1 Packet Per 4 Seconds 1 Packet Per 2 Seconds 1 Packet Per 1 Second 2 Packets Per 1 Second 4 Packets Per 1 Second 8 Packets Per 1 Second Master Announce Receipt Timeout Master Announce Receipt Timeout 2 255
578. ta Transfer Cancel OK Defa Install a Conf Validate s Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Ej Software Licensing Step 17 Select the Cancel Previous Scheduled Activation radio button and Click OK End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 161 a ADVA A Va a a uwv waza Provision System Options Optical Networking Provision System Options All System options are provisioned using the Configuration application by click ing on the Configuration icon or selecting Configuration from the application drop down list Configure System Identity and Configuration The following procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit Sys tem and the following screen displays Figure 62 Edit System Fie Application A x E D a Syst Edit System El cisien I E s Edit Security Log Identity E a Edit Alarm Log S Edit Audit Log Name at FSP 150SP 100 A Description FSP 150SP 100 Eat Syslog Location SP100 35 98 Edit ACL Contact SP100 35 98 Edit Banner CLI Prefix ADVA Edit NTP Restore System Defaults Configuration Provisioning Mode i Autoprov
579. tatus or replace unit pes Red Equipment Does Not Equipment does not match the Verify the provisioning against the Status Match Provisioning provisioning equipment Re provision as N A Critical Blinking necessary Red Equipment Equipment is provisioned but Replace equipment or place out of Provisioned But equipment is removed service Removed N A Critical N A Test Alarm A test alarm is generated to Ensure alarm propagates properly Major N A N A check alarm propagation NTESP100 Shelf Over Temperature Equipment has exceeded the Check ambient temperature and l Status temperature limit gt 90 C adjust Verify that airflow Minor N A Red requirements are met Under Temperature System temperature has Check ambient temperature and dropped below the minimum adjust Status e a threshold Minar ms Red lt 50 C Synchronization 10MHz CLK Port Sync Reference Sync Reference Failed This Ensure that the CLK cable is con Failed alarm reported when the CLK nected port is used as system Synchro nization input The port must be Not Alarmed N A N A assigned and the port must be a member of the system clock selector list for this condition to exist Buues D ejqno pue asneo ajqeqold s nquyy wey BuIy10MI18N e911dO am Aa E A WAU enue y suonyeledo pue uoneyjeysu SOV Table 28 System Alarms and Events Continued Condition Type Description Probable Cause Trouble Clea
580. ted 5 Provisioning a threshold to zero disables threshold monitoring for that entity Note Each Network Port and Access Port entity type has default thresholds for its PPs which are used when an entity is provisioned The default thresholds are configurable Procedure Step 1 Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Moni toring from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Step2 Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the NTESP100 entity Step3 Enter a right click on the desired Network Port or Access Port in the selection tree and select Edit Thresholds An Edit Thresholds pane appears see Figure 201 on p 332 Step4 Select the Network Port or Access Port entity and then select OK An Edit Thresholds pane appears see Figure 202 on p 333 Step5 Edit the desired thresholds for the desired Monitored Type Use slid ing bars to view data as required Select OK End of Procedure Figure 201 Edit PM Threshold View of a Network Port Part 1 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Performance Monitoring v Application v A x D W System Edit Thresholds NE 1 NTESP100 Identification E1000 N e1000 4 1__ Mit Registers Entity ID NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 ntity Selection Entity NETWORK PORT 1 1 1 1 Cancel OK 332 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitorin
581. ted Empty Communications Ca Gateway IP Address 192 168 0 0 Name cellular IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 3G DCN MTU 0 DNS 1 0 0 0 0 DNS 2 0 0 0 0 Management None Created None Created Tunnels Installation and Operations Manual 441 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E emp ws Y Optical Networking Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Functional Area Entity SNMP Parameter Default Setting Community Names public private Communities Access Type read only public read write private Target Addresses Target Addresses tal Exist at System efaults Target Parameters Target Parameters None Exist at System Defaults SNMP User ADMIN User Name ADMIN Engine ID local Security Name ADMIN Security Level No Authentication User Access Type Read Write Authentication Protocol None Privacy Protocol None SNMP User MONITOR User Name MONITOR Engine ID local Security Name MONITOR Security Level No Authentication User Access Type Read Write Authentication Protocol None Privacy Protocol None pene SNMP User OPERATOR User Name OPERATOR Engine ID local Security Name OPERATOR Security Level No Authentication User Access Type Read Write Authentication Protocol None Privacy Protocol None SNMP User PROVISION User Name PROVISION Engine ID local Secur
582. ted Total Number of Memory Segments 1027 Exhausted Total Number of VLAN Lookups 1028 Exhausted Total Number of EVC Lookups 1029 Insufficient bandwidth for CIR EIR settings 1280 Rules check failed 1281 Rules check failed _errstr_ SOFTWARE RELATED 4096 Invalid message qualifier 4097 Resource is busy Installation and Operations Manual 397 Error Codes and System Responses a ADVA J E saa wl Y Optical Networking Error Code Response 4098 Database operation failed _why_ Where Why is Db State is not ok Can t reopen System Default Db Build Shadow Tree failed 4099 Loading data from database failed 4100 User transaction does not exist 4101 User transaction has not been validated 4102 Request has been timed out 4103 Transaction id is 0 4104 Cannot get global system data 4105 Invalid application event 4106 No FROM port found for NE 4107 Configfile operation failed 4108 Loading data from configfile failed _why_ Where Why is Can t open configfile _configFileName_failed_command Init load failed Login failed 8000 MEIATTR_TIMING_SOURCE 8001 MEIATTR_MAX_SLAVE_SUPPORTED 8002 MEIATTR_MAX_STATIC_SLAVE_SUPPORTED 8003 MEIATTR_SLAVE_ANNOUNCE_MSG_RATE 8004 MEIATTR_SLAVE_SYNC_MSG_RATE 8005 MEIATTR_SLAVE_DELAY_RESP_MSG_RATE 8006 MEIATTR_ALIAS_ERROR 8007 MEIATTR_TIME_CLOCK_EID 8008 MEIATTR_TIMEREF
583. tention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit Use the following procedure to install a single SP 100 via a Standard or Extended 19 configuration Procedure The steps for fitting the appropriate mounting brackets are as follows Step 1 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an antistatic sur face If necessary use canned compressed air to blow off any dust particles Step2 Secure the 19 mounting bracket short and 19 mounting bracket long to the SP 100 using four M3X5 CSK POZI screws If installing in a Standard configuration set the brackets flush with the SP 100 If installing in an Extended configuration line up the rear set of bracket holes to the SP 100 so that the SP 100 is recessed from the front of the bracket See Figure 31 on p 85 Step 3 Mount the SP 100 to the 19 rack with four 12 24 x 0 5 phillips screws or four M6x20 screws and four M6 nuts 84 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Figure 31 Mounting a Single SP 100 via EXT 19 Configuration 19 Mounting Bracket Short 12 24x0 5 Screws or M6x20 POZI Screws and M6 Nuts 19 Mounting Bracket Long 12 24x0 5 Screws or M6x20 POZI Screws and M6 Nuts End of Procedure Mounting a Single SP 100 via a 23 Standard or Extended ETSI Extended Configuration Prior to mounting the SP 100 please check the mounting package
584. ter is assumed in cable 0 100 delay calculation Communications Static Route Add Static Route see Note Dest IP Address Defines the IP address of the destination The valid values are the IPv4 addresses The IP address of 0 0 0 0 is reserved for default routes You can only 0 0 0 0 enter the static default route of 0 0 0 0 if the system default router is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Defines the subnet mask for the destination The valid values are IPv4 mask If you set the IP address to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the only available choice for subnet mask is oO 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Defines the IP address of the next hop for remote Address destinations For the routes reachable directly from 0 0 0 0 the specified interface this value should be 0 0 0 0 Interface Name Defines the interface to create a static route ethO Configured Management Tunnel entries Metric Metric of the route 0 to 65 535 Advertise Route Defines whether the static route is to be advertised or Enabled not When selected the static route is advertised on Disabled Note To view Static Routes select the Static Routes tab To delete an existing Static Route enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete Static Route then select the desired static route to delete then select OK Static ARP Entry Add Static ARP Entry see Note IP Address IP Address to be added to the Address Resolution 0 0 0 0 Protocol entr
585. th inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP1024 EtherStats Packets 1024 to 1518 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP1519 EtherStats Packets 1519 to 1536 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 1519 and 1536 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESUF EtherStats Unicast Frames The Unicast Transmit Near 0 0 Frames Sent in the egress direction If End there is link down during the interval the bin is not accessible ESUP EtherStats Undersize Packets The total Receive Near 37055 3557280 number of packets received that were less End than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Installation and Operations Manual 481 a ADVA 7J E a m WN u Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies Optical Networking oa Description Direction Pata aN 1 Day L2CPFD Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0 Discarded Number of Layer 2 Control End Protocol Frames discarded on the interface L2CPFP Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames Receive Near 0 0 Processed Number of Layer 2 Control End Prot
586. th FSP 150SP equipment and must be ordered sepa rately See the FSP 750SP 100 Technical Descriptions document An optional Earth Frame Ground connection may be attached to the Earth ter minal point located at the rear of the unit Each FSP 150SP unit is supplied with an Earth Terminal Kit and a 10 foot 16 gauge grounding cable terminated with a round connector at one end and a slotted connector at the other end During installation the ground cable is terminated at the rear of the unit at one end and terminated at a site designated frame mounting point or ground bar at the other end A terminal tab is provided in the Earth Terminal Kit for optional push on connection to the Earth terminal point Use fiber optic cables that support distances up to the maximum drive distance Both single mode 9 125um and multi mode 50 125um and 62 5 125um are supported Note that the fiber type SM MM must match the SFP module type Do fiber optic cables have correct connectors Are the appropriate Small Form Factor Plugables SFPs identified and supplied for each applicable Network Access interface Refer to the FSP 150 Ethernet Access Compatibility Matrix document which contains up to date information on which SFPs are certified for each product This document may be obtained through ADVA Technical Support or via the product support site on www adva optical com Is there fiber for each applicable Network Access interface 76 Instal
587. the Clock Probe Status Tab data are available in a history entity To view history results expand the History Results entity under the Clock Probe entity and select the desired Clock Probe Result s to view A Clock Probe History Result pane displays Figure 222 View Clock Probe History Result ADVA FSP 150 EMS SP100 34 16 SyncJack File Application X BY amp System ResulE NE 1 Clock Accuracy Clock Probes CLOCK PROBE 1 1 Tests Result History Results 0000000 Senem z Interval sec Result ns Mask Stat Margin Stat CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 aA WA wa NA Clock Analysis 1000000 0 2 NA N A NA PTP Clock Probes as WA NA NA p T 16 OK OK History Estimations 00000 2 16 o oK TS 1 1 5 16 OK OK PTP Network Analysis T 10 24 OK OK id E ae 20 24 oK oK PTP Network Probes m 50 oe OR Synejack Schedules 5 iiss 100 40 OK OK SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 200 40 CK t oK Result Anal 500 40 ok oK a ENTES m 1000 N A na N A Raw Data Collection 2000 N A N A N A dr A 5000 N A na N A s 10000 N A N A N A 20000 N A N A N A 50000 NA N A N A tp bal bue opr mpo 100000 N A na N A Tau sec Add To Result Analysis Ll Identification Entity ID CLOCK PROBE RESULT 1 1 1 Alias ClkProbe1 Running Failed Count 0 Mask Failure No Actual Test Start Time 2014 01 24 22 00 31 Mask Crossed Time 0 Actual Test Durat
588. the Interface Name IP Address and Subnet Mask The IP address and Interface Name q blank must be unique across all IP interfaces in the system The interface name is from 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters no spaces This entry is mandatory Priority Mode Defines the Priority Mode It identifies the lookup criteria None Create only for the priority mapping table This table is used to TOS perform priority based lookup to determine low and normal latency and or to change the priority value DSCP Priority Create Priority Map Index Selection The following ranges of 0 only Indexes are 0 7 if Priority Mode is set to TOS 0 63 if 0 7 TOS Priority Map Mode is set to DSCP 0 63 DSCP Clock Type Selects the Clock Type Only One Step is applicable in O i ne Step Create only this release Delay Selects the Delay Mechanism Only End to End is Mechanism applicable in this release End to End Create only 508 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 54 Create Edit Master Clock Interface Parameter Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Max Slaves Supported Create only Maximum Slaves Supported Max Static Slaves Supported Create only Maximum Static Slaves Supported Max Announce Message Rate Create only Maximum Announce Message Rate 1 Packet Per 16 Seconds 1 Packet Per 8 Seconds 1 Pa
589. the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Right click on System in the selection tree pane and select Edit NTP and the following screen displays Figure 69 Edit NTP File Application v la x 5 D E a ee Edit System Edit NTP A Edit Security Log a ora Edit Alarm Log 3 Edit Audit Log State Disabled y Primary Server Edit Syslog NTP Type Unicast Backup Server a Polling Interval 6 seconds Edit ACL E Sy Edit Banner Switch server a Edit NTP E Restore System Defaults NES SEINE Primary SYNC 1 1 1 1 E BITS 1 BITS IN BITS OUT Cancel Apply OK Step 2 The NTP function can be Enabled or Disabled If Enabled there should be at least a Primary Server designated by setting its IP address There can also be an IP address designated for a Backup Server The Polling Interval can be set to 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024 seconds The default is 16 seconds If both a Primary and Backup Server are configured the user can make either one Active After editing the NTP information click on OK The display will update to show the edited information End of Procedure 168 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Provision NE 1 Common Units Configure NE 1 FSP 150SP 100 The follo
590. the following items for this procedure PC with a serial communications port e g COM1 or COM2 2 Category 5 LAN Cables with RJ 45 connectors DB 9 to RJ 45 converter ADVA Optical Networking PN 2036904035 01 or 1036904035 see Table 65 RJ 45 RS 232 Serial Console Port and DB9 Adapter Pin Assignments on p 575 Acommunications program like TeraTerm Pro Web a free software termi nal emulator for MS Windows An Internet browser e g Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater IE 8 0 recom mended or Firefox 2 0 or greater Firefox 3 6 recommended etc This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a Stand alone procedure This procedure is intended to be used during the commissioning process or used as a stand alone procedure The default DHCP setting for the FSP 150SP DCN port is disabled and as a DHCP client This procedure is offered as the best way to set up the FSP 150SP IP address using the CLI command structure by connecting to the RS 232 Serial Console Port RS 232 on the SP 100 and your PC If a DHCP server is not available for the DCN port then DHCP must be disabled Note that by default DHCP is dis abled on the DCN and as a DHCP client The IP addresses and Subnet Masks entries shown in these procedures are for example purposes only The information you enter should be determined from local sources Procedure Step 1 Connect a serial cable between the FSP 150SP RS 232 Se
591. tings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Step 8 Note Copy Database To Remote Method File Transfer Method File Transfer Server IP User ID User Password Remote File Cancel OK Enter the data required in the screen to access the FTP SFTP or SCP server and begin the file transfer process and click on OK It is assumed that the user knows the IP address of the FTP SFTP or SCP server has a valid user ID and password and knows the path and file name of the software file to transfer The file transfer will begin and show a screen similar to the following displays 246 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Figure 144 File Transfer Progress Screen ES ADVA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Maintenance File Application v Z B gt 6 E System Transfer Upgrade NE 1 Synchronization Communications E Alarm Attributes Administration Upgrade Mode Software Download Status In progress 27 Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log Software Licensing E Step9 When the Status changes from Progress to Success the file has been transferred End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 247 Database and Configuration Files ADVA VO E aap we Y Opt
592. tion NSA Default SA Default LED ESPOSOS Probable Cause Trouble Ela recedure Notification Notification Indication Sync Reference A forced switch operation has been Evaluate reason for forced Forced Switch performed on a Sync Reference switch operation and when Minor N A N A appropriate remove the forced switch Sync Reference A manual switch operation has been Evaluate reason for the Manual Switch performed on a Sync Reference manual switch operation Minor N A N A Sync Reference A Sync Reference has been restored and is No Action Required Wait To Restore in WTR timing Minor MA MA All SOOCs All Slave Only Ordinary Clocks SOOC Verify and troubleshoot clock Failed failed The OC S Virtual Port in a Faulty reference N A Critical N A state or a PTSF Alarm exists on the SOOC Telecom Slave Telecom Slave in Freerun The recovered Verify and troubleshoot clock in Freerun clock is the same as the internal oscillator reference and provisioning NR N A N A and the Telecom Slave is in freerun Telecom Slave Telecom Slave in Holdover The recovered Verify and troubleshoot clock in Holdover clock is in holdover as there is no valid reference and provisioning NR N A N A SOOC to support clock recovery SJ No Time SyncJack is not locked to a reference time Verify and troubleshoot clock N A Major N A Lock source reference and provisioning SJ No SyncJack is not locked to a reference Verify and troubleshoot clock ee N A Major N A
593. tion OK Cancel NE 1 Edit Name This is a text string containing a meaningful description of the NE The NE Name must start with a letter end with a letter or digit and have as interior characters only letters digits and hyphens Maximum length is 256 characters Upper and lower case characters are allowed up to 256 characters FSP150SP 100 Location This is a text string entry that should specify where the system is located with enough detail so that operations personnel can easily locate the device Maximum length is 256 characters up to 256 characters blank Contact This is a text string entry that should specify the name and contact information of the individual responsible for the administration of the system Maximum length is 256 characters up to 256 characters blank Installation and Operations Manual 449 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies ADVA VO E saa we Y Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults CLI Prefix When using CLI this string is displayed when navigating to the Network Element level menu This up to 64 characters string can be up to 64 printable ASCII characters long NE 1 but cannot use the space character Administrative Defines the NE administrative state IS is In Service IS State and
594. tion delay estimation signaling and management purposes The PTP protocol enables accurate time transfer between two entities clocks by transporting 80 bit timestamps in time critical packets Each timestamp rep resents the time at which the packet was sent and has a 1 nanosecond granu larity Through the use of the CorrectionField in the PTP header each timestamp can support sub nanosecond granularity The periodic transmission of messages is the basis for frequency recovery while the distribution of the timestamp values allows for accurate phase time recovery Precision Time Protocol PTP is a packet based method dedicated to the distri bution of time and or frequency over Packet Switched Networks PSNs It is based on a master slave relationship between the time sources and their time recipients A time source herein referred to as a master Grand Master master clock or Ordinary Clock Master OC M distributes its time and frequency to downstream nodes referred to as s aves slave clocks Slave Only Ordinary Clocks SOOC via PTP messages Since the transport mechanism is packet based each intermediate node e g router switch aggregation Network Element NE etc between the master and slave clocks introduces packet delay variation PDV in the transport of the PTP messages This creates uncer tainty and error in a slave clock s recovered time and frequency The Grandmaster is the primary time reference source in the pac
595. tion and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Show To view the contents of a configuration file use the show ConfigFile command as in ADVA config file gt show configfile configfile4 File Name configfile4 Description Context below DO NOT EDIT THIS LINE FILE TYPE CONFIGURATION FILE CLI ACCESS PORT 1 1 1 1 Edit home network element ne 1 configure nte ntesp100 1 1 1 configure access port access 1 1 1 1 CLI FLOW 1 1 1 6 1 Create home network element ne 1 configure nte ntesp100 1 1 1 configure access port access 1 1 1 1 end home admin config file ADVA config file gt Description To enter or edit the description of a configuration file use the description com mand as in description lt configfile name gt lt description gt The description can be up to 127 characters long ASCII with no spaces unless in quotes or question marks Example ADVA config file gt description configfile4 set access6 to EVPL and create a flow ADVA config file gt list File Name Description AS aa ooo 3222222222222 22225222 2 R e configfile2 lpsu and root configfile3 configfile4 ADVA config file gt Installation and Operations Manual 257 ADVA 7J E a m WN u Database and Configuration Files Optical Networking Remove To delete a configuration file use the remove command as in remove lt configfile
596. tion settings are shown in order as seen when using the eVision web browser management tool Refer to Table 39 on p 444 for Network port maximum bandwidth Access port maximum bandwidth and default Access port CIR PIR values For default TCA settings refer to Performance Monitoring Settings on p 478 Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Functional Area Entity Parameter Default Setting CLI Prefix ADVA Provisioning Mode Autoprov Management Traffic Disabled Bridging Mgmt Traffic Bridging Disabled Security Proxy ARP Disabled Date Time variable FTP Disabled HTTP Enabled System HTTPS Enabled Coarigdraion SSL Cipher Strength Low SCP Enabled System Serial Port Enabled Serial Port Auto Log Off Enabled SFTP Enabled SSH Enabled Telnet Disabled Authentication Traps Disabled CLI Security Prompt Disabled SNMP Engine ID 12 Octets variable Security Log Syslog Disabled Syslog Disabled la Local Logging Enabled Syslog Disabled ees Local Logging Enabled Installation and Operations Manual 437 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Table 38 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Functional Area Entity Parameter Default Setting Log Server 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 Syslo
597. tity For example if the Equipment entity state is edited in such a way that it affects the Port s Administration state the above rules will apply such that the effect is propagated to the Port s child entities also Due to the many to one relationship between Port entities and EVCs Flows the following behaviors is implemented editing a Port entity from Management Maintenance or Disabled to In Ser vice will result in ALL EVCs Flows that are children of that Port being changed from Management to In Service If an EVC was Unassigned prior to the edit of the Port state it will remain Unassigned editing a Port entity from Unassigned to Management Maintenance or Dis abled will result in ALL EVCs Flows that are children of that Port being changed to Management 432 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules editing a Port entity from Unassigned to In Service will result in ALL EVCs Flows that are children of that Port being changed to In Service editing a Port entity from Unassigned to Disabled will result in ALL EVCs Flows that are children of that Port being changed to In Service This effect will also occur as a result of an edit of the EVC s parent f entity For example if the Port entity state is edited in such a way that it affects the EVC s Admin state the above rules will apply such that Note the effect is propagated to the EVC s child entities also Oper
598. tor labeled PPS front mounted SMB TTL 50 ohm impedance External 10MHz Frequency Reference Input labeled CLK IN front mounted SMB External 10MHz Frequency Reference Input Output labeled CLK front mounted SMB GPS Input connector front mounted SMA TTL 50 ohm impedance Installation and Operations Manual 63 a ADVA 7J E am Wwe u SP 100 Hardware Description Optical Networking e Rack Mounting Brackets ordered separately One non redundant Power Supply Unit PSU Figure 29 SP 100 1U Chassis MGMT LAN BITS Out CLKIN PPSIN CLK PPS GPS ee Chassis Dimensions Cable Tie Support Integral Mounting Brackets BITS In Single fiber bi directional and dual fiber and copper Small Form factor Plugga ble SFP transceivers are supported ADVA Optical Networking strongly encourages the use of ADVA Optical Networking sourced SFPs No support is provided for systems that use SFPs other than those sourced by ADVA Optical Networking The SFP contains a software key that is checked by the SP 100 service module base unit prior to initialization This check is performed to ensure that only ADVA Optical Networking approved SFP units are used SFP units are individually qualified by ADVA Optical Networking to ensure the quality of the optical output and conformance to the MultiSour
599. tored types and associated default settings for Network Port Access Port Flows Shapers QOS Policer ESA and RADIUS Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types on p 478 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types on p 483 e Precision Time Protocol Flow Monitored Types on p 488 For RADIUS PM counters may be displayed and registers may be initialized Note Refer to Network Access Port Performance Monitoring on p 321 for proce dures on viewing editing and initializing PMs using eVision Ethernet Network Port Monitored Types RADIUS PM counts are only applicable where Remote Authentication Protocol is set to RADIUS The following performance parameters are related to an Ethernet Network port a Description Direction m ya 1 Day ABR RX Average Bit Rate Received The average Receive Near 0 0 bit rate received over the specific interval End in the ingress direction If there is link down during the interval the bin is not accessible This counter is based on RMON etherStatsOctets ABR TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted The Transmit Near 0 0 average bit rate transmitted over a specific End interval in the egress direction based on Bytes Sent If there is link down during the interval the bin is not accessible ESBF EtherStats Broadcast Frames The Transmit Near 0 0 Broadcast Frames Sent in the egress End direction If there is link down during the interval the bi
600. ts Packets 0 to 64 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP65 EtherStats Packets 65 to 127 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP128 EtherStats Packets 128 to 255 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Installation and Operations Manual 485 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E saa wa Y Optical Networking Table 43 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued a Description Direction i he 1 Day ESP256 EtherStats Packets 256 to 511 Octet Receive Near 0 0 Packets The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets ESP512 EtherStats Packets 512 to 1023 Octets Receive Near 0 0 Frames The total number of packets End including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023
601. ttings are made However the data is included in the Audit Log which is viewable from the System Details Pane in the Configuration View Below is a sample of these messages this example indicates the activation is scheduled for June 17 2013 at 12 10 with the validation timer set for 1 hour 2013 06 16 00 00 00 root EVT 2013 06 17 12 10 Software Activate timer set 2013 06 16 00 00 00 root EVT 2013 06 17 13 10 Software Validate timer set Table 20 Software Download Condition Types Condition Type Description SWDL File Transfer In Progress Software is being copied from a remote source to temporary memory SWDL Installation In Progress Software is being written from temporary memory to Standby SWDL Activation In Progress Software is being activated or is scheduled for future activation SWDL Validation In Progress Software has been activated and the validation timer was set and is running Installation and Operations Manual 155 ADVA 7J E am WN u Upgrade Software Version Optical Networking The following procedure includes steps for performing the software upgrade process using the eVision tool It is also possible to perform this process using CLI See the FSP 150SP 100 Command Line Reference Guide for details The following procedure also assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN See Set Up the
602. tum 3 clock is capable of holdover to support remote site head end and feeder applications The SP 100 utilizes the following Syncjack functions and tools The FSP 150 family of Ethernet access products provides devices for Ethernet demarcation extension and aggregation to support delivery of intelligent Ether net services both in region and out of region The SP 100 product targets the Ethernet Access Market Optimized for wireless backhaul the FSP 150CC NIDs enable delivery of Ether net services as well as highly accurate synchronization over a fiber based access network in a temperature hardened platform ideal for remote cabinets Synchronous Ethernet support includes in band transmission with clock Build ing Integrated Timing Supply BITS outputs external sync inputs with BITS clock inputs plus an internal Stratum 3 clock capable of holdover to support remote site and head end or feeder applications The FSP 150SP enables tradi tional T1 E1 SONET SDH or GPS based synchronization to be replaced with Ethernet synchronization based on ITU G 8261 G 8262 G 8264 and or IEEE 1588v2 The SP 100 product is a 1U high half width chassis with non redundant modu lar Power Supply Unit PSU AC or DC The SP 100 product provides one Ethernet service port configurable as either copper 10 100 1000 BaseT or optical 100BaseFX 1000BaseX and one Ethernet Network port configurable as either copper 100 1000 BaseT or opti
603. tures The following features are provided e retrievable performance data for each managed entity so the user can determine past and current system operation PM data collection is per formed via a polling mechanism were primitives are gathered into accumu lated counts After a defined interval e g 15 minutes or 1 day the counts are binned and stored in a database the checking of PM counts against a threshold to see if the threshold has been crossed lf so a Threshold Crossing Alert TCA is reported so that corrective actions can be taken PM supports threshold setting and automatic TCA message generation e Current and History PM bins provide a continuous record of service perfor mance allowing for accurate SLA conformance statements PM counts can be displayed as a summary or in tabular format in the eVision web browser management tool can be filtered and or refreshed and allows exporting data as Excel spreadsheets Performance Parameters There are several categories of Performance Parameters PPs that are col lected as follows equipment presence and type e g Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Interface type and presence module type and presence e physical Layer monitoring e g optical power temperature Ethernet Statistics e g the number of Ethernet packets received transmit ted Protocol Statistics e g the number of protocol dependent packets received transmitted The follo
604. ty should be present Go to Step 71 to verify the Dynamic Slave connectivity and for reference steps to provision the Remote Slave unit as a Dynamic Slave If the Remote Slave unit is will be provisioned as a Remote Static Slave go to Step 64 222 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Edit the Time Clock Perform the following steps for editing the Time Clock Prior to creating a Master Clock a Time Clock must first be provisioned and In Service The Time Clock is used to select an active time reference out of two configured time references Telecom Slave SYNC or GPS which amp may also be used to feed the physical output interfaces TOD Out PPS Out and or the Master Clock Note To provision a Telecom Slave perform Step 2 through Step 18 A second priority reference in addition to the first priority reference may be provisioned as a backup in case the first priority reference is lost Step 38 Select the Configuration Application on the tool bar or select Configu ration from the Application Menu Expand the System Synchroniza tion NE 1 and NTESP100 entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step 39 Enter a right click on the Time Clock entity and select Edit Time Clock An Edit Time Clock window appears Figure 117 Edit Time Clock ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application x
605. ual Chapter 5 Communications Provisioning Step 24 Enter the show ip interface ethO command to view the current DHCP setting for the DCN interface on the FSP 150SP See the following example ADVA gt show eth0O Name eth0 IP Address 172 17 11 33 Netmask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Role dhcp client DHCP enabled DHCP Client ID FSP 150SP 100 RIPv2 disabled MTU bytes 1500 Physical Address 00 80 ea 02 62 01 System Default Gateway 172 17 22 1 Step 25 Determine the next step Current Status Then Is the IP address something other than Proceed to the next step 0 0 0 0 Is the IP address still 0 0 0 0 Wait a one minute then retry Step 24 If after 4 attempts the IP address still does not appear contact your System Administrator When an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 is present proceed to the next step Step 26 Enter the show system command and verify that HTTP and HTTPS are enabled Step 27 Determine the next step Current Status Then Are both HTTP and HTTPS enabled Go to Step 30 Is HTTP and or HTTPS disabled Proceed to the next step Step 28 Enter the following highlighted CLI commands to enable both HTTP and HTTPS ADVA comms gt home ADVA gt configure system ADVA system gt http enabled ADVA system gt https enabled Step 29 Goto Step 26 Step 30 Open a browser window and use the configured IP address to access the NE Installation and O
606. um PTP message rate SyncJack Extended Scaled can be enabled if the PTP MC BC feature is enabled and enabled extends the maximum number of SyncJack probes that may be created When enabled will allow the creation of up to 2 Clock Probes 4 PTP Clock Probes and 1 PTP Network Probe PTP Extended Remote Slaves can be enabled if the PTP MC BC feature is enabled and extends the number of remote slaves from 4 to up to 16 at the maximum PTP message rate or 32 at the PTP message rate of up to 64 packets per second Procedure Step 1 Select the Maintenance Application on the tool bar or select Mainte nance from the Application Menu Expand the System Administration and Software Licensing entities in the selection tree pane by clicking on the signs next to each entity to expand each view Step2 Enter a right click on Feature Management and select Edit Feature An Edit Feature Management screen displays Figure 102 Edit Feature Management File Application a xl OD 6 E System n Edit Feature Management NE 1 ll Synchronization Select Features Features Status Communications C SyncJack Extended Scaled Disabled y Alarm Attributes 3 PTP MC BC Disabled PTP Extended Remote Slaves Disabled w Administration Upgrade Cancel Apply OK Database Default Database Default Settings Configuration Files Last Reset Cause Transfer Log E Software Licensing Feature al Step 3 Select the
607. ure Minor Critical Red Fiber only Sync Reference Synchronization Referencing Failed Verify synchronization network Failed The Network Port or Access Port has and provisioning failed in such a way that its clock cannot be recovered thus preventing it Minor N A N A from being used as a synchronization reference e g LOS The port must be assigned for this condition to exist Loss of ESMC Loss of Ethernet Synchronization Verify synchronization network Minor N A N A S9PO 10113 SESNEI aiqeqolg pue sjuang suuely Jeldey ozy enue y suoneledo pue uogejesu Table 31 Network Port and Access Port Alarms Continued Condition Type Description Probable Cause Trouble Clearing Procedure NSA Default Notification SA Default Notification LED Indication Sync QL Mismatch Synchronization Quality Level Mismatch The Network Port or Access Port receives SSM messages whose specified Quality Level is lower than the Expected QL The port s QL Mode attribute must be configured as enabled and the Expected QL attribute must be configured as anything besides None for this condition to exist Verify synchronization network and provisioning Minor N A N A Frequency Offset Synchronization Frequency Offset The synchronization circuit detected a frequency offset problem with the Network Port or Access Port s recovered clock The port must be assigned and the port must be a member of
608. ure 2 Syncjack GUI Concept 4 cite ce Sa a a 24 Figure 3 SP 100 Chasse iu eke eee ha RAR Cedi eS 28 Figure 4 eVision Web Browser Management Tool 29 Figure 5 SYNCIACK Suite wok bee eA we ee ROE ERS aaia 31 Figure 6 Tapping Mode Operation suis a oe ee See eS oe 33 Figure 7 Parallel Mode Operation o oooooo conos 34 Figure 8 Tester Mode Operation 0 00 cee ee es 35 Figure 9 Clock Probe MTIE Results 12152608 000 oboe be Aa 36 Figure 10 Clock Probe Result in TIE Graph cee eee 37 Figure 11 Clock Accuracy Status 4 iic40 54 cea GOSS hee HOG we eee 38 Figure 12 PTP Clock Probe Tapping Mode Operation 40 Figure 13 SyncJack PTP Clock Probe State Completed 41 Figure 14 Clock Analysis Status 1 0 0c o 41 Figure 15 PTP Network Probe Statistics 0c ee ee 42 Figure 16 PTP Network Status 0 ccc cocoa 43 Figure 17 Frequency Distribution via BITS Output Port and Sync E IMESTTACO s s ee a dee ee a ee ND aM ee 45 Figure 18 BITS Output Port Off anaana aeaa a eR OS 45 Figure 19 OC Master OC Slave with TC Interconnect 48 Figure 20 Boundary Clock and Master Clock Functional Model 50 Figure 21 Clock Interface Functions and Interconnections 52 Figure 22 Clock Probes Connectivity 0 00 a a 53 Figure 23 PTP Clock Probes Connectivity 0 00 cee ee 54 Figure 24 PTP Network Probes Conne
609. v4 PTP Network Probes Master IP Address A off off off o Syncjack Schedules Slave IP Address 7 off off off of E Result Analysis Direction Slave To Master Y MTIE comparison Reference PPS14 1400 y Raw Data Collection Reference Expected QL OL NONE MTIE Mask G823 Pdh Y Mask Margin 3 0 Raw Data Collection Disabled Measurement Type Frequency x Cancel OK Step4 Enter the following to configure the Clock Probe Clock Probe Index EID for the probe Enter a number from 1 to 4 360 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Step 5 Step 6 Create only Name a text identifier up to 15 characters no spaces or special characters for the probe Required entry PTP Flowpoint select the PTP Flowpoint from the drop down list IP Version select the desired IP version from the drop down list Only IPv4 is supported version for the current release Master IP Address enter the IP address of the master clock if the PTP Flow Point Type is set to OC Slave then the Master IP Address must be configured the same as the SOOC Slave IP Address enter the IP address of the slave clock if the PTP Flow Point Type is set to OC Slave then the Slave IP Address must be configured the same as the SOOC Direction select the desired Direction Slave to Master or Master to Slave If the Flow Point Type of the a
610. ve devices a grounded anti static wrist or heel strap is required when handling the unit to reduce elec tro static charges Compressed Air Canned dry oil free compressed air for removing dust or debris is required DC Power Cabling For connecting DC powered FSP 150SP power supply units you need the fol lowing items e Screwdriver e Wire wrap tool Wire cutters e Wire strippers e Volt meter Fuse panel e Other power related tools and supplies as required by local practices Optical Equipment The following optical equipment is required during installation e signal protocol generator or Bit Error Rate Tester BERT variable or fixed attenuators in the range 3dB to 11dB or fiber spools provid ing equivalent attenuation an optical power meter calibrated for the required wavelength s Optical fiber cleaning materials Personal Computer When provisioning the FSP 150SP a personal computer or laptop with telnet or SSH is required with an RJ 45 Ethernet patch cable cross over or straight through and an RJ 45 to F DB9 adapter The Serial Console Adapter is shipped with the unit in the Accessory Kit and may also be ordered sepa rately Part Number 1036904035 Installation and Operations Manual 79 Physical Installation a ADVA VO E VUE ws Y Optical Networking Use a PC or Laptop running the OS MS Windows version XP Vista or Windows 7 with an unused serial RS 232 port aVT100 or
611. vent End occurs since the last 1 second poll OPR Optical Power Receive Received Optical Receive Near 80 80 Power in dBm retrieved from the SFP End 486 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 43 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Continued compute port based service unavailability Counted if one or more of following exists in that second e Link down e link deactivated triggered by LLF SFP faults EFM OAM discovery failure EFM OAM loopback Also any one of the following port based MEP conditions Port based cross connect defect unexpected MD level or MAID Mis match Mismerge Port based MEP Error CCM Defect Unexpected MEP or unexpected period Port based MEP RMEP CCM Defect Loss of Connectivity Port based MEP RDI Defect unidirec tional failure makes the port based ser vice unavailable or Description Direction od ei 1 Day OPT Optical Power Transmit Transmit Optical Receive Near 80 80 Power in dBm retrieved from the SFP End OPR VAR Optical Power Received Variance The Receive Near 4 4 variance from the configured OPR End threshold that does not result in generating a TCA For example if OPR is 80 and OPR VAR is 4 no TCA is generated if OPR is between 76 and 84 Applicable only if the media type is Fiber OPT VAR Optical Power Transmit Variance The Tran
612. vision 6 1 1 049 CLK 1 1 1 2 Part Number 1078904650 01 Firmware Revision m60237 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN usI LBADVA71131800045 Manufacturing Site Shenzhen PPS 1 1 1 2 CLEI Code PENDING Manufacturing Date 2013 05 05 TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Environmental El Communications Temperature 46 deg C Voltage 13000 my DCN etho 3G DCN Settings Ej Management Tunnels NE 1 SNMP Dying Gasp Disabled SNMP E Administration Users Remote Authentication Security Policy Key Generation Notification Interface ens Description Date Time ogged in as root Step6 Resize the screen for viewing as desired End of Procedure Logging Off To log out of the FSP 150SP eVision web browser management tool Procedure Step 1 Select File Exit from the Menu Bar Step2 Close the internet browser End of Procedure 132 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 3 eVision Web Browser Management Tool User Session Timeout Each user is provisioned with a user inactivity timeout of 0 minutes to disable timeout to 99 minutes Default is 15 minutes Only a Superuser see User Authorization Privilege Levels on p 436 may edit a user GUI login timeout value When a user session is inactive for the amount of time provisioned in the GUI timeout the user session is automatically logged off to ensure system security Once the user timeout has occurred and the user attempts to operate or view the eVision GUI an Authentication Fail
613. w Identifier to associate with this Transparent Clock drop down list of Create Only If no flow has been created only None is populated in provisioned Flow the drop down list IDs COS Class Of Service 0 7 CIR Committed Information Rate in bps Minimum setting is 0 bps maximum setting is Network Port bandwidth ENON OONNOD EIR Excess Information Rate in bps Minimum setting is 0 bps maximum setting is Network Port bandwidth O nOONONOO Buffer Size Buffer size in KB Minimum setting is 0 maximum setting 0 15360 is 15360 Untagged Check Defines whether the VLAN configuration is untagged or Selected Box tagged Selecting this option sets Untagged VLAN Create only configuration Unselected Outer VLAN Defines whether the Outer VLAN tag entry is allowed Selected Check Box Only selectable if the Untagged check box is unselected Create only Unselected 504 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Table 50 Create Edit PTP Flow Point Parameter Settings Continued Paramet t Description Option Settings Applicable Rules Defaults Outer VLAN Defines the Ethertype for the Outer VLAN tag Ethertype 0 Create only Outer VLAN Tag Defines the VLAN tag and priority that is associated with 1 to 4095 Create only this PTP Flow Point Outer VLAN Tag Oto7 Inner VLAN1 Defines whether the Inner VLAN1 tag entry is allowed Selected Check
614. w of a Network Port Threshold values Procedure Step 1 Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Moni toring from the Applications menu then expand the System selection tree Step 2 Expand the Network Element entity from the selection tree then expand the Network Termination Equipment NTE entity To view Flow PM counts also expand the Access entity in the selection tree Step 3 Select the desired Network Port or Access Port in the selection tree The PM Counts pane appears see Figure 196 on p 328 Step4 Select the desired tab to view Summary 15 Minute or 5 Minute counters 1 Day counters or Threshold levels Use sliding bars to view 326 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring data as required An asterisk in the Time column indicates data that is suspect See Figure 196 on p 328 and Figure 197 on p 328 Step5 If desired 15 Minute or 5 Minute and 1 Day counts can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet by selecting the Excel button An export file pane appears see Figure 198 on p 329 Step 6 Choose the desired application to open or select the Save to Disk option The filename dispexecel php will be created in the selected application Excel is the default application see Figure 199 on p 330 Edit or save the exported file as desired End of Procedure Figure 195 Summary PM Counts View of a Network Port L
615. wall mounting applications and contains the following components two wall mounting brackets o four M3x5 CSK POZI A2 screws Wall anchoring components are supplied by the installer depending on the mounting surface Procedure Step 1 Select a suitable location to install the SP 100 The wall material and mounting screws should be of sufficient strength to bear the load of the SP 100 approx 10 Ibs Step2 Take the chassis out of its packaging and put it on an antistatic sur face If necessary use canned compressed air to blow off any dust particles Step3 Secure the SP 100 wall mounting brackets to the SP 100 using two M3x5 CSK POZI A2 screws each See Figure 35 on p 93 To avoid overheating and the risk of fire do no block airflow through the SP 100 Leave at least 3 inches 7 cm of space above and below the unit to provide sufficient air flow WARNING Step4 Use the wall mounting brackets as a template for marking holes Drill mounting holes and insert wall anchors as required Step5 Attach the SP 100 mounting bracket to the wall using wall anchors and screws See Figure 35 on p 93 End of Procedure 92 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Figure 35 Installing Wall Mounting Brackets 8 ES M3x5 POZI Screws Wall Mount Bracket M3x5 POZI Screws P Installation and Operations Manual 93 ADVA r 7 v 7 VA Wel u Physical Installation Optical Networking
616. wing entities are monitored for performance data which is accumulated into PPs Ethernet Network ports Ethernet Access ports Telecom Slave TS e Slave Only Ordinary Clock SOOC ocsFP FlowPoint PTP Network Probe 322 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 6 Etherjack Syncjack Test Procedures and Performance Monitoring Performance Parameter Attributes Each PP can be defined by the attributes outlined in the following table Table 22 Performance Parameter Attributes Attribute Description Monitor Type The name of the PP This will be presented in mnemonic form e g ESF EtherStat Frames Location Whether the PP is a Near End or Far End parameter The location is determined in relation to the monitored entity in that the PP has occurred Locally to the entity or at the near end Remotely to the entity or at the far end Direction Whether the PP is a Receive or Transmit parameter The direction is in relation to the monitored entity Time Period The time period associated with the PP i e 15 Minute 1 Day or Rollover Monitor The time at which the PP was collected Timestamp The current time is used for Rollover and Current counters The boundary crossing time is used for History count ers stored as number of seconds since the Epoch History Index Indicates a bin from the historical list of bins For 5 minute or 15 Minute history bins this numbe
617. wing procedure assumes that the user has configured the NE with an IP address and connected the NE to a DCN or LAN see Set Up the FSP 150SP DCN eth0 Port Using the Serial Port on p 276 and is logged on using eVision Procedure Step 1 Expand the System entity right click on NE 1 in the selection tree pane and select Edit Configuration The following screen displays Figure 70 Edit NE 1 27 ADYA FSP 150 EMS FSP 150SP 100 Configuration File Application xX B D gt Edit Configuration E NEgi A Identification E1000 A 1 DCN sth Network Element Information 3G Modem E Synchronization Type SHELF NTESYNCPROBE El NE 1 Para all NTESYNCPROBE Description FSP150SP 100 SYNC 1 1 1 1 hasilan BBTS Contact BITS IN CLI Prefix NE 1 Accepted Yes BITS OUT CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Shelf State CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Administrative S y Secondary None PPS 1 1 1 2 Operational Normal TOD 1 1 1 1 GPS 1 1 1 1 Shelf Physical Inventory A Communications Shelf Name SYNCPROBE AC Backplane USI 71122302127 DCN etho Part Number 1078904650 Backplane Revision 3 3G DCN CLEI Code pending Backplane Mfg Site Shenzhen E Management Tunnels Backplane Mfg Date 2012 02 01 NE 1 Step 2 The Administrative State can be changed between IS default value and Management See Entity State Descriptions on p 430 NE Identity information can also be changed or entered
618. word User login password The system supports three Retype levels of password security and is dependent on the 1 to 32 characters Password security policy setting See Security Policy Edit Policy on p 467 Only a Superuser may create a See Security Policy password associated with a new User ID A Superuser Edit Policy on may edit any existing password Any user may edit p 467 their own password This option is available when selecting Add User or Edit Password The default blank Superuser password is ChgMeNOW Comment User comment text string maximum 128 characters in length Only a Superuser may edit a user comment up to 128 characters This option is available when selecting Add User or blank Edit User Privilege User Security Level The Superuser assigns security Superuser levels for each user Refer to User Authorization Maintenance Privilege Levels on p 436 for more details Only a Provisioning Superuser may edit a user privilege level This option Retrieve is available when selecting Create New User or Edit User The default root user ID privilege level is Super User Login Timeout mins Login timeout for the user ID in minutes Only a Superuser may edit a user login timeout value This option is available when selecting Add User or Edit User 0 no logout timer to 99 minutes 15 minutes CLI Paging If the response to a CLI command fills more than one Enabl
619. y MAC Address Media Access Control Address to be added to the 00 00 00 00 00 00 ARP entry MAC addresses are hard coded at the hh hh hh hh hh hh factory Interface Name Defines the interface to create the ARP entry ethO Configured Management Tunnel entries Installation and Operations Manual 459 Configuration Settings Rules and Dependencies a ADVA J E ean waz Optical Networking Table 40 System Configuration Settings Continued Parameter Description Applicable Rules Option Settings Defaults Note To view Static ARP Entries select the Static ARP Entries tab To delete an existing Static ARP Entry enter a right click on the Communication entity in the Selection Tree and select Delete Static ARP Eniry then select the desired static ARP entry to delete then select OK Source Address Config Edit Source Address Config Address Type Specifies whether the System IP Address or the Outgoing IP Interface s Address should be used in outgoing IP PDUs Outgoing Interface IP System IP Address Source Address Interface Name Specifies the IP interface name when Address Type is set to System IP Address The IP Address associated with the IP interface name is set as the source IP eth0 Configured Management Tunnel Address in outgoing PDUs entries Snmp v1 Specifies the IP interface name which will be u
620. y and RDI Defect unidirectional failure makes the port based service unavailable 482 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 8 Provisioning Rules Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types The following performance parameters are related to an Ethernet Access Port The optical physical layer parameters are only valid when the port is configured to use the fiber interfaces Table 43 Ethernet Access Port Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings et Description Direction pe FA 1 Day ABR RX Average Bit Rate Received in the A2N Receive Near 0 0 direction The average bit rate received End over the specific interval in the ingress direction This counter is based on RMON etherStatsOctets ABR TX Average Bit Rate Transmitted in the N2A Transmit Near 0 0 direction The average bit rate transmitted End over a specific interval in the egress direction based on Bytes Sent APFD AFP Priority tagged Frames Dropped Receive Near 0 0 Priority tagged frames dropped due to AFP End setting AFP Priority tagged Frames Dropped Priority tagged frames dropped due to AFP setting AUFD AFP Untagged Frames Dropped Untagged Receive Near 0 0 frames dropped due to AFP setting End ESBF EtherStats Broadcast Frames If there is Receive Near 0 0 link down during the interval the bin is not End accessible ESBP EtherStats Broadcast Packets Received in Rece
621. y Q in Q EtherType Q in Q EtherType Override SFP Vendor Name SFP Connector Type LC Serial Number EWTDO73400006 Media Type Single Mode Part Number 0061003008 Link Length 15000 m Date of Manufacture 2007 08 27 Laser Wavelength 1310 00 nm Cancel Apply OK 182 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Step 3 Enter the Access Port facility changes Identification a Enter an Alias as required State b Set the Administrative State to the desired state ort o v Select the desired Media Type Enter the desired MTU size Select the Configured Speed option a o gt Select the Port MDIX option copper g Enable Disable Auto Diagnostic Service h Select the desired AFP option i Enable Disable Q in Q EtherType Override j Edit the Q in Q Ethertype setting if desired requires Q in Q Over ride Enabled k Enable Disable Port Shaping 1 Enter the desired Port Shaped Speed Setting can not be lower than the CIR setting for the flow if Port Shaping is Enabled m Enable Disable N2A Network to Access VLAN Trunking Click on OK For configuration of PTP functionality see Provision Precision Time 5 Protocol PTP on p 208 For configuration of Sync E functionality see Provision Note Synchronization on p 186 End of Procedure Installation and Operations Manual 183 ADVA 7J E a m WM u Provision Network Port Optical Networking
622. y 2 6 DTR Data Terminal Ready 3 4 SG Signal Ground 4 5 RXD Receive Data 5 2 TXD Transmit Data 6 3 CTS Clear To Send 7 8 RTS Request To Send 8 7 Installation and Operations Manual 121 a ADVA P J a WED wz 8 Connector Pin Assignments Optical Networking RJ 48c BITS Connector Pin Description and Assignments T1 E1 External Clock Input connector labeled BITS IN and T1 E1 External Clock Output connector labeled BITS OUT are both front mounted RJ 48c bal anced 120 Ohm connectors Refer to the following tables for the BITS OUT T4 and BITS IN T3 connector pin assignments Table 17 RJ 48c BITS IN T3 Input Connector Pin Number Signal Description B1 RRING Receive Ring B2 RTIP Receive Tip B3 GND Ground B4 B5 B6 GND Ground B7 GND Ground B8 GND Ground Table 18 RJ 48c BITS OUT T4 Output Connector Pin Number Signal Description B1 B2 B3 GND Ground B4 TRING Transmit Ring B5 TTIP Transmit Tip B6 GND Ground B7 GND Ground B8 GND Ground 122 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Time of Day TOD Connector Pin Assignments The Time of Day connector labeled TOD is a front mounted RJ 45 connector with an input output capable function The system supports a Time of Day input on which it can receive coded Time of Day inputs f
623. y are handled or NOTICE routed improperly Do not bend fiber optic cables to a radius less than 50 mm Keep all ports and connectors free from dust When not in NOTICE use fit both connector plugs and sockets with protective caps AN When cabling SFP Interface optics note that Rx ports are on the right ww bottom and Tx ports are on the left top Note 116 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 2 Physical Installation Connect Fiber Cables to Access Port or Network Port Use the following procedure to connect fiber optic cables to the Access Port or Network Port Interfaces Procedure Step 1 Remove the protective caps from both connector plugs and sockets Step 2 Connect the fiber cables depending upon the deployment scenario For direct connection to another FSP 150SP e the near end Tx port is connected to the far end Rx port e the near end Rx port is connected to the far end Tx port For connection via a core active network e the Tx port is connected to the Rx port of the Switch or Router e the Rx port is connected to the Tx port of the Switch or Router End of Procedure To Power Off For maintenance or transport purposes it may be necessary to power down the SP 100 In which case use the following procedure to do so ALWAYS remove power from the PSU to ensure that the SP 100 is electrically inert WARNING To power off the SP 100 use the following procedure Procedure Step 1 Turn of
624. y enables the user to display a pull down menu and select a menu option Installation and Operations Manual 141 eVision Applications ADVA VO E aa wa Y Optical Networking Key Function Right arrow Move These keys enable the user to move through the Left arrow options on the Menu Bar to highlight the one required Up arrow Move These keys enable the user to move up and Down arrow down scroll through menu options on a pull down menu to highlight the one required In the Selection Tree Pane Return Select This key enables the user to select a highlighted item or menu option and open the appropriate pane in the Details Pane Up arrow Move These keys enable the user to move up and Down arrow down scroll through items and menu options to Tab highlight the one required Right arrow Open This key enables the user to view nested items If nested items are available it is indicated by a plus sign to the left of that item Left arrow Close This key enables the user to close a nest of items A minus sign to the left of an item indicates that the item s nested items are open In the Details Pane Return Select This key enables the user to select a highlighted field for information input or a highlighted command button Right arrow Move through status pane tabs This key enables the Left arrow user to navigate through tabs at the top of the Details P
625. ype The name of the PP that has crossed its threshold See Monitored Types This will be presented in mnemonic form e g ESF EtherStat Frames and Default TCA Settings on p 325 for Monitor Type mnemonics Time Period In which time period the threshold was crossed 15 Minute or 5 Minute 1 Day Time The time the threshold was crossed Timestamp Location The location of the TCA generation This is Near end determined in relation to the monitored entity in that Far end the PP has occurred None e Locally to the entity or at the near end Remotely to the entity or at the far end Direction The direction in relation to the monitored entity Receive Transmit Monitored Value The value of the PP count when the threshold was crossed Up to a 64 bit number Threshold Value The configured threshold at the time the threshold was crossed Up to a 64 bit number Monitored Types and Default TCA Settings Refer to Performance Monitoring Settings on p 478 for monitored types and default Threshold Crossing Alert TCA settings Configuring System Level PM FSP 150SP 100 allows the user to configure the bin period for Performance Monitoring at system level Procedure Step 1 Select the Performance Monitoring icon or select Performance Moni toring from the Applications menu Step 2 Enter a right click on the NE 1 entity in the selection tree and select Edit An Edit PM Configuration sc
626. ys the status of each Sync Reference Identifier Step 51 Goto Step 2 Installation and Operations Manual 203 a ADVA 7J E a m Wa u Provision Synchronization Optical Networking Edit a Sync Reference Step 52 For Network Port Access Port Right click on the System Sync Domain SYNC 1 1 1 1 and select Edit Sync Reference The following screen displays Figure 100 Edit Sync Reference File Application v E x RR D E System Edit Sync Reference El NE 1 E NTESP100 Identification E1000 N 1 E1000 A 1 Entity ID SYNC 1 1 1 1 DCN eth0 3G Modem Status E Synchronization Selected Reference TS 1 1 E NE 1 Clock Mode Locked Ej NTESP100 Sync QL QL STU SYNC 1 1 1 3 TIME CLOCK 1 1 GET Seva WEES a BITS 1 Request None CLK 1 1 1 1 IN Target None CLK 1 1 1 2 PPS 1 1 1 1 IN Synchronization Reference List PPS 1 1 1 2 Select Ref Sync Ref Eid Priority Source Source Status Received QL Effective QL State Alias TOD 1 1 1 1 g SYNCREF 1 1 1 1 1 1 iy TS 1 1 Reference OK QL NSUPP QL STU Active GPS 1 1 1 1 53 Communications Cancel Apply OK 3 SNMP 5 EJ Administration a il 8 3 10 Step 53 Select the Radio Button for the Source to edit then select the desired Priority from the drop down list Click on OK Step 54 Goto Step 2 204 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 4 Operations Provisioning Delete a Sync Reference Step 55 For Network P
627. ysis Minimum Reverse RPDV ns N A Total Number Of Reverse RPDV Results o E PTP Network Probes PTP NETWORK PROBE 1 1 Synejack Schedules Forward Direction Network Usability Score Statistics SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Total Time Forward Score 3 s 0 Total Time Forward Score 5 s 0 SYNCIACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 2 Total Time Forward Score 4 s 0 SYNCJACK SCHEDULE 1 1 1 3 m Reverse Direction Total Time Reverse Score 3 s O Total Time Reverse Score 5 s 0 Total Time Reverse Score 4 s 0 PTP Messages Statistics Delay Response Message Lost 0 Sync Messages Lost Delay Response Message Received 0 Sync Messages Received 0 PTP Network Usability Score A score is provided for each direction separately forward and reverse e Calculated based on PDV Network Limit definition as specified by G 8261 1 Cluster range is configurable for each score Score can be in the range of 0 and 3 to 5 Score 5 Green PTP event messages can be safely used for successful clock recovery for any window interval of 200 seconds jumping window at least 1 of timing packets with a minimum of 2 timing packets must be observed within a Figure 15 PTP Network Probe Statistics 42 Installation and Operations Manual Chapter 1 SP 100 Overview fixed cluster located at the observed floor delay and having a range required by the clock recovery algorithm to meet the performance objectives

FSP 150SP-100 R6.1.1..

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents